Design Facility Reference 4.1

Advantage CA-Telon®
Application Generator
Design Facility Reference Guide
4.1
This documentation and related computer software program (hereinafter referred to as the “Documentation”) is
for the end user's informational purposes only and is subject to change or withdrawal by Computer Associates
International, Inc. (“CA”) at any time.
This documentation may not be copied, transferred, reproduced, disclosed or duplicated, in whole or in part,
without the prior written consent of CA. This documentation is proprietary information of CA and protected by
the copyright laws of the United States and international treaties.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, licensed users may print a reasonable number of copies of this documentation for
their own internal use, provided that all CA copyright notices and legends are affixed to each reproduced copy.
Only authorized employees, consultants, or agents of the user who are bound by the confidentiality provisions of
the license for the software are permitted to have access to such copies.
This right to print copies is limited to the period during which the license for the product remains in full force
and effect. Should the license terminate for any reason, it shall be the user's responsibility to return to CA the
reproduced copies or to certify to CA that same have been destroyed.
To the extent permitted by applicable law, CA provides this documentation “as is” without warranty of any kind,
including without limitation, any implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose or
noninfringement. In no event will CA be liable to the end user or any third party for any loss or damage, direct
or indirect, from the use of this documentation, including without limitation, lost profits, business interruption,
goodwill, or lost data, even if CA is expressly advised of such loss or damage.
The use of any product referenced in this documentation and this documentation is governed by the end user's
applicable license agreement.
The manufacturer of this documentation is Computer Associates International, Inc.
Provided with “Restricted Rights” as set forth in 48 C.F.R. Section 12.212, 48 C.F.R. Sections 52.227-19(c)(1)
and (2) or DFARS Section 252.227-7013(c)(1)(ii) or applicable successor provisions.
First Edition, May 2003
 2003 Computer Associates International, Inc.

All rights reserved.
All trademarks, trade names, service marks, and logos referenced herein belong to their respective companies.
Contents
Chapter 1. CA-Telon Design Facility Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1 What This Manual is About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2 Who Should Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.3 Where to Find Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.4 About Advantage CA-Telon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.5 Advantage CA-Telon Design Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.6 Advantage CA-Telon Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.7 Advantage CA-Telon Test Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.8 Reading Syntax Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.9 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.10 TDF Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Chapter 2. User Profile Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2 User Profile Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.3 Update Program Definition Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.4 Update Environment Definition Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.4.1 CICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.4.2 IMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.4.3 TSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.4.4 Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.4.5 AS/400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.5 Update UNIX Environment Definition Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2.6 Update WINCH Environment Definition Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2.7 Update Stored Procedure Environment Definition Defaults . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2.8 Update PF Keys Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
2.9 Update Session Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
2.10 PWS-Specific Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
2.10.1 Color Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
2.10.2 PWSCOPY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
2.10.3 PWS Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Chapter 3. Data Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2 Data Administration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.3 List Data Administration Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.4 Create/Update DBD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.5 Update DBD Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.6 List Search Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Contents iii
3.7 Update DLIDSCs For Segment Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.8 Create/Update SSA/Command For DL/I DB/Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3.9 Verify DLIDSC Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3.10 Create/Update PSB Or File Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3.11 Update Sensitive Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
3.12 Update Sensitive TLNROWs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3.13 Show/Update Data Set Default Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
3.14 Update CICS Queue Default Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
3.15 Update CICS Journal Default Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
3.16 Catalog/Import DB2 Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
3.17 List SQL Tables/Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3.18 Create/Update SQL Tables/TLNROWs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
3.19 Update CA-IDMS/SQL CA-Datacom/SQL Tables/TLNROWs . . . . . . 3-60
3.20 Create/Update Ingres II/Oracle SQL Tables/TLNROWs . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
3.21 Update SQL ALIAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
3.22 Specify Tables Being Joined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
3.23 Update SQL Join — Join Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
3.24 Update SQL Join —Access Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
3.25 Update SQL Join — Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85
Chapter 4. Panel Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2 Panel Definition Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.3 List Panel Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.4 Edit Panel Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.5 Line Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.6 Update Panel Fields (Online) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4.7 Update Help Message Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.8 Update Mapout Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.9 Update Attribute Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4.10 Update Literal Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.11 Update Output/Input/Outin Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4.12 Update Select Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
4.13 Update Parameter List Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4.14 List Consistency Edits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
4.15 Update Cross-Field Edit (XFEDIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4.16 Update Segment Edit (SEGEDIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
4.17 Consistency Edits Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
4.18 Create/Update Table Segloop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
4.19 Create/Update File Segloop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Chapter 5. Online Program Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.1.1 Screen and Report Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.1.2 Data Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.1.3 Custom Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.1.4 Program Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2 Online Program Definition Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.3 Create/Update Screen Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.4 Create/Update Data Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5.5 Update DBMS Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
iv Design Facility Reference Guide

5.6 Select New Row Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5.7 Update Database Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
5.8 Update Data Set Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
5.9 Update SQL Detail Data Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5.10 Field Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
5.11 Select Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
5.12 Update DL/I Detail Data Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
5.13 Update Database User I/O SSALIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
5.14 Update VSAM or Sequential Detail Data Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
5.15 Update CICS Queue Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
5.16 Update CICS Journal Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
5.17 Update CICS Queue Data Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
5.18 Update CICS Journal Data Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
5.19 Update TPPCB Detail Data Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
5.20 List/Show Custom Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
5.21 Edit Custom Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
5.22 Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
5.23 Update IMS MFSs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104
5.24 Update PL/I Executable Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107
5.25 Update CICS Screen Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109
5.26 Update/Show Screen Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115
5.27 Create/Update Driver Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120
5.28 Update IMS/DC Driver Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127
5.29 Create/Update IMS/DC Report Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132
5.30 Update IMS/DC Report Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138
5.31 Update Select Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-140
5.32 Create/Update Nonterminal Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-142
5.33 List Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-149
5.34 List Stored Procedures To Be Called . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-151
Chapter 6. Batch Program Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2 Update Panel Fields (Batch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.3 Update Batch Literal Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.4 Update Batch Output Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.5 Update Panel Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.6 Batch Program Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6.7 Create/Update Batch Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6.8 Update Batch Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
6.9 Update Match Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
6.10 List Sorts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
6.11 List Merge Key Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
6.12 Update Sort Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
6.13 Update Group Merge Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
6.14 Create/Update Stored Procedure Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
6.15 Update Stored Procedure Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
6.16 Update Stored Procedure Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
6.17 Stored Procedure Parameter DBNAME Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
Chapter 7. Prototyping Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Contents v
7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2 Prototyping Facility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.3 List Panel Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.4 List Presentation Stores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.5 View Presentation Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
7.6 View Panel Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Chapter 8. Utility Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2 Utilities Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.3 List Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Chapter 9. Editors and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2 The Panel Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.2.1 Invoking the Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.2.2 General Rules for Updating Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.2.3 Rules for Variable Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.2.4 Rules for Literal Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.2.5 Rules for Fields with Panel Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.2.6 Rules for Wrapped Variable Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.2.7 Rules for Wrapped Literal Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.2.8 Rules for Long Literal Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.3 The Custom Code Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9.4 The Presentation Store Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9.5 Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
9.5.1 BACKWARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
9.5.2 CANCEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
9.5.3 CAPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
9.5.4 CH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
9.5.5 CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
9.5.6 COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
9.5.7 CREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
9.5.8 EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
9.5.9 END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
9.5.10 END HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
9.5.11 EQUATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
9.5.12 FIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
9.5.13 FORWARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
9.5.14 HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
9.5.15 HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
9.5.16 INSTALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
9.5.17 ISPF/PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
9.5.18 LEFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
9.5.19 LINE EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
9.5.20 LINE OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
9.5.21 LOCATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
9.5.22 MBCOPY (MARK AND BOUND COPY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
9.5.23 MBMOVE (MARK AND BOUND MOVE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
9.5.24 MBPURGE (MARK AND BOUND PURGE) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
9.5.25 MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
vi Design Facility Reference Guide

9.5.26 MOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
9.5.27 NOSHOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
9.5.28 NULLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
9.5.29 PANEL COLUMNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
9.5.30 PANEL LINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
9.5.31 PANEL SIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
9.5.32 PD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
9.5.33 PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
9.5.34 PDSCOPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
9.5.35 POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
9.5.36 PROFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
9.5.37 PURGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
9.5.38 RCHANGE (REPEAT CHANGE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
9.5.39 RFIND (REPEAT FIND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
9.5.40 REPLACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
9.5.41 RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
9.5.42 RESTORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
9.5.43 RESTORE FIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
9.5.44 RESUME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
9.5.45 RIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
9.5.46 SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
9.5.47 SHOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
9.5.48 SUBMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
9.5.49 SWAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
9.5.50 SWAP EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
9.5.51 TRANSFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
9.5.52 TSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
9.6 Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
9.7 CA-Telon Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
9.7.1 Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
9.7.2 Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Appendix A. Field Edit Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

A.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.2 Standard Field Edit Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.2.1 Advantage CA-Telon Output Edit Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.2.2 Advantage CA-Telon Input Edit Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A.3 Standard Field Edit Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
A.3.1 OCAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
A.3.2 OCART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
A.3.3 OCDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
A.3.4 OCJULIAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
A.3.5 ODATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
A.3.6 OFLNULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
A.3.7 OFLOAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
A.3.8 OFORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
A.3.9 OHEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
A.3.10 OHEXA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
A.3.11 OHEXP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
A.3.12 OHEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
Contents vii
A.3.13 OINTCDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
A.3.14 OINTCJUL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
A.3.15 OINTLDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
A.3.16 OINTLJUL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23
A.3.17 OJULIAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23
A.3.18 ONULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
A.3.19 ONUMNULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
A.3.20 OSSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
A.3.21 OVCHAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26
A.3.22 OVNULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26
A.3.23 IBDOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
A.3.24 IBCURR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28
A.3.25 IBNUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29
A.3.26 ICDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
A.3.27 ICURRNCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-31
A.3.28 IDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32
A.3.29 IDOLLAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33
A.3.30 IFLNULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
A.3.31 IFLOAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
A.3.32 IFULLCAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
A.3.33 IFORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
A.3.34 IFULLNUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-37
A.3.35 IHEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-37
A.3.36 IHEXA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38
A.3.37 IINTCDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38
A.3.38 IINTCJUL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
A.3.39 ICJULIAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-40
A.3.40 IINTLDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41
A.3.41 IINTLJUL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-42
A.3.42 IJULIAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-43
A.3.43 ILALPHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-44
A.3.44 ILNULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-45
A.3.45 ILVCHAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-45
A.3.46 ILVNULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-46
A.3.47 INBALPHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-47
A.3.48 INBNULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-47
A.3.49 INBVCHAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-48
A.3.50 INBVNULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-49
A.3.51 INULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-50
A.3.52 INUMERIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-50
A.3.53 INUMNULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-51
A.3.54 ISTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-52
A.3.55 IVCHAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-52
A.3.56 IVNULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-53
A.4 Calls to Field Edit Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-54
A.4.1 Output edit processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-54
A.4.2 Input edit processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-54
Appendix B. Screen Program Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

B.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
B.2 Screen Program IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
viii Design Facility Reference Guide

B.3 Screen Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-1
Contents ix
x Design Facility Reference Guide
Chapter 1. CA-Telon Design Facility Main Menu
Chapter 1. CA-Telon Design Facility Main Menu 1-1

1.1 What This Manual is About
1.1 What This Manual is About

Contents: This manual discusses the following information about the Advantage
CA-Telon Design Facility (TDF):
■ Each TDF screen, including:
– How to access the screen
– The program ID of the screen
– The function of the screen
– The purpose of each field on the screen, with valid values for input fields
■ The TDF editors and editor commands
■ Standard Advantage CA-Telon field edit routines
Who should read this manual: This manual is intended for users who are
experienced in data processing concepts and procedures, specifically IMS and/or CICS
concepts, including:
■ System administrators and database administrators who support Advantage
CA-Telon
■ Application programmers who use Advantage CA-Telon to develop COBOL,
COBOL II and above, and/or PL/I applications in a mainframe or PWS
environment
1-2 Design Facility Reference Guide

1.2 Who Should Use This Manual
1.2 Who Should Use This Manual

This manual is for Advantage CA-Telon application programmers and data
administrators. To use this guide, you should have a basic knowledge of IMS and/or
CICS concepts.
The manual is designed to be used in conjunction with:

■ Programming Concepts Guide
■ Test Facility Guide

1.3 Where to Find Additional Information
1.3 Where to Find Additional Information

You can find additional information about CA-Telon in the guides that comprise the
CA-Telon documentation set. The README file contained on the documentation CD
provides a list of these guides.

1.4 About Advantage CA-Telon
1.4 About Advantage CA-Telon

In this manual, Advantage CA-Telon Application Generator, formerly known as
CA-Telon, is referred to simply as CA-Telon. Advantage CA-Telon is a productivity
tool that simplifies and speeds the application development process. It reduces the
time required for planning, coding, testing, debugging, documenting, and maintaining
applications.
You use the following Advantage CA-Telon system components to develop, compile,
and test your programs:
■ The Advantage CA-Telon Design Facility (TDF), which helps you to design and
code your programs.
■ The application system Generator, which translates your TDF-generated Advantage
CA-Telon source statements into a COBOL or PL/I program. Refer to
Programming Concepts Guide for complete documentation of the application
system Generator.
■ The Advantage CA-Telon Test Facility (TTF), which allows you to interactively
test the programs and applications that you develop in the mainframe environment.
Refer to Test Facility Guide for complete documentation of the Advantage
CA-Telon Test Facility.

1.5 Advantage CA-Telon Design Facility
1.5 Advantage CA-Telon Design Facility

The Advantage CA-Telon Design Facility (TDF) is an online tool that you can use to
develop individual programs and entire application systems. It produces Advantage
CA-Telon source statements that are input to the Advantage CA-Telon Generator for
creating COBOL, COBOL II and above, or PL/I source code.
The TDF runs under TSO by means of a CLIST or under CICS as a single transaction.
You create programs and application systems by using the TDF to define a panel
image, panel definition, and screen definition.
Online help: You can access online help for each screen and the fields it contains.
To do this, type ? in the field for which you need help, and press [Enter]. The
Advantage CA-Telon Help Facility displays help text.
To leave the Telon Help Facility, invoke END processing.
Panel image: The panel image defines the format of the screen. You create a panel
image by keying it on the screen exactly as it should appear to the application user.
This process is called painting the image.
Advantage CA-Telon distinguishes among literal fields and fields reserved for input or
output by the characters you use to paint the panel image. For example, using
installation defaults, a string consisting of the < character represents an input field.
Panel definition: Once you have created a panel image, the next step is to specify
the processing characteristics of each field in the panel, such as the source of displayed
data, the destination of the entered data, and the field attributes. You can also specify
edit criteria, data cross-validation, and key validation. Thus, the panel definition is the
field-specific data.
Screen definition: The screen definition consists of general characteristics such as

cursor positioning, screen flow, data access, and PF-key processing.
In the screen definition, you can include any custom COBOL, COBOL II, or PL/I
code to handle operations specific to your data processing environment or business
application. The TDF allows you both to enter custom code and to reference it in the
screen definition.

1.6 Advantage CA-Telon Generator
1.6 Advantage CA-Telon Generator

The Advantage CA-Telon Generator is a batch job that produces native COBOL,
COBOL II, or PL/I source code for application testing or production execution.
Screen definition input: Advantage CA-Telon source statements developed from

the values you input to the TDF are submitted to the Generator. The Generator output
is a stand-alone, native COBOL, COBOL II, or PL/I source program. The source
program contains all necessary teleprocessing control information.
Generator control: The structure and target environment (for example, CICS, IMS,
batch, AS/400) of the generated program are determined through environment
definitions in the TDF.
This architecture allows you to regenerate Advantage CA-Telon applications simply if

performance or environmental considerations change. For example, you can regenerate
a CICS DL/I application developed under Advantage CA-Telon to an IMS/DC
application if transaction volume becomes a major concern. Similarly, you can
regenerate a conversational IMS/DC application as IMS/DC non-conversational. In
addition, during testing you can generate an application as a self-contained unit
without BMS control blocks and later generate it with interfaces to BMS along with
the BMS source code. The database administrator or technical support can accomplish
these changes without any involvement by the application development group.
Program structure: A Advantage CA-Telon-generated program is easy to follow,

partly because it conforms to a standard hierarchical structure.
Additionally, you can specify that custom COBOL, COBOL II, or PL/I statements are
to be inserted into the generated program exactly as you coded them. This standard
structure provides high development and maintenance productivity without sacrificing
performance.
The generated program also contains calls to Advantage CA-Telon-delivered

subroutines used for editing and optimizing line traffic. You have the option to
generate the source code instream for these subroutines so that the application
continues to run even if you discontinue using Advantage CA-Telon. You can also
create custom edit subroutines that can be called in generated code.
Since Advantage CA-Telon generates a native COBOL, COBOL II and above, or PL/I
source program, no Advantage CA-Telon runtime monitor or other "black box" is
necessary for program compilation or execution.
Refer to Programming Concepts Guide for details about the structure of the generated
program.

1.7 Advantage CA-Telon Test Facility
1.7 Advantage CA-Telon Test Facility

The Advantage CA-Telon Test Facility (TTF) provides an interactive debugging tool
that allows you to test an application or prototype new screens in the MVS mainframe
environment.
The TTF allows you to execute any Advantage CA-Telon screen definition without
following the logical processing sequence. That is, you do not have to navigate the
prescribed screen flow to execute the screen that you are testing. This allows you to
test a module even when the preceding modules are not available.
Full-screen interactive debugging: The TTF gives you screen-to-screen control

and full-screen interactive debugging facilities which allows you to:
■ Display program information, such as program name and compilation date and
time
■ Display and modify program and working storage areas, in both character and
hexadecimal format
■ Stop execution at specified instructions or break points
■ Intercept and interactively debug program ABENDs
Tracing: The TTF gives you a dynamic, full-screen PCB trace of every DL/I
database call, DB2 table access call, or EXEC CICS file access. You can request this
trace at any time during the testing process, and you can request it to occur before
and/or after each call.
The TTF controls the loading and execution of Advantage CA-Telon screen programs.
CICS environment: In the CICS environment, the TTF runs under CICS. Your
particular installation determines whether the TTF uses OS or CICS loads (that is,
whether the program must be defined in the CICS tables). OS loads allow for a more
effective environment.
IMS environment: In an IMS environment, the TTF runs under TSO. This is
accomplished by running the TTF under IMS/DB, which in turn is running in the TSO
foreground. The TTF system simulates the IMS/DC environment so that terminal
interaction appears the same as IMS. Refer to Test Facility Guide for complete
documentation of the Advantage CA-Telon Test Facility.

1.8 Reading Syntax Diagrams

The formats of all statements and some basic language elements are illustrated using
syntax diagrams. Read syntax diagrams from left to right and top to bottom.
The following terminology, symbols, and concepts are used in syntax diagrams.
Keywords: appear in uppercase letters, for example, COMMAND or PARM. These

words must be entered exactly as shown.
Variables: appear in italicized lowercase letters, for example, parm1 or parm2.
Required Keywords and Variables: appear on a main line.
Optional Keywords and Variables: appear below a main line.
Default Keywords and Variables: appear above a main line.
Double Arrowheads Pointing to the Right: indicate the beginning of a

statement.
Double Arrowheads Pointing to Each Other: indicate the end of a statement.
Single Arrowheads Pointing to the Right: indicate a portion of a statement, or

that the statement continues in another diagram.
Punctuation Marks or Arithmetic Symbols: If punctuation marks or arithmetic

symbols are shown with a keyword or variable, they must be entered as part of the
statement or command. Punctuation marks and arithmetic symbols can include:
, comma > greater than symbol

. period < less than symbol
( open parenthesis = equal sign
) close parenthesis ¬ not sign
+ addition - subtraction
* multipication \ division

No Parameters: Below is an example of a statement without parameters.
Statement Without Parameters

──COMMAND─────────────────────────────────────────────────────
You must write:

COMMAND
Required Parameters: Required parameters appear on the same horizontal line

(the main path of the diagram) as the command or statement. The parameters must be
separated by one or more blanks.
Statement With Required Parameters

──COMMAND──PARM1──PARM2───────────────────────────────────────
You must write:

COMMAND PARM1 PARM2
Delimiters such as parentheses around parameters or clauses must be included.
Delimiters Around Parameters

──COMMAND──(PARM1)──PARM2='variable'──────────────────────────
You must write:

COMMAND (PARM1) PARM2='variable'
Where you see a vertical list of parameters as shown below, you must choose one of
the parameters. This indicates that only one is required and only one of the displayed
parameters is allowed in the statement.
Choice of Required Parameters

──COMMAND──┬─CLAUSE1─┬────────────────────────────────────────
├─CLAUSE2─┤
└─CLAUSE3─┘
You can choose any of the parameters from the vertical list, such as in the examples
below:
COMMAND CLAUSE1
COMMAND CLAUSE2
COMMAND CLAUSE3

Optional Parameters: A single optional parameter appears below the horizontal

line that marks the main path.
Optional Parameter
──COMMAND──┬───────────┬──────────────────────────────────────
└─PARAMETER─┘
You can choose (or not) to use the optional parameter, as shown in the examples
below:
COMMAND
COMMAND PARAMETER
If you have a choice of more than one optional parameter, the parameters appear in a
vertical list below the main path.
Choice of Optional Parameters

──COMMAND──┬─────────┬────────────────────────────────────────
├─CLAUSE1─┤
└─CLAUSE2─┘
You can choose any of the parameters from the vertical list, or you can write the
statement without an optional parameter, such as in the examples below.
COMMAND
COMMAND CLAUSE1
COMMAND CLAUSE2
Multiple Parameters: For some statements, you can specify more than one
parameter, or a single parameter more than once. A repeat symbol (a
backward-pointing arrow above the main horizontal line) indicates that you can specify
multiple parameters. Below are examples which include the repeat symbol.
Repeatable Variable Parameter

┌──
───────────┐
─parameter─┴──────────────────────────────────────
──COMMAND───
In the above example, the word “parameter” is in lowercase italics, indicating that it is
a variable, but it is also on the main path, which means that at least one parameter is
required. The repeat symbol indicates that you can specify more than one parameter.
Assume that you have three values named PARM-X, PARM-Y, and PARM-Z for the
variable. Some of your choices can be:

COMMAND PARM-X
COMMAND PARM-X PARM-Y
COMMAND PARM-Y PARM-Z
COMMAND PARM-X PARM-Y PARM-Z
If the repeat symbol contains punctuation such as a comma, you must separate
multiple parameters with the punctuation. Below is an example which includes the
repeat symbol, a comma, and parentheses.
Separator with Repeatable Variable and Delimiter

┌─,──────┐
─clause─┴──)───────────────────────────────────
──COMMAND──(───
In the above example, the word “clause” is in lowercase italics, indicating that it is a
variable, but it is also on the main path, which means that at least one clause is
required. The repeat symbol indicates that you can specify more than one clause and
that you must separate the clauses with commas. The parentheses indicate that the
clauses must be enclosed within parentheses. Assume that you have three values
named CLAUSE-X, CLAUSE-Y, and CLAUSE-Z for the variable. Some of your
choices can be:
COMMAND (CLAUSE-X)
COMMAND (CLAUSE-X,CLAUSE-Y)
COMMAND (CLAUSE-Y,CLAUSE-Z)
COMMAND (CLAUSE-X,CLAUSE-Y,CLAUSE-Z)
The following example shows a vertical list of parameters with the repeat symbol.
Choice of Repeatable Parameters

┌──
─────────┐
┬─PARM1─┬┴────────────────────────────────────────
├─PARM2─┤
└─PARM3─┘
Some choices you can make include:

COMMAND PARM2
COMMAND PARM1 PARM2 PARM3
COMMAND PARM3 PARM2 PARM1

The following example shows a vertical list of parameters with a repeat symbol which
includes a comma.

Separator with Repeatable Parameters

┌─,───────┐
┬─PARM1─┬┴────────────────────────────────────────
├─PARM2─┤
└─PARM3─┘
Some choices you can make include:

COMMAND PARM2
COMMAND PARM1,PARM2,PARM3
COMMAND PARM3,PARM2,PARM1
Default Parameters: When a parameter in a syntax diagram is above the line, for
example, YES in the diagram below, its special treatment indicates it is the default
parameter. If you do not include the default parameter when you write the statement,
the result is the same as if you had actually included the parameter.
Default Parameter
──COMMAND──┬─────────────────┬────────────────────────────────
│ ┌─YES─┐ │
├─PARM1=─┼─────┼──┤
│ └─NO──┘ │
└─CLAUSE2─────────┘
Because YES is the default in the example above, if you write:

COMMAND CLAUSE2
you have written the equivalent of:
COMMAND PARM1=YES CLAUSE2
Variables Representing Several Parameters: In some syntax diagrams, a set of

several parameters is represented by a single reference, as in the example below.
Variables Representing Several Parameters

──COMMAND──┬─────────────────────┬────────────────────────────
├─CLAUSE1─────────────┤
└─┤ parameter-block ├─┘
parameter-block:
├──┬──────────────────┬──────────────────────────────────────────┤
├─PARM1────────────┤
└─PARM2─┬───────┬──┘
├─PARM3─┤
└─PARM4─┘
The parameter-block variable can have its own syntax diagram.

Choices you can make from this syntax diagram therefore include (but are not limited
to) the following:
COMMAND CLAUSE1
COMMAND PARM1
COMMAND PARM2 PARM4
Syntax Notes: A note in a syntax diagram is similar to a footnote except that the
note appears at the bottom of the diagram box.
──COMMAND──┬───────────┬──────────────────────────────────────
(1)
└─CLAUSE1─── ┘
Note:
1 This is a note about the keyword.

1.9 Introduction
1.9 Introduction
This chapter documents the initial screen of the CA-Telon Design Facility, the TDF
Main menu. On this menu, you can select the primary design and definition functions
for CA-Telon:
■ User profile maintenance
■ Data administration
■ Panel definition
■ Online program definition
■ Batch program definition
■ The prototyping facility
■ Utilities

1.10 TDF Main menu
1.10 TDF Main menu

Access: Enter the TSO CLIST, SPF panel, CICS transaction code assigned at
installation by your system administrator.
After display of messages related to data set or data file allocation, ending with the
display of three asterisks (***), press [Enter] to display the TDF Main menu.
Program ID: F100
Function: Allows you to select a menu for a CA-Telon primary function.
TELON DESIGN FACILITY MAIN MENU

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
FUNCTION: 2__
1 ── USER PROFILE MAINTENANCE

2 ── DATA ADMINISTRATION
3 ── PANEL SPECIFICATION
4 ── ONLINE PROGRAM DEFINITION
5 ── BATCH PROGRAM DEFINITION
6 ── PROTOTYPING FACILITY
U ── UTILITIES
X ── EXIT

Note: This screen is slightly different for the CA-Telon PWS PWS environment. For
further information, refer to PWS Option Administrator Guide.
1. COMMAND
For information, see 9.5, “Primary Commands” on page 9-13.
Note: The INSTALL command causes a branch to the TDF Installation Menu.
A full description of this screen as well as subordinate screens are found
in the "CA-Telon Design Facility Customization" section of the
Implementation Guide guide.
2. FUNCTION
The CA-Telon primary function selected. CA-Telon displays the main menu for
the function after you select it. Valid values are:
1
User profile maintenance. Allows you to define program defaults.
Alternatively, you can specify a category of defaults here by entering one of
these values:

1.10 TDF Main menu
1D
Program defaults
1P
PF keys
1S
Session controls
1C
Color Profile (PWS Only)
See 2.2, “User Profile Maintenance” on page 2-3 for detailed information.
2
Data administration. Allows you to create, update, purge, show, and list
PSBs, PCBs in a PSB, databases, segments in a database, VSAM files,
queues, journals, or sequential files.
It also allows read-only access to the DB2 catalog. See 3.2, “Data
Administration Menu” on page 3-3 for detailed information.
3
Panel specification. Allows you to create, update, purge, show, and list items
related to the panel image and panel definition. See 4.2, “Panel Definition
Menu” on page 4-4 for detailed information.
4
Online program definition. You can create, update, purge, and list items
relate to an online screen definition, IMS report definition, driver definition or
CICS nonterminal definition. This includes defining the environment,
database or data file usage, and custom code. See 5.2, “Online Program
Definition Menu” on page 5-5 for detailed information.
Online screen definition.
5
Batch program definition. Allows you to create, update, purge, show, and list
all items related to a batch program definition.
See Chapter 6, “Batch Program Definition” on page 6-1 for detailed
information.
6
Prototyping facility. A tool to model either panel images or panel definitions.
The application user can view and respond to a prototype of an interactive
session with an application function that uses simple scenarios (sequences of
screen samples to simulate an application). Prototyping can be performed
with or without data mapping. See 7.2, “Prototyping Facility Menu” on
page 7-3, for detailed information.
U
Utilities. You can copy, rename, list, or print any panel image, panel
definition, screen definition, report definition, driver definition, nonterminal
definition, or batch definition. You can also export your screen, report, driver,
nonterminal, or batch definition (the TDF-created definition is translated into
a CA-Telon source code listing). You can also list all TDF program headers.

1.10 TDF Main menu
See 8.2, “Utilities Menu” on page 8-3 for detailed information.

X
Exit the TDF and return control to the system.

Chapter 2. User Profile Maintenance
Chapter 2. User Profile Maintenance 2-1

2.1 Introduction
2.1 Introduction
This chapter discusses user profile maintenance, Option 1 on the TDF Main menu.
The user profile maintenance option allows you to set default values both for your
program and for TDF operations. You can also set or change PF-key values.

2.2 User Profile Maintenance

Access: On the TDF Main menu, enter 1 in the FUNCTION field.
Program ID: F105
Function: Allows you to select one of the following functions:

■ Set default program definition values
■ Set TDF PF-key functions
■ Set TDF session controls
■ Set PWS color profile
USER PROFILE MAINTENANCE MENU

COMMAND ==> 1__________________________________________________________________
FUNCTION: 2__
D ── DEFINITION DEFAULTS
P ── PFKEYS
S ── SESSION CONTROLS
C ── COLOR PROFILE

1. COMMAND
See 9.5, “Primary Commands” on page 9-13 for information.
2. FUNCTION
The function that you will perform. Valid values are:
D
Define default values for input fields on other TDF screens, such as for the
transfer work area, custom code name, and the language in which programs
are created
P
Define the functions PF keys perform during a TDF session
S
Define default values, such as export parameters and panel image size, that
are valid for this and subsequent TDF sessions

C (PWS Only)
Define the colors and intensities for all foreground and background fields on
the TDF screens. This option appears only on the PWS. For more
information refer to PWS Option Administrator Guide.

2.3 Update Program Definition Defaults

Access: Access this screen in one of the following ways:
■ On the User Profile Maintenance menu, enter D in the FUNCTION field
■ On the TDF Main menu, enter 1D in the FUNCTION field
Program ID: F112
Function: Sets default values for various input fields on TDF screens.
Note: You can override any default value you supply here on any TDF screen that
displays it by simply typing over the default.
When you press [Enter] or [End], your new entries replace the old. You exit the
screen by pressing [End], which saves all changes and returns you to the screen from
which you came.
UPDATE PROGRAM DEFN DEFAULTS

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
GENERAL PARAMETERS:
LANG 2__ CAPS 3__ APPL 4_____
OUTIFIL 5 HELP 6 HOLD 7
ALARM 8 EOFKEY 9
CUSTOM CODE DEFINITION MEMBERS:

XFERWKA 1_______________________________________
PGMCUST 11___________________________________________________________
EXTENDED ATTRIBUTES:
EATTR 12 (Y,N)
COLOR HILIGHT COLOR HILIGHT
EAIN 13_____ 14___ EAOUT 17_____ 18___
EALIT 15_____ 16___ EAERR 19_____ 2___
UPDATE ENVIRON DEFN DEFAULTS 21__ (C-CICS/I-IMS/T-TSO/B-BATCH/

A-AS4/U-UNIX/W-WINCH/S-STORED)

1. COMMAND
2. LANG
The programming language in which CA-Telon is to generate programs. This
field is not used in installations using only one language. Valid values are:
COB
COBOL, COBOL II. This is the default.
PLI
PL/I

3. CAPS
A value to specify whether to translate lowercase characters to uppercase.
Valid values are:
ON
CA-Telon translates lowercase characters that the application user enters to
uppercase. This is the default.
OFF
No translation occurs on input
4. APPLID
Contains the optional variable length application id which is used to define
the names for programs and control blocks. Its use is determined at
installation time. For more information, see the Implementation Guide.
5. OUTIFIL
The initial value for input, outin, and select fields on the screen. Valid values
are:
B
Spaces. This is the default.
U
Underscores
N
Low values
6. HELP
A value to indicate whether CA-Telon is to generate code that you can use to
build a HELP facility for the system you develop. Valid values are:
Y
Generate the code. This is the default.
N
Do not generate the code
7. HOLD
A value to specify whether CA-Telon is to generate code that you can use to
build the HOLD capability into the system you develop. Valid values are:
Y
Generate the code. This is the default.
N
Do not generate the code
8. ALARM
A value to specify whether the terminal alarm is to ring automatically when
an ERROR-ATTR condition is detected on output. Valid values are:
Y
Automatic ring on ERROR-ATTR
N
No automatic ring on ERROR-ATTR. This is the default.
9. EOFKEY (IMS MFS only)
A value to specify whether the application user can erase data by pressing
[EOF]. Valid values are:
Y
Allow the application user to erase data with the EOF key. This is the
default.

N
Do not allow the application user to erase data with the EOF key MFS does
not return to an application program in which a field has been erased using
[EOF] and the attribute for that field has its modified data tag field off.
Therefore, if the EOFKEY value is N, the CA-Telon program processes such
a field as if it still contained the data originally entered, even if the
application user has erased it. If the EOFKEY value is Y for a modified data
tag, the MFS for this application is turned on. This results in the resending of
every input field to the application (including those that have been erased with
[EOF]).
10. XFERWKA
The COPY member names to add to the transfer work area section of the
program. Each name must be separated by a comma.
11. PGMCUST
The name of the COBOL section or PL/I procedure in which to add custom
code and the name of the custom code added. You can make multiple
specifications using this format:
section-name1,member-name1,
section-name2,member-name2,...
Section-name
The four-character identifier of the section or procedure in which to include
the custom code (for example, H100) and a suffix (I or T) that specifies
whether to include the code at the beginning (I) of the section or procedure,
or at the end (T).
For example, H100I specifies section H100 is included at the beginning of the
program and E100T specifies section E100 is included at the end of the
program.
Member-name
The name of the custom code added at the location specified by section-name.
For example, the value A100I,OUTIDC specifies the custom code named
OUTIDC is placed at the beginning of the A-100 section.
You can include a member designated in PGMCUST at the beginning and end
of any section or procedure in the program, except for U-100 sections or
procedures generated by I/O statements (that is, CREATE, DELETE, READ,
and UPDATE).
12. EATTR
A value to specify whether to use extended attributes with this screen. Valid
values are:
Y
Use extended attributes
N
Do not use extended attributes. This is the default. Extended attributes are
defined in the EAIN, EALIT, EAOUT, and EAERR fields.
13. EAIN (color attribute)
The default color attributes for input, outin, and select fields. Valid values
are:

■ BLUE
■ GREEN
■ RED
■ PINK
■ TURQ (Turquoise)
■ YELLOW
■ NEUTRAL
14. EAIN (highlight attribute)
The default highlight attributes for input, outin, and select fields. Valid
values are:
Valid value Meaning

BLINK Field blinks when
B displayed.
BL
REVERSE Field displays in reverse
R video.
RE
REV
REVER
REVERS
DEFAULT Field appears in default
D mode.
DE
DEF
DEFAU
DEFLT
UNDERLINE Field is underlined.
U
UN
UNDER
15. EALIT (color attribute)

The default color attributes for literal fields. Valid values are the same as for
the EAIN color attribute.
16. EALIT (highlight attribute)
The default highlight attributes for literal fields. Valid values are the same as
for the EAIN highlight attribute.
17. EAOUT (color attribute)
The default color attributes for outin and output fields. Valid values are the
same as for the EAIN color attribute.
18. EAOUT (highlight attribute)
The default highlight attributes for outin and output fields. Valid values are
the same as for the EAIN highlight attribute.

19. EAERR (color attribute)

The default color attributes for fields flagged in error. Valid values are the
same as for the EAIN color attribute.
20. EAERR (highlight attribute)
The default highlight attributes for fields flagged in error. Valid values are
the same as for the EAIN highlight attribute.
21. UPDATE ENVIRON DEFN DEFAULTS
A value to transfer to the Update Environment Definition Defaults or similar
screen for particular target environment. Valid values are:
C
CICS (OS/390)
I
IMS
T
TSO
B
Batch
A
AS/400
U
UNIX
W
WINCH
S
STORED
Notes:
Depending upon your selection you are transferred to one of these
screens:
U: (UNIX)
F151 - Update UNIX Environment Definition Defaults. See 2.5,
“Update UNIX Environment Definition Defaults” on page 2-19, for
more information.
W: (WINCH)
F153 - Update WINCH Environment Definition Defaults. See 2.6,
“Update WINCH Environment Definition Defaults” on page 2-21,
for more information.
S: (STORED)
F154 - Update Stored Procedure Environment Defaults. See 2.7,
“Update Stored Procedure Environment Definition Defaults” on
page 2-23, for more information.

2.4 Update Environment Definition Defaults

Access: On the Update Program Definition Defaults screen, enter the character
corresponding to the environment updated in the UPDATE ENVIRON DEFN
DEFAULTS field.
Program ID: F113
Function: Updates the defaults for the program environment.
UPDATE ENVIRON DEFN DEFAULTS

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
CICS: SPASIZE 2____ PSBSCHD 3_______ PSBNAME 4

TRACE 5 LINEOPT 6 BMS 7
SPASTG 8 IOASTG 9 TPBSTG 1
GENPCBS 11 LNKCOPY 12______ USGCOP1 13______
DBMS 14 USGCOP2 15______
____
IMS: SPASIZE 16 LINKOPT 17 CONVERS 18
GENPCBS 19 LNKCOPY 2______ USGCOPY 21______
TRACE 22 LINEOPT 23___ SPACMPT 24
TRANCDE 25______ TRANMFS 26 TRANFLD 27______
WKSPASZ 28___ WKSPAIO: GET 29______ PUT 3______
WKSPAIN 31
TSO: GENPCBS 32 LNKCOPY 33______ USGCOPY 34______
BATCH: TRACE 35 DLIWGHT 36______
GENPCBS 37 LNKCOPY 38______ USGCOPY 39______
DBMS 4______
AS4: LNKCOPY 41______ USGCOPY 42______ COMMIT 43
HOLDLTH 44 TRACE 45

1. COMMAND
See 9.5, “Primary Commands” on page 9-13 for information. information.
2.4.1 CICS
2. SPASIZE
The size of the DFHCOMMAREA used to hold the transfer work area. After
CA-Telon generates the program, this value appears in the "CICS Program
Summary" of the assembler listing as TRANSFER AREA SIZE SPECIFIED. The
size must be greater than or equal to the sum of the following items:
■ The SPA Header
■ The application Transfer Work Area
■ The screen image size
During practical input, estimate this value, and then refine it as needed, based on
the requirements printed out on generated program listings.

3. PSBSCHD
A value to specify whether CA-Telon is to automatically schedule and terminate
the DL/I PSB in the CICS program sections Q-200-PSB-SCHEDULE and
Q-210-PSB-TERM. Valid values are:
Y
Automatically schedules and terminates the DL/I PSB. This is the default.
N
Generates the Q-200 and Q-210 sections without any reference to them in the
CA-Telon code. In this case, you are responsible for performing the sections
to schedule and terminate the DL/I PSB.
Note: The PSB name used on the schedule call is the variable name
(PSB-NAME), which may be dynamically set prior to the PSB scheduling.
4. PSBNAME
For DL/I, the name of the PSB that the program uses.
5. TRACE
A value to specify whether the program generates and maintains TRACE variables
for debugging. Valid values are:
Y
The program generates TRACE variables for the CA-Telon Test Facility
(TTF). This is the default.
N
The program does not generate TRACE variables for the TTF
Note: Note that TRACE variables increase the size of the generated program.
6. LINEOPT
The line optimization logic that the program uses and generates. Valid values are:
1
Use the CA-Telon line optimizing subroutine. CA-Telon automatically
performs line optimization for you.
2
Simulate subroutine optimizing in Custom Code (except for fill character
processing).
3
Do not generate line optimizing code.
Note: For CA-Telon PWS, LINEOPT must be set equal to 2 or 3.
7. BMS
A flag to indicate whether the program creates a CICS BMS or uses CA-Telon's
own mapping. CA-Telon's mapping is recommended for all 3270-type terminals.
Valid values are:
Y
Create a BMS map
N
Create a CA-Telon map. This is the default.

8. SPASTG
The location where CA-Telon is to generate the SPA-AREA. Valid values are:
A (AUTO)
■ For COBOL, CA-Telon generates the SPA-AREA in the Linkage Section.
When no SPA-AREA enters a program as it is executed, the program
does a GETMAIN to initialize the SPA AREA and the XCTL to the
same program.
■ For PL/I, when no SPA-AREA enters the program, the program does a
GETMAIN, sets the COMPTR, and initializes the SPA-AREA.
S (STATIC)
CA-Telon generates the SPA-AREA in COBOL Working Storage.
9. IOASTG
A COBOL field that specifies where CA-Telon generates the
SEGMENT-IO-AREA. Valid values are:
A (AUTO)
Generate SEGMENT-IO-AREA in the Linkage Section and do a GETMAIN
for it at program initialization
S (STATIC)
Generate SEGMENT-IO-AREA in Working Storage
10. TPBSTG
A COBOL field that specifies where CA-Telon is to generate the TP-BUFFER.
Valid values are:
A (AUTO)
CA-Telon generates the TP-BUFFER in the Linkage Section and performs a
GETMAIN for it at program initialization
S
CA-Telon generates the TP-BUFFER in Working Storage
field
11. GENPCBS
A value to specify whether CA-Telon is to include DL/I PCB masks in the
program. Valid values are:
Y
CA-Telon automatically generates the PCB masks in the program
N
You must include the PCB masks in the LNKCOPY and
D
The program is a stand-alone program that links USGCOPY TDF fields
12. LNKCOPY
The name of the COPY member containing the 01-level declarations to include in
the Linkage Section.
13. USGCOP1
A COBOL BLL-POINTER-LIST option specifying the COPY member appended
to the BLL-POINTER-LIST entries in the Linkage Section.

14. DBMS
The name of the default data access for batch programs.
15. USGCOP2
A COBOL BLL-POINTER-LIST option specifying the COPY member included in
the Q-100-CICS-INIT to initialize the BLL-POINTER-LIST entries.
2.4.2 IMS
16. SPASIZE
The size of the SPA specified in the IMS generation for this application. It can be
defined in conjunction with WKSPASZ. The size of SPASIZE alone or of
SPASIZE plus WKSPASZ must be large enough to hold:
■ The SPA header
■ The application transfer work area
■ The largest screen image in the application
Find the initial value for this field based on SPA requirements printed on the
generated program listings. field
17. LINKOPT
The type of linking to occur in the IMS program. Valid values are:
D
Indicates the program is a stand-alone program that links dynamically to other
programs. If you do not specify ANY for LINKPGM or MSGPGM, all
programs to which control can be passed must be accounted for in the
MSGTRAN, MSGPGM, MSGTBL, or LINKPGM fields. See 5.2, “Online
Program Definition Menu” on page 5-5 for more information.
Any attempt to transfer control to an unspecified module results in a user
abend.
S
CA-Telon generates the program as a subroutine that executes under a driver.
The only valid fields with this option are CONVERS, MFSMOD, and
PGMNAME. See 5.2, “Online Program Definition Menu” on page 5-5 for
details about these fields.
18. CONVERS
A value indicating whether the system that CA-Telon generates is IMS
conversational. Valid values are:
Y
Specifies that the system being generated is an IMS conversational system
using an IMS SPA
N
Specifies that the system being generated is an IMS non-conversational
system using a WORKSPA database
19. GENPCBS
A value to specify whether to include DL/I PCB masks in the program. Valid
values are:

Y
Automatically generate PCB masks in the program
N
PCB masks must be included in the LNKCOPY and USGCOPY members
20. LNKCOPY
21. USGCOPY
The variable declarations in the linkage member appended to the COBOL
Procedure Division or the PL/I procedure statements.
In COBOL, the variable declaration is the list of 01-level variables in the Linkage
Section. In PL/I, variable declaration is a list of DECLARE statements in the
Linkage Section.
22. TRACE
A value to specify whether the program generates and maintains trace variables
Y
N
Note: Trace variables increase the size of the generated program.
field
23. LINEOPT
1
Use the CA-Telon line optimizing subroutine. CA-Telon automatically
2
Simulate subroutine optimizing in custom code (except for fill character
processing).
3
Do not generate line optimizing code.
Note: For CA-Telon PWS, LINEOPT must be set equal to 2 or 3.
24. SPACMPT
A value to indicate whether CA-Telon should generate a SPA with a fixed number
of overhead bytes, making it compatible for use by both static and dynamic
programs. The generation of such a SPA allows for message switching between
static and dynamic modules in an application. Valid values are:
Y
CA-Telon generates a compatible SPA. Advantage CA-Telon generates a field
called SPA-CMPAT in the dynamic programs where the next-program-name
field exists in static programs.

N
CA-Telon generates SPA with a different number of overhead bytes, based on
whether the module is static or dynamic. Message switching between static
and dynamic modules cannot take place in the application.
25. TRANCDE
The name of the IMS transaction code associated with the generated program,
specified only when the IMS transaction is different from the CA-Telon-generated
program name. The CA-Telon-generated program is hhnnnn, where:
hh is the header and
nnnn is the ID as entered on the program definition.
26. TRANMFS
A value to specify whether the MFS processes the transaction code. Valid values
are:
Y
MFS processes the transaction code
N
MFS does not process the transaction code. This is the default.
27. TRANFLD
The transaction code that is imbedded to the MID for this screen, specified only
when the /FORMAT command is used to start the application, or if the system is
non-conversational. Refer to Programming Concepts Guide for additional
information.
28. WKSPASZ
The number of bytes in the WORKSPA database used in this application system,
specified only when you use a WORKSPA database.
In a non-conversational system, the value must be large enough to hold the
application transfer work area, overhead, and the largest screen image in the
application.
In a conversational system, the value must be large enough to hold the remainder
of this area overflowing from the IMS SPA area (defined with the value in the
SPASIZE field).
29. GET
The name of the COPY member containing custom code included before the read
of a WORKSPA database.
30. PUT
The name of the COPY member containing custom code included before the
replacement of a WORKSPA database.
31. WKSPAIN
A value to specify whether the generation of CA-Telon WORKSPA database
initialization code is to take place in the IMS program section
C-920-GET-WORKSPA. Valid values are:

Y
Results in generation of code to reinitialize the CA-Telon transfer work area
when the IMS program flow has been broken. This is the default.
N
Results in no such generation of code
2.4.3 TSO
32. GENPCBS
A value to specify whether to include DL/I PCB masks in the program that
CA-Telon generates. Valid values are:
Y
N
Include PCB masks in the LNKCOPY and USGCOPY members
Note: IMS programs are generated as TSO programs for testing under the
CA-Telon Test Facility (TTF).
33. LNKCOPY
34. USGCOPY
Linkage Section.
2.4.4 Batch
35. TRACE
Y
N
Note: Trace variables increase the size of the generated program.
36. DLIWGHT
A value to specify whether the CA-Telon program generates automatic weighting
of DL/I calls. Valid values are:
Y
Generate automatic weighting of DL/I calls

N
Do not generate automatic weighting of DL/I calls
CA-Telon increments a generated variable by one (1) for each DL/I REPL call
and by three (3) for each DL/I DLET or ISRT call. The programmer is
responsible for checking and resetting the variable to determine when a checkpoint
should be taken.
37. GENPCBS
A value to specify whether to include DL/I PCB masks in the program that
CA-Telon generates. Valid values are:
Y
N
Include PCB masks in the LNKCOPY and USGCOPY members
38. LNKCOPY
39. USGCOPY
Linkage Section.
40. DBMS
The name of the default data access for batch programs.
2.4.5 AS/400
41. LNKCOPY
Use this parameter to specify the name of the COPY member containing the
01-level declarations that you want to include in the linkage section. If you code
this parameter, you must also code USGCOPY.
42. USGCOPY
Use this parameter to define the variable declarations in the linkage member that
are appended to the COBOL Procedure Division Statement. This is the list of
01-level variables in the linkage section.
43. COMMIT
Use this parameter to identify whether the program executes on the AS/400 under
commitment control. Valid values are Y, N, and H. (H is a special value for SQL
access only. The AS/400 extension COMMIT HOLD is generated, as opposed to
COMMIT.)
44. HOLDLTH
Use this parameter to identify the length of the HOLD SPA area in the hold
database file on the AS/400. If unspecified, CA-Telon/400 uses a default of 8000.

45. TRACE
Use this parameter to specify whether the program generates and maintains
TRACE variables to facilitate debugging. Note that TRACE variables increase the
size of the generated program. Valid values are Y and N. The default is N. Since
AS/400 Debug does not use TRACE variables nor the CA-Telon Test Facility, it
is suggested that you leave this parameter as the default, N.

2.5 Update UNIX Environment Definition Defaults

Access: On the Update Program Definition Defaults screen, enter U in the
UPDATE ENVIRON DEFN DEFAULTS field.
Program ID: F151
Function: Updates the defaults for the UNIX program environment.
UPDATE UNIX ENVIRN DEFN DEFAULTS

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
UNIX: TRACE 2
HOLDLTH 3____
LINKAGE: LNKCOPY 4_______

USGCOPY 5_______
DBMS: RDBMS 6_______ (INGRES, ORACLE)
DRIVER: SPASIZE 7____

CALLTYP 8
CANCEL 9

1. COMMAND
2. TRACE
Y
N
The program does not generate TRACE variables for the TTF.
3. HOLDLTH
Refer to the Target Option for UNIX Guide for information.
4. LNKCOPY
5. USGCOPY

6. RDBMS
7. SPASIZE
8. CALLTYP
9. CANCEL

2.6 Update WINCH Environment Definition Defaults

Access: On the Update Program Definition Defaults screen, enter D in the
UPDATE ENVIRON DEFN DEFAULTS field.
Program ID: F153
Function: Updates the defaults for the WINCH program environment.
UPDATE WINCH ENVIRN DEFN DEFAULTS

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
UNIX: TRACE 2
HOLDLTH 3____

USGCOPY 5_______
DBMS: RDBMS 6_______ (DB2)
DRIVER: SPASIZE 7____

CALLTYP 8
CANCEL 9

1. COMMAND
2. TRACE
Y
N
The program does not generate TRACE variables for the TTF.
3. HOLDLTH
Refer to the Target Option for Windows Character Guide for information.
4. LNKCOPY
5. USGCOPY

6. RDBMS
7. SPASIZE
8. CALLTYP
9. CANCEL

2.7 Update Stored Procedure Environment Definition Defaults
2.7 Update Stored Procedure Environment Definition

Defaults
Access: To access the Update Stored Procedure Environment Definition Defaults
screen, on the Update Program Definition Defaults screen, enter an R in the
UPDATE ENVIRON DEFN DEFAULTS Field.
Program ID: F154
Function: Specifies the default environment data for the Stored Procedure programs.
UPDATE STORED ENVIRON DEFN DEFAULTS

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
RESULTS 2_ ASUTIME 3____ WLMENV 4_________________

SCHEMA 5_______ COLLID 6_________________
PARAMETERS:
EXTSCUR:7_ (2-DB2 U-USER D-DEFINER)
PRMSTYL:8_ (N-GENERAL WITH NULLS G-GENERAL D-DB2SQL J-JAVA)
PROGTYP:9_ (M-MAIN S-SUB)
SQLMOD :1 (M-MODIFIES SQL DATA N-NO SQL S-CONTAINS SQL
R-READS SQL DATA)
SELECT ALL THAT APPLY (Y/N):

11_ COMRETN 12_ DBINFO 13_ DETERM
14_ FENCED 15_ NULCALL 16_ STAYRES

1. COMMAND
2. RESULTS
Specifies the maximum number of result sets that the stored procedure can return.
The default is 0, which indicates that there are no result sets.
3. ASUTIME
Specifies the total amount of processor time, in CPU service units, that a single
invocation of a stored procedure can run.
4. WLMENV
Identifies the MVS Workload Manager (WLM) environment in which the stored
procedure is to run when the DB2 stored procedure address space is
WLM-established. The name of the WLM environment is a long identifier.

Note: If a WLM ENVIRONMENT is not specified, the stored procedure runs in

the default WLM-established stored procedure address space specified at
installation time.
5. SCHEMA
Part of the qualified name for of the stored procedure.
The qualified form of stored procedure name is a short SQL identifier (the
SCHEMA name) followed by a period and a long SQL identifier.
6. COLLID
Identifies the package collection to be used when the stored procedure is executed.
This is the package collection into which the DBRM that is associated with the
stored procedure is bound.
If COLLID is not specified, the package collection for the stored procedure is the
same as the package collection of the calling program.
7. EXTSCUR
Specifies how the stored procedure interacts with an external security product,
such as RACF, to control access to non-SQL resources.
2 —The stored procedure does not require a special external security environment.
This is the only valid choice when a Workload Manager environment is not
specified (DB2).
U — An external security environment should be established for the stored

procedure. Access is performed using the authorization ID of the user who
invoked the stored procedure (USER).
D — An external security environment should be established for the stored

procedure. Access is performed using the authorization ID of the stored procedure
owner (DEFINER).
8. PRMSTYL
Identifies the linkage convention (parameter style) used to pass parameters to the
stored procedure. All of the linkage conventions provide arguments to the stored
procedure that contain the parameters specified on the CALL statement. Some of
the linkage conventions pass additional arguments to the stored procedure that
provides more information to the stored procedure.
D — (DB2SQL) In addition to the parameters on the CALL statement, the

following arguments are also passed to the stored procedure:
■ a null indicator for each parameter on the CALL statement
■ the SQLSTATE to be returned to DB2
■ the qualified name of the stored procedure
■ the specific name of the stored procedure

■ the SQL diagnostic string to be returned to DB2

■ the DB2INFO structure, if DBINFO is specified
G — (GENERAL) Only the parameters on the CALL statement are passed to the
stored procedure. The parameters cannot be null.
N — In addition to the parameters on the CALL statement, another argument is

passed to the stored procedure. The additional argument contains a vector of null
indicators for each of the parameters on the CALL statement that enables the
stored procedure to accept or return null parameter values (GENERAL WITH
NULLS).
J — The stored procedure uses a convention for passing parameters that conforms
to the Java and SQLJ specifications. IN OUT and OUT parameters are passed as
single-entry arrays. The DBINFO structure is not passed (JAVA).
9. PROGTYP
Specifies whether the stored procedure will run as a main routine or a subroutine.
S — The stored procedure will run as a subroutine (SUB).
M — The stored procedure will run as a main routine (MAIN).
10. SQLMOD
Indicates whether or not the stored procedure can execute SQL statements and, if
so, what type it can execute.
N — The stored procedure cannot execute any SQL statements (NO SQL).
M — The stored procedure can execute any SQL statement except those
statements that are not supported in any stored procedure (MODIFIES SQL
DATA).
R — The stored procedure cannot execute SQL statements that modify data. SQL
statements that are not supported in any stored procedure return a different error
(READS SQL DATA).
S — The stored procedure cannot execute any SQL statements that read or modify
data. SQL statements that are not supported in any stored procedure return a
different error (CONTAINS SQL).
11. COMRETN
Indicates whether DB2 commits the transaction immediately on return from the
stored procedure (COMMIT ON RETURN).
N — DB2 does not issue a COMMIT when the stored procedure returns.

Y — DB2 issues a COMMIT when the stored procedure returns if the following
statements are true:
■ The SQLCODE that is returned by the CALL statement is not negative.

■ The stored procedure is not in a must-abort state.
■ The COMMIT operation includes work that is performed by the calling
application process and the stored procedure.
If the stored procedure returns result sets, the cursors that are associated with the
result sets must have been defined as WITH HOLD to be usable after the
COMMIT.
12. DBINFO
Specifies whether specific information known by DB2 is passed to the stored
procedure when it is invoked.
N — Additional information is not passed.
Y — An additional argument is passed to the stored procedure when it is invoked.

This argument is a structure that contains information such as the application
run-time authorization ID, the schema name, the name of a table or column that
the procedure might be inserting into or updating, and identification of the
database server that invoked the procedure.
13. DETERM
Specifies whether the stored procedure returns the same result from successive
calls with identical input arguments.
Y — The stored procedure returns the same result from successive calls with
identical input arguments (DETERMINISTIC).
N — The stored procedure might not return the same result from successive calls
with identical input arguments (NOT DETERMINISTIC).
14. FENCED
Specifies whether or not the stored procedure runs in an external address space (to
prevent user programs from corrupting DB2 storage).
Y — The stored procedure will run in an external address space (FENCED).
N — The stored procedure will not run in an external address space (NOT
FENCED).

15. NULCALL
Determines whether or not the stored procedure will be called even when any of
the input arguments is null, making the procedure responsible for testing for null
argument values.
Y — The stored procedure will be called even when any of the input arguments is
null; the stored procedure is responsible for testing for null argument values.
N — The stored procedure will not be call when any of the input arguments is
null.
16. STAYRES
Specifies whether the stored procedure load module remains resident in memory
when the stored procedure ends.
Y — The load module remains resident in memory after the stored procedure
ends.
N — The load module is deleted from memory after the stored procedure ends.

2.8 Update PF Keys Definition

■ On the User Profile Maintenance menu, enter P in the FUNCTION field
■ On the TDF Main menu, enter 1P in the FUNCTION field
Program ID: F110
Function: Defines the functions that the PF keys perform while you are using the
TDF.
When you press [Enter] or [EOF], your new entries replace the old. You exit the
which you came.
UPDATE PFKEYS

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
PF/PA KEY DEFINITIONS: 2

PF1 ===> _________ PF13 ===> _________ PA1 ===> _________
PF2 ===> _________ PF14 ===> _________ PA2 ===> _________
PF3 ===> _________ PF15 ===> _________ PA3 ===> _________
PF4 ===> _________ PF16 ===> _________ CLEAR ===> _________
PF5 ===> _________ PF17 ===> _________
PF6 ===> _________ PF18 ===> _________
PF7 ===> _________ PF19 ===> _________
PF8 ===> _________ PF2 ===> _________
PF9 ===> _________ PF21 ===> _________
PF1 ===> _________ PF22 ===> _________
PF11 ===> _________ PF23 ===> _________
PF12 ===> _________ PF24 ===> _________
VALUES: HOLD SWAP END HOLD HELP FORWARD BACKWARD

END MENU LINE EDIT CANCEL SAVE NOP
LEFT RIGHT LINE OUT LOCATE RFIND RCHANGE
CAPS NULLS PROFILE RESET RESTORE SWAP EDIT
RESUME PDF ISPF CAN PD END ALL
LINE COMMANDS: D I R C M A B O ) ( X XX F L COLS FS LC G U DG

1. COMMAND
2. PF/PA KEY DEFINITIONS
A set of commands associated with PF keys.
Valid values are presented on the screen as VALUES and LINE COMMANDS.
Default values are displayed in the designated fields.
See 9.5, “Primary Commands” on page 9-13 for information about VALUES.
See 9.6, “Line Commands” on page 9-45 for information about line commands.
The value NOP means "no option." When you press a PF key which has been
assigned the NOP value, no function is performed.

You can change the PF-key functions at any time. Any changes you make are in
effect once you exit the screen. They remain in effect until you change them
again.
Note: You cannot define the PA keys and [Clear] in TSO. If you do, they will
not function.

2.9 Update Session Controls

■ On the User Profile Maintenance menu, enter S in the FUNCTION field
■ On the TDF Main menu, enter 1S in the FUNCTION field
Program ID: F114
Function: Defines the default values of various input on TDF screens. These are
indicator values that used to direct internal TDF processing. They do not affect
program generation.
When you press [Enter] or [End], your new entries replace the old. You exit the
which you came.
UPDATE SESSION CONTROLS

COMMAND ==> 1__________________________________________________________________
DEFAULT HEADER ===> 2

IMAGE CHARACTERS ===> 3 < (INPUT FIELDS)
===> > (OUTPUT FIELDS)
===> + (OUTIN FIELDS)
===> | (SELECT FIELDS)
===> \ (LITERAL BREAK INDICATOR)
FIELD SELECTION ===> 4 Y (YES/NO - INPUT FIELDS)
===> Y (YES/NO - OUTPUT FIELDS)
===> Y (YES/NO - OUTIN FIELDS)
===> Y (YES/NO - SELECT FIELDS)
===> N (YES/NO - LITERAL FIELDS)
COMPRESS STATEMENTS ===> 5 (YES/NO)
ENVIRONMENT ===> 6 (C-CICS/I-IMS/T-TSO/B-BATCH/
A-AS4/U-UNIX/W-WINCH)
FORMAT ===> 7 (YES/NO) PSB ===> 8 (YES/NO)
DITTO CHARACTER ===> 9
PANEL SIZE ===> 1_ X ___ UPPER CASE LITERALS ===> 11
USER MODE ===> 12 (1/2)

DG SEPARATORS ===> 13 _
PDSCOPY DSNAME ===> 14___________________________________________________

1. COMMAND
2. DEFAULT HEADER
The one- to five-character header used with the names of all programs and control
blocks generated for a particular application. Defining it here causes it to appear
on every TDF screen that has a HEADER field.
The default is a two-digit header specified at installation.
3. IMAGE CHARACTERS
The characters that CA-Telon uses to identify the usage of a field that you paint
on a panel image. Valid values are any character except a single quote (') and an

ampersand (&). However, each character used to define a field type may not be
used in a literal field on a panel image, except for the literal break character.
Default values are:
<
Input field
>
Output field
+
Outin field
|
Select field
\
Literal break
The usage of each of these types of fields is:
Literal
A literal field is any character or series of characters whose display does not
vary during program execution. Data comprising a literal field is mapped out
to the screen but is not otherwise used in processing.
Input
An input field is any character or series of characters keyed by the application
user and processed as input from the screen. In most cases, the field is
mapped to a database or work area field. Each input field can be mapped to
two separate data fields.
Output
An output field is any character or series of characters that the program
displays to the application user. The data for an output field originates from a
database, data file, or work field, and is protected from modification by the
application user.
Outin
An outin field is a combination output and input field that is processed during
program output. The application user can change it, then it is processed during
the input phase.
Select
A select field is a special input field that allows the application user to
designate the next screen for processing. When the application user enters
data into a select field, the program branches to a screen or process
predetermined by the programmer. When a screen has more than one select
field, the application user must enter data in only one select field. The
program displays an error message when data is entered into more than one
field.
Literal Break
The literal break character breaks a literal field into two parts. Use this
character when you want to process parts of a literal or control an attribute.

4. FIELD SELECTION
The fields that are displayed on the Edit Panel Image screen when you update a
panel image. Valid values are:
Y
Display fields of this type
N
Do not display fields of this type
Default values are:
Y
Input
Y
Output
Y
Outin
Y
Select
N
Literal
Do not modify the default values unless required for special applications.
5. COMPRESS STATEMENTS
A value to specify whether the TDF is to generate compressed CA-Telon source
statements. Valid values are:
Y
Compress statements
N
Generate one statement per line. This is the default.
6. ENVIRONMENT
The execution environment for the program. Valid values are:
A
AS/400
B
BATCH
C
CICS (OS/390)
W
WINCH
I
IMS
T
TSO. This is the default.
U
UNIX
Note: ( — Valid on PWS or on OS/390 if the corresponding target option is
installed.)

7. FORMAT
The environment format under which the program runs at the Generator request of
the CA-Telon program. Valid values are:
Y
Environment format request wanted
N
No environment format request. This is the default.
See 8.2, “Utilities Menu” on page 8-3 for detailed information about this field.
8. PSB
The environment PSB (CICS, IMS, or TSO) the program runs under at the
Generator request statement section of the CA-Telon program. Valid values are:
Y
Environment PSB requested
N
Environment PSB not requested. This is the default.
See 8.2, “Utilities Menu” on page 8-3 for detailed information about this field.
9. DITTO CHARACTER
A special character that enables you to repeat the previous statement on many
TDF screens. Valid values are any character except an asterisk (*). The default is
the double quote (").
If you enter the ditto character in a field and then press [Enter], CA-Telon repeats
the field immediately above.
10. PANEL SIZE
The number of lines and columns on a screen, in the format ll ccc where:
ll
The number of lines on the screen or report (maximum = 99). The default
value is 24.
ccc
The number of columns on a screen or report (maximum = 240) The default
value is 80.
The total screen size must not exceed 9920. To calculate screen size, multiply the
total number of lines by the total number of columns on the screen.
Note: If you are working with a Model 3 or Model 4 terminal, CA-Telon
displays the panel in a Model 2 mode if you create a panel with 24 lines.
11. UPPER CASE LITERALS
A value to specify whether the literals can contain lowercase characters. Valid
values are:
ON
All literals converted to uppercase. This is the default.
OFF
Lower case literals remain as keyed

12. USER MODE

A value to specify whether the program definition menus are presented in short
form or long form. Valid values are:
1
Short form
2
Long form
See the following sections in this manual for more information:
■ 5.2, “Online Program Definition Menu” on page 5-5
■ 6.6, “Batch Program Definition” on page 6-18
13. DG SEPARATORS
The character used in the first and second separator lines of the Update Data
Access screen. Valid values include any character. If you do not specify a value,
hyphen (-) is the default.
Note: If you specify '¬', no separator is displayed.
14. PDSCOPY DSNAME (Mainframe only)
The default data set searched when you enter the PDSCOPY command with only
a member name. See 9.5, “Primary Commands” on page 9-13 for information
about the PDSCOPY command.

2.10 PWS-Specific Features

These TDF functions are specific to PWS. They are provided in addition to the
standard mainframe TDF features and functions.
■ Color Profile - The color profile function enables you to select, as part of your
TDF profile, the colors and intensities for all foreground and background fields on
the TDF screens.
■ PWSCOPY Command - A command in the Custom Code Editor that allows you
to copy ASCII files from a directory into the custom code member. PWSCOPY is
equivalent to PDSCOPY on the mainframe.
■ Security - The PWS provides a security layer that controls access to its menus and
dialogs.
■ Mouse - You may use your mouse to position the cursor on inputtable fields in
the TDF.
Note: The ISPF, TSO, and PDF commands are not available in the PWS.
2.10.1 Color Profile

On the TDF Main menu, enter 1C in the FUNCTION field.
Program ID: F116
Function: Allows you to select colors for the TDF screens. This program is only
available for PWS.
COLOR PROFILE

COMMAND ==> 1__________________________________________________________________
ENTER COLORS BELOW:

RESTORE
FOREGROUND BACKGROUND BLINKING DEFAULTS
(-15) (-7) (Y/N) (Y)
========== ========== ======== ========
2 PROTECTED NORMAL ===> 8__ 9_ 1_ 11_
3 PROTECTED HIGH ===>
4 UNPROTECTED NORMAL ===>
5 UNPROTECTED HIGH ===>
6 STATUS LINE ===>
7 SCREEN COLOR ===>
.
.
.

1. COMMAND

2. Protected Normal
All literal text that appears on the screen
3. Protected High
Usually the error message field
4. Unprotected Normal
Fields where input can be entered
5. Unprotected High
Fields where input has been entered in error
6. Status Line
Short help message and related fields at bottom of screen
7. Screen Color
Blank areas of the screen
8. Foreground
The color that displays as the foreground for the field type. Valid values are 0
through 15.
9. Background
The color that displays as the background for the field type. Valid values are 0
through 7.
10. Blinking
Specifies if the field should blink or not. Valid values are:
Y
The field should blink
N
The field should not blink
11. Restore defaults
Returns the field type definition to the default and overrides the current color
combinations.
Y
Return the field type to the default definition
N
Leave the field type definition
2.10.2 PWSCOPY Command

This command enables you to copy an ASCII text file into a TDF custom code editor
member. The command format is:
PWSCOPY file-name
or
PWSCOPY
Valid values are:

file-name
The drive, directory, and fully qualified name of the file
*
Allows you to select the file using the File Open Dialog box. After selecting the
file, click OK and the file is copied into the custom code member at the location
specified by the A (After) or B (Before) line command.
2.10.3 PWS Security

PWS includes security to administer the Telon work environment from the TDF. This
allows administrators to control access TDF functions and to various PWS menu items
for three user types:
■ Controller
■ Programmer
■ Analyst
For more information about PWS security, refer to the appropriate chapter in the PWS
Option Administrator Guide.

Chapter 3. Data Administration
Chapter 3. Data Administration 3-1

3.1 Introduction
3.1 Introduction
This chapter discusses data administration, which is Option 2 on the TDF Main menu.
With this option, you can define and maintain the following CA-Telon entities:
■ File group
■ Program specification block (PSB)
■ Database description (DBD)
■ SQL table
■ SQL join
■ VSAM file
■ Sequential file
■ CICS queue
■ CICS journal
This chapter provides technical reference information for the data administrator. Refer
to Data Administration Guide for guidance about using the data administration option.

3.2 Data Administration Menu

Access: On the TDF Main menu, enter 2.
Program ID: D100
Function: Specifies an administration function (definition or maintenance data) to be

performed on a named CA-Telon entity.
This menu allows you to CREATE, UPDATE, PURGE, SHOW, LIST, or CATALOG:
A file group (FG)
A Program Specification Block (PSB)
DL/I Database Description (DL)
An SQL table (TB)
An SQL join (TJ)
A VSAM file (VS)
A sequential file (SQ)
A CICS queue (CQ)
A CICS journal (CJ)
What to consider
■ Not all FUNCTIONs apply to all ITEMs.
■ You must define a DBD before you can use it in a PSB. You define a DBD on
the Create/Update DBD screen.
■ You can define a file group (FG) in the same way as a PSB, except that you can
also reference data sets. PSBs and file groups are defined on the Create/Update
PSB Or File Group screen.
■ You can import PSBs or DBDs from source definitions. To do this, use the
utilities described in Utilities Guide or in the PWS Option Administrator Guide.
■ The CA-Telon data administration function does not interface directly to a data
dictionary. Therefore, you must import information from DBD and PSB source
statements, or directly from the catalog for table definitions.
To import DBD and its PSB source statements, use the import jobs described in
Utilities Guide or in the command files described in the PWS Option
Administrator Guide.
■ To import CA-IDMS/SQL and CA-Datacom/SQL table definitions, use their
respective SQL Extract utilities and the Transport_In utility.
■ Use the CA-Telon data administration function to provide default information to
simplify the programmer's task of creating program definitions.

DATA ADMINISTRATION MENU

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
FUNCTION: 2__ CR-CREATE UP-UPDATE PU-PURGE SH-SHOW LI- LIST

CA-CATLG/DB2
ITEM: 3__ FG-FILE GRP PS-PSB
DL-DLI DBD TB-SQL TBL TJ-SQL JOIN
VS-VSAM SQ-SEQ FILE CQ-CICS QUE CJ-CICS JRNL
NAME: 4__________________________ (QUAL.TBLNAME/TLNNAME FOR SQL ITEMS)

DESC: 5_______________________________________
BASE: 6__________________________ (QUAL.TBLNAME/TLNNAME FOR SQL ITEMS)

(USED ONLY FOR FUNCTION: CR)
RDBMS: 7_______ (INGRES, ORACLE)
(USED ONLY FOR FUNCTION: CR ITEM: TB WITH NO BASE)

1. COMMAND
2. FUNCTION
The function that you will perform. Valid values are:
CR
Create the entity specified in the ITEM field. For this function, NAME and
DESC are required fields.
UP
Create the entity specified in the ITEM field. For this function, NAME is a
required field.
PU
Purge the entity specified in the ITEM field. For this function, NAME is a
required field.
SH
Show the entity specified in the ITEM field. For this function, NAME is a
required field.
LI
List the entity specified in the ITEM field. The list of entries will begin with
the mask value, if any, specified in the NAME field.
CA
List tables in the DB2 catalog to select and import tables from the catalog
into the TDF.
3. ITEM
The type of entity you are defining or maintaining. Valid values are:
FG
File group
PS
Program specification block (PSB)

DL
Database description (DBD)
TB
SQL table or view
TJ
SQL join
VS
VSAM file
SQ
Sequential data set
CQ
CICS queue
CJ
CICS journal
4. NAME
The name of the entity you are defining or maintaining. The name must be one to
eight characters long. However, if you specify the SQL name (qualifier.name)
instead of the CA-Telon name, qualifier can be one to eight characters long and
name can be one to 18 characters long.
Note: The length of CICS transient data (TYPE=TD) queue names is limited to
four characters.
5. DESC
A description of the entity being defined or maintained. This field is for
informational purposes only but is required when the FUNCTION field value is
CR.
6. BASE
The name of an existing entity whose definition you are modifying to create a
new definition. This value is ignored when the FUNCTION field value is not CR.
For SQL, you can specify the CA-Telon-name or qualifier.table.name of an
existing table or join.
7. RDBMS
When creating an Ingres II or Oracle 7 table without using a base, you must
specify either INGRES or ORACLE.

3.3 List Data Administration Information

Access: On the Data Administration menu, enter LI in the FUNCTION field.
Program ID: D401
Function: Lists data administration entities which you can select to manipulate.
LIST DATA ADMINISTRATION INFO

COMMAND ==> 1___________________________________________________________ PAGE 1
NAME RENAME DESCRIPTION USER UPDATE

2 ____3_____ ____4_____ __________________5____________________ __6__ __7___
_ __________ __________ _______________________________________ _____ ______
_ __________ __________ _______________________________________ _____ ______
_ __________ __________ _______________________________________ _____ ______
_ __________ __________ _______________________________________ _____ ______
_ __________ __________ _______________________________________ _____ ______
_ __________ __________ _______________________________________ _____ ______
_ __________ __________ _______________________________________ _____ ______
_ __________ __________ _______________________________________ _____ ______
_ __________ __________ _______________________________________ _____ ______
_ __________ __________ _______________________________________ _____ ______
_ __________ __________ _______________________________________ _____ ______
_ __________ __________ _______________________________________ _____ ______
_ __________ __________ _______________________________________ _____ ______
_ __________ __________ _______________________________________ _____ ______
_ __________ __________ _______________________________________ _____ ______
_ __________ __________ _______________________________________ _____ ______
_ __________ __________ _______________________________________ _____ ______
_ __________ __________ _______________________________________ _____ ______
_ __________ __________ _______________________________________ _____ ______

1. COMMAND
2. FUNCTION
The function to perform on an item. Enter one of the values in the table below in
the first column, to the left of the NAME field for the entity.
Value Function Description

C Copy Copies a member
D Description Changes the description of a member
P Purge Purges a member and confirms the purge
R Rename Renames a member
S Show Allows you to browse a member
U Update Allows you to enter a member in update mode
Z Zap Purges a member without confirming the purge

3. NAME
The name of the entity.
4. RENAME
An additional function being performed on the entity. A value is required if the
value in the FUNCTION field is C or R.
If you rename an entity, you must access it by its new name.
Valid values are listed in the table below with the confirmation message, if any,
that is displayed in the RENAME field after the function is performed.
Value Description Message

C Copies a member *COPIED
D Changes the description of a member *DESC UP
P Purges a member and confirms the purge
R Renames a member *RENAMED
S Allows you to view the member in browse mode
U Allows you to enter a member in update mode *PROCSD
Z Purges a member without confirming the purge *PURGED
5. DESCRIPTION
The description of the entity, used for informational purposes only. The value in
this field is saved only if the value in the FUNCTION field is D.
6. USER
The user or terminal ID that most recently modified the entity. CA-Telon
automatically maintains the value in this field.
7. UPDATE
The date of the last update of the entity. CA-Telon automatically maintains the
value in this field.

3.4 Create/Update DBD

Access: On the Data Administration menu, enter:
■ CR or UP in the FUNCTION field
■ DL in the ITEM field
■ The name of the DBD in the NAME field
■ The description of the DBD in the DESC field
Program ID: D111
Function: Updates IMS database segments.
XXXXXXXX CREATE DBD

COMMAND ==> 1_____________________________________________________ PAGE 1
ACCESS 2 RMNAME 3
SEQ TYPE NAME PARENT/DEVICE MAX LTH SEGMENT KEY LENGTH START
_4_ ___5___ ___6____ ___7____ __8__ ___9____ __1_ __11_
___ _______ ________ ________ _____ ________ _____ _____
___ _______ ________ ________ _____ ________ _____ _____
___ _______ ________ ________ _____ ________ _____ _____
___ _______ ________ ________ _____ ________ _____ _____
___ _______ ________ ________ _____ ________ _____ _____
___ _______ ________ ________ _____ ________ _____ _____
___ _______ ________ ________ _____ ________ _____ _____
___ _______ ________ ________ _____ ________ _____ _____
___ _______ ________ ________ _____ ________ _____ _____
___ _______ ________ ________ _____ ________ _____ _____
___ _______ ________ ________ _____ ________ _____ _____
___ _______ ________ ________ _____ ________ _____ _____
___ _______ ________ ________ _____ ________ _____ _____
___ _______ ________ ________ _____ ________ _____ _____
___ _______ ________ ________ _____ ________ _____ _____
___ _______ ________ ________ _____ ________ _____ _____

1. COMMAND
2. ACCESS
A protected field identifying the access mode that the application uses to read the
databases (for example, HISAM or HDAM). A value is displayed only if the
DBD was imported.
3. RMNAME
A protected field specifying information that CA-Telon uses to manage data in a
fast path DBD or in the root segment of an HDAM database. A value is displayed
only if the DBD was imported into the TDF.
4. SEQ
A sequence number for the segment. You can also enter one of these line
commands in this field:

C Copy a line
CC Copy a block of lines
I Insert a line
Inn Insert nn lines
M Move a line
MM Move a block of lines
R Repeat a line
RR Repeat a block of lines
A Line(s) to insert, copy, or move go after this line
B Line(s) to insert, copy, or move go before this line
D Delete an entry
U Transfer to the Update DBD Segment screen
See 9.6, “Line Commands” on page 9-45 for more information.

5. TYPE
The statement types used by CA-Telon to generate a DBD. Valid values are:
DATA SET
The DATA SET= statement, used to define a data set group in a database.
The value in this field is taken in conjunction with the NAME and DEVICE
field values.
LCHILD
The LCHILD= statement, used to define logical relationships in a logical
database. You must define this field in a physical database or databases.
SEGM
The SEGM= statement, used to define:
■ The segment type (with the NAME field value)
■ The position of the segment in the hierarchy of the database (with the
PARENT field value)
■ The length of the data portion of the segment type (with the MAX LTH
field value)
At least one SEGM= statement must follow a DATA SET= statement. The
SEGM field defines the DBD statement.
6. NAME
The value in this field is:
■ The primary data set in the data set group, when the value in the TYPE field
is DATA SET. The value in this field defines the DD1= value in the DBD
DATA SET statement.
Note: Duplicate names are not allowed in a DBD generation for IMS.

■ The segment name, when the TYPE field is SEGM. The value, taken in
conjunction with the PARENT field value, defines the NAME= value in the
DBD SEGM statement.
7. PARENT/ DEVICE
The value in this field depends on the value in the TYPE field:
■ For EXEC DLI processing, the name of the parent segment for this segment,
field when the value in the TYPE field is SEGM. If this is a root segment,
the PARENT value must be zero or blank. Otherwise, this field must contain
the name of the parent segment. CA-Telon uses the value in this field to
generate the correct DL/I call and to generate the PSB. It defines PARENT=,
a DBD SEGM statement.
■ The device on which you want the data set group stored, when the TYPE
field is DATA SET. The value in this field defines DEVICE=, a DBD DATA
SET statement.
8. MAX LTH
For DL/I path processing, a value to define BYTES=, a DBD SEGM statement,
when the TYPE field is SEGM.
9. SEGMENT KEY
The key field (IMSKEY) for the segment. This value defines the first subfield of
NAME=, a DBD FIELD statement.
Note: For a non-keyed segment, leave this field blank.
10. LENGTH
The number of bytes that the key in the segment occupies. This value defines
BYTES=, a DBD FIELD statement.
11. START
The starting byte position of the key field in the segment. This value defines
START=, a DBD FIELD statement.

3.5 Update DBD Segment

Access: On the Create/Update DBD screen, enter U in the SEQ field next to a DBD
segment.
Program ID: D112
Function: Specifies default information for a segment.
UPDATE DBD: 1_______ SEGM: 2_______

COMMAND ==> 3_____________________________________________________________
OPTIONS ==> SEARCH FIELDS 4 PCB PARMS 5 DLIDSC 6
GENERAL: LABEL 7_______

COPY 8_______ COPYLV1 9 COPYLBL 1____________________________
DLIDSC SEGMENT CMND IMSKEY OP KEY

11 12______ 13______ 14__ 15______ 16 17_____________________

1. UPDATE DBD
A protected field displaying the DBD name specified in the NAME field on the
Data Administration menu.
2. SEGM
A protected field displaying the SEGM name specified in the NAME field of the
Create/Update DBD screen.
3. COMMAND
4. SEARCH FIELDS
Search fields defined for this segment, if the displayed value is a plus sign (+).
To proceed, enter any non-blank value. This transfers you to the List Search
Fields screen.
5. PCB PARMS
The PCB parameters. To select this field, enter a non-blank value. This transfers
you to the Extended Parameter Utility screen, on which you can enter parameters
such as PROCOPT and INDICES. See 3.11, “Update Sensitive Segment” on
page 3-33 for information on PROCOPT and INDICES.

6. DLIDSC
The DLI data search criterion. To proceed, enter any non-blank value. This
transfers you to the Update DLIDSCs For Segment Member screen.
7. LABEL
The default label for the segment name. CA-Telon uses this field when generating
the name of the COBOL paragraph or PL/I procedure that contains the DL/I call.
If you do not specify a value, the default is the name of the segment referenced in
the DBD.
8. COPY
The COBOL COPY member name or PL/I INCLUDE member name that contains
the segment definition.
If you enter a member name, CA-Telon uses the contents of that member for the
layout of the segment, as in this example:
DBSEG TRGEMPL
USAGE INREAD
COPYLBL TRG1-IO-AREA
COPY TRG1IO
If you enter NONE, CA-Telon does not copy a segment definition into the
program, as in this example:
DBSEG TRGEMPL
USAGE INREAD
COPY NONE
Note: NONE is not a valid value for index data sets.
If you do not specify a value, the default is the value of the SEGM field, as in
this example:
DBSEG TRGEMPL
USAGE INREAD
COPY (uses segment name)
For VSAM processing, the member name is the same as the data set name, on the
Create/Update PSB Or File Group screen or the Show/Update Data Set Default
Data screen.
When you use the COPY and COPYLBL fields, if there is more than one segment
of the same name (under different PCBs), you must specify a unique
COPY/COPYLBL combination, as in this example:
DBSEG TRGEMPL
USAGE INREAD
COPY (uses segment name)
9. COPYLV1
A value to specify that the COPY/INCLUDE member for the I/O area of this
segment is to start at the COBOL or PL/I 01 level. Valid values are:

Y
The segment is to start at the COBOL or PL/I 01 level. You must also
specify the COPYLBL field to supply the I/O area for the data access that
CA-Telon generates.
N
CA-Telon generates the 01 and 02 levels and uses the COPY/INCLUDE
member for 03 levels and below.
10. COPYLBL
The name of the COPY or INCLUDE member containing the segment definition.
This value overrides the CA-Telon default IOA-segment-name-SEGMENT.
If the member has the same name as the segment (see the SEGM field), you may
omit this value and CA-Telon will include the member whose name matches the
segment name.
If you enter NONE, no segment definition is copied into the program.
If you have specified Y in the COPYLV1 field and CA-Telon is generating
automatic I/O, a COPYLBL value is required.
If two segments have the same segment name (the default value of DBSEG or
another name that you specify in the LABEL field) and the same COPYLBL,
CA-Telon generates only one I/O area. Thus, for CA-Telon to generate a second
I/O area, specify a unique data item name in the COPYLBL field.
11. (Sequence number)
A protected field displaying sequence numbers.
12. DLIDSC
A protected field identifying the DLI data search criterion (DLIDSC) at this
segment level, used to generate the SSA.
The CA-Telon-reserved names for DLIDSCs are:
■ NONE
■ DFLT
■ QUAL
■ UNQUAL
■ **DFLT**
■ **QUAL**
■ **UNQUAL**
13. SEGMENT
A protected field displaying the value specified in the NAME field on the
14. CMND
A protected field displaying *---.
15. IMSKEY
A protected field displaying the value obtained from the SEGMENT KEY field on
the Create/Update DBD screen. This value defines NAME=, a DBD FIELD
statement.

16. OP
A protected field displaying =. However, if the IMSKEY field is blank, the OP
field is also blank.
17. KEY
The PL/I or COBOL variable name containing the key to this segment.
If inheritance is requested at the key level for this segment in the program
definition, this value is retrieved and suffixed to the inheritance sign (@) in the
program definition. For example, if the value in this field is WK-KEY, the
inherited key in the program definition is @WK-KEY. Refer to Programming
Concepts Guide for more information on inheritance. See also the description of
update field below.
Note: If the IMSKEY field is blank, then this field must also be blank.
18. (Update field)
A value to specify that you are updating the key value. Enter any non-blank
value, except for a plus sign (+), to transfer to a general-purpose screen on which
you can update the KEY value at the lowest segment level (the last line displayed
on this screen).
A plus sign (+) in this field indicates that the value in the KEY field is more than
30 bytes. In this case, the KEY field is protected, and you must enter a non-blank
character in the update field to update the KEY value.

3.6 List Search Fields

■ On the Update DBD Segment screen, enter any non-blank character in the
SEARCH FIELDS field
■ On the Create/Update SSA/Command For DL/I DB/Segment screen, enter any
non-blank character in the U field
Program ID: D115
Function: Maintains as many as 160 IMS database segment search fields.
XXXXXXXX LIST SEARCH FIELDS

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________ Page 1
SEGMENT NAME 2_______ PARENT 3_______ MAX LTH 4____

IMSKEY 5_______ LENGTH 6____ START 7____
KEYPIC 8______________________ TYPE 9__
SRCHFLD NAME LENGTH START TYPE KEYPIC

1__ 11______ 12___ 13___ 14 15______________________

1. COMMAND
2. NAME
A protected field identifying the name of the segment defined on the
3. PARENT
The name of the parent segment for this segment, as specified in the PARENT
field on the Create/Update DBD screen.
If this is a root segment, the PARENT value must be zero. Otherwise, the
PARENT must be the name of a segment previously defined for the same DBD.
CA-Telon uses this field for setting up the correct DL/I call and for generating the
PSB.
4. MAX LTH
For DL/I path processing, a value to define BYTES=, a DBD SEGM statement.
This value was specified in the MAX LTH field on the Create/Update DBD
screen.

5. IMSKEY
The key field for the segment. This value defines the first subfield of NAME=, a
DBD FIELD statement. This value was specified in the SEGMENT KEY field on
the Create/Update DBD screen.
Note: For a non-keyed segment, leave this field blank.
6. LENGTH
The number of bytes that the key in the segment occupies. This value defines
BYTES=, a DBD FIELD statement. This value was specified in the LENGTH
field on the Create/Update DBD screen.
7. START
The starting byte position of the key field in the segment. This value defines
START=, a DBD FIELD statement. This value was specified in the START field
on the Create/Update DBD screen.
8. KEYPIC
The format of the key for the segment. CA-Telon uses this value to define the
VALUE field in the SSA.
If the format of the key for the segment is a character format, do not enter a
value.
If the format of the key for the segment is packed decimal or binary and the key
value to be moved to the SSA is of a different format, the key is converted when
it is moved to the SSA.
The following examples are COBOL entries in the KEYPIC field:
9(5) COMP-3
X(5)
S9(4) COMP
9(8)V9(7)
9. TYPE
The TYPE of data that the search field contains. Valid values are:
X
Hexadecimal
P
Packed
C
Character, alphanumeric, or numeric
F
Binary full-word
H
Binary half-word
10. (Sequence number)
The sequence number of the field. You can also use this field as a select field.
The field is protected until you enter a value in the SRCHFLD NAME field.

11. SRCHFLD NAME

The name of the field used in the segment search argument (SSA) for DL/I
applications.
12. LENGTH
The length of the search field that is used when the SSA is generated.
13. START
The starting position of the search field in the segment.
14. TYPE
The type of data that the search field contains. Valid values are as documented
for the first TYPE field on this screen.
15. KEYPIC
The format of the key for the segment, as documented for the first KEYPIC field
on this screen.

3.7 Update DLIDSCs For Segment Member

Access: On the Update DBD Segment screen, enter any non-blank character in the
DLIDSC field.
Program ID: D116
Function: Lists segment search argument (SSA) information that you can modify.
UPDATE DLIDSCS FOR SEGMENT MEMBER

COMMAND ==> 1__________________________________________SCROLL ===> ___
DBD: 2_______ SEGMENT: 3________
DLIDSC USECNT CMND IMSKEY OP KEY MORE

4_____ 5_____ 6_____ 7___ 8_____ 9__ 1_________________ 11____

1. COMMAND
2. DBD
A protected field identifying the name of the DBD that you are listing.
3. SEGMENT
A protected field identifying the name of the segment that you are listing.
4. (Line command)
The first column of each line, allowing entry of a line command to modify the
associated item(s). Valid values are:
C
Copy a line.
I
Insert a line
R
Repeat a line.
A
Line(s) to insert, copy, or move go after this line.
B
Line(s) to insert, copy, or move go before this line.

D
Delete an entry.
S
Select a DLIDSC for a segment level, or select a user I/O request from
updating the program definition data group. This command is available only
when control has been transferred to this screen from the Update Database
Segment screen or the Update DL/I Detail Data Access screen. This
command increments the use count by 1; use the V line command to check
the use count.
U
Select the line to update an SSA (control is transferred to the Create/Update
SSA/Command For DL/I DB/Segment screen).
V
Verify the program definitions that reference the DLIDSC (control is
transferred to the Verify DLIDSC Count screen and the use count, specified
in the USECNT field, is updated).
Note: Use of this command prevents all other users from updating a program
definition data group until the verify process has completed.

5. DLIDSC
The DLI data search criterion (DLIDSC) at this segment level, used to generate
the SSA for DL/I. To access this field, enter I as a line command.
The first character must be a letter, @, #, or $. You can specify numbers as
subsequent characters. No other special characters are allowed and if specified,
will produce a Generator error.
The value in this field may not match the segment name.
The CA-Telon-reserved names for DLIDSCs are:
■ NONE
■ DFLT
■ QUAL
■ UNQUAL
■ **DFLT**
■ **QUAL**
■ **UNQUAL**
To create a DLIDSC that accesses a secondary index:
1. Enter the I line command.
2. Enter the DLIDSC field value.
3. Update the line.
PROCSEQ and the remaining SSA information are entered on the Create/Update
SSA/Command For DL/I DB/Segment screen.

6. USECNT
A protected field specifying one of the following:
■ The number of times a data group specified in the program definition
references the DLIDSC
■ If the value is 1, a program definition
7. CMND
The SSA command code field for IMS, overriding the default on the segment
CA-Telon generates.
The character you enter is prefixed with an asterisk (*) and suffixed with one to
three hyphens (-) to make a 4-byte code. For example, if you enter D in this field,
CA-Telon generates the SSA command code parameter as:
D--
If you do not specify a value, CA-Telon uses the IMS default *---.
For EXEC DLI, you can use this field as a shorthand method of specifying
qualification options. However, note that EXEC DLI does not support all
command codes.
8. IMSKEY
The name of the key used in qualifying the SSA for the segment. This value
defines the first subfield of NAME=, a DBD FIELD statement.
Note: For an unqualified SSA, leave this field blank.
You can update the value entered here on the Create/Update SSA/Command For
DL/I DB/Segment screen.
9. OP
For DL/I processing, the relational operator for the SSA that CA-Telon generates.
If not specified, the default is >= for BROWSE data access and = for keyed
access.
The valid values for DL/I processing are as follows:
Value Description
= Equal to
>= Greater than or equal to
=> Greater than or equal to
<= Less than or equal to
=> Less than or equal to
> Greater than
< Less than
^= Not equal to

Value Description
=^ Not equal to
Note: The OP field value does not apply to unqualified SSAs; that is, for
BROWSE requests for which there is no starting key value (STBRKEY,
defined on the Create/Update File Segloop screen). If you use the
SCHFLDx fields on the Create/Update File Segloop screen, OP may be
(but need not always be) set to =.
OPCODE Override Rules: The following rules apply to OPCODE overrides:

■ User I/O OPCODE overrides the segment-level OPCODE
■ Segment-level OPCODE overrides the DLIDSC OPCODE in data administration
CA-Telon generates the value of the segment-name-SSA-OPCODE in Working Storage

based on the segment-level OPCODE override.
If you override the OPCODE at the user I/O before the DL/I call in U-100, CA-Telon
moves the overridden OPCODE to xxxx-SSA-OPCODE and resets it to the OPCODE
in Working Storage after the DL/I call.
If the user I/O OPCODE is the same as the segment-level OPCODE, CA-Telon does
not generate MOVE statements for the OPCODE.
10. KEY
The name of the host variable value used for the data access.
Note: The inheritance symbol (@) is not valid because inheritance is not valid at
this level.
11. MORE
A protected field to indicate whether there is more information than is shown on
this line. Possible values are:
+
There is more information than is shown on this line
X
Information about secondary index processing for the DLIDSC
Enter U as a line command on this screen to transfer control to the Create/Update
SSA/Command For DL/I DB/Segment screen and to see the additional
information.

3.8 Create/Update SSA/Command For DL/I DB/Segment

Access: On the Update DLIDSCs For Segment Member screen, enter U as a line
command.
Note: This access is unavailable if you are using only the default DLIDSC.
Therefore, on the Update DLIDSCs For Segment Member screen, first enter I
as a line command to insert another DLIDSC and update it.
Program ID: D118
Function: Creates or updates your SSA definitions, allowing you to specify default
SSA/command information for a segment in a DL/I database. CA-Telon uses this
information to create DLIDSC statements at export time.
UPDATE SSA/COMMAND FOR DL/I SEGMENT

COMMAND ==> 1___________________________________________________________
DBD: 2_______ SEGMENT: 3________ DLIDSC: 4_______ PROCSEQ: 5________
GENERAL: KEYFEED 6________________________

CMDCODE 7___ -OR- PATH 8(Y/N) CURRENT 9 (Y/N) OPTION 1 (F/L)
CONCATK 11 (Y/N) PARENTG 12(Y/N) LOCKED 13 (Y/N)
EX DL/I: VARLTH 14 (Y/N) OFFSET 15___
WHERE/BOOLEAN SSA: BOOL

U IMSKEY OP KEY OP
16 17______ 18 19_______________________________________________________ 2__

1. COMMAND
2. DBD
3. SEGMENT
A protected field identifying the segment that you are listing.
4. DLIDSC
segment level that CA-Telon uses to generate the SSA for DL/I or qualification
options for EXECDLI.
Note: An asterisk (*) is not allowed as a first character in a DLIDSC label.

5. PROCSEQ
The secondary index that is processed for this segment through program definition.
PROCSEQ only allows the parents of LCHILDs in the DBD.
6. KEYFEED
The name of the host variable in which to place the concatenated key that
EXECDLI returns. This field is ignored for DL/I.
7. CMDCODE
The SSA command code field for IMS, overriding the default on the segment
CA-Telon generates.
The character you enter will have a four-byte code consisting of:
■ A prefix of an asterisk (*)
■ A suffix of three hyphens (---)
For example, if you enter D in this field, CA-Telon generates the SSA command
code parameter as:
D--
If you do not specify a value, CA-Telon uses the IMS default *---.
For EXEC DLI, you can use this field as a shorthand method of specifying
qualification options. However, note that EXEC DLI does not support all
command codes.
8. PATH
A value to specify whether CA-Telon is to retrieve the segment referred to by this
DLIDSC as part of a path call. Valid values are:
Y
This SSA is used in standard path call generation (generates the D command
code)
N
This SSA is used in path call processing (generates the N command code)
Blank
This SSA is a standard IMS SSA
9. CURRENT
A value to specify whether CA-Telon is to maintain positions for all levels above
the segment type. Valid values are:
Y
Generate the command code
N
Do not generate the command code
10. OPTION
The command option FIRST or LAST, equivalent to a DL/I call function
command code. Use these command options only with GET and ISRT type
commands. Valid values are:

FIRST
Equivalent to the DL/I F call function command code. Use it to specify the
first occurrence of the segment type that satisfies the rest of the qualification
in the command.
LAST
Equivalent to the DL/I L call function command code. Use it to specify the
last occurrence of the segment type that satisfies the rest of the qualification
in the command.
11. CONCATK
A value to specify whether to use qualification statements or a concatenated key
to qualify an I/O request. This value is equivalent to specifying or not specifying
the C command code. Valid values are:
Y
Generate the C command code
N
Do not generate the C command code
12. PARENTG
The current PARENT level. This is equivalent to specifying the EXEC DLI
SETPARENT option and the command code. Valid values are:
Y
N
13. LOCKED
A value to specify whether the segment is locked by the program, even if the
program does not update the segment. This prevents a segment from being altered
by other programs until the program reaches the next sync point and field is
equivalent to the command code. Valid values are:
Y
N
14. VARLTH
A value to specify whether the segment is variable length.
15. OFFSET
The offset to the parent segment in the I/O area. Specify the offset or the relative
byte length from the beginning of the record. For example, if the key starts on
the fourth byte, enter 3. You can specify this field only when using logical
relationships.
16. U
A value to transfer control to the List Search Fields screen so that you can select a
search field (if, for example, you cannot remember the name of the search field).
You can select a search field and it is updated to this screen.
Enter U or S.

17. IMSKEY
The name of the key used in qualifying the SSA for the segment. This value
defines the first subfield of NAME=, a DBD FIELD statement.
Note: For an unqualified SSA, leave this field blank.
18. OP
If not specified, the default is >= for BROWSE data access and = for keyed
access.
For DL/I processing, valid values are:
Value Description
= Equal to
=> Less than or equal to
> Greater than
< Less than
^= Not equal to
=^ Not equal to
The OP field value does not apply to unqualified SSAs; that is, for BROWSE
requests for which there is no starting key value (STBRKEY, defined on the
Create/Update File Segloop screen). If you use the SCHFLDx fields on the
Create/Update File Segloop screen, OP may be (but need not always be) set to =.
19. KEY
The name of the host variable name whose value is moved to the SSA for the
database call.
20. BOOLOP
The Boolean operator to connect qualification statements. Valid values are:
AND
Dependent AND (changed to & for DL/I processing)
*
Dependent AND (changed to AND for EXEC DL/I processing)
OR
Logical OR (changed to + for DL/I processing)
+
Logical OR (changed to OR for EXEC DL/I processing)
|
Logical OR (changed to OR for EXEC DL/I processing)

3.9 Verify DLIDSC Count
#
Independent AND (not valid for EXEC DL/I processing)


Access: On the Update DLIDSCs For Segment Member screen, enter V as a line
command.
Program ID: D120
Function: Displays the program definitions that use a particular SSA/command.
XXXXXXX VERIFY DLIDSC COUNT

COMMAND ==> 1________________________________________________________________
DBD: 2______ SEGMENT: 3________ DLIDSC: 4________
USED BY USED BY USED BY USED BY USED BY USED BY

5________

1. COMMAND
2. DBD
3. SEGMENT
A protected field identifying the segment that you are listing.
4. DLIDSC
segment level that CA-Telon uses to generate the SSA for DL/I. This value was
specified on the Update DLIDSCs For Segment Member screen.
5. USED BY
A protected field displaying the program definitions that use a particular
SSA/command.

3.10 Create/Update PSB Or File Group

Access: On the Data Administration menu screen, enter:
■ FG or PS in the ITEM field
■ Name in the NAME field
■ Description in the DESCRIPTION field
Program ID: D211
Function: Defines or updates file groups or IMS program specification blocks

(PSBs).
XXXXXXX CREATE/UPDATE PSB, FILE GROUP

COMMAND ==> 1_____________________________________________________ PAGE 1
LANG 2____ COMPAT 3__

TP ONLY
SEQ TYPE NAME PCBNAME KEYLEN PROCSEQ PROCOPT EXP ABC PRT LTERM
_4_ __5____ ___6____ _____7______ _8_ ___9____ __1_ 11 12 13 __14___
___ _______ ________ ____________ ___ ________ ____ _ _ _ ________
___ _______ ________ ____________ ___ ________ ____ _ _ _ ________
___ _______ ________ ____________ ___ ________ ____ _ _ _ ________
___ _______ ________ ____________ ___ ________ ____ _ _ _ ________
___ _______ ________ ____________ ___ ________ ____ _ _ _ ________
___ _______ ________ ____________ ___ ________ ____ _ _ _ ________
___ _______ ________ ____________ ___ ________ ____ _ _ _ ________
___ _______ ________ ____________ ___ ________ ____ _ _ _ ________
___ _______ ________ ____________ ___ ________ ____ _ _ _ ________
___ _______ ________ ____________ ___ ________ ____ _ _ _ ________
___ _______ ________ ____________ ___ ________ ____ _ _ _ ________
___ _______ ________ ____________ ___ ________ ____ _ _ _ ________
___ _______ ________ ____________ ___ ________ ____ _ _ _ ________
___ _______ ________ ____________ ___ ________ ____ _ _ _ ________
___ _______ ________ ____________ ___ ________ ____ _ _ _ ________
___ _______ ________ ____________ ___ ________ ____ _ _ _ ________
___ _______ ________ ____________ ___ ________ ____ _ _ _ ________

Show/Purge screen: You can access the Show/Purge PSBs Or File Groups screen
from the Data Administration menu screen by entering:
■ SH or PU in the FUNCTION field
Alternatively, on the List Data Administration Information screen, you can enter S or
P as a line command for a PSB (/P) or file group (/G).
The Show/Purge PSBs Or File Groups screen fields are the same as the Create/Update
PSB Or File Group screen fields.

1. COMMAND
2. LANG
The default language option (informational purposes only). Valid values are:
■ COBOL
■ COB
■ PLI
■ PL/I
3. COMPAT
A value to specify whether the I/O PCB is included when the PSB is added to the
data group with DGADD from the Create/Update Data Group screen. Valid
values are:
Yes
The PSB is treated as if it were an I/O PCB.
No
(Default) The PSB has an I/O PCB added when in a BMP or MSG region.
If the DBMS field is equal to EXEC DLI, you must specify GENPCBS=N. This
means that you are responsible for defining all of the PCBs, including the I/O
PCB. You should define the I/O PCB as IO-PCB (or IO_PCB for PLI) to avoid
compile errors.
4. SEQ
An edit field. Valid editor commands are:
C
Copy a line
CC
Copy a block of lines
I
Insert a line
II
Insert nn lines
M
Move a line
MM
Move a block of lines
R
Repeat a line
RR
Repeat a block of lines
A
Line(s) to insert, copy, or move go after this line
B
Line(s) to insert, copy, or move go before this line
D
Delete an entry

U
Select the line to update a database
If you enter U, CA-Telon transfers control to:
■ The Update Sensitive Segment screen, if TYPE is DB
■ The Update Sensitive TLNROWs screen, if TYPE is SQL or TABLE
5. TYPE
The type of program control block (PCB) or other item being specified in the PSB
or file group. When specifying items for a PSB, valid values are :
TP or TPPCB
IMS teleprocessing PCB. Generates a CA-Telon TPPCB statement. Required
for all alternate PCBs.
GSAM
IMS database access. Required for all GSAM database PCBs.
DB or Database
IMS and DL/I database access. Required for all DL/I database PCBs.
When specifying a file group, valid values are:
TP or TPPCB
IMS teleprocessing PCB. Generates a CA-Telon TPPCB statement. Required
for all alternate PCBs.
GSAM
IMS database access. Required for all GSAM database PCBs.
DB or Database
IMS and DL/I database access. Required for all DL/I database PCBs.
DS or Data Set
CICS or batch VSAM file access, or batch sequential file access.
SQL
SQL tables.
TABLE
SQL tables.
CQ
CICS temporary storage or transient data queues.
QUEUE
CICS temporary storage or transient data queues.
CJ
CICS journals.
JOURNAL
CICS journals.
6. NAME
The name of the item in the PSB or file group. The tables below show how to
determine the name:
Item Name
PCB DBDNAME associated with this PCB

Item Name
VSAM or sequential file DDNAME associated with the file
SQL table The TLNNAME associated with the table
CICS queue or journal The name assigned when the queue or journal is defined
to the TDF
Option PCB Description

Type
Name Alternate The destination of the message or transaction code
Database The DBD used as the primary source of the database
segments
GSAM
The GSAM database PCB
Type Alternate The logical terminal name
7. PCBNAME
The CA-Telon COBOL name used to access this PCB.
CA-Telon generates the PCB name by suffixing the characters that you specify in
this field with -PCB. If you do not enter a value in this field, CA-Telon generates
the name dbd-name-PCB, where dbd-name is the value in the NAME field.
For example, if the NAME value is GCPVM2T and no value is specified in the
PCBNAME field, the PCB name in the generated programs is GCPVM2T-PCB.
However, if the value in the PCBNAME field is PROVIDER, the PCB name is
PROVIDER-PCB.
8. KEYLEN
The number of bytes in the PCB key feedback area. The value in this field is
specified in KEYLEN=, a PCB statement.
Note: When no information is available in the data group, the default value for
KEYLEN is 100.
9. PROCSEQ
The name of the secondary index used to process the database named in the PCB
statement's DBDNAME operand. The value in this field is specified in
PROCSEQ=, a PCB statement.
10. PROCOPT
The DB processing options. This field is valid only when the value in the TYPE
field is DB or GSAM. The value in this field is specified in PROCOPT=, a PCB
statement.
For more information about the DB processing options, refer to documentation of
IMS utilities.

11. EXP
The setting of the EXPRESS value in the PCB that CA-Telon generates, to
indicate whether the PCB processes a message if an application abends. This field
is valid only for teleprocessing PCBs. Valid values are:
Y
Messages from the alternate PCB are sent if an ABEND occurs
N
Messages from the alternate PCB are backed out if an ABEND occurs
The default value depends upon the value of the ABC field: if the ABC value is
Y, the EXP value defaults to Y; otherwise, the default value is N.
12. ABC
A setting to indicate that the PCB that CA-Telon generates replaces CA-Telon's
XFER-PCB in calls to the CA-Telon ABEND handling routine. This field is valid
only for teleprocessing PCBs. Valid values are:
Y
(Default) The PCB that CA-Telon generates replaces CA-Telon's XFER-PCB
N
CA-Telon uses the XFER-PCB
13. PRT (PRINT)
A value to specify whether the REPORT subroutine uses this PCB. If you do not
code this field, then the print subroutine uses the XFER-PCB. This field is valid
only for teleprocessing PCBs. Valid values are:
Y
The PCB that CA-Telon generates replaces CA-Telon's XFER-PCB.
N
(Default) CA-Telon uses the XFER-PCB.
14. LTERM
The destination for messages sent using this PCB. The value in this field is
specified in LTERM=, a PCB statement.
Valid values include any IMS transaction code and any logical terminal name
defined to IMS. If not specified, the destination for the PCB is modifiable in the
program.

3.11 Update Sensitive Segment

Access: On the Create/Update PSB Or File Group screen, enter U in the SEQ field
for databases.
Program ID: D215
Function: Updates values used to generate the SENSEG statement.
The PSB authorizes which sensitive statements you can view.
XXXXXXX UPDATE SENSITIVE SEG

COMMAND ==> 1_____________________________________________________ PAGE 1
PCBNAME 2 DBNAME 3
SEQ NAME LABEL PROCOPT INDICES

_4_ _5__ __6__ ___7__ ___8____________________________________________
___ ____ _____ ______ ________________________________________________
___ ____ _____ ______ ________________________________________________
___ ____ _____ ______ ________________________________________________
___ ____ _____ ______ ________________________________________________
___ ____ _____ ______ ________________________________________________
___ ____ _____ ______ ________________________________________________
___ ____ _____ ______ ________________________________________________
___ ____ _____ ______ ________________________________________________
___ ____ _____ ______ ________________________________________________
___ ____ _____ ______ ________________________________________________
___ ____ _____ ______ ________________________________________________
___ ____ _____ ______ ________________________________________________
___ ____ _____ ______ ________________________________________________
___ ____ _____ ______ ________________________________________________
___ ____ _____ ______ ________________________________________________
___ ____ _____ ______ ________________________________________________
___ ____ _____ ______ ________________________________________________

1. COMMAND
You can also enter the INIT command to reinitialize all segment characteristics
for the database. Even if only one segment is displayed on this screen, INIT
reinitializes all of the segments on the database.
2. PCBNAME
A protected field specifying the CA-Telon COBOL name used to access this PCB.
This value was defined on the Create/Update PSB Or File Group screen in the
PCBNAME field or the NAME field.
3. DBNAME
A protected field specifying the field keyword for various types of PCBs. This
value was defined on the Create/Update PSB Or File Group screen in the NAME
field.
4. SEQ
A sequential number for the sensitive segment. You can also enter the D line
command to delete the line.

5. NAME
The name of the sensitive segment. This value is specified in NAME=, a
SENSEG statement.
6. LABEL
The default label for the segment name. CA-Telon uses this field when generating
the name of the COBOL paragraph or PL/I procedure that contains the DL/I call.
If you do not specify a value, the default is the name of the segment referenced in
the DBD.
7. PROCOPT
The PROCOPT value to include in the corresponding SENSEG statement for the
PSB that CA-Telon generates.
If you do not specify a value, CA-Telon generates the PCB PROCOPT field based
on data access. For example, an OUTREAD data access causes CA-Telon to
generate a PROCOPT of G. The value in this field does not affect the program
that CA-Telon generates.
8. INDICES
The value to include in the corresponding SENSEG INDICES field that CA-Telon
generates for the PSB. If you do not specify a value, CA-Telon does not generate
a value for the INDICES field.

3.12 Update Sensitive TLNROWs

Access: In the Create/Update PSB Or File Group screen, enter U in the SEQ field
for tables.
Program ID: D216
Function: Deletes sensitive TLNROWs, causing CA-Telon to delete the TLNROW

from the table definition.
XXXXXXX UPDATE SENSITIVE TLNROWS

COMMAND ==> 1_____________________________________________________ PAGE 1
FGNAME 2__________ TBLNAME 3_______
DELETE OR MOVE TLNROWS TO CREATE PROPER SENSITIVITY

SEQ TLNROW C-CNT COLUMNS DEFINED
_4_ ___5____ _6_ __7_________________________________________________________ _

1. COMMAND
You can also enter INIT to reinitialize all TLNROW characteristics for the
database. Even if only one TLNROW is displayed on this screen, INIT
reinitializes all of the TLNROWs on the database.
2. FGNAME
A protected field displaying the file group name specified in the NAME field on
the Data Administration menu.
3. TBLNAME
A protected field containing the TLNNAME for the table.
4. SEQ
A field in which you enter D to delete an entry from the table. CA-Telon
eliminates the TLNROW from the table definition.
5. TLNROW
A protected field identifying the CA-Telon defined rows in your table. For each
row, there are potentially multiple columns.
Note: The first row must have the name in the LABEL field on the
Create/Update SQL Tables/TLNROWs screen.

6. C-CNT
A protected field specifying the number of columns in the row.
7. COLUMNS DEFINED
A protected field identifying the columns defined for this TLNROW.
If a plus sign (+) is displayed to the right of this field, there is more column
information for this TLNROW. To view the information, access the

3.13 Show/Update Data Set Default Data

Access: Access this screen in one of these ways:
■ On the List Data Administration Information screen, enter S or U as a line
command
■ On the Data Administration menu, enter:
– SH or UP in the FUNCTION field
– VS or SQ in the ITEM field
– Name in the NAME field
– Description in the DESCRIPTION field
Program ID: D114
Function: Specifies data set record default information for a file group that includes
this data set for a program definition CA-Telon uses to initialize the respective data set
information in a data group.
XXXXXXX UPDATE DATA SET RECORD DEFAULTS

COMMAND ==> 1_____________________________________________________ PAGE 1
DATA SET 2_______ ACCESS 3___
GENERAL: LRECL 4____ _____ (MIN MAX) BLKSIZE 5____ COMMIT 6____
OPEN 7______ (INPUT/OUTPUT/I-O/EXTEND/UPDATE)
RECORD: LABEL 8_______

COPY 9_______
COPYLV1 1 (Y/N)
COPYLBL 11_____________________________
COBDIV 12 (FD/WS)
COBVSKY 13____________________________________________________________
I/O:
KEY 14____________________________________________________________
KEYLEN 15_
OPCODE 16___
VSAM: TYPE 17__ (KSDS/RRDS/ESDS) ACCMODE 18_ (DYN/RAN/SEQ/DIR)

OPTLIST 19____________________________________________________________
RECLTH 2____________________________________________________________
GENKEYL 21____________________________ INDEXOF 22______ REUSE 23(Y/N)

Note: Fields 14 through 23 are displayed only if you enter VS (VSAM) in the
ITEM field.
1. COMMAND
2. DATA SET
A protected field identifying the data set to which you are specifying default
information.

3. ACCESS
The type of access for the data set. Valid values are VSAM and SEQ
(sequential).
4. LRECL
The length (in bytes) of the logical record for the data set. For variable-length
files, enter the minimum length in the first portion of the field (MIN) and the
maximum length in the second portion of the field (MAX). For fixed length files,
either leave MAX blank or enter the same value as you do in MIN.
5. BLKSIZE
The blocking factor (in bytes) of the data set. If you do not specify a value, you
must specify the blocking factor in the JCL.
6. COMMIT
refer to U$TNAS4. for more information.
7. OPEN
The way in which CA-Telon automatically opens the data set at program
initialization. Valid values are:
■ INPUT
■ OUTPUT
■ I/O (VSAM only)
■ EXTEND
■ UPDATE
At program termination, CA-Telon closes any files automatically opened at
program initialization.
8. LABEL
A replacement for the name of this data set in the host variable names that
CA-Telon generates.
9. COPY
The COBOL COPY or PL/I INCLUDE member name that contains the record
layout. Enter either a member name or NONE in this field.
CA-Telon uses the contents of the member for the layout of the records. If you
enter NONE, CA-Telon does not copy a record layout member into the program.
If the COPY or INCLUDE member has the same name as the record, you need
not specify a value in this field.
Note: The COPY field is not valid for indexes.
10. COPYLV1
A value to specify whether or not the COPY/INCLUDE member for the I/O area
of this record starts at the COBOL or PL/I 01 level. Valid values are:
Y
The COPY or INCLUDE member is included in its entirety at the COBOL or
PL/I 01 level. You must also specify the COPYLBL field to supply the I/O
area for the data set calls that CA-Telon generates.

N
CA-Telon generates the 01 and 02 levels and uses the COPY or INCLUDE
11. COPYLBL
The COBOL or PL/I data item name of the group level (for example, an 01 field
and its subordinates) for the segment copy definition. For example:
01 TRG1-IO-AREA
This value overrides the default I/O area IOA-record-name-SEGMENT.
If two records have the same record name (the default value of DBSEG or some
other name that you specify in the LABEL field) and the same COPYLBL value,
CA-Telon generates only one I/O area. Thus, for CA-Telon to generate a second
I/O area, specify a unique data item name in the COPYLBL field.
If you enter Y in the COPYLV1 field and CA-Telon is generating automatic I/O,
a COPYLBL value is required.
12. COBDIV
The section of the COBOL program in which to copy the record layout for the
data set. The definition is to begin at level 03 or higher and will have a 02 level
of 02 IOA-record-name-SEGMENT generated above it.
If you do not specify a value, CA-Telon copies the record layout into the COBOL
file definition for the data set. If you code Working Storage, the record layout
appears in the IO-AREA of the program. This value in this field is valid only on
batch programs and on RECORD statements referencing a data set. Refer to
Programming Concepts Guide for information on RECORD statements.
13. COBVSKY
The data name of the VSAM KSDS or RRDS key for the file.
For a VSAM KSDS, you must define the key for the file in the KEY field. For a
VSAM RRDS, the data name must specify an unsigned integer defined in the
Working Storage of the COBOL program.
Note: Since CA-Telon does not generate the relative key, you must define it.
COBOL uses this variable-keyed access to VSAM files. The value in this field is
valid only in batch programs and on RECORD statements referencing a VSAM
key-sequenced or relative data set.
To specify that the KSDS alternate key (key on a data set using the INDEXOF
field value) does not have to be a unique data set, enter DUPLICATE after the
data name.
14. KEY
The PL/I or COBOL variable names containing the key to a record. If inheritance
is requested, data access (user I/O) uses the variable name to identify a record that
it retrieves.
Refer to Programming Concepts Guide for information on inheritance.

15. KEYLEN
The length of the RID (Record Identification) field.
16. OPCODE
(DL/I processing.) The OPCODE value for VSAM access. Default values are >=
for BROWSE segments and = for all others.
17. TYPE
The type of access for the data set. Valid values are:
KSDS
(Default) VSAM key-sequenced data set
RRDS
VSAM relative data set
RELATIVE
VSAM relative data set
ESDS
VSAM entry-sequenced data set
18. ACCMODE
Access to this type of data set. Valid values are:
DYN
(Default) VSAM dynamic access
RAN
VSAM random access
SEQ
VSAM sequential access
DIR
VSAM direct access
19. OPTLIST
(VSAM processing only.) Options on CICS data sets for command level calls.
Valid values are:
■ RRN
■ SEGSET
■ SEGSETALL
■ SYSID
■ MASSINSERT
■ DEBKEY
■ DEBREC
■ UPDATE
You can specify one or more of these options on the SEGMENT and all user exec
data access (READ, UPDATE, CREATE, and DELETE). Separate each option
with a comma.
Values that you code on the SEGMENT statement are carried down to user exec
specifications if you do not specify an OPTLIST value on the user exec data
access. Values that you specify that are not valid for a particular command level
verb (for example, READ, WRITE, and STARTBR) are automatically removed
from any calls using that verb. For example, if MASSINSERT is specified as an
option on the RECORD statement or user exec data access, it appears only if the

EXEC CICS WRITE command is generated for that segment in the CICS
program.
You can specify literal values for the SEGSET and SYSID options by enclosing
the literal value in double quotes. For example:
OPTLIST=(RRN,SYSID("SYSA"))
20. RECLTH
(VSAM processing of variable-length records only.) The maximum length of each
record on the file, as follows:
Record-length
Maximum record length, specified as either an integer or the name of a
COBOL or PL/I variable that contains the key-length value. This value is
used when reading or writing the VSAM record. Any rewrite operations are
processed using the current length of the record being updated (as determined
by the read).
Read-length, rewrite-length
Maximum record length during a read and subsequent update, respectively.
Each value can be specified as an integer or the name of a COBOL or PL/I
variable that contains the key-length value. Read-length is used for all
automatic read EXEC CICS calls for the record. Rewrite-length is used as
the maximum length of the updated record. This specification is applicable for
UPDATE processing only (i.e., usage is UPDATE).
If you do not enter a value for this field, CA-Telon uses the value from the
RECORD statement.
Note: The length that you use in a read operation for a variable-length record
must be at least as large as the actual record retrieved. If not, a CICS
AEIV (LENGERR) ABEND results.
21. GENKEYL
(VSAM processing only.) The length of the generic key used for the access. This
value can be an integer or the name of a COBOL or PL/I variable that contains
the key-length value.
If you do not specify a value, CA-Telon assumes that the access uses the full key
length; it does not use the value from the RECORD statement.
22. INDEXOF
A value to specify that this data set is the index of another data set. It must
directly follow the indexed data set on the Create/Update SSA/Command For DL/I
DB/Segment screen.

23. REUSE
A value to specify whether I/O should start at the beginning or end of a data set
that is opened to output.
Valid values are:
Y
I/O starts at the beginning of the data set
N
I/O starts at the end of the data set if any data already exists

3.14 Update CICS Queue Default Data

■ CQ in the ITEM field
Program ID: D11Q
Function: Collects data for a queue's record definition at a global (data

administration) level. Queues defined here can subsequently be added to the data
groups of CICS screen and nonterminal definitions with the DGADD command.
Note: Queues that are not defined in data administration can be created directly in a
data group by using the DGADD command. They are added with skeletal
information which you can then modify.

UPDATE CICS QUEUE DEFAULT DATA
COMMAND==> 1____________________________________________________________________
CQNAME 2______
GENERAL: TYPE 3_ (TS/TD) AUX/MAIN 4 (A/M)

LRECL 5___
SYSID 6________

COPY 8_______
COPYLV1 9 (Y/N) COPYLBL 1_______________________________

1. COMMAND
See 9.5, “Primary Commands” on page 9-13.
2. CQNAME
A protected field displaying the default queue name to identify this queue to
CICS. The value in this field was specified in the NAME field on the Data
Administration menu.
This value is the default for all program definitions that reference this queue. You
can override it at the data group record level by using the variable QUELBL.

You cannot override it at the program definition level (that is, on the Update CICS
Queue Record screen).
3. TYPE
The type of CICS queue. Valid values are:
TS
Temporary storage
TD
Transient data
cannot override it at the program definition level.
4. AUX/MAIN
(Temporary storage queues only.) The type of storage to which this queue should
be written. Valid values are:
A
(Default) Auxiliary storage
M
Main storage
cannot override it at the program definition level.
5. LRECL
The length (in bytes) of this queue's entries. This value is required if the
LTHOPT value specified on the Update CICS Queue Record screen is Y and the
value in the TYPE field is TS.
can override it at the program definition level on the Update CICS Queue Record
screen.
6. SYSID
The system ID to use when CA-Telon accesses this queue.
A value is not required, but if you specify one, you must also specify LTHOPT
and LRECL values on the Update CICS Queue Record screen.
cannot modify it at the program definition level.
The variable loaded with SYSID is one of the following:

■ SYSWK-cqname-QUEUE-SYSID (COBOL) or
■ SYSWK_cqname_QUEUE_SYSID (PL/I), where cqname is the value of the
CQNAME field.
7. LABEL
A replacement for the name of the CICS queue in the user exec (U-100)
paragraph name that CA-Telon generates for this queue.

screen.
8. COPY
The COBOL COPY or PL/I INCLUDE member name that contains the queue
record layout.
If you do not specify a value, programs that access this queue will
COPY/INCLUDE a member using the CQNAME value. If you enter NONE,
CA-Telon does not generate a COPY or INCLUDE statement for this queue.
This value is inherited by all program definitions that reference this queue. You
screen.
9. COPYLV1
A value to specify whether the COBOL COPY or PL/I INCLUDE member that
defines the layout of this queue record begins with a 01-level data item. Valid
values are:
Y
The COPY or INCLUDE begins with a 01-level data item (for example, 01
TRG1-IO-AREA)
N
(Default) The COPY or INCLUDE begins with a data item of level 03 or
higher
screen.
10. COPYLBL
The COBOL or PL/I group-level variable name for the CICS queue accesses.
This value overrides the FROM/INTO data area used in all I/O generated for this
CICS queue. For example, if the data area for this queue begins with the COBOL
variable 01 TRG1-IO-AREA, the COPYLBL value must be TRG1-IO-AREA.
screen.

3.15 Update CICS Journal Default Data

■ CJ in the ITEM field
Program ID: D11J
Function: Collects data for a journal's record definition at a global (data

administration) level. Journals defined here can subsequently be added into the data
groups of CICS screen and nonterminal definitions with the DGADD command.
Note: Journals not defined in data administration can also be created directly in a
data group by using the DGADD command. Journals are created with default
initial values which you can then modify.
UPDATE CICS JOURNAL DEFAULT DATA

COMMAND ==> 1___________________________________________________________________
CJNAME 2_______
GENERAL: JFILEID 3_ (1 - 99)

JTYPEID 4_
LRECL 5___

COPY 7_______
COPYLV1 8 (Y/N) COPYLBL 9__________________________________

1. COMMAND
2. CJNAME
A protected field displaying the name of this CICS journal definition. The value
in this field was specified in the NAME field on the Data Administration menu.
This value is the default in all program definitions that reference this CICS
journal. You cannot override it at the program definition level.

Note: If the journal is not defined in data administration, you can specify during
DGADD any CJNAME value at the program level that is not defined in
TDF data administration.
3. JFILEID
Journal file ID. Valid values in CICS are 02 through 99. (01 is reserved by
CICS for the system log.)
This value is the default in the program definitions that reference this CICS
journal. You cannot modify it at the program level if the journal is defined to
data administration.
4. JTYPEID
Two characters used by CICS to identify the origin of this journal record.
journal. You cannot modify it at the program level if the journal is defined to
data administration.
5. LRECL
The maximum length (in bytes) of the user data in this journal's entries. The total
length is the sum of the prefix length (if any) and the data length. The Generator
assigns this value to the default journal length variable,
SYSWK-journal-name-JOURNAL-LENGTH, or its user-defined override.
journal. You can modify it at the program level on the Update CICS Journal
Record screen.
6. LABEL
A replacement for the CJNAME value in the user exec (U-100) paragraph names
that CA-Telon generates for this journal.
journal. You can modify it at the program level on the Update CICS Journal
Record screen.
7. COPY
The COBOL COPY or PL/I INCLUDE member name that contains the journal
record layout. If you do not specify a value, programs that access this journal use
the value in the CJNAME field in a COPY or INCLUDE statement. If you enter
NONE, CA-Telon does not generate a COPY or INCLUDE statement.
This value is inherited by all program definitions that reference this CICS journal.
You can modify it at the program level on the Update CICS Journal Record
screen.
8. COPYLV1
A value to specify whether the COBOL COPY or PL/I INCLUDE member that
defines the layout of this journal record begins with a 01-level data item. Valid
values are:
Y
TRG1-IO-AREA)

N
(Default) The COPY or INCLUDE begins with a data item of level 03 or
higher
can override it at the program definition level on the Update CICS Journal Record
screen.
9. COPYLBL
The COBOL or PL/I group-level variable name for the CICS journal accesses.
This value overrides the FROM/TO data area used in all I/O generated for this
CICS journal.
For example, if the data area for this journal begins with the COBOL variable 01
JOURNAL-SAVE, the COPYLBL value must be JOURNAL-SAVE.
This value is inherited by all program definitions that reference this CICS journal.
You can override it at the program definition level on the Update CICS Journal
Record screen.

3.16 Catalog/Import DB2 Tables

■ CA in the FUNCTION field
■ D2 in the ITEM field
Program ID: D411
Function: Imports DB2 tables or views into the TDF.
Refer to Utilities Guide for more information on importing.
XXXXXXX CATALOG/IMPORT DB2 TABLES

COMMAND ==> 1_____________________________________________________ PAGE 1
SELECT THE DB2 TABLES TO BE IMPORTED INTO THE TDF

QUAL TABLENAME COLS TLN TLNNAME USERID UPDATE
2 3_______ 4_________________ 5__ 6 7_______ 8_______ 9_______ 1

1. COMMAND
2. (Type of import)
The type of import to perform. Valid values are:
I
Import into the TDF only if the table was not previously imported. The
message *DUP - USE O/A appears if you try to import a previously imported
table.
O
Import into the TDF whether or not the table was previously defined to the
TDF. If the table exists in the TDF, overlay existing data with imported data.

A
Import this table's catalog information as one or more additional TLNROWs
to the table specified in the TLNNAME field. If the TLNNAME is blank,
this table's current catalog information is added as additional TLNROW to its
existing TDF information.
3. QUAL
A protected field identifying the table name qualifier.
4. TABLENAME
A protected field identifying the name of the table. CA-Telon extracts this table
from the catalog.
5. COLS
A protected field identifying the number of columns in the table. CA-Telon
extracts this table from the catalog.
6. TLN
A protected field indicating whether the table has been imported into the TDF.
Possible values are:
Y
The table has been imported
N
The table was not imported
7. TLNNAME
The unique CA-Telon name for the table or join used by the TDF and Generator
to construct host variable names. The default is the first eight characters of the
table name.
On an ADD request, this value specifies the table being extended.
8. USERID
A protected field identifying the user who imported the table.
9. UPDATE
A protected field identifying the date of the most recent update or import.
10. (Message area)
A protected field displaying any error condition that occurs during an import or
displaying *IMPORT OK when the import is successful.

3.17 List SQL Tables/Joins

■ LI in the FUNCTION field
■ TB in the ITEM field
Program ID: D402
Function: Lists SQL tables and views or SQL joins that have been imported into
the TDF.
LIST SQL TABLES

COMMAND ==> 1_____________________________________________________ PAGE 1
SQL QUAL.NAME DESCRIPTION TLNNAME DB

2_ 3_______________________ 4_____________________________________ 5________ 6_

1. COMMAND
2. (Select field)
Use this column to enter these commands:
C
Copy
R
Rename
U
Update

Z
Zap (unconfirmed delete)
Note: You may zap multiple tables at one time. The other commands can be
performed on only one table at a time.
3. SQL QUAL.NAME
A protected field identifying the qualifier and table name.
4. DESCRIPTION
A protected field displaying a description of the table.
5. TLNNAME
A protected field identifying the unique name for the table or join used by
CA-Telon to construct the names of host variables that it generates.
6. DB
A protected field indicating the SQL type. These are the following values:
D2
DB2 family (DB2, SQL/400, SQL/DS, XDB)
DC
CA-Datacom/SQL
ID
CA-IDMS/SQL
IN
Ingres II
OR
Oracle 7

3.18 Create/Update SQL Tables/TLNROWs

You can also reach these screens by entering U as a line command on the List SQL
Tables/Joins screen.
Program ID
D141 (SQLs other than CA-IDMS or CA-Datacom/SQL)
D151 (CA-IDMS/SQL or CA-Datacom/SQL, discussed in the section following
this one)
D161 (Ingres II or Oracle 7, discussed in the section following this one)
Function: Appends CA-Telon fields to an existing SQL table definition that has
been imported from the SQL catalog into the TDF.
Note: If you create a table, the table is defined only in the TDF. All SQL tables
must be created in the host SQL environment.
You can then specify additional parameters to enhance CA-Telon's capability to

generate the COBOL or PL/I code that you want. Use this screen to specify these
additional parameters.
In the screen display below, QUAL.TBLNAME refers to the full table name, including
qualifier (QUAL) and name (NAME). SIZE indicates the total number of lines
contained in the list of column names.
The Create/Update SQL Table/TLNROWs screen for SQLs other than CA-IDMS,
CA-Datacom, Ingres II, or Oracle 7 is shown below.

UPDATE SQL TABLE QUAL.TBLNAME SIZE

COMMAND ===> 1____________________________________________ SCROLL ===> ____
TLNNAME 2_______ DESCR 3_______________________________________ SYNONYM 4 Y/N
DCLCOPY 5_______ DCLLBL 6_____________________________ DCLRDEF 7 Y/N
COPY 8_______ COPYLBL 9_____________________________ COPYLV1 1Y/N
COLUMN NAME ALIAS KY/AC TYPE LTH/DEC ^NU

TOP OF DATA
11____ 12_______________ 13____________________________ 14 15 16 17 18 19

Show/Purge screen: You can access the Show/Purge SQL Tables/TLNROWs
(D147) screen, the Show/Purge CA-IDMS/CA-Datacom SQL Tables/TLNROWs
(D157) screen, or the Show/Purge Ingres II/Oracle SQL Tables/TLNROWs (D167)
screen from the Data Administration menu by entering:
■ TB in the item field
Alternatively, on the List SQL Tables/Joins screen, you can enter S or P as a line
command for the desired table.
The Show/Purge screen fields are the same as those found in the Create/Update
screens for these tables, except that they are all protected in the Show/Purge screen.
1. COMMAND
2. TLNNAME
The CA-Telon name for the table, used to construct the names generated for such
host variables as paging keys and not-null indicators.
The default value is the value in the DCLCOPY field.
The TLNNAME must be unique for all Tables in the TDF regardless of the type
(SQL or CA-IDMS/SQL or CA-Datacom/SQL) of table.
This parameter can be the same name as the name you specify for the DCLCOPY
parameter, described later in this section. You should use a different name for the
TLNNAME if the DCLCOPY name is encoded and you want a more meaningful
name for the variable names that CA-Telon generates.
3. DESCR
A catalog description of the table, for informational purposes only. If you do not
specify a value in this field, CA-Telon displays the default description provided by
the import method.

4. SYNONYM
(SQL Table) Specifies whether CA-Telon is to generate the qualifier for the table.
Valid values are:
Y
CA-Telon leaves the qualifier for the table blank, with appropriate processing
based on the synonyms specified outside the TDF environment
N
CA-Telon generates the qualifier for the table
5. DCLCOPY
The name that CA-Telon gives in an EXEC SQL INCLUDE. For DB2, it is the
SQL DCLGEN COPY member name. If you are always going to specify the
INCLUDE in custom code work areas, enter NONE in this field.
CA-Telon requires you to enter a value in this field.
6. DCLLBL
The name for the COBOL or PL/I structure that the DCLGEN produces for this
table. If you do not enter a value, CA-Telon uses the default structure name (the
table name is prefixed by DCL).
7. DCLRDEF
A value to specify whether CA-Telon is to redefine the DCLGEN INCLUDE
structure with the COPY or INCLUDE member that you specify in the COPY
field. Valid values are:
Y
Redefine the DCLGEN INCLUDE structure with the COPY member that you
specify.
N
(Default) Do not redefine the DCLGEN INCLUDE structure. CA-Telon
copies the COPY or INCLUDE member into Working Storage.
8. COPY
The COPY/INCLUDE member that CA-Telon is to copy into Working Storage for
this table at generation time.
This COPY or INCLUDE member name is the member name for the ALIASes.
For DB2 Tables, it is not a DB2 INCLUDE member.
To prevent the copy, enter NONE.
9. COPYLBL
The COBOL data item name of the group level for the Table I/O area copy
definition (for example, 01 TRG-IO-AREA). The default I/O area in all table
calls is IOA-TLNNAME-SEGMENT.
See 3.5, “Update DBD Segment” on page 3-11 for more information on
COPYLBL.
10. COPYLV1
A value that specifies whether the COBOL COPY or PL/I INCLUDE member
identified in the COPY field begins with a 01-level data item. Valid values are:

Y
TRG1-IO-AREA)
N
(Default) The COPY or INCLUDE begins with a data item of level 03
11. (Line command)
A field in which you can enter one of these line commands:
C Copy a line
I Insert a line
Inn Insert nn lines
IS(n) Insert n lines for you to enter the command
M Move a line
R Repeat a line
D Delete an entry.

12. COLUMN NAME
Identifies the name of the column in the table or the start of a TLNROW (a row
in a CA-Telon-imported table) which redefines the columns of the table. You can
insert a TLNROW by entering a hyphen (-) for this parameter.
Although you can use this parameter to specify the name of a column in the table,
to minimize keying errors, Computer Associates recommends that you copy the
columns for a TLNROW from the original set of columns.
If desired, you can delete extra columns from the TLNROW.
The literal TLNROW-- identifies a TLNROW line. The TLNROW name is the
value in the ALIAS field for SQL tables. CA-Telon requires that the name of the
first TLNROW match the TLNNAME value.
13. ALIAS
This field can contain one of the following:
■ An I/O area or host variable name for the column. CA-Telon uses this I/O
area or host variable name in place of the column name for the generated I/O.

■ The name of the TLNROW that you are defining. CA-Telon uses the name of
a TLNROW in the generated I/O procedure or paragraph names.
■ An SQL Special register: CURRENT TIME, CURRENT DATE, or
CURRENT TIMESTAMP.
14. KY
A value to specify whether this column is involved in generated SQL I/O WHERE
conditions. Valid values are:
Y
Declares this column a key column. CA-Telon includes any such columns in
sequential order in the generated WHERE condition.
p
Generates the WHERE condition to include this column in position p of the
column order. If a number is specified for one column, Y is not a valid value
for any column. The group of numbers must begin with 1 and be
incremented by 1.
15. AC
A value to specify whether the EXEC SQL statement is to access the column.
Valid values are:
Y
The column is accessed by the EXEC SQL statement
N
The column is not accessed by the EXEC SQL statement
16. TYPE
The type of fields in the table. Valid values are listed in the following table:
SQL Data Type CA-Telon Field Description

TYPE LTH DEC
CHAR (n) CHAR n A fixed-length character
string of length n where n is
in the range 1-254.
DASH — A TLNROW.
DATE DATE A date value in either of two
forms: U.S. or International.
DECIMAL (p, s) DEC p s A decimal number. The first
integer, p, is the precision of
the number (the total number
of digits) and must be in the
range 1 to 15. The second
integer, s, is the scale of the
number (the number of
digits to the right of the
decimal point) and must be
in the range 0 to p.

SQL Data Type CA-Telon Field Description

TYPE LTH DEC
FLOAT FL A floating point number.
GRAPHIC (n) GR n A fixed-length string of
double-byte characters of
length n where n is in the
range 1-127.
INTEGER INT A long integer.
LONG VARCHAR LVCH A varying-length character
string whose maximum
length is determined by the
host SQL.
LONG LVGR A varying-length character
VARGRAPHIC string whose maximum
length is determined by the
host SQL.
SMALLINT SINT A small integer.
TIME TIME A time value.
TIMESTAMP STMP The timestamp.
VARCHAR (n) VCHR n A varying-length character
string of maximum length n
that must be in the range 1
to 32,767.
VARGRAPHIC (n) VGR n A varying-length string of
maximum length n that must
be in the range 1 to 32,767.
17. LTH
The length, if the type is variable length, or the precision, if the type is
DECIMAL. See the table in the TYPE field documentation.
If you are creating an SQL table, enter a value. If you are updating a table,
CA-Telon outputs the value.
For updates and imports, CA-Telon obtains this field from the SQL catalog. If
you update the value here, you must update the corresponding value in the
catalog.
18. DEC
The scale, if the type is DECIMAL. See the table in the TYPE field
documentation.

If you are creating a table, enter a value. If you are updating a table, CA-Telon
outputs the value.
you update the value of this field for SQL tables, you must update the
corresponding value in the catalog.
19. ^N (NOTNULL)
A value to specify that null values are not allowed in the column. Valid values
are:
Y
Nulls not allowed.
N
Nulls allowed. CA-Telon generates null indicator variables associated with
each column defined with N in this field.
outputs the value.
For imports, CA-Telon obtains this field from the SQL catalog. If you update the
value here, you must update the corresponding value in the catalog.

3.19 Update CA-IDMS/SQL CA-Datacom/SQL Tables/TLNROWs
3.19 Update CA-IDMS/SQL CA-Datacom/SQL

Tables/TLNROWs
Access: On the Data Administration menu enter:
■ UP in the FUNCTION field
You can also reach this screen by entering U as a line command on the List SQL
Program ID:
D151 (CA-IDMS/SQL or CA-Datacom/SQL)
Function: This screen is used to append CA-Telon table rows to an existing

CA-IDMS/SQL or CA-Datacom/SQL table definition.
You do not create a CA-Telon definition for CA-IDMS/SQL or CA-Datacom/SQL

table within the TDF as you do for other SQL implementations. (See the
Create/Update SQL Table screen (D141) described in the previous section.) To ensure
that the TDF and catalog information are the same, definitions for CA-IDMS/SQL and
CA-Datacom/SQL tables must be extracted from the appropriate catalog and
transported® into the TDF using the CA-Telon Transport utility. See the
® Advantage
CA-IDMS Database SQL Option Guide and Advantage CA-Datacom Database SQL
Option Guide manuals for the complete details on this process.
Once the SQL table definition has been transported in, you can copy the primary
TLNROW to create view TLNROWs to enhance CA-Telon's capability to generate the
COBOL code that you want. Use this screen to specify this information.
The Update SQL Table/TLNROWs screen for CA-IDMS/SQL or CA-Datacom/SQL is

shown below.
In the screen display below, QUAL.TBLNAME refers to the full table name, including
qualifier (QUAL) and name (NAME). SIZE indicates the total number of lines
contained in the list of column names.

UPDATE SQL TABLE QUAL.TBLNAME SIZE

COMMAND ===> 1____________________________________________ SCROLL ===> ____
TLNNAME 2_______ DESCR 3_______________________________________TYPE 4______
COPY 5_______ COPYLBL 6_____________________________ COPYLV1 7 Y/N
DICTNAM 8_______ SCHEMA 9_________________ SYNONYM _ Y/N1
COLUMN NAME ROW NAME ALIAS KY/AC TYPE LTH/DEC ^N

TOP OF DATA
11____ 12______________________________ 13______ 14 15 16 17______ 18_ 19 2

1. COMMAND
2. TLNNAME
The TLNNAME must be unique for all tables in the TDF regardless of the type
(DB2, CA-IDMS/SQL, CA-Datacom/SQL, etc.) of table.
Note: When an SQL table definition is extracted from a dictionary, TLNNAME
defaults to the first eight characters of the table name if you do not specify
a more meaningful TLNNAME in the control cards.
3. DESCR
the extract utility.
4. TYPE
Identifies the type of SQL Table:
■ BASE
■ VIEW
■ NETWORK (CA-IDMS/SQL only)
5. COPY

6. COPYLBL
definition ( for example, 01 TRG-IO-AREA). The default I/O area in all table
See 3.5, “Update DBD Segment” on page 3-11 for more information on
COPYLBL.
7. COPYLV1
A value that specifies whether the COBOL COPY member identified in the COPY
field begins with a 01-level data item. Valid values are:
Y
The COPY begins with a 01-level data item (for example, 01
TRG1-IO-AREA)
N
(Default) The COPY begins with a data item of level 03
8. DICTNAM
Displays the CA-IDMS Dictionary Name (DICTNAME) from which the table
definition was extracted (CA-IDMS/SQL only).
9. SCHEMA
Displays the schema name of the table.
10. SYNONYM
Specifies whether CA-Telon is to generate the qualifier for the table
(CA-Datacom/SQL table only). Valid values are:
Y
N
11. LINE COMMAND
C Copy a line
I Insert a line
Inn Insert nn lines
M Move a line
R Repeat a line


D Delete an entry
U Update a TLNROW
S Select a TLNROW
The valid line commands depend on the type of line for which the command is
entered. The primary TLNROW is defined as the principal Table definition
imported from the dictionary. A primary TLNROW cannot be modified. A view
TLNROW is defined as a redefinition, or view, of the principal Table definition
and is created and maintained by the user.
For the primary TLNROW, only the U(pdate) and S(elect) line commands may be
entered.
For a primary TLNROW column, only the following line commands may be
entered:
C Copy a line
I Insert a line after the last primary Table column
Inn Insert nn lines after the last primary Table column
For a view TLNROW, all line commands are valid.

For a view TLNROW Column, all line commands except U(pdate) and S(elect)
are valid.
12. COLUMN NAME
in a CA-Telon imported table) which redefines the columns of the table.
For view TLNROWs, you must copy the columns from the original set of
columns.
For SQL table primary TLNROW columns, this field cannot be specified.
The literal TLNROW-- identifies a TLNROW line. The TLNROW name is the
value in the ROW NAME field for SQL Tables. CA-Telon requires that the name
of the first, or primary, TLNROW match the TLNNAME value for the table.
13. ROW NAME
This field provides the name of the TLNROW you are defining. CA-Telon uses
the name of the TLNROW in the generated I/O procedure or paragraph names.
14. ALIAS
This field indicates whether an ALIAS has been established for the columns on
the Update SQL ALIAS screen. Values are:

Y
Yes
N
No
Note: To view or maintain SQL table column aliases, enter a U(pdate) or
S(elect) in the line command field of the TLNROW. Aliases are not used
for CA-Datacom.
15. KY
A value to specify whether this column is involved in generated SQL I/O WHERE
Y
p
incremented by 1.
16. AC
Valid values are:
Y
N
17. TYPE
The type of fields in the table. Valid values are listed in the following table:
CA-IDMS/SQL CA-Telon Field Description of Data Type

Data Type
TYPE LTH DEC
CHAR (n) CHAR n A fixed-length character
string of length n where n
is in the range 1-254.
DASH — A TLNROW.
DATE DATE A set of values that
represent valid dates from
January 1, 0001, through
December 31, 9999. The
internal length of a DATE
value is always eight
bytes.


Data Type
TYPE LTH DEC
DECIMAL (p, s) DECIMAL p s A fixed-point, signed
packed-decimal value.
The first integer, p, is the
precision of the number
(the total number of
digits) in the range 1 to
31. The second integer, s,
is the scale of the number
of digits to the right of the
decimal point) and in the
range 0 to p.
DOUBLE DBLPREC A 64-bit (long)
PRECISION floating-point value with a
seven-bit exponent and a
binary precision of 56.
The length of a DOUBLE
PRECISION value is eight
bytes.
FLOAT (p) FLOAT p A floating-point value
with a 7-bit exponent and
a user-specified precision
(p) to indicate the binary
precision of the FLOAT
value. Precision is an
integer in the range 1
through 56. If the
precision is greater than
24, the length of a
FLOAT value is eight
bytes otherwise the length
is four bytes.
GRAPHIC (n) GRAPHIC n A fixed-length string of
double-byte character
strings of length n where
n is in the range 1-16,380
(CA-IDMS/SQL only).
INTEGER INTEGER A 31-bit signed integer
value. The length of an
INTEGER value is four
bytes.


Data Type
TYPE LTH DEC
LONG INTEGER LONGINT A 64-bit signed long
integer value. The length
of a LONG INTEGER
value is eight bytes
(CA-IDMS/SQL only).
NUMERIC (p, s) NUMERIC p s A fixed-point, signed
zoned decimal value. The
first integer, p, is the
decimal point) in the
range 0 to p.
REAL REAL A 32-bit (short)
floating-point value with a
seven-bit exponent and a
binary precision of 24.
The length of a REAL
value is four bytes.
SMALLINT SMALLINT A 15-bit signed integer
value. The length of a
SMALLINT value is two
bytes.
TIME TIME A valid time value from
00.00.00 through 24.00.00.
The internal length of a
TIME value is eight bytes.


Data Type
TYPE LTH DEC
TIMESTAMP TIMESTMP A valid date/time
combination with a
precision of millionths of
a second. Valid dates
range from January 1,
0001, through December
31, 9999. Valid times
range from
00.00.00.000000 through
23.59.59.999999. The
internal length of a
TIMESTAMP value is
eight bytes.
UNSIGNED UNSGNDEC p s A fixed-point, unsigned
DECIMAL (p, s) packed decimal value.
The first integer, p, is the
range 0 to p
(CA-IDMS/SQL only).
UNSIGNED UNSGNNUM p s A fixed-point, unsigned
NUMERIC (p, s) packed The first integer,
p, is the precision of the
number (the total number
of digits) in the range 1 to
range 0 to p
(CA-IDMS/SQL only).
VARCHAR (n) VARCHAR n A variable-length
character string of
maximum length n in the
range 1 to 32,767
(CA-IDMS/SQL only).


Data Type
TYPE LTH DEC
VARGRAPHIC (n) VARGRAPH n A variable-length string of
maximum length n in the
range 1 to 16,379
(CA-IDMS/SQL only).
18. LTH
Protected field which displays the length, if the type is variable length, or the
precision, if the type is DECIMAL, NUMERIC, UNSIGNED DECIMAL, or
UNSIGNED NUMERIC. See the table in the TYPE field documentation.
For imports, CA-Telon obtains this field from the dictionary.
19. DEC
Protected field which displays the scale, if the type is DECIMAL, NUMERIC,
UNSIGNED DECIMAL, or UNSIGNED NUMERIC. See the table in the TYPE
field documentation.
20. ^N (NOTNULL)
are:
Y
Nulls not allowed
N

3.20 Create/Update Ingres II/Oracle SQL Tables/TLNROWs

You can also reach these screens by entering U as a line command on the List SQL
Program ID: D161 (Ingres II or Oracle 7)
Function: Appends CA-Telon fields to an existing SQL Ingres II or Oracle 7 table

definition that has been imported the TDF using the SQL Catalog Extract system.
Note: If you create a table, the table is defined only in the TDF. All SQL tables
must be created in the host SQL environment.
You can then specify additional parameters to enhance CA-Telon's capability to

generate the COBOL code that you want. Use this screen to specify these additional
parameters.
The Create/Update SQL Table/TLNROWs screen for Ingres II or Oracle 7 is shown

below.
UPDATE SQL TABLE

COMMAND ====> 1_____________________________________________SCROLL ===>______
TLNNAME 2________ DESCR 3___________________________________________SYNONYM 4 Y/N
DCLCOPY 5________ DCLLBL 6______________________________ DCLRDEF 7 Y/N
COPY 8________ COPYLBL 9______________________________ COPYLV1 1Y/N
RDBMS: 11________
COLUMN NAME ROW NAME ALIAS KY/AC TYPE LTH/DEC ^N
TOP OF DATA
12__ 13_________________________________ 14_____ 15 16_17 18_________19___2 21

1. COMMAND

2. TLNNAME
The default value is the value in the DCLCOPY field.
The TLNNAME must be unique for all Tables in the TDF regardless of the type
(DB2, Ingres II, Oracle, etc.) of Table.
This parameter can be the same name as the name you specify for the DCLCOPY
parameter, described later in this section. You should use a different name for the
TLNNAME if the DCLCOPY name is encoded and you want a more meaningful
name for the variable names that CA-Telon generates.
3. DESCR
the import method.
4. SYNONYM
(SQL Table) Specifies whether CA-Telon is to generate the qualifier for the table.
Valid values are:
Y
N
5. DCLCOPY
The name that CA-Telon gives in an EXEC SQL INCLUDE. If you are always
going to specify the INCLUDE in custom code work areas, enter NONE in this
field.
CA-Telon requires you to enter a value in this field.
6. DCLLBL
The name for the COBOL structure that the DCLGEN produces for this table. If
you do not enter a value, CA-Telon uses the default structure name (the table
name is prefixed by DCL).
7. DCLRDEF
A value to specify whether CA-Telon is to redefine the DCLGEN INCLUDE
structure with the COPY or INCLUDE member that you specify in the COPY
Y
Redefine the DCLGEN INCLUDE structure with the COPY member that you
specify.
N
(Default) Do not redefine the DCLGEN INCLUDE structure. CA-Telon
copies the COPY or INCLUDE member into Working Storage.
8. COPY

9. COPYLBL
definition (for example, 01 TRG-IO-AREA). The default I/O area in all table
See the Update DBD Segment section for more information on COPYLBL.
10. COPYLV1
A value that specifies whether the COBOL COPY or PL/I INCLUDE member
identified in the COPY field begins with a 01-level data item. Valid values are:
Y
The COPY or INCLUDE begins with a 01-level data item (for example,
01TRG1-IO-AREA)
N
(Default) The COPY or INCLUDE begins with a data item of level 03
11. RDBMS
The RDBMS in use is displayed in this field. Valid values are INGRES and
ORACLE. You may not update this field.
12. (Line command)
C Copy a line
I Insert a line
Inn Insert nn lines
M Move a line
R Repeat a line
B Line(s) to insert, copy, or move go before this
line
D Delete an entry

13. COLUMN NAME

in a CA-Telon-imported table) which redefines the columns of the table. You can
insert a TLNROW by entering a hyphen (-) for this parameter.
Although you can use this parameter to specify the name of a column in the table,
to minimize keying errors, Computer Associates recommends that you copy the
columns for a TLNROW from the original set of columns.
If desired, you can delete extra columns from the TLNROW.
The literal TLNROW--identifies a TLNROW line. The TLNROW name is the
value in the ALIAS field for SQL tables. CA-Telon requires that the name of the
first TLNROW match the TLNNAME value.
14. ROW NAME
This field provides the name of the TLNROW you are defining. CA-Telon uses
the name of the TLNROW in the generated I/O procedure or paragraph names.
15. ALIAS
This field indicates whether an ALIAS has been established for the columns on
the Update SQL ALIAS screen. Valid values are:
Y
Yes
N
No
Note: To view or maintain SQL table column aliases, enter a U(pdate) or
S(elect) in the line command field of the TLNROW.
16. KY
A value to specify whether this column is involved is generated SQL I/O WHERE
Y
p
Generates the WHERE condition to include this column in position p. of the
incremented by 1.
17. AC
Valid values are:
Y
N

18. TYPE
The type of fields in the table. Valid values are listed for Ingres II in the
following table: Valid values for Oracle 7 are found on the following table:
Oracle 7 SQL CA-Telon Field Description of Data Type

Data Type
TYPE LTH DEC
CHAR(n) CHAR n A fixed-length character
in the range from 1 through
255.
DASH — A TLNROW.
DATE DATE 7 A data value converted to 7
bytes when supplied as a
binary value.
FLOAT(p) FLOAT p A floating point number of
precision p (PICs cannot be
used).
LONG VARCHAR A varying length character
string whose length is
determined by Oracle.
LONG RAW VARCHAR A varying length raw data
string whose length is
determined by Oracle.
NUMBER(p,s) DECIMAL p s A numeric value of precision
p and scale s., where p can
range from 2 through 38 and
s can range from 1 through
127.
NUMBER(p) INTEGER p Used when s is 0 and p is
greater than 5.
NUMBER(p) SMALLINT p Used when s is 0 and p is
less than 6.
RAW(n) CHAR n A fixed-length raw data
in the range from 1 through
255.
ROWID VARCHAR When converted to a string
type, a ROWID requires
from 18 to 256 bytes.

Oracle 7 SQL CA-Telon Field Description of Data Type

Data Type
TYPE LTH DEC
VARCHAR2(n) VARCHAR n A varying length character
string of maximum length n
that must be in the range
from 1 through 2000.
19. LTH
The length, if the type is variable length, or the precision, if the type is
DECIMAL. See the table in the TYPE field documentation.
If you are creating an SQL table, enter a value. If you are updating a table,
CA-Telon outputs the value.
you update the value here, you must update the corresponding value in the
catalog.
20. DEC
The scale, if the type is DECIMAL. See the table in the TYPE field
documentation.
outputs the value.
you update the value of this field for SQL tables, you must update the
corresponding value in the catalog.
21 ^N (NOTNULL)
are:
Y
Nulls not allowed.
N
outputs the value.
For imports, CA-Telon obtains this field from the SQL catalog. If you update the
value here, you must update the corresponding value in the catalog.

3.21 Update SQL ALIAS

■ On the Update CA-IDMS/CA-Datacom/SQL Tables/TLNROWs screen, enter a
U(pdate) or S(elect) in the line command field of the TLNROW line.
■ On the Update Ingres II/Oracle SQL Tables/TLNROWs screen, enter a U(pdate)
or S(elect) in the line command field of the TLNROW line.
Program ID: D152
Function: This screen allows maintenance of a host variable name for each column
name within the TLNROW. CA-Telon uses this host variable name in place of the
column name for the generated I/O.
The Update SQL ALIAS screen is displayed with differing content depending upon the
SQL. For CA-IDMS/SQL, the screen appears as follows:
ADD/UPDATE SQL ALIAS QUAL.TBLNAME

COMMAND ===> 1____________________________________________ SCROLL ===> ____ __
TLNROW 2_______ DESCR 3_______________________________________
COPY 4_______ COPYLBL 5______________________________ COPYLV1 6
DICTNAM 7_______ SCHEMA 8_________________
COLUMN NAME ALIAS

9_______________________________ 1____________________________

1. COMMAND
2. TLNROW
Identifies the TLNROW name of the listed columns.
3. DESCR
Displays the catalog description of the table.
4. COPY
Displays the name of the COPY or INCLUDE member for the table or NONE.

5. COPYLBL
Displays the COBOL data item name of the group level for the table I/O area
copy definitions, if specified on the Update CA-IDMS/CA-Datacom/SQL Table
screen.
6. COPYLV1
Displays the COBOL COPY Level 01 indicator as specified on the Update
CA-IDMS/CA-Datacom/SQL Table screen.
7. DICTNAM
Displays the CA-IDMS Dictionary Name from which the table definition was
extracted.
8. SCHEMA
Displays the schema name of the table.
9. COLUMN NAME
Identifies the name of the column in the TLNROW.
10. ALIAS
This field can contain the host variable name for the column used by CA-Telon in
place of the column name in the generated I/O.
Note: - Field is protected

For Ingres II and Oracle 7, the screen appears as follows:
ADD/UPDATE SQL ALIAS QUAL.TBLNAME

COMMAND ===> 1_____________________________________________ SCROLL ===>____ __
TLNROW 2______ DESCR 3__________________________________________ SYNONYM 4
COPY 5______ COPYLBL 6_______________________________ COPYLV1 7
TLNNAME 8______ RDBMS: 9_____ DCLCOPY 1______ DCLRDEF 11
COLUMN NAME ALIAS

12________________________________ 13____________________________

1. COMMAND
2. TLNROW
Identifies the TLNROW name of the listed columns.
3. DESCR
Displays the catalog description of the table.
4. SYNONYM
Specifies whether CA-Telon is to generate the qualifier for the table.
5. COPY
Displays the name of the COPY or INCLUDE member for the table or NONE.
6. COPYLBL
Displays the COBOL data item name of the group level for the table I/O area
copy definitions, if specified on the Update CA-IDMS/CA-Datacom/SQL Table
screen.
7. COPYLV1
Displays the COBOL COPY Level 01 indicator as specified on the Update
CA-IDMS/CA-Datacom/SQL Table screen.
8. TLNNAME
Displays the TLNNAME.
9. RDBMS
Displays the RDBMS.
10. DCLCOPY
The name that CA-Telon gives in an EXEC SQL INCLUDE.
11. DCLRDEF
Specifies whether CA-Telon will redefine the DCLGEN INCLUDE statment.

12. COLUMN NAME

Identifies the name of the column in the TLNROW.
13. ALIAS
This field can contain the host variable name for the column used by CA-Telon in
place of the column name in the generated I/O.
Note: - The field is protected.

3.22 Specify Tables Being Joined

■ TJ in the ITEM field
Program ID: D142
Function: Specifies the tables involved in join processing.
SPECIFY TABLES BEING JOINED

COMMAND ===> 1_________________________________________________________________
JOIN NAME 2__________________________
TLNNAME 3_______
CORRELATION SQL
NAME QUAL TABLE NAME TLNNAME TYPE SQL SCHEMA

4 1 5_______ 6_______ 7_________________ 8_______ 9______ 1________________
2 ________ ________ __________________ ________ _______ __________________
3 ________ ________ __________________ ________ _______ __________________
4 ________ ________ __________________ ________ _______ __________________
5 ________ ________ __________________ ________ _______ __________________
6 ________ ________ __________________ ________ _______ __________________
7 ________ ________ __________________ ________ _______ __________________
8 ________ ________ __________________ ________ _______ __________________
9 ________ ________ __________________ ________ _______ __________________
1 ________ ________ __________________ ________ _______ __________________
11 ________ ________ __________________ ________ _______ __________________
12 ________ ________ __________________ ________ _______ __________________
13 ________ ________ __________________ ________ _______ __________________
14 ________ ________ __________________ ________ _______ __________________
15 ________ ________ __________________ ________ _______ __________________

1. COMMAND
2. JOIN NAME
Qualified join name.
3. TLNNAME
The CA-Telon name for the join. This name must be unique among join or table
identifiers.
4. OUTPUT LINE
A protected field displaying the sequence number.
5. CORRELATION NAME
A correlation name for the table in the generated auto exec (user I/O) for this join.

6. QUAL
The qualifier of the table used in this join.
7. TABLE NAME
The name of a table used in this join.
8. TLNNAME
The CA-Telon name of the table used for this join. CA-Telon uses this value to
construct the names of such host variables as paging keys and not-null indicators.
9. SQL TYPE
A protected field displaying the type of SQL table. Valid values are DB2, IDMS,
DATACOM, INGRES, and ORACLE. All tables used in the join must be the
same SQL type.
10. SQL SCHEMA
This field is displayed only for CA-IDMS/SQL or CA-Datacom/SQL Tables in the
join and is a protected field identifying the CA-IDMS/SQL or CA-Datacom/SQL
Schema name of the table.
Note: For UPDATE, a change in the CORRELATION NAME, QUAL, or
TABLE NAME is processed as a delete of that table from the join and an
add of a new table.

3.23 Update SQL Join — Join Columns

Access: On the Specify Tables Being Joined screen, invoke END processing.
Program ID: D143
Function: Specifies the WHERE clause predicate(s) used in constructing the join
part of the WHERE clause in generated user I/O.
CA-Telon constructs the join WHERE clause predicates by using the column names
that you specify, as well as the correlation name of the table that defines the column.
If you specify more than one predicate, CA-Telon constructs the entire WHERE clause
by joining the predicates with the AND keyword.
If a table is added to an existing join, the display of the join columns is followed by
the columns of the newly added table. If a table is deleted from a join on the previous
screen, columns from the tables it was joined to will follow the display of any
remaining joined columns.
UPDATE SQL JOIN - JOIN COLUMNS QUAL.TBLNAME SIZE

COMMAND ===> 1____________________________________________ SCROLL ===> ____
ACCESS COLUMNS 2 TLNNAME 3_______
CORRELATION
NAME COLUMN NAME

4_____ 5_______ 6_______________________________
= 7_______ 8_______________________________
______ ________ ________________________________
= ________ ________________________________
______ ________ ________________________________
= ________ ________________________________
______ ________ ________________________________
= ________ ________________________________
______ ________ ________________________________
= ________ ________________________________
______ ________ ________________________________
= ________ ________________________________
______ ________ ________________________________
= ________ ________________________________
______ ________ ________________________________
= ________ ________________________________

1. COMMAND
You can also enter the INIT command to clear the join and restart the processing.
2. ACCESS COLUMNS
A field in which you can request a transfer to the Update SQL Join —Access
Columns screen by entering any non-blank value.

3. TLNNAME
The CA-Telon name the join used as the key name for the join. This name must
be unique among join or table identifiers.
4. (Line command)
C Copy a line
I Insert a line
Inn Insert nn lines
M Move a line
R Repeat a line
D Delete an entry

5. CORRELATION NAME
The correlation name of the table used in the join selection criterion.
6. COLUMN NAME
The column name used in the join WHERE clause. The column name given must
match a column name from the table with the correlation name and must be
included in the join table identified by the TLNNAME field.
7. CORRELATION NAME
The correlation name of the joined table used in the join selection criteria.
8. COLUMN NAME
The column name in the joined table used in the join WHERE clause. The
column name given must match a column name from the table with the correlation
name and must be included in the join table identified by the TLNNAME field.

3.24 Update SQL Join —Access Columns

Access: On the Update SQL Join — Join Columns screen, enter any non-blank
character in the ACCESS COLUMNS select field.
Program ID: D144
Function: Specifies the columns used in this join. The columns are qualified by the
appropriate correlation name as specified on this screen.
UPDATE SQL JOIN - ACCESS COLUMNS QUAL.TBLNAME SIZE

COMMAND ===> 1____________________________________________ SCROLL ===> ____
JOIN COLUMNS 2 ALIAS 3 TLNNAME 4_______
CORRELATION
NAME COLUMN NAME AC FROM QUAL.TABLE

5_____ 6_______ 7_______________________________ 8 9__________________________

1. COMMAND
2. JOIN COLUMNS
A field in which you can request to transfer to the Update SQL Join — Join
Columns screen by entering any non-blank character.
3. ALIAS
Use this field to request display of the Add/Update SQL Join Alias screen where
the ALIAS, KEY, and ACCESS information can be updated.
4. TLNNAME
The CA-Telon name for the join, used as the key name for the join. This name
must be unique among join or table identifiers.
5. (Line command)
C Copy a line


I Insert a line
Inn Insert nn lines
M Move a line
R Repeat a line
D Delete an entry

6. CORRELATION NAME
The correlation name of the table used in the join select criterion.
7. COLUMN NAME
The column name used in the join WHERE clause. The column name given must
match the column name in the table with the correlation name.
8. AC
Displays the column's access value as identified on the Update SQL Join Alias
screen.
9. FROM QUAL.TABLE
This field displays the fully-qualified table name for each column.

3.25 Update SQL Join — Alias

Access: On the Update SQL Join - Access Columns screen, enter any non-blank
character in the ALIAS select field.
Program ID: D145
Function: Displays the columns used in this join and allows specification of the host
variable name used in reading data from or inserting data into the join column.
ADD/UPDATE SQL JOIN ALIAS

COMMAND ===> 1____________________________________________ SCROLL ===> _______
TLNNAME: 2_______ TABLE: 3__________________________
CORRELATION
NAME COLUMN NAME KY/AC ALIAS

4_______ 5_______________________________ 6_ 7 8_____________________________

1. COMMAND
2. TLNNAME
Displays the CA-Telon name for the join.
3. TABLE
Displays the fully qualified join table name.
4. CORRELATION NAME
Displays the correlation name of the joined table containing the column.
5. COLUMN NAME
Displays the column name used in the join WHERE clause.
6. KY
A value to specify whether this column is involved in generated WHERE
Y

p
incremented by 1.
7. AC
Valid values are:
Y
N
8. ALIAS
Allows specification of a host variable name for the column used in reading data
from or inserting data into the column.
Note: CA-Datacom does not support the use of aliases. Any aliases entered for
CA-Datacom tables are ignored.

Chapter 4. Panel Specification
Chapter 4. Panel Specification 4-1

4.1 Introduction
4.1 Introduction
This chapter discusses panel definition, Option 3 on the TDF Main menu. The first
steps in creating your program are to create:
■ A panel image: the layout of a screen or report
■ A panel definition: all the fields mapped to and from a program's panel image
This chapter documents the screens you use in these steps.
The following diagrams present the panel image and panel definition portion of a
CA-Telon-generated online program and batch program.

4.1 Introduction
Panel image: You create a layout of a screen or report by keying the literal and
variable fields in to the Edit Panel Image screen. CA-Telon uses this image to capture
field locations, field types, and field lengths.
Panel definition: The panel definition defines all CA-Telon statements that create
the portions of your program that:
■ Control the terminal display
■ Retrieve data from the terminal
■ Store data from the terminal
The panel definition provides data such as:

■ The source of data being mapped to an output field
■ Whether a particular field must be entered by the operator
■ What edit tests a field must pass
■ How data is reformatted during input
■ What special attribute characters are used
■ Where the data for the input field is mapped
The panel definition includes:
■ The panel image
■ The field characteristics
■ CA-Telon-generated consistency edits
■ SEGLOOP processing

4.2 Panel Definition Menu

Access: On the TDF Main menu, enter 3.
Program ID: P100
Function: Allows you to create and maintain panel images and panel definitions.
PANEL DEFINITION MENU

COMMAND ==> 1__________________________________________________________________
FUNCTION: 2_ CR-CREATE UP-UPDATE PU-PURGE SH-SHOW LI-LIST
ITEM 3_ PI-IMAGE PD-DEFIN

FD-FIELD CE-CONSIS SL-SEGLOOP
(UP) (CR,UP) (CR,UP,PU)
MEMBER NAME:
HEADER 4____
ID 5____
DESC 6_______________________________________
ENTER VALUE FOR SPECIFIC ITEM TO BE PROCESSED:

1. IMAGE 7 > < + \ (INPUT OUTPUT OUTIN SELECT LIT-BREAK CHARACTERS)
8 24 8 (LINE-COLUMN IMAGE SIZE)
9 U (UPPER/LOWER CASE LITERALS)
2. DEFIN 1 Y Y Y Y N (INPUT OUTPUT OUTIN SELECT LITERAL FIELDS LISTED)
3. FIELD 11______ (NAME OR LINE,COLUMN OR "PANEL")
4. CONSIS 12______ (TYPE - "XFEDIT", "SEGEDIT", OR BLANK FOR LIST)
13______ (NAME - IF TYPE SPECIFIED)
5. SEGLOOP 14______ (TYPE - "FILE" OR "TABLE")
15______ (FROM NAME OR LINE,COLUMN)
16______ (TO NAME OR LINE,COLUMN)

1. COMMAND
2. FUNCTION
The type of function to perform on the item identified by the values HEADER
and ID fields.
The table below lists each function type and the items on which you can perform
each function.
Value Meaning Items

CR Create PI PD CE
SL
UP Update PI PD FD
CE SL
PU Purge PI PD SL
SH Show PI PD
LI List PI PD

3. ITEM
The item to work with. Valid values are:
PI
Panel image
PD
Panel definition
FD
Field definition
CE
Consistency edit
SL
SEGLOOP
4. HEADER
A one- to five-character name that identifies a group of programs that form an
application or portion of an application. This value must be unique for each group
of programs.
The length of this field is determined at installation time. The combined length of
HEADER and ID can be a maximum of six characters.
You can specify a HEADER value to correspond to a programming application
group at your site. For example, CL could represent a claims application group.
5. ID
A one- to five-character name that identifies a particular program. For the
program, the panel image, panel definition, screen definition, and report definition
must have the same name.
For example, ABCD.PI, ABCD.PD, ABCD.SD, and ABCD.BD are all associated
with the same program, whose ID is ABCD. The suffixes .PI, .PD, .SD, and .BD
are appended by CA-Telon for the panel image, panel definition, screen definition,
and batch definition, respectively. See the following chapters later in this manual
for more information about screen definitions and batch definitions.
■ Chapter 5, “Online Program Definition”
■ Chapter 6, “Batch Program Definition”
6. DESC
A description of the panel image or panel definition. For your informational
purposes, CA-Telon displays this description on screens such as the List Panel
Definitions screen, the Edit Panel Image screen, and the Line Edit screen.
7. IMAGE
The characters that CA-Telon uses to identify the field types on a panel image.
Valid values are any character except a single quote (') and an ampersand (&).
However, each character used to define a field type may not be used in a literal
field on a panel image, except for the literal break character. Default values are:
<
Input field
>
Output field

+
Outin field
|
Select field
\
Literal break
For your ID, you can change these CA-Telon defaults on the Update Session
Controls screen.
8. SIZE
The screen or report size, ll X ccc, where:
ll
The number of lines on the screen or report
ccc
The number of columns on the screen or report
The CA-Telon default is 24 x 80.
For your ID, you can change these CA-Telon defaults on the Update Session
Controls screen, subject to the following limitations:
Panel Characteristic Maximum Minimum

Panel columns 240 17
Panel lines 420 - Batch 1
0 99 - Online
Number groups 200 N/A
Screen size 9920 N/A
0 (lines x columns)
Note: If you are working with a Model 3 or Model 4 terminal, CA-Telon

displays the screen in Model 2 mode if you create a screen with 24 lines.
9. CASE
A value to specify whether to translate lower case literals into upper case literals.
The value in this field is applicable only when the FUNCTION value is CR
(CREATE). Valid values are:
U
Convert all literals to upper case
L
Save all literals as entered (mixed upper case and lower case)
The CASE field value affects only fields that are added or modified in the current
session. You can modify the value when you are editing a panel with the CAPS
command. See 9.5, “Primary Commands” on page 9-13 for more information.
10. DEFIN
A set of values to specify which field types are displayed on the Update Panel
Fields (Online) screen. Valid values are:

Y
Display this field type
N
Do not display this field type
The order of values corresponds to the order of the field types as listed on the
screen.
11. FIELD
The name, or the line and column position, of a field in a panel definition. A
value in this field is not valid until the panel definition is created.
The value in this field has two possible functions:
■ When the ITEM value is FD, it allows for direct field data detail update
(bypassing the Update Panel Fields (Online) screen)
■ When ITEM is CE, the value is one of the following:
– The name of a select field for which the consistency edit is performed
– *PANEL, for all consistency edits except those performed for select fields
12. CONSIS
The type of consistency edit. Valid when the FUNCTION field value is UP
(update). Valid values, and the resulting screen displays, are:
XFEDIT
The Update Cross-Field Edit (XFEDIT) screen
SEGEDIT
The Update Segment Edit (SEGEDIT) screen
BLANK
The List Consistency Edits screen
If a value is specified here, enter the consistency edit name in the NAME field.
13. NAME
The name of the consistency edit to edit directly from this screen.
If the edit was not named when it was created, you can access it only through the
List Consistency Edits screen.
14. SEGLOOP
The type of mapping that SEGLOOP loop processing is to perform. Valid values
are:
FILE
The program reads a segment or record for each iteration of the loop. This is
valid for only output mapping.
TABLE
The program reads data from or writes data to an array (table) for each
iteration of the loop. This is valid for both input and output.
15. FROM
The first variable field included in the SEGLOOP loop processing, identified by
either its panel definition field name or by its line and column location.

16. TO
The last variable field included in the SEGLOOP loop processing, identified by
either its panel definition field name or by its line and column location.

4.3 List Panel Definitions

Access: On the Panel Definition menu, enter LI in the FUNCTION field.
Program ID: P401
Function: Lists these items:

■ Panel image (PI)
■ Panel definition (PD)
Note: This screen lists a panel image only if there is no panel definition for the
program. Entities displayed on the list vary depending on the screen from
which the list is requested.
LIST DEFINITIONS

COMMAND ==> 1_____________________________________________________ PAGE 1

XXXXXX.PD PANEL DEFINITION FOR DOCUMENTATION ABCDE 8385
YYYYYY.PD PANEL DEFINITION FOR MODELING TEST XYZ 9385
ZZZZZZ.PI PANEL IMAGE ONLY FOR MODELING TEST XYZ 91585
2 3 4 5 6 7

1. COMMAND
For information, refer to 9.5, “Primary Commands” on page 9-13.
2. (Function)
A column position to the left of the NAME field in which you can enter a control
character to manipulate the item on the line. Valid values are:
C
Copy
D
Change a description
P
Purge with confirmation
R
Rename

S
Show (browse)
U
Update
Z
Zap (purge without confirmation)
3. NAME
The name of the panel image or panel definition.
4. RENAME
One of several actions, depending upon the value in the FUNCTION field. When
the action is complete, CA-Telon returns a confirmation message.
Note: If the function field value for this entry is C or R, a value in the
RENAME field is required.
Valid values, their meanings, and the associated messages are:
Value Meaning Message

C Copy a member *COPIED
D Change the description of a member *DESC UP
P Purge a member with a confirmation *PURGED
R Rename a member *RENAMED
S Enter a member in browse mode *PNL SAVED
U Enter a member in update mode *PNL SAVED
Z Purge a member without confirmation
CA-Telon confirms a rename action, the old member no longer exists and
information about it (that is, description, user, and update) is no longer displayed.
Subsequent access to the data must be through the new name.
5. DESCRIPTION
A description used for informational purposes. CA-Telon requires this field for all
functions, but it updates the DESCRIPTION field value only if the function field
value is D.
6. USER
Protected field identifying the last user to access the member.
7. UPDATE
Protected field identifying the date of the last access of the member.

4.4 Edit Panel Image

Access: On the Panel Definition menu, enter:
■ CR in the FUNCTION field
■ PI in the ITEM field
■ Header in the HEADER field
■ Identifier in the ID field
■ Description in the DESC field
Program ID: P103
Function: Allows you to create a panel image, the first step in creating your
program. The top line of the screen contains the description that you entered on the
previous screen. You can modify the description by overwriting it here.
Press [End] to save the image. The message END PROCESSING PERFORMED
appears on the Panel Definition submenu to indicate a successful save.
DESCRIPTION

Image characters: Image characters are the characters that CA-Telon uses to
identify the usage of a field painted on a panel image.
Valid values are any character except a single quote (') and an ampersand (&).
However, the characters used to define field usage must be excluded from a literal
field on a panel image, except for the literal break character.
Default image characters are:

<
Input field
>
Output field
+
Outin field
|
Select field
\
Literal break
For example, if you accept the default character > for output fields, the TDF interprets
> on a panel image as a position in an output field.
The CA-Telon defaults can be overridden on the Update Session Controls screen. For
more information, see 2.9, “Update Session Controls” on page 2-30.
After you save a panel image using a set of image characters, you can change the
image characters using the CH line command. For more information, see 9.6, “Line
Commands” on page 9-45.
Panel image example: This sample screen shows a panel image with literal,
output, input, outin, and select fields. The variable fields are represented by the
default image characters.
PAGE >>> E M P L O Y E E T R A I N I N G S Y S T E M >>> >>>>>

>>>>>>> EMPLOYEE TASK ADD/UPDATE
EMPLOYEE ID >>>>>>
ITEM PROJ/TASK DESCRIPTION PRIORITY ACCT CODE MESSAGE
> ++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++ ++ ++++++ >>>>>>>

++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++ ++ ++++++
"ENTER" TO UPDATE DISPLAY EMPLOYEE RECORD

START LIST AT PROJECT DUPLICATE PROJECT ITEM FROM TASK <<<< TO <<<
DELETE PROJECT/TASK ITEM GO TO TIME CHARGE FOR WEEK << AND YEAR
>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>

The output field shown on the last line of the screen is a field in which CA-Telon can
output error messages. This field:
■ Can be located anywhere on the screen
■ Can be 01 to 79 characters long

■ Is recommended to be at least 70 characters long

■ Is required for all panel images used in screen definitions in online programs

4.5 Line Edit
4.5 Line Edit

Access: When creating a panel image, you can switch to line edit mode by pressing
the PF key defined for it.
Program ID: P104
Function: Allows you to move fields or areas of the image around, or to paint the
image.
When you enter the line edit mode, CA-Telon displays line command fields at the left
of each line of the panel image, if it has been created.
To exit this screen, press [End], SWAP EDIT, or LINE EDIT PF key.
LINE EDIT MBTST1.PD PANEL 24 8 GROUP 1 OF 1 SIZE 24 COL 2

COMMAND ==> 1____________________________________________ SCROLL ===> CSR
1 DESCRIPTION
2
3 2
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2

1. COMMAND
2. (Line commands)
A field that allows you to enter one of these line commands:
C Copy a line
I Insert a line
Inn Insert nn lines
M Move a line

4.5 Line Edit
MM Move a block of lines.

R Repeat a line
D Delete an entry

4.6 Update Panel Fields (Online)

■ PD in the ITEM field
Note: The HEADER and ID values must match the corresponding values in the panel
image, since both are part of the same program.
Program ID: P155
Function: Specifies the characteristics of all the fields in the panel image, the first
step in creating a panel definition.
hhiiii.PD UPDATE PANEL FIELDS

COMMAND ==> 1_____________________________________________________ PAGE 1
OPTIONS ==> 2 ATTRS _ HELPMSG _ MAPOUT _
LINE 1 COL 1 3 SIZE 24 8
──── ────+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+----5----+----6----+----7---
1 DESCRIPTION
2 4
3
──── ─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
U LN COL LTH USE NAME FLDTYPE DBNAME OR TEXT REQ MORE
1 29 11 LI DESCRIPTION
4 2 1 IN IN1 FILE-FIELD1 Y +
5 6 7 8 9 1 11
12

1. COMMAND
2. OPTIONS
For a screen definition, a set of one-byte fields that allow you to transfer to a
specified screen. Enter a nonblank character in the field that represents the screen
of your choice:
ATTRS
Update Attribute Parameter screen
HELPMSG
Update Help Message Parameters screen

MAPOUT
Update Mapout Parameter screen
3. LINE COL
The panel image lines to view on the three-line panel image display window.
Change the window by altering the LINE and COL values and pressing [Enter].
The line and column number image location is displayed in the upper left corner
of the window.
4. Panel image display window
A display-only three-line window to the panel image. You can change the image's
field position, content, or type by changing values in the remaining fields on this
screen.
5. U
The action to take on a field in the panel image. Valid values are:
U
CA-Telon displays the appropriate screen:
■ Update Literal Fields
■ Update Output/Input/Outin Field
■ Update Select Fields
D
Delete the field
Z
Delete the field
I
Insert a blank line after the field in order to enter another field
6. LN COL LTH USE
The starting line number, starting column number, length, and use respectively of
the field. Possible USE values are:
LI
Literal field
IN
Input field
OU
Output field
OI
Outin field
SE
Select field
You can change these characteristics by entering new values. Also, you can add a
new field to the panel image by specifying these values immediately below the
last field on the screen. Once you enter the new data, CA-Telon moves it to its
relative position in the existing field information, and you can update it.
7. NAME
The field name. CA-Telon uses this value to generate MFS or BMS control
blocks and create COBOL or PL/I buffer names. CA-Telon gives these names a
prefix of TPI- for input buffer names and TPO- for output buffer names.

The name must be one to 8 characters long. The first character must be a letter,
@, #, or $. Subsequent characters may be numbers. No other special characters
are allowed. Otherwise, Generator errors will result.
Note: When the field is in a series of fields in a SEGLOOP list, this value may
have only six characters for IMS and five characters for CICS.
You refer to this value in a consistency edit, segment edit, or auto cursor position
field.
Literal fields require a NAME value only when referenced from the program.
When a name is specified for a literal field, it is included in the BMS map for
CICS or MFS for IMS. A NAME value is required for all other fields. If not
specified, CA-Telon supplies a default name Pllccc, where ll and ccc are starting
line and column positions. For example, P20005 is for a field beginning on line 20
in column 5.
Field names ERRMSG1, MORE, PAGENO, SYSMSG, TRANCDE, TRANFLD,
or PASSWORD have special meaning to CA-Telon. If used, the FLDTYPE value
is normally set to NONE.
8. FLDTYPE
The mapping of data to or from the DBNAME, with or without editing. Valid
values are:
ALPHA
Direct alphanumeric move.
NONE
No automatic move. Programmers must perform any mapping required.
NUMERIC
Check for a numeric value or CA-Telon specific field edits (for example:
DATE, DOLLAR, and STATE).
field-edit
An application-specific field edit name. A call is made to field-edit, prefixed
with I or O for input or output (where a subroutine must be created to
perform this edit). See Appendix A, “Field Edit Formats,” for more
information.
Default values are:
■ ALPHA, if a DBNAME is specified but no RANGE is supplied
■ NUMERIC, if a DBNAME and a RANGE are supplied
■ NONE, if no DBNAME is supplied
This specification is valid for output, input, outin, and select usage types. For
outin, two edit names are necessary if output and input processing are different.
If the field edit fails, control returns to the program without processing.
Editing occurs in:
■ E-100-INPUT-EDITS for input fields
■ B-100-OUTPUT-EDITS for output fields
■ E-100-INPUT-EDITS and B-100-OUTPUT-EDITS for outin fields
■ J-100-SELECT for select fields

Note: A FLDTYPE value may not be specified if a CONVERT, VALUES, or

FORMAT specification is supplied. For more information, see 4.11,
“Update Output/Input/Outin Field” on page 4-32.
9. DBNAME OR TEXT
The mapping name. On an output field, it indicates the program data field that is
mapped out to the screen display. On an input field, it indicates the data field to
receive the data from the screen.
An input field can be mapped to two different program fields, and an outin field
can be mapped out from one data field and mapped back into two different fields.
To designate these additional fields, you use the appropriate screen to update field
data:
With PL/I programs, you can use any expression that is valid in an assignment or
external procedure call. If the name is qualified by a structure name, include that
structure name before the data name in this format structure-name.data-name.
COBOL programs accomplish this function with the value in the OF field of the
Update Output/Input/Outin Field screen.
If you enter a SHOW command in the COMMAND field, the command is
displayed in this field.
Note: CA-Telon does not allow you to overwrite literals with spaces on this
screen. If you attempt to overwrite a literal, CA-Telon places an asterisk
(*) in the field and displays a message that text is required. If you press
[Enter] or [PF3], * becomes the default literal.
10. REQ
A value to specify whether the application user must enter data in an input or
outin field. Valid values are:
Y
The application user must enter data.
N
(Default) The application user does not have to enter data. If the user leaves
the field blank, its value is set to zeros if field type is NUMERIC or spaces if
field type is ALPHA.
C
Consistency edit code checks to see if this field is required. If a field with
type C contains the required asterisk (*) character, the field is treated as if it
were blank.
11. MORE
A field that allows CA-Telon to signify, by display a plus sign (+), that there is
additional detail data for this field that cannot be displayed on this screen. To
display the additional data (or enter additional data), enter U in the U field; this
transfers you to the appropriate screen:


12. SEGLOOP DELIMITERS
Protected field displaying information about the range of the SEGLOOP:
■ Under the NAME heading, the literal "SEGLOOP"
■ Under the FLDTYPE heading, the SEGLOOP type (FILE or TABLE)
■ Under the DBNAME OR TEXT heading, the SEGLOOP attribute (that is,
OUTPUT, OUTIN, or INPUT)
Following this information is displayed:
■ The literal "SEGLOOP -"
■ The literal "START" or "END" to indicate that this is the beginning or ending
delimiter of the SEGLOOP
The line that is immediately after the START SEGLOOP delimiter becomes the
first field in the SEGLOOP. The line that is immediately before the LAST
SEGLOOP delimiter becomes the last field in the SEGLOOP.
Valid line commands for the SEGLOOP delimiters are:
U
Transfers you to the appropriate SEGLOOP detail screen:
■ Create/Update Table Segloop
■ Create/Update File Segloop
Z
Deletes the SEGLOOP

4.7 Update Help Message Parameters

Access: On the Update Panel Fields (Online) screen, enter any nonblank character
in the HELPMSG field.
Program ID: P156
Function: Performs batch updates of the HELPMSG value.
XXXXXX.PD UPDATE HELPMSG PARM

COMMAND ==> 1_____________________________________________________ PAGE 1
──── ────+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+----5----+----6----+----7---
1 DESCRIPTION
2 3
3
──── ─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
LN COL LTH USE NAME HELPMSG
4 2 1 IN IN1 INHELPMSG
4 5 6

1. COMMAND
2. LINE COL
The line and column number image location is displayed in the upper-left corner
of the window.
3. (Panel image display window)
screen.
4. LN COL LTH USE
LI
Literal field
IN
Input field

OU
Output field
OI
Outin field
SE
Select field
5. NAME
The field name, from the Update Panel Fields (Online) screen. See 4.6, “Update
Panel Fields (Online)” on page 4-16 for more information.
6. HELPMSG
Specify the name of the key used by the help facility to bring up the appropriate
screen.
Note: When you enter a value here, you also enter Y in the HELP field of the
Update/Show Screen Parameters screen. See 5.26, “Update/Show Screen
Parameters” on page 5-115, for more information.

4.8 Update Mapout Parameter

in the MAPOUT field.
Program ID: P159
Function: Performs batch updates of the MAPOUT value.
XXXXXX.PD UPDATE MAPOUT PARM

COMMAND ==> 1_____________________________________________________ PAGE 1
──── ────+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+----5----+----6----+----7---
1 DESCRIPTION
2 3
3
──── ─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
LN COL LTH USE NAME MAPOUT
4 5 6

1. COMMAND
2. LINE COL
The line and column number image location is displayed in the upper-left corner
of the window.
screen.
4. LN COL LTH USE
LI
Literal field
IN
Input field
OU
Output field

OI
Outin field
SE
Select field
5. NAME
The field name, from the Update Panel Fields (Online) screen.
See 4.6, “Update Panel Fields (Online)” on page 4-16 for more information.
6. MAPOUT
The data name of any COBOL or PL/I variable in the program that controls
output mapping of the output or outin field identified on this line. When the value
of the variable is Y, the associated field is mapped to the output buffer by code
that CA-Telon generates in the B-100-OUTPUT-EDITS section. If the value is
not Y, the field is not mapped.
The field that is used for MAPOUT must be set in custom code, and the
MAPOUT field must be specified on each detail screen for the fields that are
conditionally mapped on output. When CA-Telon generates the code with the
MAPOUT field coded, it sets up an IF statement before each individual output
field.
A list of all MAPOUT fields for the entire screen also appears on the Update
Output/Input/Outin Field screen.

4.9 Update Attribute Parameter

to select the ATTR option.
Program ID: P158
Function: Performs batch updates of field attributes.
XXXXXX.PD UPDATE ATTRIBUTE PARMS

COMMAND ==> 1____________________________________________________ PAGE 1
──── ────+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+----5----+----6----+----7---
1 DESCRIPTION
2 3
3
──── ─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
LN COL LTH USE NAME ATTRPRO ATTRINT OUTATTR EACOLOR EAHIGH EAVALID
1 29 11 LI _ ______ _ __ __ __
4 2 1 IN IN1 _ ______ _ __ __ __
4 5 6 7 8 9 1 11

1. COMMAND
2. LINE COL
The line and column number image location is displayed in the upper left corner
of the window.
screen.
4. LN COL LTH USE
LI
Literal field
IN
Input field
OU
Output field

OI
Outin field
SE
Select field
5. NAME
The field name, from the Update Panel Fields (Online) screen. See 4.6, “Update
6. ATTRPRO
Specifies that a field is protected against application user entry when the field is
written to the terminal. It is valid on input, outin, and select fields. Valid values
are:
Y
Protect the field
N
Do not protect the field
Attribute protection is most often used on outin fields to prevent the application
user from changing a displayed value that is returned to the program on input.
Note: If the ATTRPRO value is Y, you can unprotect the field by moving the
reserved attribute fields (for example, OK-ATTR or CURSOR-ATTR) to
it. Refer to Programming Concepts Guide for information on these fields.
7. ATTRINT
The intensity of the field displayed. Valid values are:
NORMAL
Normal intensity. This is the default.
HIGH
High intensity
(blank)
Do not display the field
Note: You can change the field intensity at a later time by moving the reserved
attribute fields (for example, INPUT-BLANK-ATTR or
INPUT-HIGH-ATTR) to it. Refer to Programming Concepts Guide for
information on reserved attribute fields.
8. OUTATTR
A value to specify whether the attributes for this field are included in the
CA-Telon screen image area located at the end of the Transfer Work Area of all
CA-Telon-generated programs. This causes the screen image to be larger, but this
is required when you use CA-Telon Help or Hold or if you must refresh the
screen. Valid values are:
Y
(Distributed default) Include attributes in the output buffer
N
Do not include attributes in the output buffer
This value overrides the installation default.

9. EACOLOR
The color displayed on an extended attribute terminal. This value is valid only
when the EATTR value on the Update/Show Screen Parameters screen is Y.
Valid values are:
BL
Blue
RE
Red
PI
Pink
TU
Turquoise
YE
Yellow
GR
Green
DE
The value set at screen definition
NE
Neutral (usually white, depending on installation default)
10. EAHIGH
The extended highlight attribute for the field. This value is valid only when the
EATTR value on the Update/Show Screen Parameters screen is Y. Valid values
are:
B
Blink when displayed
BL
R
Display in reverse video
RE
D
Display in default mode
DE
U
Underline display
UN
Underline display
11. EAVALID
The extended validation attribute for the field. This value is valid only when the
EATTR value on the Update/Show Screen Parameters screen is Y and you request
that CA-Telon generate one of the following types of source code:
■ IMS MFS, on the Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment screen
■ CICS BMS, on the Update CICS Screen Environment screen

Valid values are:

MF
The application user must enter all character positions of the field
ME
The application user must enter at least one character into the field
BO
Both of the above apply
During execution, terminal input in the field is checked before control is returned
to the program. Control is returned to the program only if something is entered.
By comparison, the REQ field value is used to check for input from inside the
program.
See 4.6, “Update Panel Fields (Online)” on page 4-16 for more information on the
REQ field.
If the application uses terminals both with and without extended attributes and the
EAVALID is ME, the REQ value must be Y.

4.10 Update Literal Fields

Access: On the Update Panel Fields (Online) screen, enter U in the U field.
Program ID: P180
Function: Adds or updates details for a literal field.
XXXXXX.PD UPDATE LITERAL FIELD

COMMAND ==> 1________________________________________________________________
FIELD NAME 2_______ USAGE LITERAL 3 LINE 1 COL 29 LTH 11 4
MAPPING: TEXT 5___________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
GENERAL: OUTATTR 6 (Y/N)
ATTR: ATTRINT 7_____ EACOLOR 8_ EAHIGH 9_

1. COMMAND
2. FIELD NAME
The field name, from the Panel Definition menu or the Update Panel Fields
(Online) screen. See 4.2, “Panel Definition Menu” on page 4-4 or 4.6, “Update
3. USAGE
The type of field. Valid values are:
■ LITERAL (Default)
■ SELECT
■ INPUT
■ OUTPUT
■ OUTIN
A value is required if a value is not carried over from the Panel Definition menu
or the Update Panel Fields (Online) screen.
4. LINE COL LTH
Protected field displaying the starting line number, starting column number, and
length respectively of the literal field. These values were specified on the Panel
Definition menu or the Update Panel Fields (Online) screen.

5. TEXT
The text for a literal field. Do not use the single quote (') or an ampersand (&)
characters.
6. OUTATTR
Specifies whether the attributes for this field are included in the CA-Telon screen
image area located at the end of the Transfer Work Area of all
CA-Telon-generated programs. This causes the screen image to be larger, but this
is required when you use CA-Telon Help or Hold or if you must refresh the
Y
(Distributed default) Include attributes in the output buffer
N
7. ATTRINT
NORMAL
HIGH
High intensity
(blank)
8. EACOLOR
Valid values are:
BL
Blue
RE
Red
PI
Pink
TU
Turquoise
YE
Yellow
GR
Green
DE

NE
9. EAHIGH
are:
B
BL
R
RE
D
DE
U
Underline display
UN
Underline display

4.11 Update Output/Input/Outin Field

Access: On the Update Panel Fields (Online) screen, enter U in the U column for a
listed field with a USE value of OU (output), IN (input), or OI (outin).
Note: The title displayed on this screen varies to reflect the usage of the field being
updated.
Program ID: P181
Function: Specifies additional data for a given field.
XXXXXX.PD UPDATE OUTIN FIELD

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
FIELD NAME HHHH__2_ USAGE OUTPUT_ 3 LINE 2 COL 2 LTH 5 4
GENERAL IN: REQ 5 (Y/N/C) HELPMSG 6_______________________

OUT: PIC 7___________________________ OUTATTR 8 (Y/N)
MAPPING: DBNAME 9____________________________________________________________

OF 1___________________________________________________________
....... _____________________________________________________________
OF _____________________________________________________________
....... _____________________________________________________________
OF _____________________________________________________________
INIT 11____________________________________________________________
MAPOUT 12_____________________________
EDIT: FLDTYPE OUT 13_____ IN 13_____ PARM LIST EXTENSION 14

SPEC 15_____ (FORMAT/CONVERT/VALUES/RANGE)
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
ATTR: ATTRPRO 16 ATTRINT 17____ EACOLOR 18 EAHIGH 19 EAVALID 2
FMTEXIT 21_ ___ FMTCNTL=MFS 22 (Y/N)

1. COMMAND
2. FIELD NAME
(Online) screen.
See 4.2, “Panel Definition Menu” on page 4-4 or 4.6, “Update Panel Fields
(Online)” on page 4-16 for more information.
3. USAGE
The type of field. Valid values are:
■ LITERAL. This is the default.
■ SELECT
■ INPUT
■ OUTPUT
■ OUTIN

A value is required if no value is carried over from the Panel Definition menu or
the Update Panel Fields (Online) screen.
4. LINE COL LTH
5. REQ
A value to specify whether the application user must enter data in an input or
outin field. Valid values are:
Y
The application user must enter data.
N
The application user does not have to enter data. If the user leaves the field
blank, its value is set to zeros if the field type is NUMERIC or spaces if field
type is ALPHA. This is the default.
C
Consistency edit code checks to see if this field is required. If a field with
type C contains the required asterisk (*) character, the field is treated as if it
is blank.
6. HELPMSG
The field-level help message, usually a key used by the help facility to bring up
the appropriate screen.
Update/Show Screen Parameters screen. For more information, see 5.26,
“Update/Show Screen Parameters” on page 5-115.
7. PIC
The COBOL or PL/I picture clause (any valid COBOL or PL/I numeric format).
This value overrides the standard output formatting by CA-Telon based on the
FLDTYPE value, except that a FLDTYPE value of FLOAT overrides the PIC
value (for example, $$9.9).
The standard output formatting for a five-digit number based on FLDTYPE value
is:
FLDTYPE Value COBOL PL/I

NUMERIC Z(4)9 (4)Z9
FULLNUM 9(5) (5)9
DOLLAR Z(2)9.99 (2)Z9.99
8. OUTATTR
A value to specify whether the attributes for this field are included in the output
buffer. This field is valid for only output fields and literal fields with field names.
Valid values are:

Y
Include attributes in the output buffer
N
9. DBNAME
The file, working storage, or transfer work area field name that CA-Telon uses to
map data to and/or from the field represented on the screen.
Note: To have CA-Telon generate special code to support the COBOL II
"ACCEPT ... FROM DATE" or COBOL for MVS and VM "MOVE
FUNCTION CURRENT-DATE ..." use the reserved word @DATE This
reserverd word is appropriate for OUTPUT only; it should not be used for
INPUT-only fields. A separate INPUT DBNAME must be specified for
OUTIN fields.
10. OF
(COBOL only.) A qualification of the DBNAME field value (for example,
TAX-DUE OF FEDERAL-RETURN). For USAGE values INPUT, OUTIN, and
SELECT, you can map to and/or from more than one field (DBNAME).
11. INIT
The initialized value of an input or select field when written to the terminal. Omit
single quotes (') or ampersands (&) from this value. Otherwise, errors will occur
during program assembly.
12. MAPOUT
The data name of any COBOL or PL/I parameter in the program that controls
output mapping of the field represented on this line. See 4.8, “Update Mapout
Parameter” on page 4-23 for more information.
13. FLDTYPE
values are:
ALPHA
NONE
No automatic move. Programmers must perform any mapping required.
NUMERIC
field-edit
perform this edit). See Appendix A, “Field Edit Formats” for more
information.
Default values are:


Editing occurs in:
Note: A FLDTYPE value may not be specified if the SPEC value is CONVERT,
VALUES, or FORMAT.
14. PARM LIST EXTENSION
A field to request transfer to the Update Parameter List Extension screen by
entering any nonblank character. Use this screen to specify extended fields for
installation-defined FLDTYPE edits.
To transfer, a value must already have been entered in the FLDTYPE field.
15. SPEC
The edit specification:
FORMAT
Defines a mask used to format an alphanumeric field on input or output.
CONVERT
Defines acceptable display values and specifies how the program stores them.
It can be used for input or output mapping.
RANGE
Defines one or more acceptable ranges of values for a numeric field on input.
VALUES
Defines one or more valid input values for input, outin, and select fields.
Enter the specification in the field and its associated values in the extended field
space below the SPEC field. The syntax for entering each specification and a full
description of its function follow.
FORMAT mask
In the FORMAT mask 9s represent numbers and Xs represent characters. All
other characters are inserted into the corresponding positions on output and
stripped from the corresponding positions on input. Here are examples of how an
input value is stored after formatting by the mask and how that same value is
displayed on output through the same mask:
Input Mask Stored value Output
123-45-678 999-99-999 12345678 123-45-678

ABCD343 ABXX993 CD34 ABCD343
RTXY887 ABXX993 XY88 ABXY883
CDQ34 XXT99 CD34 CDT34

All characters except the mask-defined value 9 are stripped for storage. CA-Telon
does not verify the value in X position on input. (In the third example, CA-Telon
accepts but does not store the input value RT.) CA-Telon does verify that
characters specified as 9s are numbers.
If the length of the mask does not equal the length of the input field, the target is
blank-padded to the right during mapping. Remember, the target data field must
be alphanumeric even if the mask is all 9s.
CONVERT screen-val-1,stored-val-1 [,screen-val-2,stored-val-2 ...]
Screen-val is the value as it appears on the screen; stored-val is the value as it is
stored. If you define more than one pair, the length of all occurrences of
screen-val must be the same; this is also true for all occurrences of stored-val. If
you use blanks to pad the length, enclose the value in single quotes.
In this example, the two pairs specified result in the indicated screen value and
stored value:
CONVERT FEMALE,F,'MALE ',M
Valid screen value Stored value
FEMALE F
MALE M
For input or select fields, CA-Telon puts the pairs in a table for searching at
runtime. During execution, the application user's input must match a specified
screen-val. If not, CA-Telon flags the field and an error is returned.
If there is no corresponding stored-val during output, the program displays the
stored value as is.
RANGE start-range-1,end-range-1 [,start-range-2,end-range-2 ...]
Start-range and end-range can be numeric constants or data field names. Values
must be specified lowest to highest. The range is inclusive; that is, the numbers
defining the range are themselves within the range.
In the following example, valid input values for the field are defined as between 4
and 9, 23 and 33, or 53.8 and 75.
RANGE 4, 9, 23, 33, 53.8, 75
VALUES value-1[,value-2 ...]
Using the specified values, CA-Telon generates COBOL 88-level items or a PL/I
search array. At runtime, these are the only acceptable values. All others are
flagged as errors. In the following example, only the values 10, 12, and AL are
acceptable.
VALUES 1, 12, AL
Although not required, all values should be the same length as the LTH value for
the field. If the entered value is longer, at compile time COBOL issues a
diagnostic and PL/I truncates the length to the LTH value.

16. ATTRPRO
A value to specify that a field is protected against application user entry when the
field is written to the terminal. It is valid on input, outin, and select fields. Valid
values are:
Y
Protect the field
N
it. Refer to Programming Concepts Guide for information on these fields.
17. ATTRINT
NORMAL
HIGH
High intensity
(blank)
18. EACOLOR
Valid values are:
BL
Blue
RE
Red
PI
Pink
TU
Turquoise
YE
Yellow
GR
Green
DE
NE

19. EAHIGH
are:
B
BL
R
RE
D
DE
U
Underline display
UN
Underline display
20. EAVALID
Valid values are:
MF
ME
BO
program. See 4.6, “Update Panel Fields (Online)” on page 4-16 for more
information on the REQ field.
21. FMTEXIT
(IMS applications only.) An MFS field exit routine invoked for the field on input.
Two values are required for this specification:
■ Exit Routine Number (valid values: 000 through 127)
■ Exit Routine Value (valid values: 000 through 255)

22. FMTCNTL
(IMS applications only.) A value to specify that this is an output field displaying
special MFS data.
Valid values are:
Y
This is a special MFS field
N
This is not a special MFS field
If FMTCNTL is Y, the FIELD NAME value (LABEL field value on other
screens) must be one of the MFS system literals:
■ DATE1
■ DATE2
■ DATE3
■ DATE4
■ TIME
■ PASSWORD
■ LTSEQ
■ LTNAME
■ LPAGENO
■ LTMSG
For fields with labels other than PASSWORD, the field usage is assumed to be
OUTPUT (other usage specifications are ignored). The field occupies space on
the screen, but does not appear in the buffers (that is, the CA-Telon program
knows nothing about the field).

4.12 Update Select Fields

■ On the Update Panel Fields (Online) enter U in the U field for a select field
■ On the Update Select Parameters screen, enter a nonblank value to select the
SELECT FIELDS option
Program ID: P182
Function: Add or update information about a given select field.
XXXXXX.PD UPDATE SELECT FIELD

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
FIELD NAME AA_2____ USAGE SELECT 3 LINE 3 COL 3 LTH 41 4
GENERAL: NEXTPGM 5____ SCONSIS 6_______ HELPMSG 7_______________________

INEDIT 8 (Y/N) INDBIO 9 (Y/N)
SELKEY FROM 1______________________________________________________
TO ________________________________________________________
MAPPING: DBNAME1 11__________________________________________________________

OF 12__________________________________________________________
DBNAME2 ____________________________________________________________
OF ____________________________________________________________
INIT 13__________________________________________________________
EDIT: FLDTYPE 14_____ PARM LIST EXTENSION 15

SPEC 16_____ (FORMAT/CONVERT/VALUES/RANGE)
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
ATTR: ATTRPRO 17 ATTRINT 18 ___ EACOLOR 19 EAHIGH 2 EAVALID 21
FMTEXIT 22 __ __ FMTCNTL=MFS 23 (Y/N)

1. COMMAND
2. FIELD NAME
(Online) screen. See 4.6, “Update Panel Fields (Online)” on page 4-16 and 4.2,
“Panel Definition Menu” on page 4-4 for more information.
3. USAGE
The type of field (SELECT).
4. LINE COL LTH
5. NEXTPGM
The ID of the next program in the application to receive control from the current
program. The length of this field is determined at CA-Telon installation.

If a value is not specified here, program control can be handled using PF-key or
consistency-edit coding.
Note: This value is overridden by the value, if any, specified in the NEXTPGM
field of Create/Update Screen Definition screen.
6. SCONSIS
For input processing, the member name of the statement copied or included in the
J-100 paragraph execution for a select field.
7. HELPMSG
The field-level help message, usually a key used by the help facility to bring up
the appropriate screen.
Update/Show Screen Parameters screen. See 5.26, “Update/Show Screen
Parameters” on page 5-115, for more information.
8. INEDIT
Specifies whether CA-Telon is to execute the E-100-INPUT-EDITS section before
NEXTPGM and/or SCONSIS processing. CA-Telon generates the E-100
automatically if the program contains select fields. The E-100-INPUT-EDITS
section edits input fields according to FLDTYPE specification. Valid values are:
Y
CA-Telon executes the E-100-INPUT-EDITS section automatically. If errors
occur, CA-Telon skips the balance of processing and returns an error message
to the screen.
N
(Default) CA-Telon does not automatically execute the E-100-INPUT-EDITS
section; however, you can explicitly call it from SCONSIS code.
9. INDBIO
A value to specify whether CA-Telon is to perform the H-100 section to create
and update segments requested for auto exec. CA-Telon generates the H-100
paragraph if the program contains select fields. Valid values are:
Y
CA-Telon automatically executes the H-100-INPUT-TERM section
N
(Default) CA-Telon does not automatically execute the H-100-INPUT-TERM
section; however, you can explicitly call it from SCONSIS code
10. SELKEY
The source and target fields for the key value of a line displayed on the screen for
further processing. This specification is meaningful when input to the select field
is an identifier of an item displayed within list processing.
The two subfields that represent the range of key values used in a SEGLOOP
entry are:
FROM
The name of the data item in which key information was stored during output
processing (generally defined using the SAVEKEY parameter of the
SEGLOOP statement)

TO
The name of the data item in which the key is stored for later processing
11. DBNAME
The name of the file, working storage, or transfer work area that CA-Telon uses to
map data to and/or from the select field.
12. OF (COBOL only.)
A qualification of the DBNAME field value (for example, TAX-DUE OF
FEDERAL-RETURN). For USAGE values INPUT, OUTIN, and SELECT, you
can map to and/or from more than one field (DBNAME).
13. INIT
The initialized value of an input or select field when written to the terminal. Omit
single quotes (') or ampersands (&) from this value. Otherwise, errors will occur
during program assembly.
14. FLDTYPE
values are:
ALPHA
NONE
No automatic move. Program must perform any mapping required.
NUMERIC
field-edit
perform this edit).
See Appendix A, “Field Edit Formats” for more information.
Default values are:
Editing occurs in:
Note: A FLDTYPE value may not be specified if the SPEC value is CONVERT,
VALUES, or FORMAT.


A field to request transfer to the Update Parameter List Extension screen by
entering any nonblank character. Use this screen to specify extended fields for
installation-defined FLDTYPE edits.
To transfer, a value must already have been entered in the FLDTYPE field.
16. SPEC
FORMAT
CONVERT
RANGE
Defines one or more acceptable ranges of values for a numeric field or input.
VALUES
Defines one or more valid input values for input, outin, and select fields.
space below the SPEC field. See the discussion of the SPEC field in 4.11,
“Update Output/Input/Outin Field” on page 4-32 for details about the syntax for
entering each specification and a full description of its function.
17. ATTRPRO
Specifies whether a field is protected against application user entry when the field
is written to the terminal. It is valid on input, outin, and select fields. Valid
values are:
Y
Protect the field
N
it. For information on these fields, refer to Programming Concepts Guide.
18. ATTRINT
NORMAL
(Default) Normal intensity
HIGH
High intensity
(blank)

INPUT-HIGH-ATTR) to it. For information on reserved attribute fields,

refer to Programming Concepts Guide.
19. EACOLOR
Valid values are:
BL
Blue
RE
Red
PI
Pink
TU
Turquoise
YE
Yellow
GR
Green
DE
NE
20. EAHIGH
are:
B
BL
R
RE
D
DE
U
Underline display
UN
Underline display
21. EAVALID


Valid values are:
MF
ME
BO
program. See 4.6, “Update Panel Fields (Online)” on page 4-16 for more
information on the REQ field.
22. FMTEXIT
(IMS applications only.) An MFS field exit routine invoked for the field on input.
Two values are required for this specification:
■ Exit Routine Number (valid values: 000 through 127)
■ Exit Routine Value (valid values: 000 through 255)
23. FMTCNTL
(IMS applications only.) A value to specify that this is an output field displaying
special MFS data. Valid values are:
Y
This is a special MFS field
N
This is not a special MFS field
If FMTCNTL is Y, the FIELD NAME value (LABEL field value on other
screens) must be one of the MFS system literals:
■ DATE1
■ DATE2
■ DATE3
■ DATE4
■ TIME
■ PASSWORD
■ LTSEQ
■ LTNAME
■ LPAGENO
■ LTMSG
For fields with labels other than PASSWORD, the field usage is assumed to be
OUTPUT (other usage specifications are ignored). The field occupies space on

the screen, but does not appear in the buffers (that is, the CA-Telon program
knows nothing about the field).

4.13 Update Parameter List Extension

Access: On the Update Output/Input/Outin Field screen or on the Update Select
Fields screen, enter a nonblank character in the PARM LIST EXTENSION field.
Program ID: P186
Function: Specifies the variables that contain the values of the extended parameters
passed to the field edit specified on the previous screen.
XXXXXX.PD UPDATE PARM LIST EXTENSION

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
IEXTEND/OEXTEND MUST CONFORM TO INSTALLATION "USREDITS"
FIELD NAME OR POSITION : 2
IEXTEND 3__________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
OEXTEND 4__________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________

1. COMMAND
2. FIELD NAME OR POSITION
Protected field displaying the field name. See 4.2, “Panel Definition Menu” on
page 4-4 or 4.6, “Update Panel Fields (Online)” on page 4-16 for more
information.
3. IEXTEND
The extended parameter list for input edit. The list can contain up to nine
parameters and can include any COBOL or PL/I data name defined to the
program.
The parameters that you specify override the extra parameters (i.e., extensions)
passed to the user-written output field edit (defined earlier using the FLDTYPE
field).
Note: CA-Telon supports up to 300 override extensions per program.

4. OEXTEND
The extended parameter list for output edit. The list can contain up to nine
parameters and can include any COBOL or PL/I data name defined to the
program.
The parameters that you specify override the extra parameters (i.e., extensions)
passed to the user-written output field edit (defined earlier using the FLDTYPE
field).
Note: CA-Telon supports up to 300 override extensions per program.

4.14 List Consistency Edits

■ CE in the ITEM field
Program ID: P161
Function: Creates SRC statements, or creates or updates XFEDIT and SEGEDIT

edits.
Each line on this screen represents a separate XFEDIT, SEGEDIT, or SRC item. The
combined total may not exceed 400 items.
XXXXXX.PD LIST SRC, XFEDIT, SEGEDIT

COMMAND ==> 1_____________________________________________________ PAGE 1
SEQ TYPE DESCRIPTION (FIRST WORD IS XFEDIT/SEGEDIT NAME) OR STATEMENT CODE

2__ 3______ 4________________________________________________________________
___ _______ _________________________________________________________________
___ _______ _________________________________________________________________
___ _______ _________________________________________________________________
___ _______ _________________________________________________________________
___ _______ _________________________________________________________________
___ _______ _________________________________________________________________
___ _______ _________________________________________________________________
___ _______ _________________________________________________________________
___ _______ _________________________________________________________________
___ _______ _________________________________________________________________
___ _______ _________________________________________________________________
___ _______ _________________________________________________________________
___ _______ _________________________________________________________________
___ _______ _________________________________________________________________
___ _______ _________________________________________________________________
___ _______ _________________________________________________________________
___ _______ _________________________________________________________________

1. COMMAND
For information, see 9.5, “Primary Commands” on page 9-13. You can also use
the LOCATE command to find an item by its sequence number, using this syntax:
Locate sequence-number
2. SEQ
A field in which you can enter one of the following line commands:
C Copy a line.


I Insert a line
Inn Insert nn lines
M Move a line.
R Repeat a line.
RR Repeat a block of lines.
A Line(s) to insert, copy, or move go after this line.
B Line(s) to insert, copy, or move go before this line.
D Delete an entry.
U Update an entry.
You are transferred to the appropriate screen:
■ Update Cross-Field Edit (XFEDIT)
■ Update Segment Edit (SEGEDIT)

3. TYPE
The type of consistency edit that CA-Telon is to perform. Valid values are:
■ XFEDIT
■ SEGEDIT
■ SRC
Refer to Programming Concepts Guide for general information on SRC, XFEDIT,
and SEGEDIT.
4. DESCRIPTION
The value of this field is:
■ An identifier for and description of the consistency edit, if the TYPE value is
XFEDIT or SEGEDIT
■ The COBOL or PL/I source statement embedded in the code, if the TYPE
value is SRC
This value cannot contain a single quote (') or an ampersand (&). If it does,
errors will occur during program assembly.
For XFEDIT or SEGEDIT types, CA-Telon uses the value to identify the edit and
initialize the error message for the edit. The first blank-delimited word or the first
eight bytes (whichever is shorter) becomes an identifier to permit direct reference
to the edit. If the first word is less than 8 bytes, CA-Telon right-justifies the

remainder of the value to isolate the first word at the left of the display. If you
enter EDIT1 - THIS IS A SEGEDIT, the display returned is:
1__ SEGEDIT EDIT1___ - THIS IS A SEGEDIT
The entire description is placed in a comment at the beginning of the section or
procedure in the generated source.
If you enter an XFEDIT or SEGEDIT line on this screen, you must update the
XFEDIT or SEGEDIT before editing on this screen.
See 4.15, “Update Cross-Field Edit (XFEDIT)” on page 4-52 and 4.16, “Update
Segment Edit (SEGEDIT)” on page 4-55 for more information.

4.15 Update Cross-Field Edit (XFEDIT)

Access: On the List Consistency Edits screen, enter U in the SEQ field and
XFEDIT in the TYPE field.
After entering the data, save the entries by pressing the END PF key. If you entered
U in the multiple occurrences of the SEQ field on the List Consistency Edits screen,
the update screen for the next edit is displayed. Otherwise, control returns to the List
Consistency Edits SEGEDIT screen.
Program ID: P165
Function: Updates cross-field edit data. See 4.17, “Consistency Edits Example” on
page 4-61 for examples of entering cross-field edit fields.
HHNNNN.PD UPDATE XFEDIT

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
EDIT NAME XXXXXXXX 2
COPY EDIT BASE: 3_______ SEGLOOP: 9_
EDIT CONDITION: 4___________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________
ERROR MESSAGE: 5___________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________
HIGHLIGHT FIELDS: 6___________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________
ERRCHAR FIELDS: 7___________________________________________________________
CURSOR AT FIELD: 8_______

1. COMMAND
2. EDIT NAME
Protected field displaying the first word or first eight characters in the
DESCRIPTION field on the List Consistency Edits screen.
3. COPY EDIT BASE
The name of an existing edit whose definition values you can copy into the fields
on this screen with these steps:
1. Enter the EDIT NAME value of an edit that is listed on the List Consistency
Edits screen
2. Press [Enter]

All blank fields on the screen are initialized to the values associated with the edit
you have copied.
4. EDIT CONDITION
A conditional test for fields. When the condition is true, there is an error.
A condition can be either a COBOL 88-level field or a field/application user
combination where:
■ The field is a COBOL or PL/I variable or literal. Non-numeric literals must
be enclosed in double quotes. The maximum length is 256 bytes including
double quotes.
■ The operation is one of the following:
– The reserved word NUMERIC
– The reserved word NOT NUMERIC
– Any COBOL or PL/I operand
– An expression in the format mnemonic value or mnemonic,value where
mnemonic is LT, LE, EQ, GE, GT, or NE, and value is a COBOL or
PL/I variable, a literal (enclosed in double quotes), a COBOL reserved
word, or an expression (enclosed in single quotes) with arithmetic
symbols
■ Valid connectors are AND, OR, and THENIF
Note: THENIF causes the condition that follows to be nested inside the first
condition. You cannot specify an ELSE condition.
A valid value is at least one condition. Entering IF is optional; it is generated in
the code whether it is specified or not.
For example, if you specify
EMPL-DOB,NE,SPACES,THENIF,EMPL-DOB,GT,
'(XFER-CURRENT-DATE - 16)'
CA-Telon generates this COBOL code:
IF EMPL-DOB NOT=SPACES
IF EMPL-DOB > (XFER-CURRENT-DATE - 16)
5. ERROR MESSAGE
The error message that appears in the ERRMSG1 field when an edit condition is
true. This value is initialized to the contents of the DESCRIPTION field on the
You can specify a variable or a literal by enclosing the value in double quotes (").
If the value contains neither double quotes nor embedded blanks, it identifies a
host variable name (HVNAME).
For example:
■ If the value in this field is XFER-ERROR-MESSAGE, CA-Telon generates
this COBOL code:
MOVE XFER-ERROR-MESSAGE TO ERRMSG-FIELD.

■ If the value in this field is "ERROR MESSAGE", CA-Telon generates this

COBOL code:
MOVE 'ERROR MESSAGE' TO ERRMSG-FIELD.
6. HIGHLIGHT FIELDS
The fields highlighted when the error condition is true. Valid values are input,
output, or select field names defined in the NAME field on the Update Panel
Fields (Online) screen. See 4.6, “Update Panel Fields (Online)” on page 4-16 for
more information.
Note: CA-Telon requires a value in at least one of these fields:
■ HIGHLIGHT FIELDS
■ ERRCHAR FIELDS
■ CURSOR AT FIELD
7. ERRCHAR FIELDS
Required screen fields. Valid values are the names of input, outin, or select field
for which the REQ value is C on the Update Output/Input/Outin Field screen.
When an application user fails to input a required field, the field is highlighted,
flagged with the error-required character (usually '*'), and returned to the
application user. Cross-field edits are done before the field is returned to the user.
If a field is specified here but its REQ value is not C, CA-Telon automatically
fills a field with zeros or spaces (depending on type) when an application user
fails to input a value.
■ ERRCHAR FIELDS
■ CURSOR AT FIELD
8. CURSOR AT FIELD
The field where the cursor appears when the screen is returned to the application
user with an error condition. Valid values are the names of input, outin, or select
field names defined in the NAME field on the Update Output/Input/Outin Field
screen.
If you do not enter a value, the cursor appears at the first highlighted field.
■ ERRCHAR FIELDS
■ CURSOR AT FIELD
9. SEGLOOP
Allows this XFEDIT to be identified as belonging to a SEGLOOP. When
specified, code is generated to perform the cross-field edits in a DO-group, to test
all values in one pass, and to generate one error message for all fields in error.

4.16 Update Segment Edit (SEGEDIT)

Access: On the List Consistency Edits screen, enter U in the SEQ field next to the
segment edit to be created or updated.
After entering the data, save the entries by pressing the END PF key. If you have
entered U in multiple occurrences of the SEQ field of the List Consistency Edits
screen, the update screen for the next edit is displayed. Otherwise, control returns to
the List Consistency Edits screen.
Program ID: P168
Function: Updates segment edit data.
HHNNNN.PD UPDATE SEGEDIT

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
EDIT NAME XXXXXXXX 2
COPY EDIT BASE: 3________ SEGLOOP: 21
SEGMENT NAME: 4________ PCBNAME: 2_____________
KEY: 5____________________________________________________________
WHEN: 6____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
ERROR CONDITION: 7________
HIGHLIGHT FIELDS:8____________________________________________________________
ERRCHAR FIELDS: 9____________________________________________________________
CURSOR FIELD: 1 _______
ERROR MESSAGE: 11____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
CALL FUNC: 12________ OPCODE:13________
DLI QUALIFY 14___ CMDCODE:15_______ I/O AREA:16___________________

SSALIST: 17____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
VSAM SEGMENT LTH:18____________________________
GEN KEY LTH:19____________________________

1. COMMAND
2. EDIT NAME
Protected field displaying the first word or first eight characters in the
DESCRIPTION field on the List Consistency Edits screen.
3. COPY EDIT BASE
The name of an existing edit whose definition values you can copy into the fields
on this screen with these steps:
1. Enter the EDIT NAME value of an edit that is listed on the List Consistency
Edits screen
2. Press [Enter]

All blank fields on the screen are initialized to the values associated with the edit
you have copied.
4. SEGMENT NAME
The name of the DL/I segment, VSAM data set, or SQL TLNROW being
accessed by the SEGEDIT:
■ For DL/I:
– With segments in multiple PSBs, the value specified in the LABEL field
on the Create/Update Data Group screen
– Otherwise, the value specified in the SEGMENT field on the Update
Database Segment screen
■ For VSAM, the value specified with the DATA ITEM (data set) statement in
the NAME or LABEL field on the Show/Update Data Set Default Data screen
■ For SQL, the value specified in the CURRENT ROW NAME field on the
Select New Row Name screen
5. KEY
The name of the COBOL or PL/I variable that holds the key identifying the
record, segment, or row to be read. This value overrides the value in the KEY
field on the Create/Update Data Group screen.
Alternatively, you can enter the entire SEGEDIT WHERE clause in this field.
Use double quotes where single quotes should appear in the generated output.
For SQL, there must be a one-to-one correspondence between host variables listed
here and the key fields defined for the SEGEDIT TLNROW in the data
administration option of TDF. To use different key fields, set up a new
TLNROW with only the keys referenced in the SEGEDIT key clause.
6. WHEN
A conditional test for execution of the segment edit, in this format:
condition1[,connector1,condition2...]
When the condition is true, the remainder of the segment edit is executed. If no
value is specified, the segment edit is always executed.
Condition can be either a COBOL 88-level field or a field/application-user
combination where:
■ The field is a COBOL or PL/I variable or literal. Non-numeric literals must
be enclosed in double quotes. The maximum length is 256 bytes including
double quotes.
■ The operation is one of the following:
– The reserved word NUMERIC
– The reserved word NOT NUMERIC
– Any COBOL or PL/I operand
– An expression in the format mnemonic value or mnemonic,value where
mnemonic is LT, LE, EQ, GE, GT, or NE, and value is a COBOL or
PL/I variable, a literal (enclosed in double quotes), a COBOL reserved

word, or an expression (enclosed in single quotes) with arithmetic

symbols
Connector can be AND, OR, and THENIF.
Note: THENIF causes the condition that follows to be nested inside the first
condition. You cannot specify an ELSE condition.
Entering IF is optional; it is generated in the code whether it is specified or not.
7. ERROR CONDITION FOUND/ NOTFOUND
The condition that causes the execution of the error routine and redisplay of the
screen.
A FOUND condition exists when the:
■ DL/I return status code is spaces
■ VSAM return condition is nulls
■ SQL return code is 000
■ First byte of TS or TD queue is null (a read to a TD queue record deletes the
record)
A NOT FOUND condition exists when the:
■ DL/I return status code is GE
■ VSAM return code is NOTFND
■ SQL return code is +100
■ TS queue return status code is ITEMERR
■ TD queue return status code is QZERO
Note: Some SQL databases may use non-standard return codes for FOUND and
NOT FOUND conditions. The return codes for these databases are
converted to standard SQL return codes prior to use within generated
programs.
8. HIGHLIGHT FIELDS
The fields to be highlighted when the error condition is true. Valid values are
input, output, or select field names defined in the NAME field on the Update
Panel Fields (Online) screen.
See 4.6, “Update Panel Fields (Online)” on page 4-16 for more information.
■ ERRCHAR FIELDS
■ CURSOR AT FIELD
9. ERRCHAR FIELDS
Required screen fields. Valid values are the names of input, outin, or select field
for which the REQ value is C on the Update Output/Input/Outin Field screen.
When an application user fails to input a required field, the field is highlighted,
flagged with the error-required character (usually '*'), and returned to the
application user. Cross-field edits are done before the field is returned to the user.

Note: If a field is specified here but its REQ value is not C, CA-Telon
automatically fills a field with zeros or spaces (depending on type) when
an application user fails to input a value.
CA-Telon requires a value in at least one of these fields:
■ ERRCHAR FIELDS
■ CURSOR AT FIELD
10. CURSOR AT FIELD
The field where the cursor appears when the screen is returned to the application
user with an error condition. Valid values are the names of input, outin, or select
field names defined in the NAME field on the Update Output/Input/Outin Field
screen.
If you do not enter a value, the cursor appears at the first highlighted field.
■ ERRCHAR FIELDS
■ CURSOR AT FIELD
11. ERROR MESSAGE
The error message that appears in the ERRMSG1 field when an edit condition is
true. This value is initialized to the contents of the DESCRIPTION field on the
You can specify a variable or a literal by enclosing the value in double quotes (").
If the value contains neither double quotes nor embedded blanks, it identifies a
host variable name (HVNAME).
For example:
■ If the value in this field is XFER-ERROR-MESSAGE, CA-Telon generates
this COBOL code:
MOVE XFER-ERROR-MESSAGE TO ERRMSG-FIELD.
■ If the value in this field is "ERROR MESSAGE", CA-Telon generates this
COBOL code:
MOVE 'ERROR MESSAGE' TO ERRMSG-FIELD.
12. CALL FUNC
The I/O access code. Valid values are:
DLI
Any four-byte GET function code, such as GN or GHU
VSAM
Any eight-byte READ verb, such as READ or READNEXT
SQL
(This option not valid for SQL)

13. OPCODE
The operation code. This value overrides the value specified in the OP field on
the Update Database Segment screen. If not specified, the default is >= for
BROWSE segments and = for all other segment types.
For DL/I processing, this value causes CA-Telon to change the SSA before the
call and reset it after the call. The OPCODE field and the SSALIST field are
mutually exclusive.
For VSAM processing, the only valid values are >= and =.
For SQL processing, valid relational operators are allowed. The default is =.
14. DLI QUALIFY
The DL/I SSA for the segment edit. Valid values are:
Y
Qualify the SSA (segment-QUAL-SSA)
N
Do not qualify the SSA (segment-UNQUAL-SSA)
Note: The value in this field and the value in the SSALIST field are mutually
exclusive; specify only one.
15. CMDCODE
The DL/I SSA command code. This value overrides the command code value, if
specified, in the CMND field on the Update Database Segment screen.
The character(s) you specify are prefixed with an asterisk (*) and suffixed with
one or two dashes (-) to make a four-byte code.
Note: The value in this field and the value in the SSALIST field are mutually
exclusive; specify only one.
16. I/O AREA
The name of the data area used for this edit. This value overrides the value
specified in the I/O AREA field on the Update DL/I Detail Data Access screen or
the CA-Telon generated I/O area.
17. SSALIST
The list of DL/I SSAs. It overrides SSAs generated by CA-Telon from DSCREF
field values on the Update Database Segment screen.
You can include the current SSAs in this list. CA-Telon assumes these SSAs are
defined in your custom code.
18. VSAM SEGMENT LTH
The maximum length of VSAM variable-length records. Valid values include an
integer or the name of a variable that contains the length.
This value overrides the value specified in the RECLTH field on the Show/Update
Data Set Default Data screen.
19. GEN KEY LTH
(VSAM processing only.) The length of the generic key used for the access.
Valid values include either an integer or the name of a COBOL or PL/I variable
that contains the key length value.

If you do not enter a value, CA-Telon assumes that the access uses the full key
length.
20. PCBNAME
The PCB against which the segment edit is to execute.
21. SEGLOOP
Allows this SEGEDIT to be identified as belonging to a SEGLOOP. When
specified, code is generated to perform the segment edits in a DO-group, to test all
values in one pass, and to generate one error message for all fields in error.

4.17 Consistency Edits Example

Access: This scenario shows the entries an application developer would make to a
panel definition to perform these consistency edits:
■ Make sure the student enrollment data is not greater than today's date
■ Perform a section/procedure named MY-CUSTOM-CODE-SECTION
■ Check student number against the DL/I database to make sure the number does
not already exist
Values entered by the application developer are identified in the text and highlighted
on the screen illustration.
Step 1: The application developer accesses the Panel Definition menu and enters
these values:
■ CR in the FUNCTION field
■ CE in the ITEM field
■ ED in the HEADER field
■ MENU ADD STUDENT in the ID field
Note: ADDSTU is displayed in the FIELD field because this edit is for a select field.
Otherwise, *PANEL would be displayed in this field.
PANEL DEFINITION MENU

COMMAND ==> ___________________________________________________________________
FUNCTION: CR CR-CREATE UP-UPDATE PU-PURGE SH-SHOW LI-LIST
ITEM CE PI-IMAGE PD-DEFIN

FD-FIELD CE-CONSIS SL-SEGLOOP
(UP) (CR,UP) (CR,UP,PU)
MEMBER NAME:
HEADER ED__
ID MENU ADD STUDENT
DESC ________________________________________

1. IMAGE < > + \ (INPUT OUTPUT OUTIN SELECT LIT-BREAK CHARACTERS)
24 8 (LINE-COLUMN IMAGE SIZE)
U (UPPER/LOWER CASE LITERALS)
2. DEFIN Y Y Y Y N (INPUT OUTPUT OUTIN SELECT LITERAL FIELDS LISTED)
3. FIELD ADDSTU__ (NAME OR LINE,COLUMN OR "PANEL")
4. CONSIS ________ (TYPE - "XFEDIT", "SEGEDIT", OR BLANK FOR LIST)
________ (NAME - IF TYPE SPECIFIED)
5. SEGLOOP ________ (TYPE - "FILE" OR "TABLE")
________ (FROM NAME OR LINE,COLUMN)
________ (TO NAME OR LINE,COLUMN)

Step 2: After the application developer presses [Enter], the List Consistency Edits
screen is displayed.

In this example, two consistency edits (lines 1 and 3) and one line of source code (line
2) are defined for the field. The application developer enters U as line commands for
lines 1 and 3 to request update of the two consistency edits.
EDMENU.PD LIST SRC, XFEDIT, SEGEDIT

COMMAND ==> _____________________________________________________ PAGE 1
SEQ TYPE DESCRIPTION (FIRST WORD IS XFEDIT/SEGEDIT NAME) OR STATEMENT CODE
U1 XFEDIT DATECHK - MAKE SURE ENROLLMENT DATE IS VALID

2 SRC PERFORM MY-CUSTOM-CODE-SECTION.
U3 SEGEDIT STUNOCK - MAKE SURE STUDENT NO IS NEW
4 _______ _________________________________________________________________
5 _______ _________________________________________________________________
6 _______ _________________________________________________________________
7 _______ _________________________________________________________________
8 _______ _________________________________________________________________
9 _______ _________________________________________________________________
1 _______ _________________________________________________________________
11 _______ _________________________________________________________________
12 _______ _________________________________________________________________
13 _______ _________________________________________________________________
14 _______ _________________________________________________________________
15 _______ _________________________________________________________________
16 _______ _________________________________________________________________
17 _______ _________________________________________________________________
18 _______ _________________________________________________________________

Step 3: After the application developer presses [Enter], the Update Cross-Field Edit
(XFEDIT) screen is displayed.
The application developer modifies the EDIT CONDITION field and adds a value to
the HIGHLIGHT FIELDS field to identify the field for highlighting if the application
user enters data that is not consistent with the edit.
EDMENU.AD UPDATE XFEDIT

COMMAND ==> __________________________________________________________________
EDIT NAME DATECHK
COPY EDIT BASE: ________ SEGLOOP: _
EDIT CONDITION: STUDENT-ENROLL-DATE GT XFER-TODAYS-DATE______________________

_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
____________
ERROR MESSAGE: DATECHK MAKE SURE ENROLLMENT DATE IS VALID

_____________________________________________________________
HIGHLIGHT FIELDS: ENROLLDT____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
ERRCHAR FIELDS: _____________________________________________________________
CURSOR AT FIELD: ________


Step 4: The application developer presses [End] to save this screen and display the
Update Segment Edit (SEGEDIT) screen for the second edit, STUNOCK, previously
selected on the List Consistency Edits screen.
EDMENU.PD UPDATE SEGEDIT

COMMAND ==>___________________________________________________________________
EDIT NAME STUNOCK
SEGMENT NAME: ________ PSBNAME ___________
SEGKEY: ____________________________________________________________
WHEN: ____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
ERROR CONDITION: _________
HIGHLIGHT FIELDS: ____________________________________________________________
ERRCHAR FIELDS: ____________________________________________________________
CURSOR FIELD: _________
ERROR MESSAGE: STUNOCK MAKE SURE STUDENT NO IS NEW_________________________
____________________________________________________________
CALL FUNC: ______ OPCODE: _______
DLI QUALIFY: ____ CMDCODE: ______ I/O AREA: __________________________

SSALIST: ____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
VSAM SEGMENT LTH: ______________________________
GEN KEY LTH: ____________________________________________________________

The application developer adds or modifies these values:
■ EDSTUDNT in the SEGMENT NAME field, to identify the DL/I segment for
accesseing
■ TPI-IDENT in the SEGKEY field. The input value is IDENT and CA-Telon
adds the prefix TPI-
■ 'TPI-OPTION= "1"' to provide the condition, to be generated in an IF statement,
for execution of this edit identify the input buffer field containing the segment key
■ FOUND in the ERROR CONDITION field, to identify the condition of the error
process (that is, the error condition exists whenever the record is found)
■ IDENT in the HIGHLIGHT FIELDS field, to identify the field to highlight
whenever the error is processed
■ STUDENT ID IS ALREADY ON DB replaces the default error message that had
been carried over from the List Consistency Edits screen

EDMENU.PD UPDATE SEGEDIT

COMMAND ==>___________________________________________________________________
EDIT NAME STUNOCK
SEGMENT NAME: EDSTUDNT PSBNAME ___________
SEGKEY: TPI-IDENT___________________________________________________
WHEN: 'TPI-OPTION="1"'____________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
ERROR CONDITION: FOUND____
HIGHLIGHT FIELDS: IDENT_______________________________________________________
ERRCHAR FIELDS: ____________________________________________________________
CURSOR FIELD: _________
ERROR MESSAGE: STUDENT ID IS ALREADY ON DB_________________________________
____________________________________________________________
CALL FUNC: ______ OPCODE: _______
DLI QUALIFY: ____ CMDCODE: ______ I/O AREA: __________________________

SSALIST: ____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
VSAM SEGMENT LTH: ______________________________
GEN KEY LTH: ____________________________________________________________

Step 5: When the application developer presses [End], this screen is saved and the
List Consistency Edits screen is redisplayed.

4.18 Create/Update Table Segloop

■ SL in the ITEM field
■ TABLE in the SEGLOOP TYPE field
■ Field-name or field position in the SEGLOOP FROM field, if FUNCTION is CR
■ Field-name or field position in the SEGLOOP TO field, if FUNCTION is CR
Program ID: P170
Function: Create or update data for a table segment loop. A table segment loop
retrieves the information to be displayed from a table rather than by browsing a
segment, as is done with a file segment loop.
XXXXXX.PD CREATE TABLE SEGLOOP

COMMAND ==> 1___________________________________________________________________
OUTPUT_2 SEGLOOP LIMITS NAME LINE COLUMN

FIRST 3________ ____ ______
LAST 4________ ____ ______
INCRE _7 __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ 5 6
REPEAT _8 __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
CINCRE _9 __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
LINECNT 1____
OCUST1 11______ OCUST2 12______ OCUST3 13______
OSEGIDX 14____________________________
SAVEKEY 15____________________________ TO ______________________________
______________________________ TO ______________________________
______________________________ TO ______________________________
______________________________ TO ______________________________
______________________________ TO ______________________________
______________________________ TO ______________________________
______________________________ TO ______________________________
ISEGIDX 16____________________________
ICUST1 17______ ICUST2 18______ ICTLNM 19______

1. COMMAND
2. SEGLOOP
The type of SEGLOOP. Possible values are OUTPUT, INPUT, and OUTIN. The
value is determined automatically by the type of fields in the loop range.

3. FIRST
The name of the first field in the SEGLOOP. This value is initialized to the value
in the FROM field on the Panel Definition menu. Names are limited to six
characters for IMS and five characters for CICS.
4. LAST
The name of the last field in the SEGLOOP. This value is initialized to the value
in the TO field on the Panel Definition menu. Names are limited to six characters
for IMS and five characters for CICS.
5. LINE
The line number positions of the first field and the last fields in the SEGLOOP
group.
6. COLUMN
The column number positions of the first field and the last fields in the SEGLOOP
group.
7. INCRE
The vertical spacing for displaying the group of SEGLOOP fields on the screen,
specified in this format:
vertical-spacing1[,vertical-spacing2...]
The vertical starting point of the first line displayed is specified in the
combination of the FIRST and LINE fields, and the value in the INCRE field is
the offset relative to the position of the first line displayed. The number of offset
values specified must be one less than the number of lines that comprise the
display.
For example, if the first field is FLD1, its LINE value is 3, its COLUMN value is
6, and the INCRE specification is 1,2,1, the vertical spacing of the resulting
display is:
1---+----+----+----+
1
2
3 FLD1
4 FLD1
5
6 FLD1
7 FLD1
Note that if you want to display a specific number of iterations, you specify one
less entry. In the example above, you specify three entries to display four
iterations.
8. REPEAT
The number of times to repeat the display defined by the INCRE value.
9. CINCRE
Define the spacing between columns on the screen; that is, the number of columns
between one field in an iteration and the next iteration of the same field. (A value
of 15 would cause a field in the next loop to begin 15 columns to the right of the
same field in the prior loop, regardless of the other fields in the loop.) Specify one
CINCRE value for each column, except for the first.

For example, if you want data to appear in three columns, with the first column
beginning at position 2, the second beginning in position 20, and third beginning
at position 45, enter the CINCRE values:
18, 25
(that is, from position 2 to position 20 is 18 columns; from position 20 to 45 is 25
columns).
The number of values specified in the CINCRE field determines the number of
iterations of the line. That is, if you specify n values in the number of iterations
on each line is n+1.
For BMS processing, when you specify CINCRE, all fields in SEGLOOP must
appear on one line only. For non-BMS processing, when you specify CINCRE,
all outin and input fields in SEGLOOP must occur on one line only.
Note: When coding CINCRE, be sure that the values you specify allow enough
spaces to display all fields in the loop horizontally. Also, be sure that the
number of columns needed to display each line does not exceed the width
of the screen.
10. LINECNT
The name of an output field in which to display the line number. To suppress
display of the line number, do not enter a value here.
11. OCUST1
The name of the custom code to perform output processing after the initial auto
exec call and before mapping the first line to the screen.
12. OCUST2
The name of the custom code to perform output processing after the second auto
exec call in the SEGMENT loop and before the data is mapped to the screen.
CA-Telon performs this code if the call is successful.
13. OCUST3
The name of the custom code to perform output processing at the end of the
SEGMENT loop. CA-Telon uses it for data that is mapped to the next line of the
current screen during the next loop iteration.
CA-Telon does not execute this code if there is no more room on the screen to
contain the information mapped from the file or if the auto exec call is
unsuccessful.
14. OSEGIDX
The name of the index for the array from which output values are mapped for
each SEGLOOP pass. CA-Telon uses this information only if values are mapped
from an array. No specification is needed if the subscript SEGLOOP-COUNT is
to be used instead of an index name.
15. SAVEKEY
The names of the data items that are stored in a table at each loop iteration. The
specification is one or more pairs of data items, each including a source field and
a destination field. The second data item specified is the name of a table element

(generally in the transfer work area) in which to store information from the first
data item in each iteration of the SEGLOOP process.
The maximum length of this field is 254 characters including delimiters.
Generally, the data items define the keys for the displayed data, as specified in the
DBNAME field on the Update Output/Input/Outin Field screen, and are used to
retrieve a requested item (defined by line number) during subsequent select-option
processing.
16. ISEGIDX
The name of the index for the array being referenced in each segment loop.
CA-Telon uses this information only if values are mapped into an array. No
specification is needed if the subscript SEGLOOP-COUNT is used instead of an
index name.
17. ICUST1
The name of the exit for custom code prior to input edits (in the loop).
18. ICUST2
The name of the custom code to perform custom processing in the input
SEGMENT loop.
19. ICTLNM
The name of the screen field, in the input segment loop, that determines if editing
or mapping is done on the current iteration of the loop.
If the specified screen field is blank, CA-Telon:
■ Sets the LINE-INPUT-ERROR field value to N
■ Does not increment the LINE-INPUT-COUNT value
■ Passes control to custom code (if ICUST2 is specified) or to the bottom of the
input loop; optionally, you can terminate the processing of the loop in the
custom code

4.19 Create/Update File Segloop

■ SL in the ITEM field
■ FILE in the SEGLOOP TYPE field
■ Field-name or field position in the SEGLOOP FROM field, if FUNCTION is CR
■ Field-name or field position in the SEGLOOP TO field, if FUNCTION is CR
Program ID: P175
Function: Create or update data for a file segment loop. A file segment loop
retrieves information by browsing a segment, file, or criteria from table SELECT,
rather than from a table, as is done with a table segment loop.

XXXXXX.PD CREATE SEGLOOP
COMMAND ==> 1 __________________________________________________________________
OUTPUT 2 SEGLOOP LIMITS NAME LINE COLUMN
FIRST 3 ________ ___ _____
LAST 4 ________ ___ _____
INCRE 7 __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ 5 6
REPEAT 8 __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
CINCRE 9 __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
LINECNT 1 ______
PAGE 11 _ PAGESAV 12 __ PKYUNIQ 13 _ PKYLTH 14 ___
PAGEKEY 15 ____________________________________________________________
OCUST1 16 ________ OCUST2 17 ________ OCUST3 18 ________
OSEGIDX 19 ______________________________
SAVEKEY 2 ______________________________
______________________________ TO _____________________________
______________________________ TO _____________________________
______________________________ TO _____________________________
______________________________ TO _____________________________
______________________________ TO _____________________________
______________________________ TO _____________________________
______________________________ TO _____________________________
STBRKEY 21 ________________________ ISEGIDX 22 ________________________
ICUST1 23 ____________ ICUST2 24 ____________ ICTLNM 25 ____________

1. COMMAND
2. SEGLOOP
The type of SEGLOOP. Possible values are OUTPUT, INPUT, and OUTIN. The
value is determined automatically by the type of fields in the loop range.

3. FIRST
The name of the first field in the SEGLOOP. This value is initialized to the value
in the FROM field on the Panel Definition menu. Names are limited to six
characters for IMS and five characters for CICS.
4. LAST
The name of the last field in the SEGLOOP. This value is initialized to the value
in the TO field on the Panel Definition menu. Names are limited to six characters
for IMS and five characters for CICS.
5. LINE
The line number of the field.
6. COLUMN
The column number of the field.
7. INCRE
The vertical spacing for displaying the group of SEGLOOP fields on the screen;
vertical-spacing1[,vertical-spacing2...]
The vertical starting point of the first line displayed is specified in the
combination of the FIRST and LINE fields, and the value in the INCRE field is
the offset relative to the position of the first line displayed. The number of offset
values specified must be one less than the number of lines that comprise the
display.
For example, if the first field is FLD1, its LINE value is 3, its COLUMN value is
6, and the INCRE specification is 1,2,1, the vertical spacing of the resulting
display is:
1---+----+----+----+
1
2
3 FLD1
4 FLD1
5
6 FLD1
7 FLD1
Note that if you want to display a specific number of iterations, you specify one
less entry. In the example above, you specify three entries to display four
iterations.
8. REPEAT
Specify the number of times you want to REPEAT the INCRE in the group. For
example, a repetition of four results in four occurrences of the INCRE, which
results in four plus the one occurrence of the group that was painted on the Panel
Image.
9. CINCRE
horizontal-spacing1[,horizontal-spacing2]...
Define the spacing between columns on the screen; that is, the number of columns
between one field in an iteration and the next iteration of the same field. (A value
of 15 would cause a field in the next loop to begin 15 columns to the right of the

same field in the prior loop, regardless of the other fields in the loop.) Specify
one CINCRE value for each column, except for the first.
For example, if you want data to appear in three columns, with the first column
beginning at position 2, the second beginning in position 20, and third beginning
at position 45, enter the CINCRE values:
18, 25
(that is, from position 2 to position 20 is 18 columns; from position 20 to 45 is 25
columns).
The number of values specified in the CINCRE field determines the number of
iterations of the line. That is, if you specify n values in CINCRE, the number of
iterations on each line is n+1.
For BMS processing, when you specify CINCRE, all fields in SEGLOOP must
appear on one line only. For non-BMS processing, when you specify CINCRE,
all outin and input fields in SEGLOOP must occur on one line only.
Note: When coding CINCRE, be sure that the values you specify allow enough
spaces to display all fields in the loop horizontally. Also, be sure that the
number of columns needed to display each line does not exceed the width
of the screen.
10. LINECNT
The name of an output field which is to display the line number. To suppress
display of the line number, do not enter a value.
11. PAGE
A value to specify whether CA-Telon or the application user is to generate paging.
Valid values are:
Y
Automatically generate paging
N
Do not automatically generate paging
12. PAGESAV
The number of screens that can be paged backward consecutively before the first
screen is redisplayed.
13. PKYUNIQ
A value to specify whether allow non-unique keys are allowed for the PAGEKEY
Y
Key must be unique
N
Non-unique keys allowed
14. PKYLTH
The length (in bytes) of the key identified by the PAGEKEY value.

15. PAGEKEY
The data item that contains the key of the segments being displayed on the list
screen. This data is saved in the transfer work area to implement automatic
paging.
Note: For SQL, a PAGEKEY value is not valid. If you specify a value in this
field, the Generator issues an error message.
16. OCUST1
The name of the custom code to perform output processing after the initial auto
exec call and before the first line mapped to the screen. OCUST1 custom code is
usually used in tandem with custom code identified in either the OCUST2 field or
OCUST3 field.
17. OCUST2
The name of the custom code to perform output processing after all subsequent
auto exec calls in the segment loop, before the data is mapped to the screen.
CA-Telon performs this code if the auto exec call is successful, whether or not the
end of page has been reached.
Note: CA-Telon performs one additional read after end of page is reached, to
establish a starting point for the next page. Use OCUST2 to check for
additional validation criteria for display. This precludes display of a blank
page when a successful auto exec call is not sufficient for validation.
18. OCUST3
The name of the custom code to perform output processing at the end of the
segment loop. CA-Telon uses this code for data that is mapped out to the next
line of the current screen during the next loop iteration. CA-Telon does not
execute this code if there is no more room on the screen to contain the
information mapped from the file.
OCUST3, and OCUST1 for the first record, are generally used to format data for
display on the screen.
19. OSEGIDX
The name of the index for the array from which output values are mapped for
each SEGLOOP pass. This information is used only if values are mapped from an
array. No specification is needed if the subscript SEGLOOP-COUNT is used
instead of an index name.
20. SAVEKEY
The names of the data items that are stored in a table at each loop iteration. The
specification is one or more pairs of data items, each including a source field and
a destination field. The second data item specified is the name of a table element
(generally in the transfer work area) in which to store information from the first
data item in each iteration of the SEGLOOP process.
The maximum length of this field is 254 characters including delimiters.
Generally, the data items define the keys for the displayed data, as specified in the
DBNAME field on the Update Output/Input/Outin Field screen, and are used to
retrieve a requested item (defined by line number) during subsequent select-option
processing.

Note: For TS queues, the key should be the queue ITEM number.
21. STBRKEY
The start browse key is the data item that contains the key data used in accessing
the first record to appear in the SEGLOOP on this screen. Only a single item
may appear in this field, though it may identify a structure (for COBOL) or the
overlay of a structure (for PL/I).
For DL/I, CA-Telon uses this value in the SSA for the first GU call to start the
looping process. You cannot use this field with the SCHFLDC, SCHFLDI, and
SCHFLDL fields.
For VSAM, CA-Telon uses this value as a unique key that is read to start the
looping process. For temporary storage queues, CA-Telon uses it as the startup
ITEM member for the browse. The value must be a binary half word.
For SQL, CA-Telon uses the value in STBRKEY to assign to the aggregate
structure CURRENT-SEGMENT-KEY. The individual components of that
structure are subsequently assigned to the key fields used in the SQL SELECT
call.
For PL/I, if the SEGLOOP key is defined as decimal (for example, PIC S9(5)
COMP-3, DEC FIXED, SQL integer) or binary (for example, PIC S9(4) COMP,
BIN FIXED, SQL float), you must define a character string to overlay the key
field, and then define that overlay field as the STBRKEY. For example:
SEGLOOP ...STBRKEY=OVERDEC...
COBOL
5 DECFLD PIC S9(5) COMP-3.
5 OVERDEC PIC X(3) REDEFINES DECFLD.
PL/I
DCL DECFLD DEC FIXED (6,)
OVERDEC CHAR(4) BASED(ADDR(DECFLD));
For COBOL and PL/I DL/I programs, where the AUTOEXEC BROWSE segment
has a KEYPIC on it, STBRKEY has the same definition as the KEYPIC field.
Refer to Programming Concepts Guide for more information.
22. ISEGIDX
The name of the index for the array being referenced in each segment loop.
CA-Telon uses this information only if values are mapped into an array. No
specification is needed if the subscript SEGLOOP-COUNT is to be used instead
of an index name.
23. ICUST1
An exit name for custom code prior to input edits (in the loop).
24. ICUST2
The name of custom code to perform custom processing in the input segment
loop.
25. ICTLNM
The name of the screen field, in the input segment loop, that determines if editing
or mapping is done on the current iteration of the loop.

If the specified screen field is blank, CA-Telon:

■ Sets the LINE-INPUT-ERROR field value to N
■ Does not increment the LINE-INPUT-COUNT value
■ Passes control to custom code (if ICUST2 is specified) or to the bottom of the
input loop; optionally, you can terminate the processing of the loop in the
custom code
26. SCHFLDC
(Applicable only to a SEGLOOP program converted from a release prior to 2.0.
Valid only for DL/I-controlled SEGLOOPs.) The data item that contains the
search criteria used in accessing records on the list screen. This data is used in
the SSA to determine which segments are listed and must be set up prior to the
transfer to this screen.
This field is generally used to list all segments that have an IMS-defined search
field equal to a particular value.
If you specify a value, be sure to enter = in the OPCODE field on the Update
Database Segment screen for the lowest level browse segment to override the
standard >= value.
SCHFLDC is not used when the STBRKEY field is used to set up the SSA for
the search I/O. If SCHFLDC is specified, SCHFLDI and SCHFLDL values must
also be specified.
27. SCHFLDI
Valid only for DL/I-controlled SEGLOOPs.) The name of the field in the
segment against which the SEGLOOP search is directed. The segments listed are
those segments whose SCHFLDI field values match the value in the SCHFLDC
field.
If you specify SCHFLDI, you must also specify SCHFLDC and SCHFLDL
values.
28. SCHFLDL
Valid only for DL/I-controlled SEGLOOPs.) The length of the SCHFLDC and
SCHFLDI fields. CA-Telon uses this value to set up the SSA for the search I/O.
If SCHFLDL is specified, SCHFLDC and SCHFLDI values must also be
specified.
Note: - These fields are only valid for programs created in CA-Telon prior to
release 2.0.

Chapter 5. Online Program Definition
Chapter 5. Online Program Definition 5-1

5.1 Introduction
5.1 Introduction
This chapter discusses the online program definition function, Option 4 on the TDF
Main menu.
Once you have created a panel image and panel definition, the next step in creating the
program is to create a program definition. That definition can be:
■ A screen
■ A driver
■ A report
■ A nonterminal program (CICS)
■ A batch program
Note: The batch program definition function is described in Chapter 6, “Batch
Program Definition.”
The following diagram shows the components of an online program definition:
The online program definition function allows you to:

■ Define general screen/report characteristics
■ Define data accessed by the program
■ Create custom code
■ Identify the environment in which the program executes, including client/server
generation.
Note: Using CA-Telon definition utilities, previously-exported online program
definitions can be imported into TDF online program definition for
maintenance. Refer to Utilities Guide for more information.

5.1 Introduction
5.1.1 Screen and Report Characteristics

The screen definition consists of all the field values that the TDF requires to create
your application program. For example, custom code created on other TDF screens is
part of the screen definition.
The screen or report definition includes:

■ Cursor positioning
■ The next program to be executed
■ Remarks
■ The name of the transfer work area (XFERWKA) layout
■ The name of the other program work area custom code
■ The names of the various other custom code members added to designated areas
of the program
You enter these values in fields of various TDF screens described in this chapter.
5.1.2 Data Access

You can define two types of data access: automatically executed (auto exec) and user
executed (user exec).
Auto exec I/O: When your program always performs the same action with the data
(read, write, create, or update), you can create high-level, auto exec I/O. The
CA-Telon-generated program then accesses that data function with each execution of
the program. Use the Create/Update Data Group screen to set up this automatic I/O.
CA-Telon places code for auto exec calls in A-100-, B-100-, D-100-, and H-100-
sections of the program depending on the type of call requested.
User exec I/O: When the same I/O must perform different processing based on
varying conditions in the program, you create a user exec I/O with the Create/Update
Data Group screen.
When the type of data access is conditional, you will create different I/O and control
its execution. When you create user exec data access, CA-Telon generates the code in
a U-100 section or procedure that can be performed or called from any custom code
entry point.

5.1 Introduction
5.1.3 Custom Code

Although CA-Telon automatically generates most of the code needed in your program,
there are some cases that require your own custom code to complete your task.
Defining custom code: The custom code screen of the program definition
submenu allows you to enter that code using the CA-Telon editor. Refer to
Programming Concepts Guide for program flowcharts that illustrate the normal entry
points for your custom code.
Placing custom code: You can insert custom code at almost any point of your
CA-Telon-generated program. You identify the location for placing particular custom
code members by naming those members in the screen definition, report definition, and
driver definition.
5.1.4 Program Environment

Finally, you identify the environment in which the program will run. Screens
described in this chapter allow you to define IMS/DC or CICS environment.
For other environments, refer to the appropriate document:

■ PWS Option Administrator Guide
■ Target Option for UNIX Guide
■ Target Option for Windows Character Guide
■ Target Option for AS/400 Guide

5.2 Online Program Definition Menu

Access: Access this menu in one of these ways:
■ On the TDF Main menu, enter 4 in the FUNCTION field
■ On most other CA-Telon screens, enter =4 in the COMMAND field
Program ID: S100
Function: Allows you to:

■ Create, update, purge, show, and list program definitions
■ Access the data group, custom code, and environment screens
This is the long form of the menu. CA-Telon displays this menu when the USER
MODE field on the Update Session Controls screen contains the value 2. CA-Telon
displays the short form of the menu when the USER MODE field on the Update
Session Controls screen contains the value 1. See 2.9, “Update Session Controls” on
page 2-30 for more information.
The short form of the menu contains a subset of the fields on the long form.
ONLINE SCREEN DEFINITION MENU

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
ITEM: 3_ SD-SCREEN DR-DRIVER RD-REPORT ND-NONTERMINAL

DG-DATA GROUP CC-CUSTOM CODE EN-ENVIRON
MEMBER NAME:
HEADER 4____
ID 5____ TYPE 6_ (SD, DR, RD, ND)
DESC 7______________________________________________________________
BASE DEFN : 8_____ (FOR CREATE - NAME OF BASE SD, DR, RD OR ND)

1. ENVIRON 9_____ (CICS, IMS, AS4, UNIX, WINCH)
2. CUSTCODE 1________ (NAME OF CUSTOM CODE)

1. COMMAND
For information, see 9.5, “Primary Commands” on page 9-13. You can also enter
the SETMODE command to swap between the long form and short form of this
menu.
2. FUNCTION
The type of function to perform on the named ITEM. The initial value is UP
(update). Valid values are:

CR
Create a screen definition, driver definition, report or CICS nonterminal
definition.
UP
Update a screen definition, driver definition, report or CICS nonterminal
definition.
PU
Purge a screen definition, driver definition, report or CICS nonterminal
definition.
SH
Show a screen definition, driver definition, or report definition. The screen
that is displayed consists of protected fields.
LI
List entities starting with the requested HEADER and ID. You can copy,
rename, purge, update, or browse entities that are listed.
3. ITEM
The item with which you will work. Valid values are:
SD
Screen definition
DR
Driver definition
RD
Report definition
ND
CICS nonterminal definition
DG
Data group
CC
Custom code
EN
Environment
4. HEADER
A one- to five-character name identifying a group of programs (that is, an
application or a portion of an application).
The length of this field is determined at installation time. The combined length of
HEADER and ID must be five or six characters, depending on the installation
options.
5. ID
A one- to five-character name that uniquely identifies one of the following within
a particular HEADER:
■ Screen definition
■ Report definition
■ CICS nonterminal definition
■ Driver definition
■ Panel image

The combined length of HEADER and ID must be five or six characters,

depending on the installation options.
6. TYPE
The type of definition. Valid values are:
SD
Screen definition
DR
Driver definition
RD
Report definition
ND
CICS nonterminal definition
7. DESC
The description entered on the Panel Definition menu. If you have not previously
accessed the Panel Definition menu, this field is blank.
8. BASE DEFN
The concatenation of HEADER and ID values of an existing screen, driver, or
report definition to copy.
Use of this field is optional. You can use this field only when the FUNCTION
value is CR.
9. ENVIRON
The program environment targets. Valid values are:
■ IMS
■ CICS
■ AS400
■ UNIX
■ WINCH
( — Valid on PWS or on OS/390 if the corresponding target option is installed.)
10. CUSTCODE
The name of the custom code member you are creating or updating. You must
enter a value for this field when the value in the ITEM field is CC.

5.3 Create/Update Screen Definition

Access: On the Online Program Definition menu, enter:
■ SD in the ITEM field
You can also access this screen from the List Data Administration Information screen
by entering U as a line command for a listing of a screen definition.
Program ID: S110
Function: Maintains characteristics of a screen definition and provides access to

other TDF screens to complete the screen definition.
HHNNNN.SD UPDATE SCREEN DEFINITION

COMMAND ==> 1__________________________________________________________________
2 OPTIONS ==> CUSTOM CODE _ DATA GROUP _ PANEL DEF _ ENV IMS _ SCRN PARMS_
STORED PROCEDURES _
GENERAL: DESC 3_______________________________________ 4 REMARKS 5_______
NEXTPGM 6____ CURSOR 7_______ SIZE 8_ X ___ LANG 9__ (COB/PLI)
CMPLOPT 1________ 4 IDENTIF 11________ 4 PROCEDR 12________
DATA XFERWKA 13________________________________________________________
AREAS: 4 WKAREA 14________________________________________________________ _
OUTPUT:
A-1 4 OINIT1 15______ 4 OINIT2 16______ 4 CURSCUS 17______
B-1 4 OUTTERM 18______
INPUT:
P-1 PFKEYS 19___________________________________________________________ _
D-1 4 ININIT1 2______ 4 ININIT2 21______
J-1 SELECT FIELDS 22
E-1 4 FLDEDIT 23______
X-1 24_ SCREEN XFEDIT/SEGEDIT 4 CONSIS 25______
H-1 4 INTERM 26______
MISC: 4 SECTION 27__________________________________________________________ _

PGMCUST 28_________________________________________________________ _

Fields allowing entry of multiple members: Five fields allow you to specify
more than one member name:
■ XFERWKA
■ WKAREA
■ PFKEYS
■ SECTION
■ PGMCUST

The XFERWKA, PFKEYS, and PGMCUST fields have no edit option field; therefore,
you cannot select the custom code editor for these fields. Members entered into these
fields are usually stored in shared libraries.
The WKAREA and SECTION fields have an edit option field. However, you can
access the Editor only when one member name exists for the field. If you have
specified more than one member name for the field, go to the List/Show Custom Code
screen to select the member for editing.
All five fields that accept specification of multiple members can contain a maximum
of 253 bytes of data. You can specify 60 bytes for each field on this screen; you can
enter U in a one-byte field to the right of the 60th byte to request an extension screen
for additional space. When you return from the extension screen, the plus sign (+)
character appears in the one-byte field.
Show/Purge screen: You can access the Show/Purge Screen Definition (S114)
screen from the Online Program Definition menu by entering:
■ SD in the ITEM field
Alternatively, on the List Panel Definitions screen, you can enter S or P as a line
command for a screen definition (SD).
The Show/Purge Screen Definition screen fields are the same as the Create/Update
Screen Definition screen fields.
1. COMMAND
You can also enter one of the following commands to invoke the custom code
editor for a specified member:
■ CREATE member-name [member-description]
■ EDIT member-name [member-description]
■ UPDATE member-name
■ SHOW member-name
2. OPTIONS
Other TDF functions to complete the necessary specifications of the program
definition. Enter any single non-blank character in the input field to the right:
Option You Can Select Resulting Screen Display

CUSTOM CODE List/Show Custom Code
DATA GROUP Create/Update Data Group
PANEL DEF Update Panel Fields (Online)


ENV environment The appropriate update screen environment screen, as
specified on the Update Session Controls screen
SCRN PARMS Update/Show Screen Parameters
STORED PROCEDURES List Stored Procedures to be called
3. DESC
The description entered on the Online Program Definition menu. You can modify
the description here.
4. Edit Flag fields
Some fields on this screen for which you supply custom code member names are
preceded by a one-position edit option field. The list below provides valid edit
option values and the functions that they invoke:
U
CA-Telon transfers control to a blank edit screen allowing you to create a
custom code member. If you have already created a custom code member,
CA-Telon transfers to the List Custom Code screen after you enter the custom
code member name in the associated field.
If you have not specified a custom code member in the associated field,
CA-Telon automatically creates a custom code member and gives it the name
of the corresponding entry point. For example, if you enter U in the edit
option field for OINIT1 but have not specified a name, CA-Telon names the
custom code member OINIT1. The next time you access the Create/Update
Screen Definition screen, the value **DFLT** is displayed in the name field
to signify that the name matches the entry point name and that the field is
protected.
O
CA-Telon erases the value displayed in the associated field, including the
value **DFLT**.
This action simply eliminates the association between this entry and the
custom code member. It does not delete the member. Its purpose is to allow
you to rename the custom code member or associate it with another entry
point.
S
CA-Telon passes control to the custom code editor and returns the requested
member in show mode.
5. REMARKS
The name of the custom code member to add to the COBOL REMARKS section
of the program or to the beginning of the PL/I program.

6. NEXTPGM
The ID of the next program in the application to receive control from the current
program. The actual length of the NEXTPGM field is set at CA-Telon
installation.
Note: If the program transfer control is handled using select field options, PF-key
coding, or consistency edit coding, do not enter a value in this field. If you
specify a value, CA-Telon passes control to the program identified, unless
PF-key action specifies the next program and sets the PF-key return code
field (CONTROL-INDICATOR) to R.
7. CURSOR
The label name of the field where the cursor is positioned when the application
user initially accesses the screen. Alternatively, you can position the cursor
through custom code by using the CURSCUS field.
Note: The label name can be the label of only an input, outin, or select field.
8. SIZE
The number of lines and columns on the screen, in the format ll ccc:
ll
A two-digit number indicating the number of lines
ccc
a three-digit number indicating the number of columns
SIZE defaults to the size of the panel definition, which is either 24 x 80 or the
value specified for the PANEL SIZE field on the Update Sessions Controls screen.
If overridden, the size must be larger than the size of the associated panel
definition.
9. LANG
The programming language in which CA-Telon is to generate the program. This
field is not used in installations using only one language. Valid values are:
COB
COBOL, COBOL II
PLI
PL/I
The language specified here overrides the default language set on the Update
Program Definition Defaults screen. If the default was not set, a value in this field
is required.
10. CMPLOPT
Compiler parameters to be included in the generated program before the COBOL
IDENTIFICATION DIVISION line or the PL/I PROC statement. The field on
this screen contains 16 bytes. Once an entry has been made in the field, an
extension field is presented after the field. If you need to enter a longer value,
place a "U" in the extension field to go to the "Update Parameter Overflow"
screen, where you can enter a total of 253 bytes, including commas.
11. IDENTIF
The custom code COPY member name to be added after the COBOL
IDENTIFICATION DIVISION line for specification of INITIAL and other

Identification Division options, or in the parentheses after OPTIONS in the PL/I

PROC statement.
Note: When this copybook is used for PL/I, "MAIN" must be coded if it is
desired.
12. PROCEDR
The custom code COPY member name to be added before the PROCEDURE
DIVISION line for specification of Declaratives after the Procedure Division.
This copybook is valid only for COBOL; it does not appear on the screen for a
PL/I program.
13. XFERWKA
The custom code COPY member names to add to the TRANSFER WORK AREA
section of the program.
You can specify a maximum of 20 COPY member names, each separated by a
comma, and a maximum string length of 253 bytes.
You must enter a value for this field, unless you are performing a create function
and you specified a XFERWKA list on the Update Program Definition Defaults
screen. In this case, that value is the default for this field.
14. WKAREA
The names of the COPY member(s) that contain a definition of a work area to add
to the DATA DIVISION section of the COBOL program. The COPY members
can be included as part of the screen definition or as members of a library.
You can specify a maximum of 20 COPY members, each separated by a comma,
and a maximum string length of 253 bytes.
Note: COPY members that you specify here are in addition to the standard
application COPY member named hhWKAREA, where hh is the variable
application header.
Refer to Programming Concepts Guide for information on hhWKAREA.
15. OINIT1
The name of the custom code member to place in the A-100-OUTPUT-INIT
section before the automatic database or file read statements (that is, to perform
special I/O, initialize areas, and so on).
If there is no automatic read, CA-Telon still inserts this custom code member in
the same section or procedure and can use the custom code member for custom
database or file reads.
16. OINIT2
The name of the custom code member to place in the A-100-OUTPUT-INIT after
automatic database or file read statements.
If there is no automatic read, CA-Telon still inserts this custom code member in
the same section or procedure and can use the custom code member for custom
database or file reads.

17. CURSCUS
The name of the custom code member that contains cursor positioning logic.
Refer to Programming Concepts Guide for more information on cursor
positioning.
Note: If you are using the CURSOR field, CA-Telon positions CURSCUS
custom code after the code generated to set the cursor.
18. OUTTERM
The custom code added at the end of the B-100-OUTPUT-EDITS section. This
logic is performed after output edit processing and after SEGLOOP processing (if
defined).
19. PFKEYS
The COPY or INCLUDE code to process PF keys to include in the
P-100-PFKEYS section of the generated program. CA-Telon generates a COPY or
INCLUDE statement for each entry.
As installed, the format is hhPFKnnn, where:
hh
Value in the Online Program Definition menu HEADER field
nnn
The PF key number. The value is generally 1 to 24 but can be any one- to
three-character value; for example, the value OTH means other PF keys.
Note: The scroll keys (page forward and page backward) established at
installation are automatically requested when paging is specified on
the Create/Update File Segloop screen.
The maximum string length is 253 bytes.
20. ININIT1
The name of the custom code added in the D-100-INPUT-INIT section of the
program, prior to any auto exec.
21. ININIT2
The name of the custom code added in the D-100-INPUT-INIT section of the
program, following any auto exec.
22. SELECT FIELDS
Enter any non-blank character in this field to access the Update Select Fields
screen. The TDF presents the Update Select Fields screen only if the panel
has select fields.
Note: This field does not show presence or absence of consistency edits or
select fields. This information is given on the Update Select
Parameters screen.
23. FLDEDIT
The name of the custom code added in the E-100-INPUT-EDITS section of
the program. CA-Telon executes this custom code after performing all
individual field edits.
24. SCREEN XFEDIT/ SEGEDIT
Enter any single non-blank character in this field to access the List
Consistency Edits screen. If a consistency edit exists, this field contains a
plus sign (+).

25. CONSIS
The name of the custom code added in the X-100-CONSIS-EDITS
(consistency edits) section of the program.
26. INTERM
The name of the custom code added in the H-100-INPUT-TERM
(termination) section of the program, following any auto exec.
27. SECTION
The name or names of the custom code member or members that contain the
COBOL sections or PL/I procedures.
You can perform the section or procedure from other parts of the program.
You can store the section in a common library, or the section can be unique
to this screen.
The maximum number of COPY members you can include is 35, each
separated by a comma, and the maximum input value for this field is 253
bytes including commas.
28. PGMCUST
code, and the name of the custom code member to be added. The default is
the value in the PGMCUST field on the Update Program Definition Defaults
screen. You can make multiple specifications using this format:
section-name1, member-name1,
section-name2, member-name2,...
Section-name
The four-character identifier of the section or procedure in which to
include the custom code (for example, H100) and a suffix (I or T) that
specifies whether to include the code at the beginning (I) of the section or
procedure, or at the end (T).
For example, H100I specifies section H100 is included at the beginning
of the program and E100T specifies section E100 is included at the end
of the program.
Member-name
The name of the custom code added at the location specified by
section-name.
Thus, the value A100I,OUTIDC specifies the custom code named
Note: PGMCUST must be specified in the SETENV field of MACLIB
member TLNIIS for any program to use an exit name.
You can include PGMCUST at the beginning and end of any section or
procedure within the program, with the exception of U-100 sections or
procedures generated by I/O statements (that is, CREATE, DELETE, READ,
and UPDATE). On a CREATE statement, the value defaults to profile
PGMCUST field.
The maximum input value for this field is 253 bytes including commas.
The following section names are available for Screen programs:

Section Description
A100I A-100-OUTPUT-INIT (beginning of section)
A100T A-100-OUTPUT-INIT (end of section)
B100I B-100-OUTPUT-EDITS (beginning of section)
B100T B-100-OUTPUT-EDITS (end of section)
C100I C-100-TERMIO-READ (beginning of section)
C100T C-100-TERMIO-READ (end of section)
C200I C-200-TERMIO-WRITE (beginning of section)
C200T C-200-TERMIO-WRITE (end of section)
C210I C-210-TERMIO-WRITE-INITIAL (beginning of section)
C210T C-210-TERMIO-WRITE-INITIAL (end of section)
C220I C-210-TERMIO-WRITE-SUBQUENT (beginning of section)
C220T C-210-TERMIO-WRITE-SUBQUENT (end of section)
C300I C-300-TERMIO-XFER (beginning of section)
C300T C-300-TERMIO-XFER (end of section)
C400I C-400-TERMIO-MSG-SWITCH (beginning of section)
C400T C-400-TERMIO-MSG-SWITCH (end of section)
C500I C-500-FORM-INIT (beginning of section; character client)
C500T C-500-FORM-INIT (end of section; character client)
C600I C-600-PROCESS-FORM (beginning of section; character
client)
C600T C-600-PROCESS-FORM (end of section; character client)
C700I C-700-TP-TO-CLI-ATTR (beginning of section; character
client)
C700T C-700-TP-TO-CLI-ATTR (end of section; character client)
C710I C-710-TP-SEARCH-TABLE (beginning of section; character
client)
C710T C-710-TP-SEARCH-TABLE (end of section; character client)
C730I C-730-ATTRIB-LOOP (beginning of section; character client)
C730T C-730-ATTRIB-LOOP (end of section; character client)
C800I C-800-CLI-TO-TP-ATTR (beginning of section; character
client)
C800T C-800-CLI-TO-TP-ATTR (end of section; character client)

Section Description
C810I C-810-CLI-SEARCH-TABLE (beginning of section; character
client)
C810T C-810-CLI-SEARCH-TABLE (end of section; character client)
C830I C-830-ATTRIB-LOOP (beginning of section; character client)
C830T C-830-ATTRIB-LOOP (end of section; character client)
C910I C-910-GET-MESSAGE & C-910-TERMIO-SAVE (beginning
of section; IMS screen programs and drivers and AS/400 and
UNIX screen programs, respectively)
C910T C-910-GET-MESSAGE & C-910-TERMIO-SAVE (end of
section; IMS screen programs and drivers and AS/400 and
UNIX screen programs, respectively)
C920I C-920-GET-WORKSPA (beginning of section; IMS screen
programs and drivers with WORKSPA)
C920T C-920-GET-WORKSPA (end of section; IMS screen programs
and drivers with WORKSPA)
C925I C-925-INSERT-WORKSPA (beginning of section; IMS screen
C925T C-925-INSERT-WORKSPA (end of section; IMS screen
C930I C-930-INPUT-MERGE (beginning of section)
C930T C-930-INPUT-MERGE (end of section)
C935I C-935-INPUT-MERGE-LOOP (beginning of section)
C935T C-935-INPUT-MERGE-LOOP (end of section)
C940I C-940-OUTPUT-MERGE (beginning of section)
C940T C-940-OUTPUT-MERGE (end of section)
C945I C-945-OUTPUT-MERGE-LOOP (beginning of section)
C945T C-945-OUTPUT-MERGE-LOOP (end of section)
C948I C-948-OUTPUT-OUTIFIL (beginning of section)
C948T C-948-OUTPUT-OUTIFIL (end of section)
C950I C-950-PUT-WORKSPA (beginning of section; IMS screen
C950T C-950-PUT-WORKSPA (end of section; IMS screen
C960I C-960-PUT-SPA (beginning of section; IMS screen programs
and drivers with SPA)

Section Description
C960T C-960-PUT-SPA (end of section; IMS screen programs and
drivers with WORKSPA)
C970I C-970-PUT-MESSAGE (beginning of section)
C970T C-970-PUT-MESSAGE (end of section)
C990I C-990-BUFFER-INIT (beginning of section)
C990T C-990-BUFFER-INIT (beginning of section)
C995I C-995-BUFFER-INIT-LOOP (beginning of section)
C995T C-995-BUFFER-INIT-LOOP (end of section)
C999I C-999-TERMIO-EXEC (beginning of section)
C999T C-999-TERMIO-EXEC (end of section)
D100I D-100-INPUT-INIT (beginning of section)
D100T D-100-INPUT-INIT (end of section)
E100I E-100-INPUT-EDITS (beginning of section)
E100T E-100-INPUT-EDITS (end of section)
E200I E-200-PROCESS-FIELD (beginning of section)
E200T E-200-PROCESS-FIELD (end of section)
H100I H-100-INPUT-TERM (beginning of section)
H100T H-100-INPUT-TERM (end of section)
J100I J-100-SELECT (beginning of section)
J100T J-100-SELECT (end of section)
K100I K-100-HOLD-RESTORE (beginning of section)
K100T K-100-HOLD-RESTORE (end of section)
K200I K-200-HOLD-RESUME (beginning of section)
K200T K-200-HOLD-RESUME (end of section)
K300I K-300-WINDOWS (beginning of section)
K300T K-300-WINDOWS (end of section)
K310I K-310-WINDOW-SAVE (beginning of section)
K310T K-310-WINDOW-SAVE (end of section)
K320I K-320-WINDOW-CLEANUP (beginning of section)
K320T K-320-WINDOW-CLEANUP (end of section)
K330I K-330-WINDOW-RESTORE (beginning of section)

Section Description
K330T K-330-WINDOW-RESTORE (end of section)
L100I L-100-HOLD-SAVE (beginning of section)
L100T L-100-HOLD-SAVE (end of section)
L990I L-990-INSERT-HOLD (beginning of section)
L990T L-990-INSERT-HOLD (end of section)
M100I M-100-HELP-ANALYZE (beginning of section)
M100T M-100-HELP-ANALYZE (end of section)
MAINFIELD MAIN-FIELD-PROCESS (end of section; CICS character
client/server)
MAINFIELDI MAIN-FIELD-PROCESS (beginning of section; CICS
character client/server)
MAINI MAIN (beginning of section)
MAINT MAIN (end of section)
MAININPUTI MAIN-INPUT (beginning of section)
MAININPUTT MAIN-INPUT (end of section)
MAINLINE MAIN (replaces entire section)
MAINOUTPUTI MAIN-OUTPUT (beginning of section)
MAINOUTPUTT MAIN-OUTPUT (end of section)
MAINPROCESSI MAIN-PROCESS (beginning of section)
MAINPROCESST MAIN-PROCESS (end of section)
MAINTERMI MAIN-FORM-TERM (beginning of section; CICS character
client)
MAINTERMT MAIN-FORM-TERM (end of section; CICS character client
only)
N100I N-100-CURSOR-POSITION (beginning of section)
N100T N-100-CURSOR-POSITION (end of section)
P100I P-100-PFKEYS (beginning of section)
P100T P-100-PFKEYS (end of section)
Q100I Q-100-CICS-INIT (beginning of section)
Q100T Q-100-CICS-INIT (end of section)
Q200I Q-200-PSB-SCHEDULE (beginning of section)
Q200T Q-200-PSB-SCHEDULE (end of section)

Section Description
Q210I Q-210-PSB-TERM (beginning of section)
Q210T Q-210-PSB-TERM (end of section)
Q300I Q-300-ACQUIRE-WORKAREAS (beginning of section)
Q300T Q-300-ACQUIRE-WORKAREAS (end of section)
Q400I Q-400-ACQUIRE-SPA (beginning of section)
Q400T Q-400-ACQUIRE-SPA (end of section)
T100I T-100-CLOSE-FILES (beginning of section)
T100T T-100-CLOSE-FILES (end of section)
X100I X-100-CONSIS-EDITS (beginning of section)
X100T X-100-CONSIS-EDITS (end of section)
Z100I Z-100-SECTIONS-COPY (beginning of section)
Z900I Z-900-SECTION-FALLOUT & Z-900-PROGRAM-END
(beginning of section); COBOL programs only)
Z970I Z-970-IDMSSQL-ERROR (beginning of section)
Z970T Z-970-IDMSSQL-ERROR (end of section)
Z980I Z-980-ABNORMAL-TERMINATION (beginning of section)
Z980T Z-980-ABNORMAL-TERMINATION (end of section)
Z990I Z-990-PROGRAM-ERROR (beginning of section)
Z990T Z-990-PROGRAM-ERROR (end of section)

5.4 Create/Update Data Group

Access: On the Online Program Definition menu, the Nonterminal Program
Definition menu, or the Batch Program Definition menu, enter:
■ DG in the ITEM field
■ Identifier in the ID field (required for function CR)
Program ID: S125
Function: Specifies:
■ The data items (DL/I or SQL databases, VSAM or sequential files, and CICS
queues or journals) to access for this program definition
■ Auto exec and user exec I/O requests
UPDATE DATA GROUP ---- XXXXXX.SD SIZE ______ COL __

COMMAND ==> 1______________________________________________ SCROLL ===> ____
LABEL REQUEST KEY/WHERE IGNORE
------ -------- ----------- ------------------------------- ------------
2_____ 3_______ 4__________ 5______________________________ 6___________

1. COMMAND
You can also enter the DGADD (Data Group Add) command in the COMMAND
field. DGADD requires a parameter (for example, DGADD psb-name). This
table identifies the possible DGADD parameters and their functions:
DGADD Parameter Comments

screen-id.SD Add the data access group from screen-id to the current
screen's data group.
psb-name.PSB Add psb-name to the current screen's data group.
psb-name.PSB Psb-name must be a PSB defined in data administration.


filegroup Filegroup must be defined in data administration.
filegroup.FG
hhiiii.SD Hhiiii is the header and ID of a previously defined screen
hhiiii.BD or batch program.
dbd-name.DBD Dbd-name is the name of a DBD defined in data
dbd-name.DB administration.
dbd-name.DL
dbd-name.DLI
tln-name.DB2 Tln-name is the name assigned to an SQL table defined in
tln-name.D2 data administration.
tln-name.TABLE
tln-name.TAB
tln-name.TB
tln-name.JOIN Tln-name is the name assigned to an SQL join defined in
tln-name.DJ data administration.
tln-name.TJ
ddname.VSAM Ddname is the name assigned to a VSAM data set defined
ddname.VSM in data administration. If not defined there, skeletal
version of the data set is added to the data group.
ddname.CQ Ddname is the name assigned to a CICS temporary storage
ddname.CQTS or transient data queue or journal defined in data
ddname.CQTD administration. If this queue or journal is not defined in
ddname.TD data administration, a skeletal version of the appropriate
ddname.TS item is added to the data group. The name qualifier
ddname.CJ indicates the type of queue:
CQ
Temporary storage queue
CQTS
CQTD
Transient data queue
TD
Transient data queue
TS
CJ
Journal
ddname.SQ Ddname is the name assigned to a sequential file defined
ddname.SEQ in data administration If this data set is not defined in data
administration, a skeletal version of the data set is added to
the data group.


IMS Only TPPCB-name is the name assigned to a TP PCB added to
TPPCB-name.TP the data
TPPCB-name.TPPCB
queue-name.CQTS Add a temporary storage queue, Queue-name can be up to
queue-name.TS eight characters long.
queue-name.TD Add a transient data queue. Queue-name is limited to four
queue-name.CQTD characters.
queue-name.CQ Add a transient data or temporary storage queue defined in
data administration. If there are no TD or TS queues
defined in data administration, the name defaults to the TS
queue.
journal-name.CJ Add a CICS journal. Journal-name can be up to eight
characters long. Note that this is a name that identifies the
journal to CA-Telon but has no significance to the CICS
system in which it is used.
If you specify a file group name, CA-Telon appends the file group to the end of
the current data group. If you specify a screen definition name, CA-Telon
appends the data group from that screen to the end of the current data group.
Adding a segment to a DBD: To add a segment to a DBD that you already added
to a program on the TDF, follow these steps:
1. Make sure the new segment has been added to the DBD on the Create/Update
DBD screen
2. Issue the DGADD command for the DBD so that CA-Telon appends the DBD to
the program's current data group
3. From the new lines that appear, delete the PCB line (it should be a duplicate) and
SEG lines for any segments that already exist in the data group
4. If the new segments are not directly under the DBD with which they are
associated, move them by using line commands
Note: CA-Telon removes the DG separator line dividing new segments from the
previously existing DBD when you leave this screen.
5. Edit and add I/O lines for the new segments, as needed.
2. (Line command)
You can modify the screen contents by using these control characters:
Command Description
C Copy a line.
CC Copy a block of lines.

Command Description
I Insert a line
Inn Insert nn lines.
IS(n) Insert n lines for you to enter the command.
M Move a line.
MM Move a block of lines.
R Repeat a line.
RR Repeat a block of lines.
A Line(s) to insert, copy, or move go after this line.
AM(n) Line(s) to copy or move are repeated n times after this line.
B Line(s) to insert, copy, or move go before this line.
BM(n) Line(s) to copy or move are repeated n times before this line.
D Delete an entry.
F(n) Redisplay n lines that were excluded with the X or XX command,
beginning at the first excluded line.
L(n) Redisplay n lines that were excluded with the X or XX command,
beginning at the last excluded line.
U Update detail for a data access level.
V Preview function.
X(n) Exclude n lines beginning with this line.
XX Exclude a block of lines.
Note: - When one or more lines are excluded from the Data Group and the
Create/Update Data Group screen is saved on exit, the exclusion is retained. The next
time the Data Group is displayed with the exclusion, issue the "RESET" command to
remove the exclusion.

3. LABEL
On lines other than I/O edit lines, the COBOL or PL/I data item to which the
following access refers.
On user I/O lines, LABEL is an optional field. You can identify the user exec
when you require more than one of the same type of I/O. CA-Telon uses the
value in this field to generate the name of the COBOL or PL/I paragraph or
procedure that contains the I/O.
■ OUTREAD, OIREAD, and INREAD access types — LABEL must be
AUTOEXEC because CA-Telon generates and performs these I/O requests
automatically.

■ BROWSE, CREATE, and UPDATE access types — You have the option of
using the AUTOEXEC label to have CA-Telon generate and perform the
associated I/O. If you do not specify a label, CA-Telon identifies the requests
as USEREXEC I/O, and CA-Telon generates but does not perform the I/O.
You must write your own code to perform user exec requests.
Note: AUTOEXEC is a CA-Telon reserved word for LABEL meaning
automatically generated and executed CA-Telon code.
The first character of a value in this field must be a letter, @, #, or $. Subsequent
characters may be numbers. No other special characters are allowed. Use of
characters other than these will result in Generator errors.
Note: CA-Telon automatically performs BROWSE even if you do not specify the
label AUTOEXEC (for SQL, if you specify AUTOEXEC, CA-Telon
performs I/O from B-100 rather than generating I/O in-line).
Example:
LABEL REQUEST ...
Segment ===> TRGEMPL DEFINE

user exec ===> READ READNEXT...
READNEXT READNEXT...
This generates these user exec paragraphs:
■ In COBOL, U-100-READ-TRGEMPL and
U-100-READNEXT-TRGEMPL
■ In PL/I, U_100_READ_TRGEMPL and
U_100_READNEXT_TRGEMPL
4. REQUEST
On lines other than I/O edit lines, information that you can use to identify the data
item to which the following I/O applies. For example, on a join, CA-Telon
displays a marker for a join. For a SEG, ROW, or REC line, CA-Telon displays
the usage of the segment, row, or record. (Note that REC is used when defining
queues, journals, and VSAM and sequential files.)
The data group editor maintains usages of @DEFINE and @DUMMY, depending
on the existence of I/O for the SEG, ROW, or REC. You can update usage by
updating the appropriate SEG, ROW, or REC edit line. Change the usage from
@DUMMY to DEFINE so that CA-Telon will set up I/O areas and related storage
areas without generating any data access for the SEG, ROW, or REC in question.
Usage: Values for usage are:
Request Action
BROWSE Read the SEG/ROW in a loop during the program output
processing.

Request Action
DEFINE Explicitly request CA-Telon to generate storage areas for this
REC/SEG/ROW, regardless of whether data access has been
defined for this item.
@DEFINE CA-Telon assumes that this item needs storage areas because this
REC/SEG/ROW has data access defined to it. If you remove all
data access for this REC/SEG/ROW, this automatically reverts to
@DUMMY.
DUMMY The developer has explicitly requested that CA-Telon should not
generate storage areas for this REC/SEG/ROW, regardless of
whether data access has been defined for this item.
@DUMMY CA-Telon assumes that the REC/SEG/ROW is not being used and
no storage areas are needed. This is switched to @DEFINE when
you insert the type of data access used.
HOLD Used for HOLD processing.
WORKSPA CA-Telon handles the SEG/ROW as a workspa.
Data access lines: For data access lines, you can enter any of the following values
for this field:
Request Action
BROWSE Used with AUTOEXEC label only (in conjunction with
SEGLOOP) for READ processing in a loop during output
processing.
CREATE Can be used with AUTOEXEC label. Insert or write during
input processing.
DEFINE The segment is defined to the TDF. CA-Telon processes it in
the generation procedure to create storage areas for it.
DELETE Can be used with AUTOEXEC label. Delete during input
processing.
HOLD Used for CA-Telon hold processing.
INREAD Used with AUTOEXEC label only. Read during input
processing initialization.
JOURNAL Can be used with the AUTOEXEC label. It writes a record to
the CICS journal.

Request Action
MATCHM In a match-structure program, you must select files for auto exec
match handling. Select a file as the match master file and assign
an auto exec MATCHM request to it. Select another file as the
match transaction file and assign an auto exec MATCHT to it.
Standard line commands are valid for these requests. The U
command displays the update detail data access screens.
PREVIEW is not supported for MATCHM and MATCHT auto
exec requests.
MATCHT See MATCHM above.
MERGEnn Select up to 20 files for auto exec merge handling in a
merge-structure program. The files are identified hierarchically
by the requests MERGE01 through MERGE20. This means the
file with request MERGE01 is accessed first, MERGE02 second,
and so on. In assigning the MERGEnn data access requests, you
must increment nn by 1. For example, four requests must be
identified MERGE01, MERGE02, MERGE03, MERGE04.
Standard line commands are valid for these requests. The U
command displays the update detail data access screens.
PREVIEW is not supported for MERGEnn auto exec requests.
OIREAD Used with AUTOEXEC label only. Read during output and
input initialization processing.
OUTREAD Used with AUTOEXEC label only. Read during output
initialization processing.
READ For DL/I, READ is used to get a unique segment unless you
specify a function. Then it performs a different type of get
depending upon the function.
For VSAM and SEQ, READ is used to perform a read.
For SQL, READ is used to perform a select.
For CICS TS and TD Queues, READ is used to perform a
READQ.
READNEXT For DL/I, READNEXT is used for a get next.
For SQL, READNEXT is used to open a cursor and perform a
fetch from the cursor.
For VSAM and QUEUEs, READNEXT is used to perform a
read next.
For SEQ, READNEXT is used to perform a read.
For CICS TS and TD Queues, READ is used to perform a
READQ.

Request Action
REPLACE For DL/I, REPLACE is used for a REPLACE.
For SQL, REPLACE is used to perform an UPDATE.
For VSAM, REPLACE is used to perform a REWRITE.
SPBROWSE Used with AUTOEXEC label only (in conjunction with
SEGLOOP) for READ processing in a loop during ouput
processing on a program that calls a stored procedure which
returns a result set.
SPRDNEXT SPRDNEXT is used by a program that calls stored procedure to
perform a fetch from a cursor that has been opened by the called
stored procedure.
SPTRNACT Used with AUTOEXEC only (in batch and CICS nonterminal
programs which call stored procedures). A fetch from a cursor
that has been opened by the called stored procedure is generated
in the GET-TRAN section.
TRANSACT Used with AUTOEXEC only (in batch and CICS nonterminal
programs only). Sequential read is generated in the GET-TRAN
section.
UPDATE Can be used with AUTOEXEC label. With AUTOEXEC,
CA-Telon generates a read during output initialization. Then
CA-Telon generates a read for update followed by an update
during input processing. When AUTOEXEC is not specified,
CA-Telon generates but does not perform the read for update
followed by an update only.
Note: All data access requests that generate READs are invalid
for CICS journals. CREATE, DEFINE, @DEFINE, DUMMY,
and @DUMMY are the only valid REQUEST values for CICS
journals.
WORKSPA CA-Telon handles the segment as a workspa.
Queue and journal auto exec I/O requests:
Data Type Item Auto exec request

Queues CQUE OUTREAD, INREAD, OIREAD, CREATE;
UPDATE, BROWSE (TS only)
Journals CJNL JOURNAL
Queue and journal user exec I/O requests:

Data Type Item User Exec Request

Queues CQUE READ, CREATE, DELETE, READNEXT;
REPLACE, UPDATE (type TS only)
Journals CJNL JOURNAL
5. KEY/WHERE
This field can contain:
■ The host variable name(s) containing the key(s) that identify the segment or
record accessed by the I/O
■ The entire WHERE clause
CA-Telon uses the value in this field:
■ To set the key in the SSA, in DL/I
■ As the RIDFLD, in VSAM
■ To construct the WHERE clause, in SQL and EXEC DLI
6. IGNORE
Status codes to be ignored. All DBMS-specific status codes are valid. Generic
status values are translated to the corresponding DBMS-specific status codes at
generation time.
This table presents generic values and how CA-Telon handles generic values:
Generic Status What Is Ignored

OK Blank or zero status codes
NOTFOUND or NFD Not found status codes
DUPLICATE or DUP Multiple record or key occurrences
LOGICERR or LOG Errors on access that depends on prior required
conditions
SECURITY or SEC Security violations
ENDFILE or EOF EOF conditions
NOTAVAIL or NAV Conditions when resources are not available
DBMERROR or DBM Any return code not specified above (SQL only)
REF For DB2, referential integrity errors -530 through -536
ALL Any return code
If CA-Telon encounters a return code other than blanks that is not included in the
IGNORE field for an I/O, CA-Telon assumes ABEND processing as follows:
■ For all I/O except BROWSE, CA-Telon invokes ABEND processing. OK is
the default.

■ For BROWSE I/O, CA-Telon does not invoke ABEND processing. ALL is
the default.

5.5 Update DBMS Characteristics

Access: On the Create/Update Data Group screen, enter U as a line command for
any DBMS type.
Program ID: S127
Function: Changes the DBMS type of the COBOL or PL/I data item.
XXXXXX.XX UPDATE DBMS CHARACTERISTICS

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
CURR DBMS: TYPE _2______

TLNNAME _3______
PCB _4__________
SQL ONLY: TABLE _5___________________________ (QUAL.TBLNAME)

SYNONYM _6(Y/N)
DL/I ONLY: PCBNAME _7__________

KEYLTH _8_
PROCSEQ _9______
PROCOPT 1__
TP ONLY: LTERM 11______

EXPRESS 12(Y/N)
MSGCALL 13(Y/N)
ABCALL 14(Y/N)
PRINT 15(Y/N)

1. COMMAND
2. TYPE
Protected field identifying the type of DBMS (for example, SQL). The displayed
value is from the Create or Update PSB, File Group screen.
Note: The value REF implies that this database is used for inheritance processing
only.
3. TLNNAME
Type of DBMS:
■ For DL/I, the name of the database as specified in the DBD
■ For SQL, the label of the table
■ For VSAM, the name of the data set
The displayed value is from the Create/Update PSB Or File Group screen.
4. PCB
Protected field identifying the DL/I PCB name.
The displayed value is from the Create/Update PSB Or File Group screen.

5. TABLE
The fully-qualified name of the SQL table.
6. SYNONYM
Option for generating the qualifier for the SQL table. Valid values are:
Y
CA-Telon leaves the qualifier for the table blank. This allows for full
qualification by SQL during SQL precompilation.
N
CA-Telon generates the qualifier for the table, which is the generated program
that contains the fully-qualified SQL table or view names.
7. PCBNAME
The name of the COBOL or PL/I data item used to access the PCB.
8. KEYLTH
For a database or a data set, the length of the concatenated key for the PSB that
CA-Telon generates.
For a teleprocessing PCB, do not enter a value for this field.
9. PROCSEQ
The name of the secondary index used to process the database named in the PCB
statement's DBDNAME operand. The value in this field defines the PCB
statement, PROCSEQ=.
10. PROCOPT
The DB processing options. This field is valid only when DB or GSAM are values
in the TYPE field. The value in the PROCOPT field defines the PCB statement,
PROCOPT=.
For more information about the DB processing options, see IMS utilities
documentation.
11. LTERM
The destination for messages sent using this PSB. Options include any IMS
transaction code and any logical terminal name defined to IMS. The value in this
field defines the PCB statement, LTERM=.
If you do not specify a value in this field, the destination for the PCB is
modifiable in the program.
12. EXPRESS
A value to specify whether the PCB processes a message if an application
ABENDs. EXPRESS is valid only for teleprocessing PCBs. Valid values are:
Y
Messages from the alternate PCB are sent if an ABEND occurs
N
Messages from the alternate PCB are backed out if an ABEND occurs
The default depends on the value of the ABCALL field: if ABCALL=Y, then
EXPRESS defaults to Y; otherwise, EXPRESS defaults to N.

13. MSGCALL
A value to specify whether this PCB is used in place of XFER-PCB for generated
message switch processing. Valid values are:
Y
This PCB is used in place of XFER-PCB for generated message switch
processing
N
This PCB is not used in place of XFER-PCB for generated message switch
processing
14. ABCALL
(Valid only for teleprocessing PCBs.) A value to specify whether the PCB that
CA-Telon generates replaces CA-Telon's XFER-PCB in calls to the CA-Telon
ABEND handling routine.
Valid values are:
Y
The PCB that CA-Telon generates replaces the XFER-PCB. This is the
default.
N
15. PRINT
A value to indicate whether the REPORT subroutine uses this PCB. If you do not
specify a value, then the print subroutine uses the XFER-PCB. This field is valid
only for teleprocessing PCBs.
Valid values are:
Y
The PCB that CA-Telon generates and replaces the XFER-PCB. This is the
default.
N

5.6 Select New Row Name

Access: On the Create/Update Data Group screen, enter U as a line command in a
ROW field.
Program ID: S137
Function: Specify the usage and key for the TLNROW.
SELECT NEW ROW NAME

COMMAND ==> 1______________________________________________________PAGE __
TABLE NAME 2___________________________ CURRENT ROW NAME 3_______
GENERAL: USAGE 4_______
KEY OR 5____________________________________________________________
WHERE _____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
S TLNROW C-CNT COLUMNS DEFINED

6 7______ 8__ _9__________________________________________________________1

1. COMMAND
2. TABLE NAME
Protected field identifying the qualifier and name of an SQL table. The displayed
value is from the Catalog/Import DB2 Tables screen.
3. CURRENT ROW NAME
Protected field identifying a row in an SQL table. You can alter the value in the
S field. Data access uses the column definitions for this row.
4. USAGE
Row usage. Valid values are:
DEFINE
The row is defined to the TDF. CA-Telon processes it in the generation
procedure.
DUMMY
The row is not being used.
@DEFINE
The row is being used, but CA-Telon is controlling it.
@DUMMY
CA-Telon assumes that the row is not being used. This changes to @DEFINE
when the type of data access is defined.

5. KEY OR WHERE
This field can contain:
■ The PL/I or COBOL host variable name(s) containing the key(s) that identify
the rows being accessed
■ The entire key clause
In SQL and EXEC DLI, CA-Telon uses the value in this field to construct the
WHERE clause.
On an SQL CREATE user exec request, CA-Telon uses this field to specify a
mass insert criterion. The following is an example of this use:
EXEC SQL INSERT INTO DSN8.TEMPL
SELECT mass
FROM DSN82.TEMPL insert
WHERE WORKDEPT='D11' criterion
END-EXEC.
6. S
A value to direct CA-Telon to use the corresponding TLNROW name as the
CURRENT ROW NAME. Valid values include any non-blank character.
Access to the row uses the column definitions that the new TLNROW specifies.
7. TLNROW
Protected field identifying the CA-Telon-defined rows in the table. For each row,
there may be multiple columns.
Note that the first TLNROW has the same name as the row named in the
CURRENT ROW NAME field unless you change the CURRENT ROW NAME
with the SELECT override.
8. C-CNT
Protected field identifying the number of columns in the row.
9. COLUMNS DEFINED
Protected field listing the columns defined for the TLNROW.
10. OUTPUT FIELD
Protected field in which a plus sign (+) indicates that there is more column
information for the TLNROW. To view this information, go to the Create/Update
SQL Tables/TLNROWs screen.

5.7 Update Database Segment

Access: On the Create/Update Data Group screen, enter U as a line command on
the listing marked SEG=>.
Program ID: S135
Function: Updates detail segment characteristics valid for any type of I/O.
CA-Telon exports values from this screen to the Create/Update DBD screen,
Create/Update Data Group screen, and Show/Update Data Set Default Data screen.
UPDATE DBD: 1_______ SEGM: 2_______

COMMAND ==> 3__________________________________________________________________
OPTIONS ==> PCB PARMS 4
GENERAL LABEL 5_______ USAGE 6_______ KEYPIC 7____________________

COPY 8_______ COPYLV1 9 COPYLBL 1__________________________
KEYLEN 11______
DSCREF SEGMENT CMND IMSKEY OP KEY

__ ________ ________ _____ _________ ___ ____________________________ _
12 13 14 15 16 17 18

1. DBD
Protected field identifying the DBD name specified on the NAME field of the
2. SEGM
Protected field identifying the segment specified on the NAME field of the
3. COMMAND
4. PCB PARMS
PCB parameters. To select this field, enter a nonblank value. This transfers you
to the Extended Parameter Utility screen, on which you can enter parameters such
as PROCOPT and INDICES. See 3.11, “Update Sensitive Segment” on
page 3-33 for information on PROCOPT and INDICES.
5. LABEL
The segment, when you require more than one occurrence of a segment name in a
file group (duplicate segment name).
This value must uniquely identify the segment in the file group. It is used in
generating names such as SSA or U_100 names.

For example, if you specify READ for segment TRGEMPL, CA-Telon generates
the paragraph U-100-READ-TREGEMPL (for COBOL).
6. USAGE
The type of processing associated with the SEGMENT. Valid values are:
BROWSE
Read the segment in a loop on output.
DEFINE
The segment is defined to the TDF. CA-Telon processes it in the generation
procedure.
DUMMY
The segment is not being used.
@DEFINE
The segment is being used, but CA-Telon is controlling it.
@DUMMY
CA-Telon assumes that the segment is not being used. This changes to
@DEFINE when the type of data access is defined.
HOLD (IMS Only)
Used for hold processing.
WORKSPA (IMS Only)
CA-Telon handles the SEG/ROW as a workspa.
7. KEYPIC
The format of the key for the segment. CA-Telon uses the value in this field for
the VALUE parameter in the SSA.
Note: This field is for upward compatibility only. If not specified (e.g., due to
conversion from releases prior to 2.0), this field does not appear on the
screen.
If the format of the key for the segment is a character format, do not enter a
value.
If the format of the key for the segment is packed decimal or binary and the key
value being moved to the SSA is of a different format, the key is converted when
it is moved to the SSA.
The following is an example of a COBOL entry for the KEYPIC field:
9(5) COMP-3
8. COPY
The COBOL COPY or PL/I INCLUDE member name that identifies the segment
definition. CA-Telon uses the contents of the member for the layout of the
segment. The member name should be unique for this program.
If you enter NONE, CA-Telon does not copy a segment definition into the
program.
Note: NONE is not allowed for index data sets.
If you do not make an entry in this COPY field, CA-Telon uses the segment name
to identify the copy library member name with the layout of the segment.

9. COPYLV1
The start level of the COPY or INCLUDE member. Valid values are:
Y
The COPY/INCLUDE member for the I/O area of this segment starts at the
COBOL or PL/I 01 level. You must also specify a value in the COPYLBL
field to supply the I/O area for the data access that CA-Telon generates.
N
CA-Telon expects the I/O area to begin at the 03 level or higher. In this case,
10. COPYLBL
and its subordinates) for the segment copy definition. The COPYLBL value
overrides the I/O area that CA-Telon would normally provide.
The default I/O area in all database and data set calls is
IOA-segment-name-SEGMENT.
If two segments have the same segment name (the default value of DBSEG or
some other name that you specify on the LABEL field) and the same COPYLBL,
CA-Telon generates only one I/O area. Thus, in order for CA-Telon to generate a
second I/O area, enter a unique data item name in this field. If CA-Telon is
generating any automatic I/O, and you have specified the COPYLV1 field value
Y, you must enter a value.
In this field, you can enter either a member name or NONE. The member name
is the name of the COBOL COPY member or PL/I INCLUDE containing the
segment definition. If the COPY or INCLUDE member has the same name as the
segment (value in the SEGMENT field), you need not enter a value in this field
— CA-Telon automatically includes the COPY or INCLUDE member whose
name is the same as the segment name.
11. KEYLEN
The length of the key used to access the database. CA-Telon uses this value to
define the length of the key in the SSA that it generates.
Note: This field is for upward compatibility only. If not specified (e.g., due to
conversion from releases prior to 2.0), this field will not appear on the
screen.
12. DSCREF
The data search criterion (DLIDSC) at this segment level. CA-Telon uses this
value when it generates the SSA for DL/I.
To increment USECNT appropriately, enter U or S to request the List SSAs
screen, and S to select DLIDSC for this segment level or I/O request. See 3.7,
“Update DLIDSCs For Segment Member” on page 3-18 for more information on
incrementing USECNT.
13. SEGMENT
Protected field that identifies a segment.

14. CMND
Overrides the SSA command code for the segment that CA-Telon generates. The
characters you specify are prefixed with an asterisk (*) and suffixed with one to
three dashes (-) to make a four-byte code.
For example, if you enter D, CA-Telon generates the SSA command code as:
*D--
If you omit this field, CA-Telon uses the IMS default *---.
Note: For EXEC DLI, you can use this field to specify segment qualification
options. EXEC DLI does not support all command codes.
15. IMSKEY
The name of the key or search field for the segment defined in the DL/I DBD.
Leave this field blank for a non-keyed segment. Normally, a non-default DLIDSC
is chosen if a search field is specified here.
16. OP
For DL/I processing, the value used to define the relational operator in the SSA.
This field overrides the default OPCODE in the SSA that CA-Telon generates.
If you do not specify a value, CA-Telon uses the OPCODE '>=' for BROWSE and
keyed READNEXT data access, and '= ' for other keyed access.
Valid values are:
Value Description
= Equal to
=< Less than or equal to
> Greater than
< Less than
¬= Not equal to
=¬ Not equal to
Note: OP does not apply for unqualified SSAs; that is, for BROWSE requests for
which there is no starting key value (STBRKEY, defined on the
Create/Update File Segloop screen). If you use the SCHFLDx field on the
Create or Update File SEGLOOP screen, OP can (but need not always) be
set to the equal sign (=).
17. KEY
The PL/I or COBOL variable name containing the key to a segment. If
inheritance is requested, data access (user I/O) uses the variable name to identify a

segment that it retrieves. Refer to Programming Concepts Guide for information

on inheritance.
Note: If USAGE is BROWSE, the KEY field can be used in place of the
SEGLOOP field, PAGEKEY. If both are used, KEY is ignored (the use of
PAGEKEY is recommended). KEY does not apply for unqualified SSAs.
18. (KEY extension)
Enter any non-blank character, with the exception of a plus sign (+) and a
question mark (?), for a screen display that allows you to specify a host variable
key longer than 30 characters.

5.8 Update Data Set Record

Access: On the Create/Update Data Group screen, enter U as a line command for a
sequential or VSAM record.
Program ID: S136
Function: Updates detail data set segment data.
HEADERID.UPDATE DATA SET RECORD

COMMAND ==> 1______________________________________________________
DATA SET 2_______ ACCESS 3___
GENERAL LRECL 4____ _____ (MIN MAX) BLKSIZE 5____

OPEN 6______ __________________________
IGNOPEN 7 (Y/N) IGNCLOSE 8 (Y/N) IGNEMPT 9 (Y/N)

RECORD: LABEL 1_______ USAGE 11_______
COPY 12_______
COPYLV1 13 (Y/N)
COPYLBL 14___________________________
COBDIV 15 (FD/WS)
COBVSKY 16____________________________________________________________
I/O: KEY 17____________________________________________________________

KEYLEN 18_
OPCODE 19___
VSAM: TYPE 2__ (KSDS/RRDS/ESDS) ACCMODE 21_ (DYN/RAN/SEQ)

OPTLIST 22____________________________________________________________
RECLTH 23____________________________________________________________
GENKEYL 24____________________________ INDEXOF 25______

1. COMMAND
2. DATA SET
Protected field identifying the data set to which you are specifying information.
3. ACCESS
Protected field specifying the type of access (VSAM or SEQ) for the data set that
you are defining.
4. LRECL (VSAM Batch Only)
The length in bytes of the logical record for the data set. For variable-length files,
enter the minimum (MIN) and maximum (MAX) lengths of the records.
5. BLKSIZ (VSAM Batch Only)
The blocking factor, in bytes, of the data set. If not specified here, the blocking
factor must be specified in the JCL.
6. OPEN (VSAM Batch Only)
The way in which CA-Telon is to automatically open the data set at program
initialization. Valid values are:

INPUT
Input
OUTPUT
Output
I-O
Input/output
At program termination, CA-Telon closes any files automatically opened at
program initialization.
7 IGNOPEN (VSAM Batch only)
Indicates whether or not the dataset's status should be tested after it is opened.
Valid values are:
Y
Test the dataset's OPEN status.
N
Don't test the OPEN status.
8 IGNCLOS (VSAM Batch only)
Indicates whether or not the dataset's status should be tested after it is closed.
Valid values are:
Y
Test the dataset's CLOSED status.
N
Don't test the CLOSED status.
9 IGNEMPT: (VSAM Batch only)
Indicates whether or not the dataset's status should be tested when it is opened to
see if it is empty. Valid values are:
Y
Test the dataset's EMPTY status
N
Don't test the EMPTY status
10. LABEL
The default label associated with this data set. If specified, this value replaces the
name of the data set that CA-Telon generates.
11. USAGE
The type of processing associated with the record you are defining. Valid values
are:
BROWSE
Read the record in a loop on output.
DEFINE
The record is defined to the TDF. CA-Telon processes it in the generation
procedure.
@DEFINE
The record is being used, but CA-Telon is controlling it.

DUMMY
The record is not being used.
@DUMMY
CA-Telon assumes that the record is not being used. This changes to
@DEFINE when you define the type of data access.
HOLD
Used for HOLD processing.
WORKSPA (IMS Only)
CA-Telon handles the record as a workspa.
12. COPY
The COBOL COPY or PL/I INCLUDE member name that contains the record
definition. Enter either a member name or NONE in this field.
If you enter a member name, CA-Telon uses the contents of that member for the
layout of the record. Member name must be a unique name for this program.
If you enter NONE, CA-Telon does not copy a record definition into the program.
13. COPYLV1
The start level of the COPY or INCLUDE member. Valid values are:
Y
The COPY/INCLUDE member for the I/O area of this segment starts at the
COBOL or PL/I 01 level. You must also specify a value in the COPYLBL
field to supply the I/O area for the data access that CA-Telon generates.
N
CA-Telon expects the I/O area to begin at the 03 level or higher. In this case,
14. COPYLBL
and its subordinates) for the record copy definition. The COPYLBL value
overrides the I/O area that CA-Telon would normally provide.
The default I/O area in all database and data set calls is
IOA-record-name-SEGMENT.
If two records have the same record name (the default value of DBSEG or some
other name that you specify on the LABEL field) and the same COPYLBL,
CA-Telon generates only one I/O area. Thus, in order for CA-Telon to generate a
second I/O area, code a unique data item name for COPYLBL. If CA-Telon is
generating any Automatic I/O, code COPYLBL when you have specified the
COPYLV1 value as Y.
For the COPYLBL field, you can specify either a member name or NONE. The
member name is the name of the COBOL COPY member or PL/I INCLUDE
containing the record definition. If the COPY or INCLUDE member has the same
name as the record, you do not have to include this field. CA-Telon automatically
includes the COPY or INCLUDE member whose name is the same as the record
name.

If you enter NONE for this field, CA-Telon does not copy a record definition into
the program. NONE is commonly used when reading an input sequential file
whose record is defined in a COPY or INCLUDE member in working storage.
15 COBDIV
The section of the COBOL program in which to copy the record layout of the data
set.
The definition is to begin at level 03 or higher and will have 02
IOA-record-name-SEGMENT generated above it.
If not specified, CA-Telon copies the record layout into the COBOL file definition
(FD) for the data set.
If you code working storage (WS), the record layout appears in the IO-AREA of
the program. A value in this field is only valid on batch programs and on a
RECORD statement referencing a data set. Refer to Programming Concepts
Guide for information on RECORD statements.
16. COBVSKY
The data name of the VSAM KSDS or RRDS key for the file.
For a VSAM KSDS, you must define the key for the file by using the KEY field
on this screen.
For a VSAM RRDS, the data name must specify an unsigned integer defined in
the working storage of the COBOL program. Note that CA-Telon does not
generate the relative key, so you must define it. COBOL uses this variable keyed
access to VSAM files.
A value in this field is valid in only batch programs and on RECORD statements
referencing a VSAM key sequenced or relative data set. Enter DUPLICATE after
the data name to specify the KSDS alternate key (that is, key on a data set using
the INDEXOF field) does not have to be a unique data set.
17. KEY
The PL/I or COBOL variable names containing the key to a record. If inheritance
is requested, data access (user I/O) uses the variable name to identify a record that
it retrieves. Refer to Programming Concepts Guide for information on inheritance.
18. KEYLEN
The length of the record identification (RID) field.
19. OPCODE
The OPCODE that CA-Telon determines for VSAM access. Valid values are:
GTEQ
Greater than or equal to. This is the default.
EQ
Equal to
GT
Greater than
20. TYPE
The type of access for the data set you are defining. Valid values are:

KSDS
Key-sequenced data set. This is the default.
RRDS
Relative record data set
ESDS
Entry-sequenced data set
21. ACCMODE (VSAM Batch Only)
The access to the type of data set you are defining. Valid values are:
DYN (COBOL only)
Dynamic access
RAN (COBOL Only)
Random access
SEQ
Sequential access
DIR (PL/I Only)
Direct access
22. OPTLIST (VSAM Processing Only)
Options on CICS data sets for command level calls. Valid values are:
■ RRN
■ SEGSET
■ SEGSETALL
■ SYSID
■ MASSINSERT
■ DEBKEY
■ DEBREC
■ UPDATE
You can specify one or more of these options on the SEGMENT statement and all
user exec data access (READ, UPDATE, CREATE, and DELETE). Separate each
option with a comma.
Values that you code on the SEGMENT statement are carried down to user exec
specifications if you do not code an OPTLIST on the user exec data access.
CA-Telon automatically removes invalid values from a call for a particular
command level verb. For example, if MASSINSERT is specified as an option on
the RECORD statement or user exec data access, it only appears if the EXEC
CICS WRITE command is generated for that segment in the CICS program.
You can specify a literal value for the SEGSET and SYSID options by enclosing
23. RECLTH (VSAM processing of variable-length records only)
The maximum length of each record on the file. Valid values are:
record-length

by the read).
Read-length,rewrite-length
Each value can be specified as either an integer or the name of a COBOL or
PL/I variable that contains the key-length value. Read-length is used for all
automatic read EXEC CICS calls for the record. Rewrite-length is used as the
maximum length of the updated record. This specification is applicable for
UPDATE processing only (that is, usage is UPDATE).
The value in this field overrides the RECLTH value specified on the RECORD
statement for the file being accessed.
Note: The length that you use in a CICS read operation for a variable-length
record must be at least as large as the actual record retrieved. If not, a
CICS abend results.
24. GENKEYL (VSAM Processing Only)
The length of the generic key used for the access.
You can specify either an integer or the name of a COBOL or PL/I variable that
contains the key-length value. If you do not specify a value, CA-Telon assumes
that the access uses the full key length; it does not use the GENKEYL value from
the RECORD statement.
25 INDEXOF (VSAM Batch only.)
A data set in this data group of which this data set is an index. The index data set
must physically follow the indexed data set on the Create/Update Data Group
screen.
Note: The COPY field is not valid for an index.

5.9 Update SQL Detail Data Access

table.
Program ID: S147
Function: Adds SQL-specific information.

Note: The @ sign on this screen indicates that the value is inherited from data
administration.
Refer to Programming Concepts Guide for information on data inheritance.

HHNNNN.SD XXXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX
COMMAND ==> 1______________________________________________________________
OPTIONS ==> PREVIEW 2 OPTIMIZE FOR 3__ ROWS FETCH ONLY 4__ RESLTNR 5__
GENERAL: KEY OR 6__________________________________________________________ _
WHERE ___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
IGNORE 7__________________________________________________________
IOAREA 8__________________________________________________________ _
UPDATE 9 (Y/N) DELETE 1 (Y/N) HOLD CURSOR 11 (Y/N)
DB2/SQL: SENCOLS 12_________________________________________________________ _
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
ORDERBY 13_________________________________________________________ _
___________________________________________________________
GROUPBY 14_________________________________________________________ _
HAVING 15_________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
KEYCOLS 16_________________________________________________________ _
___________________________________________________________
OPCODE 17_________________________________________________________
CUSTOM CODE: 18 _ CPYCALL 19_____ 18 _ CPYINIT 2 ______ RESLTCC 21 ______
18 _ CPYKEY 22_____ 18 _ CPYTERM 23 ______ RESLTPR 24 ______

Field Extension screen: You can transfer to the Field Extension screen if you
require more space to enter data in these fields:
■ KEY or WHERE
■ IOAREA
■ SENCOLS
■ ORDERBY
■ GROUPBY
■ KEYCOLS

to transfer to the Field Extension screen, enter U in the select field in column 80 to the
right of the field that you need to extend. The Field Extension field redisplays the
field with additional lines for data entry.
If the field that you are extending contains column names, the Field Extension screen
displays a select field in column 80. To select the names of columns being added
rather than keying them in, enter a nonblank character in this select field; you are
transferred to the List Select Columns screen which lists valid columns from which
you can select. After selecting columns, invoke END processing to return.
Note: You can transfer directly from the Update SQL Detail Data Access screen to
the List Select Columns screen by entering S in the selection field in column
80 to the right of the SENCOLS, ORDERBY, GROUPBY, or KEYCOLS
field.
1. COMMAND
2. PREVIEW
A facility that permits you to see the effects of varying fields upon the call
without having to wait until CA-Telon generates the program. Invoke PREVIEW
by specifying a non-blank character.
Notes:
1. You cannot use PREVIEW to edit or save the call. Use the CPYCALL field
to edit or save the call.
2. When a CPYCALL copybook exists for this data access request, the
CPYCALL custom code is displayed when PREVIEW is selected.
3. OPTIMIZE FOR
The number of rows specified in an OPTIMIZE parameter for generated SQL calls
with a cursor (BROWSE, READNEXT, TRANSACT, MATCH, and MERGE).
Note: Under versions of DB2 earlier than 2.3, CA-Telon will generate the code,
but the DB2 precompilers will not accept it. Other SQLs might not accept
it as well.
4. FETCH ONLY
A value to specify whether to generate FOR FETCH ONLY in the DECLARE
CURSOR statement for generated DB2 calls with a cursor (BROWSE,
READNEXT, TRANSACT, MATCH, and MERGE).
Note: Under versions of DB2 earlier than 2.3, CA-Telon will generate the code
it as well.
Valid values are:
Y
Generate FOR FETCH ONLY
N
Do not generate FOR FETCH ONLY. This is the default.

5. RESLTNR (SPBROWSE, SPTRNACT and SPRDNEXT Data Access Only)

The number of the result set produced by the called stored procedure. If only one
result set is produced, the number is 1.
Note: If RESLTNR is specified, then RESLTPR must also be specified.
6. KEY OR WHERE
You can enter expressions in the following formats:
■ The key is a list of host variables, separated by commas and paired with
KEYCOLS and OPCODEs to generate the WHERE clause. The default
OPCODE is the equals sign (=).
Multiple variables should be separated by commas.
■ The key is separated by commas, followed by the OPCODE, followed by the
host variables, as shown in the example below:
TASK EMPL_ID,=,:XFER_EMPL_ID, OR, TASK EPL_ID,=:WS_TASK_ID
■ The expression appears in one of the following formats:
– The entire expression is enclosed in single quotes, as shown below:
'COUNT(EMPL_NAME) > 1'
– The entire expression appears in the following sequence:
1. An expression enclosed by single quotes
2. A logical operator (OR, AND, or NOT)
3. An expression enclosed in single quotes
You can specify the BETWEEN and LIKE predicates using this format only.
An example is shown below:
:EMPL_NAME BETWEEN "JOHN" AND "JONES"
The following considerations apply to KEY or WHERE clauses:
■ To generate a literal value, enclose the value in double quotes, as shown
below:
:EMPL_NAME BETWEEN "JOHN" AND "JONES"
Note: Use caution when you specify literals. Because the Generator replaces
double quotes (") with two apostrophes, a possible overflow of the
allowable field lengths might result.
■ You can specify functions such as MAX, MIN, COUNT, SUM, and AVG.
An example of specifying AVG is shown below:
'EMPL_HOURLY_RATE < AVG(EMPL_HOURLY_RATE)'
■ On an SQL CREATE user exec request, CA-Telon uses the value in this field
to specify a mass insert criterion, as in this example:

EXEC SQL INSERT INTO DSN8.TEMPL

SELECT mass
FROM DSN82.TEMPL insert
WHERE WORKDEPT='D11' criterion
END-EXEC.
7. IGNORE
generation time.

conditions
REF Violations of referential integrity valid for DB2 only;
SQLCODES -530 through -536
DBMERROR or DBM Any return code not specified above (SQL only)
ALL Any return code
the default.
the default.
8. IOAREA
The data area used for this I/O operation. The value in this field overrides the
value in the COPYLV1 field.
See dref refid=s135. for more information about the COPYLV1 field.
To request additional space for entry in this field, enter U in the select field in
column 80. You are transferred to the Field Extension screen, where the field is
redisplayed with additional lines for data entry.

9. UPDATE
A value to specify whether an update is generated for the record that is current of
the cursor. Valid values are:
Y
CA-Telon generates an update for the current record of the cursor. CA-Telon
does not generate the statement to perform the update; you must do this in
custom code. The name of the update paragraph follows standard user exec
naming conventions, except that CA-Telon appends -UPDATE or _UPDATE
to the name.
N
CA-Telon does not generate an update for the current record of the cursor.
This is the default.
If both an UPDATE and a CPYCALL are coded on the same I/O, the UPDATE
call is generated according to CA-Telon defaults. Information coded in the
CPYCALL is not used to generate the UPDATE call. If an UPDATE call must
match information in a CPYCALL, define a separate UPDATE call with its own
CPYCALL.
10. DELETE
A value to specify whether a delete is generated for the record that is current of
cursor. Valid values are:
Y
CA-Telon generates a delete for the current record of the cursor. CA-Telon
does not generate the statement to perform the delete; you must do this in
custom code. The name of the delete paragraph follows standard user exec
naming conventions, except that CA-Telon appends -DELETE or _DELETE
to the name.
N
CA-Telon does not generate a delete for the current record of the cursor.
This is the default.
11. HOLD CURSOR
A value to specify whether to generate WITH HOLD in the DECLARE CURSOR
statement for generated DB2 calls with a cursor (BROWSE, READNEXT,
TRANSACT, MATCH, and MERGE).
Note: Under versions of DB2 earlier than 2.3, CA-Telon will generate the code,
it as well.
Valid values are:
Y
Generate WITH HOLD
N
Do not generate WITH HOLD. This is the default.
12. SENCOLS
The columns that you want to select to be returned to the program.
The value in this field overrides the value in the AC field for the columns on the

Create/Update SQL Tables/TLNROWs screen (for the row to which the I/O
corresponds).
You can specify any built-in functions such as MAX, COUNT, AVG, MIN, and
SUM. Enclose the entire expression in single quotes.
The sample screen below shows specifying the COUNT function in SENCOLS:
TRC21.BD U-1-READ-TRGEMPL

COMMAND ==> ___________________________________________________________________
OPTIONS ==> PREVIEW _
GENERAL: KEY OR 'EMPL_DOB < 6511'_________________________________________ _
WHERE ____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
IGNORE ____________________________________________________________
IOAREA WS-OLD-EMPL_________________________________________________ _
DB2/SQL: SENCOLS 'COUNT()'__________________________________________________ _
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
ORDERBY ____________________________________________________________ _
_____________________________________________________________
GROUPBY ____________________________________________________________ _
HAVING ____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
KEYCOLS @EMPL_ID____________________________________________________ _
_____________________________________________________________
OPCODE @__________________________________________________________
CUSTOM CODE: _ CPYCALL ________ _ CPYINIT ________
_ CPYKEY ________ _ CPYTERM ________

redisplayed with additional lines for data entry. If you enter U when the
UPDATE field value is Y, the Field Extension screen also displays:
■ An UPDCOLS field in which you can specify update columns separate from
select columns.
■ A select field in which you can request access to the List Select Columns
screen. The List Select Columns screen allows you to select the names of
columns to add to the UPDCOLS field.
13. ORDERBY
The columns to include in the ORDERBY clause of the user I/O that CA-Telon
generates. For a BROWSE request, the ORDERBY specification overrides the key
settings specified for the table on the Create/Update SQL Tables/TLNROWs
screen.
If the field that you are extending contains column names, the Field Extension
screen displays a select field in column 80. To select the names of columns being
added rather than keying them in, enter a nonblank character in this select field;
you are transferred to the List Select Columns screen which lists valid columns

from which you can select. After selecting columns, invoke END processing to
return.
Note: You can transfer directly from the Update SQL Detail Data Access screen
to the List Select Columns screen by entering S in the selection field in
column 80 to the right of the ORDERBY field.
14. GROUPBY
The columns to include in the GROUPBY clause of the I/O that CA-Telon
generates.
return.
Note: You can transfer directly from the Update SQL Detail Data Access screen
to the List Select Columns screen by entering S in the selection field in
column 80 to the right of the GROUPBY field.
15. HAVING
The HAVING clause for the I/O that CA-Telon generates.
return.
16. KEYCOLS
The key columns in the I/O that CA-Telon generates. The value in this field
overrides the key name that can be set for the columns on the Create/Update SQL
Tables/TLNROWs screen (for the row to which the I/O corresponds). Defaults, if
used, are displayed followed by the at sign (@).
Note: CA-Telon protects the KEYCOLS field for BROWSE, READNEXT, and
TRANSACT requests, and may protect the field for a MATCH or MERGE
request. For these I/O requests, the ORDERBY field also functions as the
KEYCOLS clause.

17. OPCODE
For SQL processing, the relational operator.
The value in this field overrides the OPCODE that CA-Telon automatically
generates (shown with the inheritance @ sign). Valid values are:
Value Description
= (Default) Equal to
¬= Not equal to
> Greater than
> Less than
18. Edit Flag fields

Some fields on this screen for which you supply custom code member names are
preceded by a one-position edit option field. The list below provides valid edit
option values and the functions that they invoke:
U
CA-Telon transfers to the List Custom Code screen after you enter the custom
code member name in the associated field.
O
value **DFLT**.
point.
S
19. CPYCALL
The name of the custom code member containing the SQL call.
To create the default SQL call and put it into the custom code member that you
specify, enter a non-blank character in the select field to the left of the CPYCALL
field. This also allows you to edit the custom code member.
After editing the custom code member and returning to this screen, you can
overtype blanks in the CPYCALL field to keep the custom code member but
prevent CA-Telon from using it when generating the program. Otherwise,
CA-Telon copies the custom code member into the I/O that it generates. If both an

UPDATE and a CPYCALL are coded on the same I/O, then the UPDATE call is
generated according to CA-Telon defaults. The values in CPYCALL are not be
used to generate the UPDATE call. To make an UPDATE call match the value in
a CPYCALL, enter a separate UPDATE call value with its own CPYCALL value.
Notes:
1. CPYCALL should only be used with user execs. It is not recommended for
use with auto exec calls.
2. When a CPYCALL copybook exists for this data access request, the
CPYCALL custom code is displayed when PREVIEW is selected.
3. When using CPYCALL with the AS/400 Target Option, the cursor names
appearing in the copy member must be edited. For example,
READNEXT_TRGEMPL must be modified to READNEXTi, where i is a
sequential number indicating the "ith" cursor defined in the program.
20. CPYINIT
The name of the custom code member used at the entry point before SQL access.
This custom code member is used prior to the call (EXEC SQL).
To access the custom code member in edit mode, enter a non-blank character in
the select field to the left of the CPYINIT field.
When you return to this screen from edit mode, you can overtype blanks in the
CPYINIT field to keep the custom code member but prevent CA-Telon from using
it when generating the program. Otherwise, CA-Telon copies the custom code
member before the I/O that it generates.
Note: CPYINIT should only be used with user execs. It is not recommended for
use with auto exec calls.
21. RESLTCC (SPBROWSE, SPTRNACT and SPRDNEXT Data Access Only)
The name of the custom code member used at the entry point in the
S-200-CURSOR-resltpr-nn, where resltpr is the name of the stored procedure
being called and nn. is the corresponding result set number. This field is optional.
22. CPYKEY
The name of the custom code member that contains the WHERE clause.
the select field to the left of the CPYKEY field.
CPYKEY field to keep the custom code member but prevent CA-Telon from
using it when generating the program. Otherwise, CA-Telon copies the custom
code member into the I/O that it generates.
Note: CPYKEY should only be used with user execs. It is not recommended to
be used with auto exec calls.
23. CPYTERM
The name of the custom code member used at the entry point following SQL
access.

the select field to the left of the CPYTERM field.
CPYTERM field to keep the custom code member but prevent CA-Telon from
using it when generating the program. Otherwise, CA-Telon copies the custom
code member after the I/O that it generates.
Note: CPYTERM should only be used with user execs. It is not recommended
for use with auto exec calls.
24. RESLTPR (SPBROWSE, SPTRNACT and SPRDNEXT Data Access only)
The name of the stored procedure being called to produce the result set referred to
with the RESLTNR field.
Note: If RESLTNR is specified, then RESLTPR must also be specified.

5.10 Field Extension

Access: On the Update SQL Detail Data Access screen, enter U in the select field
in column 80 for one of these fields:
■ KEY OR WHERE
■ IOAREA
■ SENCOLS
■ ORDERBY
■ GROUPBY
■ KEYCOLS
Program ID: S144
Function: Add data to certain fields that originate on the Update SQL Detail Data
Access screen.
Note: The @ sign on this screen indicates that the value is inherited from data
administration.
Refer to Programming Concepts Guide for information on data inheritance.
SQL FIELD EXTENSION SCREEN

COMMAND ===> 1__________________________________________________________
TRC21.BD AUTOEXEC TRANSACT TRGEMPL

TABLE NAME TELON.TRGEMPL ROW NAME TRGEMPL
SENCOLS 2_____________________________________________________________ 3
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
UPDCOLS 4____________________________________________________________ 5
____________________________________________________________

1. COMMAND

2. SENCOLS
A list of columns you want to select to return to the program.
3. Selection field
A select field in column 80. To select the names of columns being added rather
than keying them in, enter a nonblank character in this select field; you are
transferred to the Select Columns screen, which lists valid columns that you can
select. After selecting columns, invoke END processing to return.
4. UPDCOLS
A list of columns you want updated with this data access.
This field is displayed only when you request an update from the Select Columns
screen by entering U in the SENCOLS field and Y in the UPDATE field.
5. Selection field
A select field in column 80 that allows you to request transfer to the Select
Columns screen to select the names of columns to enter in the UPDCOLS field.
Valid values include any nonblank character.

5.11 Select Columns
5.11 Select Columns

Access
■ On the Update SQL Detail Data Access screen, enter S in the selection field in
column 80.
■ On the SQL Field Extension screen, enter any character in the selection field in
column 80.
Program ID: S187
Function: Lists the columns in the table.
SELECT COLUMNS

COMMAND ===> 1____________________________________________________ PAGE __ ____
TABLE NAME 2____________________________ ROW NAME 3_______
DICTNAM 4_______ SCHEMA 5_________________ A ^
S COLUMN NAME ALIAS KY/C TYPE LTH/DEC N

6 7________________________ 8_____________________________ 9_ 1_11_ 12 13 14

1. COMMAND
2. TABLE NAME
Protected field identifying the qualifier and name of the table. This value is from
either the SQL catalog or the Create/Update SQL Tables/TLNROWs screen.
3. ROW NAME
Protected field identifying a row of the table.
4. DICTNAM (CA-IDMS/SQL Only)
Protected field which displays the CA-IDMS Dictionary name from which a
CA-IDMS/SQL Table definition was extracted. It is only displayed for
CA-IDMS/SQL tables.
5. SCHEMA (CA-IDMS/SQL and CA-Datacom/SQL Only)
Protected field which displays the schema name of the Table. It is only displayed
for CA-IDMS or CA-Datacom/SQL tables.

5.11 Select Columns
6. S
A select field that enables you to place the corresponding column name in the list
as designated by the Update SQL Detail Data Access screen. Valid values include
any nonblank character.
Pressing [End] or [Enter] causes the TDF to append the selections to the list. You
can select a column more than once by pressing [Enter] and reselecting the desired
column.
7. COLUMN NAME
Protected field identifying the columns associated with the rows. The value
corresponds to one in the COLUMN NAME field on the Create/Update SQL
Tables/TLNROWs screen. The 18 byte maximum is displayed for all tables
except CA-IDMS and CA-Datacom tables. For CA-IDMS/SQL and
CA-Datacom/SQL tables only the first 25 bytes are displayed.
8. ALIAS
Protected field identifying one of the following:
■ An I/O area for the column, which CA-Telon uses in place of the COLUMN
NAME value for the I/O that it generates
■ The name of the TLNROW that you are defining, which CA-Telon uses in
the user exec procedure or paragraph names that it generates
The value was specified in the ALIAS field on the Create/Update SQL
Tables/TLNROWs screen.
9. KY (KEY)
Protected field specifying whether the column is included in generated I/O
WHERE conditions. Possible values are:
Y
The column is a key column
p
The column is a key column in position p in the key column list
(Blank)
The column is not a key column
The value was specified in the KY field on the Create/Update SQL
10. AC (ACCESS)
Protected field specifying whether the column is accessed by the EXEC SQL
statement.
Y
N
The value was specified in the AC field on the Create/Update SQL

5.11 Select Columns
11. TYPE
Protected field displaying the data type of the column. The value was specified in
the TYPE field on the Create/Update SQL Tables/TLNROWs screen. See 3.18,
“Create/Update SQL Tables/TLNROWs” on page 3-53 for a full description of
these options.
12. LTH
Protected field displaying the length of a variable-length data type or the precision
of a decimal data type. The value was specified in the LTH field on the
13. DEC
Protected field displaying the scale of a decimal data type. The value was
specified in the DEC field on the Create/Update SQL Tables/TLNROWs screen.
14. ^N (^NULL)
Protected field indicating whether the column is defined as not null. The value
was specified in the ¬NU field on the Create/Update SQL Tables/TLNROWs
screen. Possible values are:
Y
The column is defined as not null (null values are not allowed)
N
The column is defined such that null values are allowed

5.12 Update DL/I Detail Data Access

DL/I data access value.
Program ID: S145
Function: Updates I/O for the segment identified on the Create/Update Data Group
screen by defining I/O characteristics not available on the previous screen:
■ Characteristics valid for any type of I/O
■ Characteristics valid for DL/I only

XXXXXX.XX X-XXX-XXXXXXXX-XXXXXXX
COMMAND ===> 1_________________________________________________________________
OPTIONS ==> PREVIEW _2
GENERAL: FUNC 3________ SSALIST 4_ (Y/N) CONCATK 5_ (Y/N)

IGNORE 6______________________________________________________________
IOAREA 7______________________________________________________________
PATH 8________ PARENTG 9_______ LOCKED 1_____ CURRENT 11_______
DSCREF SEGMENT CMND IMSKEY OP KEY

12 13 14 15 16 17 18
__ ________ ________ _____ _________ ___ _______________________________ _

1. COMMAND
You can also enter the INIT command to reinitialize all segment characteristics for
all database segments, including those not displayed on the screen.
2. PREVIEW
A facility that permits you to see the effects of varying fields upon the call
without having to wait until CA-Telon generates the program. Invoke PREVIEW
by specifying a non-blank character.
Note: You cannot use PREVIEW to edit or save the call. You can use the
CPYCALL field to edit or save the call. See 5.9, “Update SQL Detail
Data Access” on page 5-46 for more information about CPYCALL.

3. FUNC
The four-byte DL/I function code that specifies the nature of the call, in
conjunction with the value specified for the REQUEST field on the Create/Update
Data Group screen. For example:
LABEL Field REQUEST Field FUNC Field

READ READ GU
READGHU READ GHU
READGHN READ GHN
READNEXT READ GU
UPDATE UPDATE (Defaults to GHU, REPL)
REPLACE UPDATE REPL
DELETE DELETE (Defaults to GHU, DLET)
DELETE2 DELETE DLET
Note: For EXEC DLI, GET HOLD function codes are invalid.
4. SSALIST
A field that allows you to access the SSALIST field entries on the Update
Database User I/O SSALIST screen. Valid values are:
Y
Access the screen
N
Do not access the screen
5. CONCATK
A field that allows you to specify whether to use qualification statements or a
concatenated key to qualify an I/O request. This is equivalent to the C command
code. Valid values are:
Y
Generate the C command code
N
Do not generate the C command code
6. IGNORE
generation time.



conditions
ALL Any return code
the default.
the default.
7. IOAREA
The data area used for this I/O operation. The value in this field overrides the
value in the COPYLBL field.
See 5.7, “Update Database Segment” on page 5-35 for more information about the
COPYLBL field.
8. PATH
As part of the path call, the segment at (and below) the one CA-Telon is to
retrieve.
Entering a value in this field is equivalent to the D command code for all segment
levels at (and below) the specified segment.
9. PARENTG
The segment that is the current parent level for succeeding calls.
The value in this field is equivalent to the EXEC DLI SETPARENT option and
the P SSA command code.
10. LOCKED
A lock on the specified segment reserving it for exclusive use by the program,
regardless of whether the program updates it. DL/I prevents the segment from
being altered by other programs until the next program reaches a sync point.
The value in this field is equivalent to the Q SSA command code.
11. CURRENT
The segment above which CA-Telon is to maintain position for all levels.
The value in this field is equivalent to the V SSA command code.

12. (Line command)

A line command here allows you to request a list of SSAs or commands for the
segment. Enter U or S.
The Update DLIDSCs For Segment Member screen is displayed, providing a list
of all user-defined SSAs or DLIDSCs. Enter S in the COMMAND field on this
screen to select that DLIDSC. CA-Telon updates all available information on the
Select New Row Name screen or the Update DL/I Detail Data Access screen,
setting the segment or user I/O SSA values. The USECNT value is incremented
at this time.
13. DSCREF
The SSA or qualification statements for CA-Telon to use to build SSAs or
qualification statements for this request. Valid values are:
**DFLT**
CA-Telon uses the default SSA/command for this level. The default SSA is
generated as a qualified SSA in most cases. However, the default SSA is
generated as an unqualified SSA when the segment is unkeyed or the data
group contains an I/O request for this segment with the
DSCREF=**QUAL**.
QUAL
CA-Telon uses the qualified SSA for this level.
UNQUAL
CA-Telon uses the unqualified SSA for this level.
To increment USECNT appropriately, use the U or S command code to request a
list of SSAs (the List SSAs screen) and then use the S command code to select
DLIDSC for this segment level or I/O request.
14. SEGMENT
Protected field identifying the segment that you are listing.
15. CMND
The four-byte SSA command code that CA-Telon defines on the segment it
generates.
CA-Telon prefixes the character or characters you enter with an asterisk (*) and
adds a suffix of one to three hyphens (-) to make the four-byte code. For
example, if you enter D, CA-Telon would generate the SSA command code field
as:
D--
If you do not specify a code, CA-Telon uses the IMS default *---.
For EXEC DLI, you can use this field to specify segment qualification options.
Note that EXEC DLI does not support all command codes.
16. IMSKEY
Protected field identifying the name of the key for the segment. The field is blank
for a non-keyed segment. The value in this field defines the DBD FIELD
statement, NAME=.

17. OP
If not specified, the default is ">=" for BROWSE data access and "= " for keyed
access. For DL/I processing, valid values are:
Value Description
= Equal to
=< Less than or equal to
> Greater than
< Less than
¬= Not equal to
=¬ Not equal to
Note: OP does not apply for unqualified SSAs; that is, for BROWSE requests for
which there is no starting key value (STBRKEY, defined on the
Create/Update File Segloop screen). If you use the SCHFLDx field on the
Create or Update File SEGLOOP screen, OP can be (but need not always
be) set to the equal sign (=).
These rules apply to OPCODE overrides:
■ User I/O OPCODE overrides the segment level OPCODE
■ Segment-level OPCODE overrides the DLIDSC OPCODE in Option 2
CA-Telon generates the value of the segment-name-SSA-OPCODE in working
storage based on the segment-level OPCODE override.
If you override the OPCODE at the user I/O, before the DL/I call in U-100,
CA-Telon moves the overridden OPCODE to xxxx-SSA-OPCODE and resets it
back to the OPCODE in working storage after the DL/I call.
If the user I/O OPCODE is the same as the segment-level OPCODE, CA-Telon
does not generate MOVE statements for the OPCODE.
18. KEY
The host variable name whose value is moved in the SSA for the database call.

5.13 Update Database User I/O SSALIST

Access: On the Update DL/I Detail Data Access screen, enter Y in the SSALIST
field.
Program ID: S185
Function: Specifies the list of host variables used as SSAs in the call to CBLTDLI,
CEETDLI, or PLITDLI.
XXXXXX.XX X-XXX-XXXXXXXX-XXXXXXX SSALIST PROCESSING FORMAT ACTIVE

COMMAND ==> 1__________________________________________________________________
OPTIONS ==> PREVIEW _2
GENERAL: FUNC 3________ SSALIST 4_ (Y/N)

IGNORE 5_____________________________________________________________
IOAREA 6_____________________________________________________________
SEGMENT SSA LIST HOST VARIABLE

7______ 8_________________________________________________________________

1. COMMAND
2. PREVIEW
A value to request a view of the generated call. Valid values include any
nonblank character.
3. FUNC
The nature of the call, in conjunction with the value specified in the LABEL and
REQUEST fields on the Create/Update Data Group screen. For example:
LABEL Field REQUEST FUNC Field

Field
READ READ GU
READGHU READ GHU
READGHN READ GHN
READNEXT READ GU
UPDATE UPDATE (Defaults to GHU, REPL)

LABEL Field REQUEST FUNC Field

Field
REPLACE UPDATE REPL
DELETE DELETE (Defaults to GHU, DLET)
For DL/I, the value in this field specifies a four-byte function code (GN, GNP,
and so on). For EXEC DLI, Get Hold function codes are invalid.
4. SSALIST
A value to request transfer to another screen. Valid values are:
Y
Transfer to the Update DL/I Detail Data Access screen
N
Do not transfer to the Update DL/I Detail Data Access screen
(blank)
Do not transfer to the Update DL/I Detail Data Access screen
5. IGNORE
Status codes to be ignored. All DBMS-specific ignore values are valid. These
generic ignore values are translated to the corresponding DBMS-specific value at
generation time:
Status Code What CA-Telon Ignores

DUPLICATE or DUP Multiple record/key occurrences
LOGICERR or LOG Errors on accesses that are dependent on prior required
conditions
ALL Any return code
If CA-Telon encounters a return code (other than blanks) that is not ignored,
CA-Telon assumes ABEND processing, as follows:
the default.
■ For BROWSE, CA-Telon does not invoke ABEND processing. ALL is the
default.

6. IOAREA
The data area used for this I/O operation. The value in the field overrides a value
in the COPYLBL field of another screen.
7. SEGMENT
The segment to which the SSALIST host variable applies. This value is
informational only and does not affect code generation.
8. SSA LIST HOST VARIABLE
The SSA host variables used as the list of SSAs in the generated call.

5.14 Update VSAM or Sequential Detail Data Access

VSAM or SEQ data set.
Program ID: S146
Function: Updates I/O for a previously defined file.

XXXXXX.XX X-XXX-XXXXXXXX-XXXXXXX
COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
OPTIONS ==> PREVIEW 2_
GENERAL: IGNORE 3__________________________________________________________

IOAREA 4___________________________________________________________
FDREC 5______________________________
VSAM: KEY 6____________________________________________________________

FUNC 7________
OPCODE 8_____
EXEC
CICS: GENKEYL 9_____________________________
OPTLIST 1_________________________________________________________
RECLTH 11_________________________________________________________

1. COMMAND
2. PREVIEW
nonblank character except a question mark.
3. IGNORE
Status codes to be ignored. All DBMS-specific ignore values are valid. These
generic ignore values are translated to the corresponding DBMS-specific value at
generation time:

DUPLICATE or DUP Multiple record/key occurrences
LOGICERR or LOG Errors on accesses that are dependent on prior required
conditions


NOSPACE Out of space (sequential files only)
ALL Any return code
If CA-Telon encounters a return code (other than blanks) that is not included in
the IGNORE field for an I/O, CA-Telon assumes ABEND processing as follows:
the default.
the default.
4. IOAREA
The data area used for this I/O operation. This value overrides a value in the
COPYLV1 field specified on another screen.
5. FDREC
The name of the 01-level COBOL record name in the file definition (FD) that is
written, if different from the default dsname-RECORD.
6. KEY
The names of the PL/I or COBOL variable containing the key to a record. If
inheritance is requested, data access (user I/O) uses the variable name to identify a
record that it retrieves. Refer to Programming Concepts Guide for information on
inheritance.
7. FUNC
The nature of the call in conjunction with the value specified in the REQUEST
field on the Create/Update Data Group screen. For example:
VSAM I/O REQUEST Field FUNC Field

Command
DELETE DELETE DELETE
WRITE CREATE CREATE
REWRITE REPLACE REPLACE
READNEXT READNEXT READNEXT
ENDBR READNEXT ENDBR
READ READ READ
STARTBR READ STARTBR
UNLOCK READ UNLOCK
READPREV READ READPREV

VSAM I/O REQUEST Field FUNC Field

Command
RESETBR READ RESETBR
ENDBR READ ENDBR
REWRITE UPDATE REWRITE
UNLOCK UPDATE UNLOCK
Note: — To execute the equivalent of a STARTBR automatically through a
program, the user must execute STARTBR and then reset the record position by
entering a READPREV.
8. OPCODE
The operation code for VSAM access. Valid values are:
GTEQ
Greater than or equal to. This is the default.
EQ
Equal to
GT
Greater than
9. GENKEYL (VSAM Processing Only)
The length of the generic key used for the access.
Valid values include either an integer or the name of a COBOL or PL/I variable
that contains the key-length value. If not specified here, CA-Telon assumes that
the access uses the full key length; it does not use the GENKEYL value from the
RECORD statement.
10. OPTLIST (VSAM Processing Only)
Options on CICS data sets for command level calls. You can use this field to
specify one or more of these options on the SEGMENT statement and all user
exec data access (READ, UPDATE, CREATE, and DELETE). Separate each
option with a comma. Valid values are:
■ RRN
■ SEGSET
■ SEGSETALL
■ SYSID
■ MASSINSERT
■ DEBKEY
■ DEBREC
■ UPDATE
Values coded on the SEGMENT statement are carried down to user exec
specifications if you do not specify an OPTLIST value on the user exec data
access.
Values that are not valid for a specific command level verb (such as READ,
WRITE, and STARTBR) are automatically removed from any calls using that

verb. For example, if MASSINSERT is specified as an option on the RECORD

statement or user exec data access, it appears only if the EXEC CICS WRITE
command is generated for that segment in the CICS program.
You can specify literal values for the SEGSET and SYSID options by enclosing
11. RECLTH (VSAM Processing of Variable-length Records Only)
The maximum length of each record on the file. Valid values are:
Record-length
by the read).
Read-length,rewrite-length
Each value can be specified as either an integer or the name of a COBOL or
PL/I variable that contains the key-length value. Read-length is used for all
automatic read EXEC CICS calls for the record. Rewrite-length is used as the
maximum length of the updated record. This specification is applicable for
UPDATE processing only (that is, usage is UPDATE).
The value in this field overrides the RECLTH value specified on the RECORD
statement for the file being accessed.
Note: The length that you use in a CICS read operation for a variable-length
record must be at least as large as the actual record retrieved. If not, a
CICS abend results.

5.15 Update CICS Queue Record

CICS queue record.
Program ID: S13Q
Function: Updates CICS queue records.
HHNNNN.ND UPDATE CICS QUEUE RECORD

COMMAND==>1___________________________________________________________________
CQNAME 2________
GENERAL: TYPE 3_ (TS/TD) AUX/MAIN 4 (A/M)

LRECL 5____
SYSID 6________
LTHOPT 7_______ LTHLBL 8________________________________
QUELBL 9_________________________________
RECORD: LABEL 1______ USAGE 11_________

COPY 12_______
COPYLV1 13 (Y/N) COPYLBL 14_______________________________

1. COMMAND
2. CQNAME
The default queue name to identify this queue to CICS.
This field is protected if a value was specified in the NAME field on the Data
Administration menu. If a value is displayed on this screen as a result of using
the DGADD command on the Create/Update Data Group screen, you can modify
the value here.
3. TYPE
Protected field identifying the type of CICS queue. Possible values are:
TS
Temporary storage
TD
Transient data
This value is the default for all program definitions that reference this queue.
4. AUX/MAIN (Temporary Storage Queues Only)
The type of storage to which this queue should be written. Valid values are:
A
Auxiliary storage. This is the default.

M
Main storage
This value is the default for all program definitions that reference this queue.
5. LRECL
The length (in bytes) of the queue record. If an LRECL value has been defined
for the queue in data administration, you can override that value here.
This value is required if the LTHOPT value is also specified on this screen.
6. SYSID
The system ID to use when CA-Telon accesses this queue.
A value is not required, but if you specify one, you must also specify LTHOPT
and LRECL values on this screen.
This field is protected if a value was specified in the SYSID field on the Update
CICS Queue Default Data screen. If a value is displayed on this screen as a result
of using the DGADD command on the Create/Update Data Group screen, you can
modify the value here.
The variable loaded with SYSID is on one of the following:
■ SYSWK-cqname-QUEUE-SYSID (COBOL) or
■ SYSWK_cqname_QUEUE_SYSID (PL/I), where cqname is the value of the
CQNAME field. This is the default.
7. LTHOPT
A value to specify whether CA-Telon is to generate the CICS LENGTH option in
the I/O for the queue. Valid values are:
Y
Generate queue I/O with the CICS LENGTH option
N
Generate queue I/O without the CICS LENGTH option. This is the default.
The default value is Y if you specified a value in the SYSID field or if this CICS
queue has been defined in data administration; otherwise, it is N.
If you specify a value in the LRECL field and Y in the LTHOPT field, CA-Telon
uses the LRECL value to initialize the variable used with the LTHOPT option.
This variable is one of the following:
■ SYSWK-cqname-QUEUE-LENGTH (COBOL) or
SYSWK_cqname_QUEUE_LENGTH (PL/I), where cqname is the value of
the CQNAME field. This is the default.
■ If specified, the value in the LTHLBL on this screen
If you do not specify a value in the LRECL field, CA-Telon-generated code does
not initialize the CICS LENGTH option variable.
8. LTHLBL
The name of the COBOL or PL/I variable used with the LTHOPT value in I/O
requests for this CICS queue. This value is meaningful only when the LTHOPT
value is Y.

9. QUELBL
The name of the COBOL or PL/I variable that identifies the queue to be used in
all EXEC CICS commands for this queue. The default value is:
■ SYSWK-cqname-QUEUE-NAME (COBOL) or
■ SYSWK_cqname_QUEUE_NAME (PL/I), where cqname is the value in the
CQNAME field.
10. LABEL
The label associated with this CICS queue. If the queue is defined in data
administration, the default value is established. You can override it here.
This value replaces the CQNAME field value in the names that CA-Telon
generates for this queue.
11. USAGE
The type of processing associated with this CICS queue. Valid values are:
Request Action
BROWSE This queue can be used in an I/O loop by screen OUTPUT
processing.
queue, regardless of whether data access has been defined for this
item.
queue has data access defined to it.
DUMMY This queue is not being used.
@DUMMY CA-Telon assumes that the queue is not being used because no
data access has been defined for it; no storage areas are needed.
12. COPY
The COBOL COPY or PL/I INCLUDE member name that contains the queue
record layout. If the queue is defined on the Update CICS Queue Default Data
screen, a COPY value is inherited. You can override it on this screen.
If not specified, the program uses the CQNAME field value as the name of the
member to copy or include.
If you enter NONE, no COPY or INCLUDE is generated.
13. COPYLV1
The starting level of the layout contained in the member identified in the COPY
Y
The COPY or INCLUDE layout for this queue starts at the 01 level. Specify
also a COPYLBL field value to supply the variable name of the queue I/O
area.

N
CA-Telon generates the 01- and 02-level variables that precede the COPY or
INCLUDE member.
If the queue is defined on the Update CICS Queue Default Data screen, a
COPYLV1 value is inherited. You can override it on this screen.
14. COPYLBL
The name of the variable identifying the I/O area used in accessing this queue. If
not specified, CA-Telon generates all I/O for this queue using the data area
IOA-cqname-QUEUE, where cqname is the value in the CQNAME field.
If the queue is defined on the Update CICS Queue Default Data screen, a
COPYLBL value is inherited. You cannot override it on this screen.

5.16 Update CICS Journal Record

CICS journal record.
Program ID: S13J
Function: Updates CICS journal records.
HHNNNN.ND UPDATE CICS JOURNAL RECORD

COMMAND==>1___________________________________________________________________
CJNAME 2________
GENERAL: JFILEID 3_ (1 - 99)

JTYPEID 4_
LRECL 5___
LTHOPT 6 (Y/N) LTHLBL 7__________________________
PFXLTH 8___ PFXLBL 9__________________________
RECORD: LABEL 1______ USAGE 11______

COPY 12______
COPYLV1 13 (Y/N) COPYLBL 14_________________________

1. COMMAND
2. CJNAME
Protected field displaying the CA-Telon name, inherited from the NAME field on
the Data Administration menu, that identifies this CICS journal definition.
3. JFILEID
The CICS journal ID in all generated I/O for this journal. Valid CICS journal IDs
are 02 through 99. (CICS reserves 01 for the system log.)
If this journal has been defined in data administration, this field is protected. If
the journal was defined on the Create/Update Data Group screen, you can modify
the JFILEID value here.
4. JTYPEID
A 2-character identifier of the origin of the journal record.
A value is required in this field. If the journal has been defined in data
administration, this field is protected. If the journal was defined on the
Create/Update Data Group screen, you can modify the JTYPEID value here.

5. LRECL
The maximum length (in bytes) of the user data of this journal's entries.
A value is required in this field. If the journal has been defined in data
administration, you can accept the default value or modify it here. The value of
this field can be defaulted if this journal exists.
6. LTHOPT
A value to specify whether CA-Telon is to generate the CICS LENGTH option in
the I/O for this journal. Valid values are:
Y
Generate journal I/O with the CICS LENGTH option
N
Generate journal I/O without the CICS LENGTH option. This is the default.
7. LTHLBL
The name of the COBOL or PL/I variable containing the length in I/O requests for
this CICS journal.
If Y is specified for LTHOPT, the default value for LTHLBL is
SYSWK-cjname-JOURNAL-LENGTH (COBOL) or
SYSWK_cjname_JOURNAL_LENGTH (PL/I), where cjname is the value in the
CJNAME field.
This value is invalid if LENGTH is not specified for a journal data access request.
8. PFXLTH
The length of user prefix data included in this journal I/O request. If not
specified, CA-Telon does not generate the PREFIX option.
9. PFXLBL
The name of the COBOL or PL/I variable containing the prefix for this journal
I/O request.
If a PFXLTH value without a PFXLBL value is specified, CA-Telon generates the
default variable SYSWK-cjname-JOURNAL-PREFIX (COBOL) or
SYSWK_cjname_JOURNAL_PREFIX (PL/I), where cjname is the value in the
JOURNAL field.
PFXLBL is invalid if no value is specified in the PFXLTH field.
10. LABEL
The label that CA-Telon uses in generating variable and procedural names for the
journal.
The default value is the value in the CJNAME field. You can modify it here.
11. USAGE
The type of processing associated with this CICS journal. Valid values are:
Request Action
journal, regardless of whether data access has been defined for
this item

Request Action
journal has data access defined to it
DUMMY This journal is not being used
@DUMMY CA-Telon assumes that the journal is not being used because no
data access has been defined for it; no storage areas are needed
12. COPY
The name of the COPY or INCLUDE member that contains the journal record
layout.
If not specified, the default is the value in the CJNAME field.
If you enter NONE, CA-Telon does not generate a COPY or INCLUDE for this
journal.
13. COPYLV1
The starting level of the layout contained in the member identified in the COPY
Y
The COPY or INCLUDE layout for this journal starts at the 01 level. Specify
also a COPYLBL field value to supply the variable name of the queue I/O
area.
N
CA-Telon generates the 01- and 02-level variables that precede the COPY or
INCLUDE member.
If the journal is defined on the Update CICS Queue Default Data screen, a
COPYLV1 value is inherited. You can override it on this screen.
14. COPYLBL
The name COBOL or PL/I group-level variable that identifies the I/O area used in
accessing the journal. For example, if the data area for this journal begins with
the COBOL variable 01 JOURNAL-SAVE, the COPYLBL value must be
JOURNAL-SAVE.
If the journal is defined in data administration, a default value is displayed here.
You can modify it.

5.17 Update CICS Queue Data Access

CICS queue I/O request.
Program ID: S14Q
Function: Supports queue I/O requests.
XXXXXX.SD U-1-READ-TRGQUEUE

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
OPTIONS ==> PREVIEW 2_
GENERAL TYPE TS 3_
IGNORE 5______________________________________________________
IOAREA 6@_____________________________________________________
EXEC
CICS: SYSID 7____
LTHOPT 8@ (Y/N) LTHLBL 9@_________________________
SET 1 (Y/N) SETLBL 11_______________________
NOSUSP 12 (Y/N)
ITEM 13 (Y/N) ITMLBL 14_______________________
NUMITEM 15 (Y/N) NITMLBL 16_______________________

1. COMMAND
2. PREVIEW
3. TYPE
Protected field identifying the type of CICS queue. Possible values are:
TS
Temporary storage
TD
Transient data
4. AUX/MAIN (Temporary Storage Queues Only)
Protected field identifying the type of storage to which the queue is written.
A
Auxiliary storage. This is the default.

M
Main storage
5. IGNORE
Conditions that the program is to ignore for this call. You can specify any of the
valid CICS queue handle conditions and these generic status codes:

OK Successful journal access
NOTFOUND or NFD ITEMERR (only valid for temporary storage access for
which the ITEM option has been specified)
ALL All conditions including OK
CA-Telon translates generic codes into the correct CICS queue conditions at
program generation.
The default condition is OK for all queue I/O requests except BROWSE (for
CICS screen programs) and TRANSACT (for CICS nonterminal). The default is
ALL for BROWSE access requests.
If any condition not specified is encountered during processing,
CA-Telon-generated codes invoke abnormal-termination processing.
Valid CICS handle conditions for temporary storage queues are:
■ INVREQ
■ IOERR
■ ISCINVREQ
■ ITEMERR
■ LENGERR
■ NOSPACE
■ NOTAUTH
■ QIDERR
■ SYSIDERR
Valid CICS HANDLE conditions for transient data queues are:
■ IOERR
■ ISCINVREQ
■ LENGERR
■ NOSPACE
■ NOTAUTH
■ NOTOPEN
■ QBUSY
■ QIDERR
■ QZERO
■ SYSIDERR
■ DISABLED

6. IOAREA
The data area used for the I/O operation. This value overrides the COPYLV1
field value on the Update CICS Queue Record screen.
IOAREA is inherited.
7. SYSID
Protected field identifying the system ID used when accessing the queue. If a
value is displayed, also enter a value in the LTHOPT field.
8. LTHOPT
A value to specify whether CA-Telon is to generate the LENGTH option in queue
I/O. Valid values are:
Y
N
Generate queue I/O without the CICS LENGTH option
The default is Y for read and write requests; otherwise, it is N.
If you specify a value in the LRECL field and Y in the LTHOPT field, CA-Telon
uses the LRECL value to initialize the variable used with the LTHOPT option.
This variable is one of the following:
■ SYSWK-cqname-QUEUE-LENGTH (COBOL) or
SYSWK_cqname_QUEUE_LENGTH (PL/I), where cqname is the value of
the CQNAME field. This is the default.
■ If specified, the value in the LTHLBL on this screen
If you do not specify a value in the LRECL field, CA-Telon-generated code does
not initialize the CICS LENGTH option variable.
For queues, LTHOPT is equal to Y and protected temporary storage.
9. LTHLBL
The name of the COBOL or PL/I variable used with the LTHOPT value in I/O
requests for this CICS queue. This value is inherited from the Update CICS
Queue Record screen. It is meaningful only when the LTHOPT value is Y.
10. SET
A value to specify whether the SET option is generated in queue I/O. Valid
values are:
Y
Generate queue I/O with the SET option
N
Generate queue I/O without the SET option. This is the default.
11. SETLBL
The name of the COBOL or PL/I variable used when the SET option is requested
in I/O for the queue (that is, when the value in the SET field is Y).
The default is SYSWK-cqname-QUEUE-PNTR (COBOL) or
SYSWK_cqname_QUEUE_PNTR (PL/I), where cqname is the value in the
CQNAME field on the Update CICS Queue Record screen.

12. NOSUSP
A value to specify whether these conditions are ignored:
■ NOSPACE on a TS WRITE I/O request
■ QBUSY on a TD READQ request
The value in this field applies to only these two I/O requests and is ignored if
specified for any others. It is not meaningful for CICS version 1.6 or earlier,
where NOSUSPEND is not a valid parameter.
Valid values are:
Y
Ignore the condition
N
Do not ignore the condition
13. ITEM
A value to specify whether the ITEM option is generated in the I/O for this queue.
It is valid for temporary storage queues only; the TYPE field value must be TS.
Valid values are:
Y
Generate queue I/O with the CICS ITEM option
N
Generate queue I/O without the CICS ITEM option. This is the default.
14. ITEMLBL
The name of the COBOL or PL/I variable used when the ITEM option is
requested in the I/O for the queue (that is, when the value in the ITEM field is Y).
It is valid for temporary storage queues only; the TYPE field value must be TS.
The default is SYSWK-cqname-QUEUE-ITEM (COBOL) or
SYSWK_cqname_ITEM (PL/I), where cqname is the value in the CQNAME field
on the Update CICS Queue Record screen.
15. NUMITEM
A value to specify whether the NUMITEM option is generated in queue I/O, to
indicate how many items are in the queue. It is valid for only a TS READQ I/O
request. Valid values are:
Y
Generate queue I/O with the CICS NUMITEM option
N
Generate queue I/O without the CICS NUMITEM option. This is the default.
16. NITMLBL
The name of the COBOL or PL/I NUMITEM variable used when the NUMITEM
option is requested in I/O for this queue (that is, when the value in the
NUMITEM field is Y). It is valid for temporary storage queues only; the TYPE
field value must be TS.
The default is SYSWK-cqname-QUEUE-NITEM (COBOL) or
SYSWK_cqname_QUEUE_NITEM (PL/I), where cqname is the value in the
CQNAME field on the Update CICS Queue Record screen.

5.18 Update CICS Journal Data Access

CICS journal I/O request.
Program ID: S14J
Function: Supports the journal I/O request, JOURNAL.
XXXXXX.SD U-1-JOURNAL-JJJJJJJJ

COMMAND==>1___________________________________________________________________
OPTIONS ==> PREVIEW 2
JOURNAL ==> JFILEID 3__ JTYPEID 4__
GENERAL: IGNORE 5______________________________________________________

IOAREA 6@_______________________________________________________
EXEC
CICS: FUNC 7____
LTHOPT 8 (Y/N) LTHLBL 9@_________________________
PFXLTH 1@__ PFXLBL 11@________________________
REQID 12 (Y/N) REQIDLBL 13_________________________
WAIT 14 (Y/N)
STARTIO 15 (Y/N)
NOSUSP 16 (Y/N)

1. COMMAND
2. PREVIEW
3. JFILEID
Protected field displaying the CICS journal ID, used in all generated I/O for this
journal.
4. JTYPEID
Protected field displaying the identifier of the origin of the journal record.
5. IGNORE
Conditions that the program is to ignore for this call. You can specify any of the
valid CICS queue handle conditions and these generic status codes:

OK Successful journal access
NOTFOUND or NFD ITEMERR (only valid for temporary storage access for
which the ITEM option has been specified)


ALL All conditions including OK
CA-Telon translates generic codes into the correct CICS queue conditions at
program generation.
The default condition is OK for all queue I/O requests except BROWSE (for
CICS screen programs) and TRANSACT (for CICS nonterminal). The default is
ALL for BROWSE access requests.
See 5.17, “Update CICS Queue Data Access” on page 5-80 for valid CICS
handle conditions. If any condition not specified is encountered during
processing, CA-Telon-generated codes invoke abnormal-termination processing.
6. IOAREA
The data area used for the I/O operation. This value overrides the COPYLV1
field value on the Update CICS Journal Record screen.
IOAREA is inherited.
7. FUNC
The nature of the journal I/O request. Valid values are:
WAIT
CA-Telon generates an EXEC CICS WAIT JOURNAL instruction. The
options WAIT, NOSUSP, PFXLTH, and PFXLBL cannot be used and should
not be specified on this screen. Only STARTIO and REQID are valid.
(blank)
CA-Telon generates an EXEC CICS JOURNAL instruction.
8. LTHOPT
A value to specify whether CA-Telon is to generate the LENGTH option in queue
I/O. Valid values are:
Y
N
Generate queue I/O without the CICS LENGTH option
9. LTHLBL
The name of the COBOL or PL/I variable that contains the length option in I/O
requests for the journal.
The default is SYSWK-cjname-JOURNAL-LENGTH (COBOL) or
SYSWK_cjname_JOURNAL_LENGTH (PL/I), where cjname is the value in the
CJNAME field on the Update CICS Journal Record screen.
A value in this field is not valid under either of these conditions:
■ The value in the LTHOPT field is N
■ The value in the FUNC field is WAIT

10. PFXLTH
The length of user prefix data included in the journal I/O request. If not specified,
the PREFIX option is not generated.
If the value in the FUNC field is WAIT, a value is not valid and will cause a
CA-Telon generation error.
11. PFXLBL
The name of the COBOL or PL/I containing the prefix for the journal I/O request.
The default is SYSWK-cjname-JOURNAL-PREFIX (COBOL) or
SYSWK_cjname_JOURNAL_PREFIX (PL/I), where cjname is the value in the
JOURNAL field on the Update CICS Journal Record screen. A value in this field
is not valid under either of these conditions:
■ The value in the PFXLTH field is blank
■ The value in the FUNC field is WAIT
12. REQID
A value to specify whether asynchronous output is required. Valid values are:
Y
Asynchronous output is required
N
Asynchronous output is not required
13. REQIDLBL
The name of the COBOL or PL/I variable that contains the REQID in I/O requests
for the journal.
The default is SYSWK-cjname-JOURNAL-REQID (COBOL) or
SYSWK_cjname_JOURNAL_REQID (PL/I), where cjname is the value of the
CJNAME field on the Update CICS Journal Record screen.
A value in this field is valid only if you specify a value in the REQID field.
14. WAIT
A value to specify whether the I/O requests for the journal are to include a WAIT
option, to cause a program containing the I/O request to wait until it is notified of
the completion of the request. Valid values are:
Y
Include the WAIT option
N
Do not include the WAIT option. This is the default.
15. STARTIO
A value to specify whether the output of the journal record is initiated
immediately. Valid values are:
Y
Initiate the output immediately
N
Do not initiate the output immediately. This is the default.

16. NOSUSP
A value to specify whether the NOJBUFSP condition is ignored by a JOURNAL
I/O request. Valid values are:
Y
Ignore the condition
N
Do not ignore the condition
A value in this field is ignored if the value in the WAIT field is Y. It is not
meaningful for CICS version 1.6 or earlier, where NOSUSPEND is not a valid
parameter.

5.19 Update TPPCB Detail Data Access

TPPCB.
Program ID: S149
Function: Updates I/O for the teleprocessing PCB defined on the Create/Update
Data Group screen.

XXXXX.XX X-XXX-XXXXXXXX-XXXXXXXX
COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
GENERAL: FUNC 2____
I/O: TPPARMS 3___________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________

1. COMMAND
For information, see 9.5, “Primary Commands” on page 9-13
2. FUNC
The nature of the call, in conjunction with the value specified in the REQUEST
field on the Create/Update Data Group screen. Valid values are:
■ GU
■ GN
■ ISRT
■ CHNG
■ PURG
■ CMG
■ GCMD
■ XRST
■ SYNC
■ SNAP
■ CHKP
■ DEQ
■ GSCD
■ LOG
■ ROLB

■ ROLL
■ STAT
■ SYMCHKP
3. TPPARMS
The parameter list passed to a teleprocessing PCB with the WRITE request.
Separate each parameter with a comma.
The first parameter in the list (that is, the first parameter after the PCB),
represents the third parameter in the call.
TPPARMS and IOAREA are mutually exclusive.
If DBMS is equal to EXEC DLI and you are coding either CHKP, XRST, or
SYMCHKP in a batch program, use the parameters in this table as indicated:
Parameter Usage
CHKP ID(PARM1)
XRST ID(PARM1)
MAXLENGTH(PARM2)
AREA1(PARM3)
LENGTH1(PARM4)
.
.
.
AREA7(PARM15)
LENGTH7(PARM16)
SYMCHKP ID(PARM1)
AREA1(PARM2)
LENGTH(PARM3)
.
.
.
AREA7(PARM14)
LENGTH(PARM15)

5.20 List/Show Custom Code

■ CC in the ITEM field
■ SD, DR, or RD, in the TYPE field
■ Custom-code in the CUSTCODE field
On the Nonterminal Program Definition menu, enter:

■ ND in the TYPE field
You can also access this screen by selecting the custom code option on these screens:
■ Create/Update Screen Definition
■ Create/Update Driver Definitions
■ Create/Update IMS/DC Report Definitions
■ Create/Update Nonterminal Definition
■ Create/Update Batch Definitions
Program ID: S159
Function: Lists custom code members.

XXXXXX.SD LIST CUSTOM CODE

COMMAND ==> 1 PAGE 1
NAME RENAME DESCRIPTION USER UPDATED

TESTCC1 TEST CUSTOM CODE MEMBER FOX7 8/19/
2 3 4 5 6 7

1. COMMAND
Note that you can specify the starting point of the list by entering L
member-name. If member-name is found, the list begins with member-name.
If member-name is not found, the list begins with the name of the member that
follows member-name in alphabetical order.
2. (Item manipulation)
A field allowing entry of a control character to manipulate the corresponding item
on the screen:
Entry Function Description

C COPY Copies a member
D DESCRIPTION Changes the description of a member
R RENAME Renames a member
S SHOW Allows you to enter a member in browse mode
U UPDATE Allows you to enter a member in update mode
Z ZAP Purges a member without a confirmation
P PURGE Deletes a member after confirmation
3. NAME
The name of the custom code member.
4. RENAME
The name of the member to be renamed or copied, if the value in the item
manipulation field is R or C.
Note: After a member has been renamed, it is accessed under its new name.

After processing an item manipulation function, CA-Telon might display a

confirmation message in this field:
Function Entry Confirmation Message

C *COPIED
D *DESC UP
P None
R *RENAMED
S None
U *PROCSD
Z *PURGED
5. DESCRIPTION
A description of the custom code member.
6. USER
Protected field identifying user who last accessed the custom code.
7. UPDATED
Protected field identifying when the custom code was last accessed.

5.21 Edit Custom Code

Access: On the Online Program Definition menu or the Nonterminal Program
Definition menu, enter:
You can also access this screen by entering U in the item manipulation field for the
custom code member on the List/Show Custom Code screen.
You can view, but not edit, the custom code member by invoking preview processing
from one of these screens:
■ Update SQL Detail Data Access
■ Update DL/I Detail Data Access
■ Update Database User I/O SSALIST
■ Update VSAM or Sequential Detail Data Access
■ Update CICS Queue Data Access
■ Update CICS Journal Data Access
■ Update TPPCB Detail Data Access
Program ID: S151
Function: Allows full-screen editing for the purpose of creating a member that
contains your custom code or code required for program work areas and database or
data file descriptors.
To save the member and return to the screen from which you transferred, press [End].

EDIT ---- HEADERID.SD TESTCC1 MEMBER 1 OF 1 SIZE COL 7

COMMAND ==> 1 SCROLL ===> PAGE
TOP OF DATA
2''''' 3
''''''
''''''
''''''
''''''
''''''
''''''
''''''
''''''
''''''
''''''
''''''
''''''
''''''
''''''
''''''
''''''
''''''
''''''
''''''
BOTTOM OF DATA

1. COMMAND
2. (Line command)
A field to enter one of these commands:
C Copy a line
I Insert a line
Inn Insert nn lines
M Move a line
R Repeat a line
O Overlay a line
OO Overlay a block of lines
D Delete an entry
X(n) Exclude n lines beginning with this line

XX Exclude a block of lines

3. (Edit line)
An input line for custom code. You can enter code as you would on an SPF
editor.
Note: A custom code member may not exceed 10,000 lines. Computer
Associates strongly recommends that no custom code member exceed 2000
lines, as unpredictable results may occur.

5.22 Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment

■ EN in the ITEM field
■ SD in the TYPE field
■ IMS in the ENVIRON field
You can also access this screen by selecting the ENV IMS option.
Program ID: S162
Function: Specifies the environment characteristics of a CA-Telon generated

program that operates in an IMS or CA-Telon TSO test environment. These
characteristics must be specified before you can generate a program to run under IMS.
HEADERID.SD UPDATE TSO/IMS SCREEN ENV

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
IMS: LINKOPT 2 (D/S) CONVERS 3 (Y/N) LINEOPT 4 (1/2/3)

TRACE 5 (Y/N) PGM/PSB NAME 6_______
GENPCBS 7 (Y/N) LNKCOPY 8_______ USGCOPY 9_______
TSO: GENPCBS 1(Y/N) LNKCOPY 11______ USGCOPY 12
TRAN: TRANCDE 13________ TRANMFS 14(Y/N) TRANFLD 15______
SPA: SPASIZE 16___ SPACMPT 17(Y/N)
WKSPASZ 18___ WKSPAIO: GET 19______ PUT 19______ WKSPAIN 2(Y/N)
FLOW: LINKPGM 21__________________________________________________________

(ID"S) ____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
MSGPGM 22__________________________________________________________
(ID"S) ____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
MSGTRAN 23__________________________________________________________
(ID"S, ____________________________________________________________
PGM"S) ____________________________________________________________
MSGTBL 24______ ___ MSGBUF 25______ ____
MSG ERR: A4EPGM 26____ A4EMSG 27______________________________________
MFS: MFSMOD 28______ SYSMSG 29______ MIDONLY/DEVICE 3
PLIXOPT: 31 IMS _ TSO _ ALL _ (C-CREATE/U-UPDATE/P-PURGE)

Show/Purge screen: You can access the Show/Purge TSO or IMS Screen
Environment (S161) screen from the Online Program Definition menu by entering:

The Show/Purge TSO or IMS Screen Environment screen fields are the same as the
Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment screen fields.
1. COMMAND
2. LINKOPT
The type of linking to occur in the IMS program. Valid values are:
D
The program is a stand-alone program that dynamically links to other
programs. If you do not specify ANY in either the LINKPGM or MSGPGM
fields, all programs to which control can be passed must be accounted for in
MSGTRAN, MSGPGM, MSGTBL, or LINKPGM values. Any attempt to
transfer to programs not identified in these fields results in a user ABEND.
S
Generate a program as a subroutine that executes under a driver. Values in
the CONVERS, MFSMOD, and PGMNAME are valid with this option.
The default value is set at installation.
3. CONVERS
A value to specify whether the system that CA-Telon generates is IMS
Y
The system being generated is an IMS conversational system using an IMS
SPA
N
The system being generated is an IMS non-conversational system using a
WORKSPA database
In conversational transaction processing, IMS maintains a conversation with the
terminal through an IMS SPA. While in conversation with IMS, the transaction
code is maintained by IMS until modified by the application program through
message switching or setting to spaces to terminate the conversation.
In non-conversational processing, the transaction code is sent to IMS each time
[Enter] or any PF key is pressed by the application user. When you use the
non-conversation mode, CA-Telon maintains a pseudo-conversation with IMS
through the use of a WORKSPA database. This is done by using the
SPA-TRANSACTION-CODE field in the transfer work area in the same way that
IMS uses this field in the IMS SPA.
4. LINEOPT
1
Use the CA-Telon line optimization subroutine. CA-Telon automatically

2
Simulate subroutine optimization in procedural custom code (except for
fill-character processing).
3
Do not generate the line optimizing code.
Note: For PWS, the LINEOPT value must be 2 or 3.
5. TRACE
Y
N
The program does not generate TRACE variables for the CA-Telon Test
Facility
Note: TRACE variables increase the size of the generated program. The TRACE
should be N for production environment.
6. PGM/PSB NAME
The name of the load module that the linkage editor creates. CA-Telon requires
this field only when the load module name is different from the name that
CA-Telon generates for the program. The generated program name is set as an
installation default.
7. GENPCBS
values are:
Y
N
8. LNKCOPY
The name of the COPY/INCLUDE member containing the 01-level declarations
included in the linkage section.
9. USGCOPY
procedure division or the PL/I procedure statements.
In COBOL, the variable declaration is the list of 01-level variables in the linkage
section. In PL/I, variable declaration is a list of DECLARE statements in the
linkage section.
10. GENPCBS
A value to specify whether to include TSO PCB masks in the program. Valid
values are:
Y

N
11. LNKCOPY
The name of the COPY/INCLUDE member containing the 01-level declarations
included in the linkage section.
12. USGCOPY
section. In PL/I, variable declaration is a list of DECLARE statements in the
linkage section.
13. TRANCDE
The IMS transaction code associated with the generated program. Enter a value
only when the IMS transaction is different from the CA-Telon-generated program
name. The program name is set as an installation default.
14. TRANMFS
A value to specify whether the MFS processes the transaction code. Valid values
are:
Y
MFS processes the transaction code
N
MFS does not process the transaction code. This is the default.
15. TRANFLD
The transaction code that is imbedded to the MID for this screen. This value is
used only when the /FORMAT command is used to start the application, or if the
system is non-conversational.
16. SPASIZE
defined alone or in conjunction with the WKSPASZ field value. The total of the
values in the two fields must be enough bytes to hold:
■ The SPA header
■ The size of the largest screen image in the application
You can fine tune the size as needed, based on SPA requirements printed out on
generated program listings.
17. SPACMPT
A value to specify whether CA-Telon is to generate a SPA with a fixed number of
overhead bytes, making it compatible for use by static and dynamic programs.
The generation of such a SPA allows for message switching between static and
dynamic modules in an application. Valid values are:

Y
CA-Telon generates a compatible SPA. CA-Telon generates a field called
SPACMPAT in the dynamic programs where the next-program-name field
exists in static programs.
N
CA-Telon generates SPA with a different number of overhead bytes, based on
whether the module is static or dynamic. Message switching between static
and dynamic modules cannot take place in the application.
18. WKSPASZ
The number of bytes in the WORKSPA database used in this application system.
The value is not used when you do not use a WORKSPA database.
In a non-conversational system, the database must be large enough to hold:
■ Overhead
In a conversational system, the WKSPASZ value must specify enough bytes to
hold the overflow from the IMS SPA area, whose size is specified in the
SPASIZE field.
19. WKSPAIO
The name of two copy members containing custom code used in the retrieval and
writing of WORKSPA databases:
■ GET contains custom code included before the read of the WORKSPA
database
■ PUT contains custom code included before the replace of the WORKSPA
database
20. WKSPAIN
initialization code is to take place in IMS program section
Y
Generate code to reinitialize the CA-Telon transfer work area when the IMS
program flow has been broken
N
Do not generate such code
21. LINKPGM
The program IDs of all programs to which the generated program can be
dynamically linked through CA-Telon, specified in this format:
id[,id.]
where:
id
The CA-Telon-generated program ID in the hhnnnn format of your CA-Telon
installation.

The list of IDs may be a maximum of 253 bytes long.

Alternatively, you can enter ANY to specify the generated program is dynamically
linked by means of CA-Telon to NEXT-PROGRAM-NAME if
NEXT-PROGRAM-NAME-ID is not detected in a search of the MSGPGM or
MSGTRAN fields. If you enter ANY here, do not specify ANY in the MSGPGM
field or any value in the MSGTBL field.
22. MSGPGM
The program IDs of all programs to which this program issues IMS message
switches to transfer control, specified in this format:
id[,id.]
where:
id
installation.
Alternatively, you can enter ANY to specify that the generated program is to do a
message switch to NEXT-PROGRAM-NAME if the
NEXT-PROGRAM-NAME-ID is not detected in LINKPGM, MSGTRAN, or
MSGTBL specifications. If you enter ANY here, do not specify ANY for
LINKPGM.
This value is valid if the transaction code for the program to receive control is the
CA-Telon-generated transaction code. Otherwise, specify a value in the
MSGTRAN field.
23. MSGTRAN
The pairing of screen program IDs and corresponding IMS transaction codes,
id,tran[,id,tran.]
where:
id
installation
tran
The eight-character IMS transaction code equated with id
This field is limited to 256 characters. To exceed this limit, use the MSGTBL
field instead.
The generated program can transfer control by issuing IMS message switches.
Specify values only if the transaction code of the program to receive control is
different from the CA-Telon-generated transaction code.
24. MSGTBL
The copy member containing the list that would otherwise be entered in the
MSGTRAN field.

25. MSGBUF
The member name and length of a user-defined buffer area for use in automatic
message switching. CA-Telon appends the member name to the definition for the
TP-OUTPUT-XFER-BUFFER.
26. A4EPGM
A program ID processed as the next program when an A4 status code results from
attempting an IMS message switch. The program ID must also be defined in the
LINKPGM, MSGPGM, MSGTRAN, or MSGTBL field.
This field and A4EMSG are mutually exclusive.
27. A4EMSG
The message displayed in the ERRMSG1 field when an A4 status results from
attempting an IMS message switch.
Valid values include literal message text or the name of the variable containing
the message. Enclose literal message text in single quotes.
This field and the A4EPGM field are mutually exclusive. This field is invalid
when you specify S in the LINKOPT field.
The value supplied in the A4EMSG parameter is only referenced in the
C-400-TERMIO-XFER-MSG-SWITCH section. That section is only generated if
LINKOPT=D and if one of the following MESSAGE-SWITCH parameters is
specified: MSGPGM, MSGTRAN, or MSGTBL. If one of these parameters is
entered, the above section is generated and contains the MOVE statement which
assigns the value in the A4EMSG parm to TPO-ERRMSG1.
28. MFSMOD
The MFS MOD name generated for this program if it is different from the
CA-Telon-generated MOD name. You can use this value to create a meaningful
MOD name for users when the FORMAT command is used to start the
application.
29. SYSMSG
The name of the field in the CA-Telon-generated program to which system
messages are sent. Use this field only when the program field designated for the
system messages is not the special CA-Telon field SYSMSG (that is, if the
SYSMSG field is not part of the panel definition).
For example, for the system to send its messages to the field defined as
ERRMSG1, enter ERRMSG1 here.
30. MIDONLY/ DEVICE
A field that enables you to transfer to the Update IMS MFSs screen to create,
update, or purge MIDONLY fields in the screen definition. Valid values are:
C
Create a MIDONLY statement for this environment
P
Purge a MIDONLY statement from this environment

U
Update a MIDONLY statement for this environment
Note: To update, you can enter any nonblank value other than C or P.
31. PLIXOPT
(Displayed only when language is PL/I.) A field that enables you to transfer to
the Update PL/I Executable Options screen to create, update, or purge PL/I
executable options that override installation-defined PL/I defaults for
CA-Telon-generated programs. Valid values are:
C
Create a PLIXOPT statement for this environment
P
Purge a PLIXOPT statement from this environment
U
Update a PLIXOPT statement for this environment

5.23 Update IMS MFSs

Access: On the Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment screen, enter any
nonblank value in the MIDONLY field.
Program ID: S163
Function: Defines fields included in the MFS MID and in the CA-Telon input
buffer, but not on the screen.
HEADERID.SD UPDATE IMS MFS

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
GENERAL: MFSMOD 2_______ SYSMSG 3_______ SEGEXIT 4__ ___

DEVICE: TYPE 5_________ FEAT 6____________________ EATTR 7 _ (Y/N)
TYPE __________ FEAT ____________________ EATTR _ (Y/N)
TYPE __________ FEAT ____________________ EATTR _ (Y/N)
MIDONLY: LTH MIDSOURCE LABEL INITIALIZATION
8__ 9_______ 1_______ 11_______________________________________
___ ________ ________ ________________________________________
___ ________ ________ ________________________________________
___ ________ ________ ________________________________________
___ ________ ________ ________________________________________
___ ________ ________ ________________________________________
___ ________ ________ ________________________________________
___ ________ ________ ________________________________________
___ ________ ________ ________________________________________
___ ________ ________ ________________________________________
___ ________ ________ ________________________________________
___ ________ ________ ________________________________________
___ ________ ________ ________________________________________
___ ________ ________ ________________________________________
___ ________ ________ ________________________________________
___ ________ ________ ________________________________________

1. COMMAND
2. MFSMOD
MOD name for users when the FORMAT command is to start the application.
3. SYSMSG
The name of the field in the CA-Telon-generated program to which system
messages are sent. Use this field only when the program field designated for the
system messages is not the special CA-Telon field SYSMSG (that is, if the
SYSMSG field is not part of the panel definition).
4. SEGEXIT
The MFS exit routine number invoked on input, and the value passed to the exit.
5. TYPE
The device type to override the default device type. Valid values are:

Definition Type Device Type Size

Screen (SD) 3270, 2 (Default) 24 x 80
3270, 1 12 x 80
3270-A3 32 x 80
3270-A4 43 x 80
3270-A7 27 x 132
Report (RD) 3270P, 2 (Default) 55 x 120
6. FEAT
The features for this device or program group. Device features include:
■ Print line 120
■ Print line 126
■ Print line 132
■ Data entry keyboard
■ Program function keys
■ Selector light pen detect
■ Operator identification card reader
■ Dual platen
■ User-defined features for the SCS1 and SCS2 devices and DPM programs.
Alternatively, the default value is IGNORE, which specifies the device features
are ignored for this device.
7. EATTR
A value to specify whether to use extended attributes on the screen. Valid values
are:
Y
N
Do not use extended attributes. This is the default.
8. LTH
The length of the MIDONLY field.
9. MIDSOURCE
The name of the field added to the beginning of the MID but not to appear on the
screen. This value is used when Y is specified in the FMTCNTL field in the
panel definition.
See 4.10, “Update Literal Fields” on page 4-29 or 4.11, “Update
Output/Input/Outin Field” on page 4-32 for more information on the FMTCNTL
field.

10. LABEL
The CA-Telon name for the MIDONLY field.
11. INITIALIZATION
The value to which CA-Telon initializes the MIDONLY field.

5.24 Update PL/I Executable Options

Access: On the Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment screen or the Update
CICS Screen Environment screen, enter the appropriate character in the PLIXOPT
field.
Program ID: S164
Function: Generates the PLIXOPT statement.
HEADERID.SD UPDATE PL/I EXECUTION OPTS

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
ENTER "PURGE" CR "PPPP" TO CONFIRM PURGE REQUEST
ENVIRONMENT 2
ALIGN 3 A-ALIGNED U-UNALIGNED
STORAGE 4 S-STATIC A-AUTOMATIC
REORDER 5 (Y/N)
XOPTS 6___________________________________________________________

About the PLIXOPT statement: For the programs that CA-Telon generates, a
PLIXOPT statement can override installation-defined PL/I defaults for:
■ Execution options
■ Storage options
■ Variable alignments options
■ Reorder compiler options
CA-Telon inserts the PLIXOPT after the first statement in the definition (the
SCREEN, REPORT, or DRIVER statement) and prior to the program generation
statement (the CICSPGM, IMSPGM, IMSDRV, or TSOPGM statement). On this
screen you can code multiple PLIXOPT statements to define options for different
environments.
1. COMMAND
2. ENVIRONMENT
The environment. This value is inherited from the screen from which you
transferred.

3. ALIGN
A value to specify whether CA-Telon is to align the program variables. Valid
values are:
A
(Aligned) Align variables
U
(Unaligned) Do not align variables
4. STORAGE
A value to specify whether CA-Telon is to allocate variable storage at execution
time. Valid values are:
S
(Static) Do not allocate variable storage at execution time
A
(Automatic) Allocate variable storage at execution time
5. REORDER
A value to specify whether variable storage is to reorder the program for
efficiency reasons. Valid values are:
Y
Reorder the program
N
Do not reorder the program
6. XOPTS
The execution options for the PL/I CA-Telon program. Option specifications must
be delimited by a comma.

5.25 Update CICS Screen Environment

Access: To access the CICS screen definition view of this update screen, on the
Create/Update Screen Definition screen enter a nonblank character to select the ENV
field when the value is CICS.
To access the nonterminal definition view of this update screen, on the Create/Update
Nonterminal Definition screen enter a nonblank character to select the ENV field when
the value is CICS.
You can access a view of this screen also by entering the following on the Online
Program Definition menu or the Nonterminal Program Definition menu:
■ CR, UP, or SH in the FUNCTION field
■ CICS in the ENVIRON field
Program ID: S165
Function: Specifies the CICS environment data for the screen definition or
nonterminal definition, including the characteristics of the CICS program and the BMS
control blocks.
CICS screen definition view
HHHHHH.SD UPDATE CICS ENVIRONMENT

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
GENERAL: DBMS 2________ TRACE 3 (Y/N) LINEOPT 4 (1/2/3)

SPASIZE 5____ TRANCDE 6____
LNKCOPY 7________ USGCOPY 8______ 9______
BMS : BMS 1 (Y/N) BMSMAP 11________
STORAGE: SPASTG 12 (A/S) IOASTG 13 (A/S) TPBSTG 14 (A/S)
DL/I : PSBSCHD 15 (Y/N) PSBNAME 16________

GENPCBS 17 (Y/N)
PL/I : PLIXOPT 18 (C-CREATE/U-UPDATE/P-PURGE)


CICS Nonterminal definition view
HHNNNN.ND UPDATE CICS ENVIRONMENT

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
GENERAL: DBMS 2________ TRACE 3 (Y/N)

SPASIZE 5_____ TRANCDE 6___
LNKCOPY 7________ USGCOPY 8_______
STORAGE: SPASTG 12 (A/S) IOASTG 13 (A/S)
DL/I : PSBSCHD 15 (Y/N) PSBNAME 16______

GENPCBS 17 (Y/N)
PL/I : PLIXOPT 18 (C-CREATE/U-UPDATE/P-PURGE)

Show/Purge screen: You can access the Show/Purge CICS Screen Environment
(S166) screen from the Online Definition menu screen by entering:
Alternatively, on the Show/Purge Nonterminal Definition screen, you can enter a
nonblank character to select ENV CICS.
The Show/Purge CICS Screen Environment screen fields are the same as the Update
CICS Screen Environment screen fields.
1. COMMAND
2. DBMS
The DBMS environment. Valid values are:
■ DL/I
■ EXEC DLI
■ VSAM
■ SEQ
■ DB2
■ IDMSSQL (CA-IDMS/SQL)
■ DATACOM
■ ORACLE
■ INGRES
The value in this field is used by PREVIEW to distinguish between CALL
CBLTDLI, CEETDLI, and EXEC DLI logic. It is also used to distinguish
between DL/I and EXEC DLI at generation time.

3. TRACE
Y
Generate trace variables for the CA-Telon Test Facility
N
Do not generate trace variables for the CA-Telon Test Facility. This is the
default.
Note: Trace variables increase the size of the generated program. In a
production environment, the TRACE value should be N.
4. LINEOPT
(Not displayed for a nonterminal definition.) The line optimization logic that the
program uses and generates. Valid values are:
1
Use the CA-Telon line optimization subroutine. CA-Telon performs line
optimization automatically for you.
2
Simulate subroutine optimization in procedural custom code (except for fill
character processing).
3
Do not generate the line optimizing code.
Note: For PWS, this value must be 2 or 3.
5. SPASIZE
The size of the DFHCOMMAREA used to hold the transfer work area. After
CA-Telon generates the program, this value appears in the CICS Program
Summary section of the assembler listing as the TRANSFER AREA SIZE
SPECIFIED.
For CICS screen definitions, this value must be greater than or equal to the sum
of:
■ The SPA header
■ The screen image size
For CICS nonterminal definitions, this value must be greater than the sum of:
■ The SPA header
Estimate a value and fine tune it as needed based on the requirements printed out
on generated program listings.
For CICS nonterminal programs, you can specify CICS ENV to copy XFERWKA
into SPA-AREA.
6. TRANCDE
The CICS transaction code associated with the generated program. Specify a
value only when the CICS transaction is different from the CA-Telon-generated

program name. The CA-Telon-generated program name is set as an installation

default.
7. LNKCOPY
The name of the member containing the 01-level declarations to copy or include
in the linkage section.
8. USGCOPY (1)
The name of the member containing the list of 01-level declarations to copy or
include at the end of the calling parameter list.
9. USGCOPY (2)
(Not displayed for a non-terminal definition.) The name of the member containing
procedural code to copy or include at the end of the Q-100-CICS-INIT section.
10. BMS
(Not displayed for a nonterminal definition.) A value to specify whether to use
the BMS map. Valid values are:
Y
Create CICS BMS source and the appropriate program code to use the BMS
map
N
Use CA-Telon mapping (recommended for all 3270-type terminals)
11. BMSMAP
(Not displayed for a nonterminal definition.) The name of the generated BMS
map when it is different from the installation default name as delivered; hhnnnn,
where:
hh
The HEADER
nnnn
The program ID
Note: The default can be customized during CA-Telon installation. Verify the
default with your CA-Telon administrator.
If you specify a value here, you must also enter Y in the BMS field.
12. SPASTG
The section of the program where CA-Telon is to generate the SPA-AREA. Valid
values are:
A (AUTO)
■ For COBOL, CA-Telon generates the SPA-AREA in the linkage section.
When no SPA-AREA is specified for a program as it is executed,
CA-Telon initializes the SPA-AREA and the XCTL to the same program
by using GETMAIN.
■ For PL/I, when no SPA-AREA is specified for a program, CA-Telon uses
GETMAIN, sets the COMPTR, and initializes the SPA-AREA.
S (STATIC)
CA-Telon generates the SPA-AREA in COBOL working storage.

13. IOASTG
A COBOL field that specifies where CA-Telon generates the
SEGMENT-IO-AREA. Valid values are:
A (AUTO)
Generates SEGMENT-IO-AREA in the Linkage Section and do a GETMAIN
for it at program initialization.
S (STATIC)
Generates SEGMENT-IO-AREA in Working Storage.
ih1.TPBSTG field
14. TPBSTG
A COBOL field that specifies where CA-Telon is to generate the TP-BUFFER.
Valid values are:
A (AUTO)
Generates the TP-BUFFER in the Linkage Section and performs a GETMAIN
for it at program initialization.
S (STATIC)
Generates the TP-BUFFER in Working Storage field.
ih1.PSBSCHD field
15. PSBSCHD
A value to specify whether CA-Telon is to automatically schedule and terminate
the DL/I PSB in the CICS program sections Q-200-PSB-SCHEDULE and
Q-210-PSB-TERM. Valid values are:
Y
Automatically schedules and terminates the DL/I PSB. This is the default.
N
Generates the Q-200 and Q-210 sections without any reference to them in the
CA-Telon code. In this case, you are responsible for performing the sections
to schedule and terminate the DL/I PSB.
Note: The PSB name used on the schedule call is the variable name
(PSB-NAME), which may be dynamically set prior to the PSB
scheduling.
16. PSBNAME
For DL/I, the name of the PSB that the program uses.
17. GENPCBS
A value to specify whether CA-Telon is to include DL/I PCB masks in the
Y
Automatically generates the PCB masks in the program.
N
You must include the PCB masks in the LNKCOPY.
D
The program is a stand-alone program that links USGCOPY TDF fields.

18. PLIXOPT (PL/I Only) only)

A field in which you can request transfer to another screen to add, update, or
purge PLIXOPT statements, which override specific installation-defined PL/I
defaults in the CA-Telon-generated program. Valid values are:
C
Transfer to the Update PL/I Executable Options screen for creating a
PLIXOPT statement
U
Transfer to the Update PL/I Executable Options screen for updating a
PLIXOPT statement
P
Purge an existing PLIXOPT statement from this screen

5.26 Update/Show Screen Parameters

Access: On the Create/Update Screen Definition screen, enter any nonblank value in
the SCRN PARMS field.
Program ID: S112
Function: Specifies these screen characteristics:

■ HELP facility
■ HOLD facility
■ Terminal I/O characteristics
■ Extended attributes characteristics
HEADER.SD UPDATE SCREEN PARMS

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
GENERAL: HOLD 2 (Y/N) APPLID 3______ TELON LANGLVL 4

HELP 5 (Y/N)
UPDTA 6 (Y/N)
TERM IO: OUTIFIL 7 (BLANK/UNDERSCORE/NULL)

CAPS 8__ (ON/OFF)
EOFKEY 9 (Y/N)
REFRESH 1 (Y/N)
ALARM 11 (Y/N)
EATTR 12 (Y/N)
EAIN 13_____ 14___ EAOUT 17_____ 18___
EALIT 15_____ 16___ EAERR 19_____ 2___

1. COMMAND
2. HOLD
A value to specify whether CA-Telon is to generate code to build a hold facility
for the system you develop. Valid values are:
Y
Generate the code for a hold facility
N
Do not generate the code for a hold facility
The default is the value in the HOLD field on the Update Program Definition
Defaults screen.
3. APPLID
The application ID that the system administrator defines at the installation of
CA-Telon.

The default is the value in the APPLID field on the Update Program Definition
Defaults screen.
4. LANGLVL
The version of CA-Telon used to generate the program. Valid values are:
■ 2.0
■ 2.1
■ 2.3
■ 2.4
■ 3.0
■ 4.0
5. HELP
A value to specify whether CA-Telon is to generate code to build a help facility
■ Y
■ N
The default is the value in the HELP field on the Update Program Definition
Defaults screen.
6. UPDTA
A value to specify whether to include in the program (by COBOL COPY or PL/I
%INCLUDE) the update area regardless of data access requests. Valid values are:
Y
Include the update area
N
Do not include the update area
(blank)
CA-Telon examines data access requests to determine whether to include the
update area.
7. OUTIFIL
The fill character for input, outin, and select fields when they are written to the
B
Fill with spaces ( )
U
Fill with underscores (_)
N
Fill with low values
8. CAPS
A value to specify whether to translate lowercase characters input by the
application user to uppercase. Valid values are:
ON
Translate lowercase characters to uppercase. This is the default.
OFF
No translation occurs on input

9. EOFKEY (IMS MFS Only)

A value to specify whether the application user can erase data using [EOF]. Valid
values are:
Y
Allow the user to erase data using [EOF] The program recognizes through a
modified data tag that data has been erased. This is the default.
N
Do not allow the user to erase data using [EOF]. The program processes the
field as if it contains data originally entered.
MFS does not return to an application program if a field has been erased using
[EOF] when the modified data tag attribute for the field is off.
10. REFRESH
A value to specify whether all output fields on this screen are to be saved in the
screen image portion of the transfer work area across iterations. Valid values are:
Y
Save output fields in the screen-image area. This value is required if the
HOLD or HELP value is Y. The installation default is Y.
N
Do not save output fields in the screen-image area. This specification
decreases the size of the transfer work area.
11. ALARM
A value to specify whether the terminal alarm is to ring automatically when an
ERROR-ATTR condition is detected on output. Valid values are:
Y
Automatic ring on ERROR-ATTR
N
No automatic ring on ERROR-ATTR
The default is established at installation.
12. EATTR
A value to specify whether extended attributes are used with this screen.
Extended attributes are documented in the descriptions of the EAIN, EALIT,
EAOUT, and EAERR fields on this screen. Valid values are:
Y
N
Do not use extended attributes. This is the default.
Note: If you indicate extended attributes are used, but do not specify an attribute
value in the following fields, CA-Telon uses the terminal defaults specified
on the Update PF Keys Definition screen. However, if you modify an
attribute value already displayed on this screen to spaces by entering
blanks, the attribute value is null and does not revert to the terminal
default.

13. EAIN (color attribute)

Color attributes for input, outin, output, and select fields. Valid values are:
■ BLUE
■ GREEN
■ RED
■ PINK
■ TURQ (Turquoise)
■ YELLOW
■ NEUTRAL
See the description of the EATTR field for more information.
14. EAIN (highlight attribute)
Highlight attributes for input, outin, output, and select fields. Valid values are:
Valid Value Meaning

BLINK Field blinks when
B displayed.
BL
REVERSE Field displays in reverse
R video.
RE
REV
REVER
REVERS
DEFAULT Field appears in default
D mode.
DE
DEF
DEFAU
DEFLT
UNDERLINE Field is underlined.
U
UN
UNDER
See the description of the EATTR field for more information.

15. EALIT (color attribute)
Color attributes for literal fields. See the description of the EALIT color attribute
field for valid values. See the description of the EATTR field for more
information.
16. EASLIT (highlight attribute)
Highlight attributes for literal fields. See the description of the EALIT highlight
attribute field for valid values. See the description of the EATTR field for more
information.

17. EAOUT (color attribute)

Color attributes for outin and output fields. See the description of the EALIT
color attribute field for valid values. See the description of the EATTR field for
more information.
18. EAOUT (highlight attribute)
Highlight attributes for outin and output fields. See the description of the EALIT
highlight attribute field for valid values. See the description of the EATTR field
19. EAERR (color attribute)
Color attributes for fields flagged in error. See the description of the EALIT color
attribute field for valid values. See the description of the EATTR field for more
information.
20. EAERR (highlight attribute)
Highlight attributes for fields flagged in error. See the description of the EALIT
highlight attribute field for valid values. See the description of the EATTR field

5.27 Create/Update Driver Definitions

Access: On Online Program Definition menu, enter:
■ DR in the ITEM field
You can also access this screen from the List Data Administration Information screen
by entering U as a line command for a listing of a driver definition.
Program ID: S210
Function: Maintains characteristics of a driver program, and accesses other TDF

screens to complete the driver program definition.
XXXXXX.DR CREATE IMS/DC DRIVER DEFN

COMMAND ==> 1___________________________________________________________________
OPTIONS ==> 2 CUSTOM CODE _ DATA GROUP _ ENV IMSDRV _
STORED PROCEDURES _
GENERAL: DESC 3_________________________________________ 4 REMARKS 5_______
HOLD 6 (Y/N) LANGLVL 7___ LANG 8__ (COB/PLI)
FRSTPGM 9____ APPLID 1_______ UPDTA 11 (Y/N)
CMPLOPT 12________________ 4 IDENTIF 13________ 4 PROCEDR 14________
DATA XFERWKA 15________________________________________________________ _

AREAS: 4 WKAREA 16________________________________________________________
CUSTOM:
A-1 4 INIT 17______
C-3 4 XFER 18______
D-1 4 TERM 19______
MISC: 4 SECTION 2________________________________________________________ _

PGMCUST 21________________________________________________________ _

Fields allowing entry of multiple members: Four fields allow you to specify
more than one member name:
■ XFERWKA
■ WKAREA
■ SECTION
■ PGMCUST
The XFERWKA and PGMCUST fields have no edit option field; therefore, you cannot
select the custom code editor for these fields. Members entered into these fields are
usually stored in shared libraries.

The WKAREA and SECTION fields have an edit option field. However, you can
access the editor only when one member name exists for the field. If you have
specified more than one member name for the field, go to the List/Show Custom Code
screen to select the member for editing.
All four fields that accept specification of multiple members can contain a maximum
of 253 bytes of data. You can specify 60 bytes for each field on this screen; you can
enter U in the one-byte field to the right of the 60th byte to request an extension
screen for additional space. When you return from the extension screen, the plus sign
(+) character is displayed in the one-byte field.
Show/Purge screen: You can access the Show/Purge Driver Definitions (S214)
screen from the Online Program Definition menu screen by entering:
■ DR in the ITEM field
command for a driver (DR).
The Show/Purge Driver Definitions screen fields are the same as the Create/Update
Driver Definitions screen fields.
1. COMMAND
2. OPTIONS

ENV environment The appropriate update screen environment screen, as
3. DESC
The description entered on the Online Program Definition menu. You can modify
4. Edit option fields
Fields that allow you to supply custom code member names (for example,
REMARKS, WKAREA, INIT). These fields are preceded by a one-position edit
option field. Enter any character in these fields to access the Custom Code Editor.

These are valid edit option values and the functions that they invoke:
U
CA-Telon transfers to the List/Show Custom Code screen after you enter the
custom code member name in the associated field.
protected.
O
value **DFLT**.
point.
S
5. REMARKS
6. HOLD
A value to specify whether CA-Telon is to generate code to build a hold facility
Y
Generate the code for a hold facility
N
Do not generate the code for a hold facility
The default is the value in the HOLD field on the Update Program Definition
Defaults screen.
7. LANGLVL
Protected field displaying the version of CA-Telon that is used to generate the
■ 2.0
■ 2.1
■ 2.3
■ 2.4
■ 3.0
■ 4.0

8. LANG
The language of the generated programs. Valid values are:
COB
COBOL, COBOL II
PLI
PL/I
The default is the value in the LANG field on the Update Program Definition
Defaults screen.
9. FRSTPGM
The program ID of the first program to receive control from the driver when the
transaction code is executed. The length of this field depends on naming
conventions established during CA-Telon installation. See your database
administrator for more information.
10. APPLID
CA-Telon.
Defaults screen.
11. UPDTA
A value to specify whether to include in the program (by COBOL COPY or PL/I
%INCLUDE) the update area regardless of data access requests. Valid values are:
Y
Include the update area
N
Do not include the update area
(Blank)
CA-Telon examines data access requests to determine whether to include the
update area
12. CMPLOPT
13. IDENTIF
PROC statement.
desired.

14. PROCEDR
PL/I program.
15. XFERWKA
The name of a custom code COPY member to add to the TRANSFER WORK
AREA section of the program. You can enter multiple names.
You must enter a value for this field, unless you are performing a create function
and you specified a XFERWKA list on the Update Program Definition Defaults
screen. In this case, that value is the default for this field.
The maximum string length for this field is 253 bytes.
16. WKAREA
The names of the COPY member or members that contain a definition of a work
area to add to the DATA DIVISION section of the COBOL program. The COPY
members can be included as part of the screen definition or be members of a
library.
You can specify as many as 20 COPY members, each separated by a comma, and
a maximim string length of 253 bytes.
application COPY member named hhWKAREA, where hh is the variable
application header.
For information on hhWKAREA, refer to Programming Concepts Guide.
17. INIT
The name of a COPY member containing the custom code to insert in the
initialization section of the driver program, executed when the driver first receives
control.
18. XFER
The name of a COPY member that contains the custom code to insert in the
transfer control section of the driver program, executed just before control is
passed to a called subroutine (for example, a screen).
19. TERM
The name of COPY member that contains the custom code to insert in the
termination section of the driver program, executed just before the driver program
returns control to the system.
20. SECTION
One or more names of custom code members that contain the COBOL sections or
PL/I procedures that can be performed from other parts of the program. Each
name must be separated by a comma. You may specify a maximum of 35 names,
and a maximum string length of 253 bytes.

21. PGMCUST
The name of the COBOL section or PL/I procedure in which to add custom code,
and the name of the custom code member added. You can make multiple
Section-name
or at the end (T).
program.
Member-name
Thus, the value A100I,OUTIDC specifies the custom code named OUTIDC is
placed at the beginning of the A-100 section.
The following section names are available for Driver programs:
Section Description
C100I C-100-TERMIO-READ (beginning of section)
C100T C-100-TERMIO-READ (end of section)
C300I C-300-TERMIO-XFER (beginning of section)
C300T C-300-TERMIO-XFER (end of section)
C900I C-900-GET-SPA (beginning of section; IMS drivers with
SPA)
C900T C-900-GET-SPA (end of section; IMS drivers with SPA)
C910I C-910-GET-MESSAGE & C-910-TERMIO-SAVE
(beginning of section; IMS drivers)
C910T C-910-GET-MESSAGE & C-910-TERMIO-SAVE (end of
section; IMS drivers)
C920I C-920-GET-WORKSPA (beginning of section; IMS drivers
with WORKSPA)

Section Description
C920T C-920-GET-WORKSPA (end of section; IMS drivers with
WORKSPA)
C925I C-925-INSERT-WORKSPA (beginning of section; IMS
drivers with WORKSPA)
C925T C-925-INSERT-WORKSPA (end of section; IMS drivers
with WORKSPA)
C950I C-950-PUT-WORKSPA (beginning of section; IMS drivers
with WORKSPA) i1.C950I
C950T C-950-PUT-WORKSPA (end of section; IMS drivers with
WORKSPA)
C960I C-960-PUT-SPA (beginning of section; IMS drivers with
SPA)
C960T C-960-PUT-SPA (end of section; IMS drivers with
WORKSPA)
D100I D-100-INPUT-INIT (beginning of section)
D100T D-100-INPUT-INIT (end of section)
Z980I Z-980-ABNORMAL-TERMINATION (beginning of
section)

5.28 Update IMS/DC Driver Environment

Access: On the Create/Update Driver Definitions screen, enter a nonblank character
to select ENV IMSDRV in the option field.
Program ID: S167
Function: Specifies the environment characteristics of the IMS program, the IMS
PSB, the IMS MFS, the IMSDRV, and, in part, the TSO program that CA-Telon
generates.
HEADERID.DR UPDATE IMS/DC DRIVER ENV

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
IMS: CONVERS 2 (Y/N) FRSTMOD 3_______ PGM/PSB NAME 4______

GENPCBS 5 (Y/N) LNKCOPY 6 (Y/N) USGCOPY 7 TRACE 8 (Y/N)
TRAN: TRANCDE 9_________
SPA: SPASIZE 1____

WKSPASZ 11____ WKSPAIO: GET 12______ PUT 12______ WKSPAIN 13(Y/N)
FLOW: LINKPGM 14__________________________________________________________

(ID"S) ____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
MSGPGM 15__________________________________________________________
(ID"S) ____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
MSGTRAN 16__________________________________________________________
(ID"S, ____________________________________________________________
TRAN) ____________________________________________________________
MSGTBL 17______ ___ MSGBUF 18______ ____ LINKDYN 19(Y/N)
MSG ERR: A4EPGM 2____ A4EMSG 21______________________________________
STG REQ: IOASIZE 22___ TPOSIZE 23___ TPISIZE 24___
PLIXOPT: 25(C-CREATE/U-UPDATE/P-PURGE)

1. COMMAND
2. CONVERS
A value to specify whether the system that CA-Telon generates is IMS
Y
Generate an IMS conversational system using an IMS SPA
N
Generate an IMS non-conversational system using a WORKSPA database
3. FRSTMOD
The MFS MOD NAME for the screen associated with the program being
generated.
4. PGM/PSB NAME
CA-Telon generates for the program, which is set at installation.

5. GENPCBS
values are:
Y
N
6. LNKCOPY
The name of the COPY or INCLUDE member containing the 01-level declarations
to include in the linkage section.
7. USGCOPY
section. In PL/I, variable declaration is a list of declare statements in the linkage
section.
8. TRACE
Y
Generates trace variables for the CA-Telon Test Facility
N
Do not generates trace variables for the CA-Telon Test Facility
Trace variables increase the size of the generated program. In a production
environment, the TRACE value should be N.
9. TRANCDE
The IMS transaction code associated with the generated program. Specify a value
only when the IMS transaction is different from the CA-Telon generated program
name, which is set at installation.
10. SPASIZE
defined alone or in conjunction with the WKSPASZ field value. The total of the
values in the two fields must be enough bytes to hold:
■ The SPA header
■ The size of the largest screen image in the application
You can fine-tune the size as needed, based on SPA requirements printed out on
generated program listings.
11. WKSPASZ
The number of bytes in the WORKSPA database used in this application system.
The value is not used when you do not use a WORKSPA database.
In a non-conversational system, the database must be large enough to hold:


■ Overhead
In a conversational system, the WKSPASZ value must specify enough bytes to
hold the overflow from the IMS SPA area, whose size is specified in the
SPASIZE field.
12. WKSPAIO
The name of two copy members containing custom code used in the retrieval and
writing of WORKSPA databases:
GET
Contains custom code included before the read of the WORKSPA database
PUT
Contains custom code included before the replace of the WORKSPA database
13. WKSPAIN
initialization code is to take place in IMS program section
Y
Generate code to reinitialize the CA-Telon transfer work area when the IMS
program flow has been broken
N
Do not generate such code
14. LINKPGM
The program IDs of all programs to which the generated program can be
dynamically linked through CA-Telon, specified in this format:
id[,id.]
where id is the CA-Telon-generated program ID in the hhnnnn format of your
CA-Telon installation.
Alternatively, you can enter ANY to specify the generated program is dynamically
linked by means of CA-Telon to NEXT-PROGRAM-NAME if
NEXT-PROGRAM-NAME-ID is not detected in a search of the MSGPGM or
MSGTRAN fields. If you enter ANY here, do not specify ANY in the MSGPGM
field or any value in the MSGTBL field.
15. MSGPGM
The program IDs of all programs to which this program issues IMS message
switches to transfer control, specified in this format:
id[,id.]
where id is the CA-Telon-generated program ID in the hhnnnn format of your
CA-Telon installation.

Alternatively, you can enter ANY to specify that the generated program should do
a message switch to NEXT-PROGRAM-NAME if the
NEXT-PROGRAM-NAME-ID is not detected in LINKPGM, MSGTRAN, or
MSGTBL specifications. If you enter ANY here, do not specify ANY for
LINKPGM.
This value is valid if the transaction code for the program to receive control is the
CA-Telon-generated transaction code. Otherwise, specify a value in the
MSGTRAN field.
16. MSGTRAN
The pairing of screen program IDs and corresponding IMS transaction codes,
id,tran[,id,tran.]
where:
id
installation
tran
The eight-character IMS transaction code equated with id
This field is limited to 253 characters. To exceed this limit, use the MSGTBL
field instead.
The generated program can transfer control by issuing IMS message switches.
Specify values only if the transaction code of the program to receive control is
different from the CA-Telon-generated transaction code.
17. MSGTBL
The copy member containing the list that would otherwise be entered in the
MSGTRAN field.
18. MSGBUF
The member name and length of a user-defined buffer area for use in automatic
message switching. CA-Telon appends the member name to the definition for the
TP-OUTPUT-XFER-BUFFER.
19. LINKDYN
A value to specify that CA-Telon is to dynamically link to any static subroutines
which are not specified in the LINKPGM, MSGPGM, MSGTBL, or MSGTRAN
fields.
A value in this field is not valid if the MSGPGM value is ANY. To be
dynamically called, the static subroutines must be link-edited without the NCAL
option.
20. A4EPGM
A program ID processed as the next program when an A4 status code results from
attempting an IMS message switch. The program ID must also be defined in the
LINKPGM, MSGPGM, MSGTRAN, or MSGTBL field.
This field and A4EMSG are mutually exclusive.

21. A4EMSG
The message displayed in the ERRMSG1 field when an A4 status results from
attempting an IMS message switch.
Valid values include literal message text or the name of the variable containing
the message. Enclose literal message text in single quotes.
This field and the A4EPGM field are mutually exclusive. This field is invalid
when you specify S in the LINKOPT field on the Update IMS/DC Driver
Environment screen.
22. IOASIZE
The maximum size required by any one program for this segment I/O area.
23. TPOSIZE
The maximum size of the TP output buffer for all programs linked by means of an
IMS driver.
24. TPISIZE
The maximum size of the TP input buffer for all programs linked by means of an
IMS driver.
25. PLIXOPT (PLI Only)
A field in which you can request to add, update, or purge PLIXOPT statements,
which override specific installation-defined PL/I defaults in the
CA-Telon-generated program. Valid values are:
C
Create a PLIXOPT statement
U
Update a PLIXOPT statement
P
Purge a PLIXOPT statement

5.29 Create/Update IMS/DC Report Definitions

■ RD in the ITEM field
Program ID: S310
Function: Defines and maintains characteristics of report programs, including:

■ Transfer work area name
■ Other work area names
■ Custom code copy names for code added to the generated program
■ Report size
XXXXXX.RD CREATE IMS/DC REPORT DEFN

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
2OPTIONS ==> CUSTOM CODE _ DATA GROUP _ PANEL DEF _ ENV IMS _
STORED PROCEDURES _

LANGLVL 6___ SIZE 7__ X ___ LANG 8_ (COB/PLI)
CMPLOPT 9_______________ 4 IDENTIF 1______ 4 PROCEDR 11______
APPLID 12___
DATA XFERWKA 13_________________________________________________________ _
AREAS: 4 WKAREA 14_________________________________________________________
4 LINKWKA 15______
OUTPUT:
A-1 4 OINIT1 16______ 4 OINIT2 17______
B-1 4 OUTTERM 18______
MISC: 4 SECTION 19_____________________________ ___________________________ _

PGMCUST 2__________________________________________________________ _

Show/Purge screen: You can access the Show/Purge IMS/DC Report Definitions
(S314) screen from the Online Program Definition menu by entering:
■ RD in the ITEM field

command for a report definition (RD).
The Show/Purge IMS/DC Report Definitions screen fields are the same as the
Create/Update IMS/DC Report Definitions screen fields.
1. COMMAND
2. OPTIONS

PANEL DEF Update Panel Fields
ENV IMS The appropriate update screen environment screen, as
3. DESC
The description of the program. The default is the value in the DESC field of the
Online Program Definition menu. You can modify the description here.
4. Edit option fields
Fields that allow you to supply custom code member names (for example,
REMARKS, WKAREA, INIT). These fields are preceded by a one-position edit
option field. Enter any character in these fields to access the Custom Code Editor.
These are valid edit option values and the functions that they invoke:
U
CA-Telon transfers to the List/Show Custom Code screen after you enter the
custom code member name in the associated field.
protected.
O
value **DFLT**.

point.
S
5. REMARKS
The name of the custom code member to add to the COBOL REMARKS
section of the program or to the beginning of the PL/I program.
6. LANGLVL
The version of CA-Telon used to generate the program. Valid values are:
■ 2.0
■ 2.1
■ 2.3
■ 2.4
■ 3.0
■ 4.0
7. SIZE
The number of lines and columns that define the size of the report. The
CA-Telon default is 55 lines and 120 columns per page. Once the line and the
column size is established in a CA-Telon session, it remains in effect for any
additional reports created during that session.
8. LANG
The language in which CA-Telon is to generate programs. Valid values are:
COB
COBOL, COBOL II
PLI
PL/I
The default is the value in the LANG field on the Update Session Controls
screen.
9. CMPLOPT
Compiler parameters to be included in the generated program before the
COBOL IDENTIFICATION DIVISION line or the PL/I PROC statement.
The field on this screen contains 16 bytes. Once an entry has been made in
the field, an extension field is presented after the field. If you need to enter a
longer value, place a "U" in the extension field to go to the "Update
Parameter Overflow" screen, where you can enter a total of 253 bytes,
including commas.
10. IDENTIF
Identification Division options, or in the parentheses after OPTIONS in the
PL/I PROC statement.
desired.

11. PROCEDR
This copybook is valid only for COBOL; it does not appear on the screen for
a PL/I program.
12. APPLID
CA-Telon. The default is the value in the APPLID field on the Update
Program Definition Defaults screen.
13. XFERWKA
The custom code COPY member names to add to the TRANSFER WORK
AREA section of the program.
You must enter a value for this field, unless you are performing a create
function and you specified a XFERWKA list on the Update Program
Definition Defaults screen. In this case, that value is the default for this field.
14. WKAREA
The names of the COPY member or members that contain a definition of a
work area to add to the DATA DIVISION section of the COBOL program.
The COPY members can be included as part of the screen definition or be
members of a library.
You can specify a maximum of 20 COPY members, each separated by a
comma, and a maximum string length of 253 bytes.
application COPY member named hhWKAREA, where hh is the
variable application header.
For information on hhWKAREA, refer to Programming Concepts
Guide.
15. LINKWKA
The COBOL COPY or PL/I %INCLUDE member name of the link work area
which is passed from the calling program to the PRINT subroutine. The
starting level for this member may not be 01.
This member allows the PRINT subroutine access to the data used in the
report.
Note: If you do not pass data with this LINK-WORK-AREA, code a dummy
LINKWKA. For COBOL, the recommended area name is
PRINTSUB-AREA. For PL/I, the recommended field name is
ADDR(PRINTSUB_AREA).
16. OINIT1
section before the automatic database or file read statements (that is, to
perform special I/O, initialize areas, and so on).
If there is no automatic read, CA-Telon still inserts this custom code member
in the same section or procedure and can use the custom code member for
custom database or file reads.

17. OINIT2
after automatic database or file read statements.
If there is no automatic read, CA-Telon still inserts this custom code member
in the same section or procedure and can use the custom code member for
custom database or file reads.
18. OUTTERM
The name of the custom code member added at the end of the
B-100-OUTPUT-EDITS section. This logic is performed after output edit
processing and after output SEGLOOP processing (if defined).
19. SECTION
One or more names of custom code members that contain the COBOL
sections or PL/I procedures that can be performed from other parts of the
program. Each name must be separated by a comma. You may specify a
maximum of 35 names, and a maximum string length of 253 bytes.
20. PGMCUST
code, and the name of the custom code member added. You can make
multiple specifications using this format:
section-name1, member-name1, section-name2, member-name2,...
Section-name
The four-character identifier of the section or procedure in which to
include the custom code (for example, H100) and a suffix (I or T) that
specifies whether to include the code at the beginning (I) of the section or
procedure, or at the end (T).
For example, H100I specifies section H100 is included at the beginning
of the program and E100T specifies section E100 is included at the end
of the program.
Member-name
The name of the custom code added at the location specified by
section-name.
Thus, the value A100I,OUTIDC specifies the custom code named
The following section names are available for IMS/DC Report programs:
Section Description
B100I B-100-OUTPUT-EDITS (beginning of section)
B100T B-100-OUTPUT-EDITS (end of section)

Section Description
C940I C-940-OUTPUT-MERGE (beginning of section)
C940T C-940-OUTPUT-MERGE (end of section)
C980I C-980-SET-DESTINATION (beginning of section)
C980T C-980-SET-DESTINATION (end of section)
C985I C-985-PURGE-MESSAGE (beginning of section)
C985T C-985-PURGE-MESSAGE (end of section)

5.30 Update IMS/DC Report Environment

Program ID: S168
Function: Specifies the characteristics of the IMS report program.
HHIIII.RD UPDATE IMS/DC REPORT ENV

COMMAND ==> 1__________________________________________________________________
IMS: GENPCBS 2 (Y/N) LNKCOPY 3________ USGCOPY 4_______

PGM/PSB NAME 5_______
MFS: MFSMOD 6_______ DEVICE 7
TRACE 8 (Y/N)
PLIXOPT: 9 (C-CREATE/U-UPDATE/P-PURGE)

1. COMMAND
2. GENPCBS
values are:
Y
N
3. LNKCOPY
The name of the COPY or INCLUDE member containing the 01-level declarations
to include in the linkage section.

4. USGCOPY
section. In PL/I, variable declaration is a list of declare statements in the linkage
section.
5. PGM/PSB NAME
CA-Telon generates for the program, which is set at installation.
6. MFSMOD
MOD name for users when the FORMAT command is to start the application.
7. DEVICE
A field in which you can request transfer to the Update IMS MFSs screen, on
which you provide information for routing this report definition.
8. TRACE
Y
Generate trace variables for the CA-Telon Test Facility
N
Do not generate trace variables for the CA-Telon Test Facility
Trace variables increase the size of the generated program. In a production
environment, the TRACE value should be N.
9. PLIXOPT (PL/I Only)
A field in which you can request to add, update, or purge PLIXOPT statements,
which override specific installation-defined PL/I defaults in the
CA-Telon-generated program. Valid values are:
C
Create a PLIXOPT statement
U
Update a PLIXOPT statement
P
Purge a PLIXOPT statement

5.31 Update Select Parameters

Access: On the Create/Update Screen Definition screen, enter a nonblank character
to select J-100 SELECT FIELDS.
Program ID: P157
Function: Updates select fields while updating screen characteristics.

Note: This screen is displayed only when there are SELECT fields.
XXXXXX.PD UPDATE SELECT PARMS

COMMAND ==> 1____________________________________________________ PAGE 1
LINE 1 COL 1 2 3 4 SIZE 24 8
---- ----+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+----5----+----6----+----7---
1 DESCRIPTION
2
3
---- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
XFEDIT/
LN COL LTH NAME U/S SCONSIS SEGEDIT NEXTPGM INEDIT INDBIO
8 31 1 CHOICE1 _ ________ _ _____ _ N
5 6 7 8 9 1 11 12 13 14

1. COMMAND
2. LINE
Line number at the top of the display.
3. COL
Column number at the left of the display.
4. SIZE
Protected field displaying panel dimensions.
5. LN
Protected field displaying the line number of a select field.
6. COL
Protected field displaying the column number of a select field.
7. LTH
Protected field displaying the length of a select field.
8. NAME
Protected field displaying the name of a select field.

9. U/S
The function for this select field. Valid values are:
U
Update the consistency edits for this select field
S
Show the consistency edits for this select field
10. SCONSIS
The name of the copy member containing procedural code for this select field.
11. XFEDIT/ SEGEDIT
A field displaying "+"save XFEDIT or SEGEDIT edits exist for this select field.
If no such edits exist, this field is blank.
12. NEXTPGM
The program to which control is transferred if this select field is selected.
13. INEDIT
A value to specify whether CA-Telon is to execute the E-100-INPUT-EDITS
section before NEXTPGM and/or SCONSIS processing. CA-Telon generates the
E-100 automatically if the program contains select fields. The
E-100-INPUT-EDITS section edits input fields according to FLDTYPE
specification. Valid values are:
Y
CA-Telon executes the E-100-INPUT-EDITS section automatically. If errors
occur, CA-Telon skips the balance of processing and returns an error message
to the screen.
N
CA-Telon does not automatically execute the E-100-INPUT-EDITS section;
however, you can explicitly call it from SCONSIS code. This is the default.
14. INDBIO
A value to specify whether CA-Telon is to perform the H-100 section to create
and update segments requested for auto exec. CA-Telon generates the H-100
paragraph if the program contains select fields. Valid values are:
Y
CA-Telon automatically executes the H-100-INPUT-TERM section
N
CA-Telon does not automatically execute the H-100-INPUT-TERM section;
however, you can call it explicitly from SCONSIS code. This is the default.

5.32 Create/Update Nonterminal Definition

■ ND in the ITEM field
Program ID: N110
Function: Maintains characteristics of a nonterminal definition and allows access to

other screens to complete the definition.
XXXXXX.ND CREATE NONTERM. DEFINITION

COMMAND==>1____________________________________________________________________
2OPTIONS ==>CUSTOM CODE_ DATA GROUP _ PANEL DEF _ ENV CICS _
STORED PROCEDURES _
GENERAL: DESC 3___________________________ 4 REMARKS 5_______
LANGLVL 6 ___ SIZE 7_ X ___ LANG 8__ (COB/PLI)
CMPLOPT 9______________ 4 IDENTIF 1________ 4 PROCEDR 11_______
APPLID 12_____
FILES: RPTDEST 13______ PRNTDEST 14__

DATA: 4 XFERWKA 15___________________________________________________________
AREAS: 4 WKAREA 16___________________________________________________________
CUSTOM:
Q-N1 4 INIT1 17_______ 4 INIT2 18_______
C-N1 4 GETTRAN 19_______
A-N1 4 PRCTRAN 2_______
T-N1 4 TERM 21_______
MISC: 4 SECTION 22___________________________________________________________

PGMCUST 23____________________________________________________________

Show/Purge screen: You can access the Show/Purge Nonterminal Definition
(N114) screen from the Online Program Definition menu by entering:
■ ND in the ITEM field
command for a nonterminal definition (ND).
The Show/Purge Nonterminal Definition screen fields are the same as the
Create/Update Nonterminal Definition screen fields.

1. COMMAND
You can also access the custom code editor by entering one of these commands:
CREATE custom-code-member-name [member-description]
EDIT custom-code-member-name [member-description]
UPDATE custom-code-member-name
SHOW custom-code-member-name
2. OPTIONS
Options for transferring to other screens to complete the nonterminal definition.
Enter a nonblank character in the appropriate field:

PANEL DEF Update Panel Fields
ENV CICS The appropriate update screen environment screen, as
3. DESC
The description of the program. The default is the value in the DESC field of the
Nonterminal Program Definition menu. You can modify the description here.
4. (Edit flags)
The one-byte fields immediately preceding the REMARKS, WKAREA, INIT1,
INIT2, GETTRAN, PRCTRAN, TERM, and SECTION fields in which you can
enter one of these edit requests for the corresponding copy member:
Edit Flag Description Comments

O Open Opens the associated custom code entry in the
nonterminal definition. Breaks the connection made
to the specified custom code member(s). After an
open flag, there are no COPY or INCLUDE
members associated with the specified custom code
entry.
S Show Browses the associated member(s).
U Update Creates or updates the associated member(s). If the
custom code member specified does not exist, the
edit automatically processes in create mode.
Note: — Not valid for PURGE and SHOW modes.

5. REMARKS
6. LANGLVL
The version of CA-Telon that is used to generate the program. Valid values are:
■ 2.0
■ 2.1
■ 2.3
■ 2.4
■ 3.0
■ 4.0
7. SIZE
The size of (number of rows and columns on) one page of the report associated
with this definition. The default is 60 X 133. This value is not used unless the
definition has an associated report (that is, panel data).
8. LANG
The language in which CA-Telon is to generate programs. Valid values are:
COB
COBOL, COBOL II
PLI
PL/I
The default is the value in the LANG field on the Update Program Definition
Defaults screen.
9. CMPLOPT
10. IDENTIF
PROC statement.
desired.
11. PROCEDR
PL/I program.

12. APPLID
CA-Telon.
Defaults screen.
13. RPTDEST
The destination of the report output created by this program. Valid values
include:
■ The name of a sequential or VSAM file
■ A CICS queue
■ The keyword PRINTER
This value and any value other than PRINTER must be defined in the data group
for this definition.
14. PRNTDEST
The four-byte name of the printer (as it is defined in the CICS TCT) to which the
report from this definition is routed. A value in this field is valid only if the
RPTDEST value is PRINTER.
If RPTDEST is PRINTER and you do not enter a value here, be sure to include
custom code to set the variable BWA-PRINTER-ID (COBOL) or
BWA_PRINTER_ID (PL/I) to the name of the printer (as it is defined in the TCT)
used by the generated nonterminal program. This code should be incorporated
into the initialization processing, as it is required prior to any report processing.
15. XFERWKA
One or more names of COPY or %INCLUDE members that contain the
TRANSFER WORK AREA section of your non-terminal program. You may
specify a maximum of 20 member names, each separated by a comma, and a
maximum string length of 253 bytes.
This field is optional for a non-terminal program definition.
Note: Even if a value is specified in XFERWKA, no SPA-XFER-WORK-AREA
is generated unless a SPASIZE is specified on the Update CICS Screen
Environment screen.
16. WKAREA
One or more names COPY or %INCLUDE members containing the definition of
work areas added to the generated program. In COBOL programs, these members
are copied into the WORKING-STORAGE SECTION of the DATA DIVISION of
the program.
The members can be custom code members with this definition or members of a
PDS or CA-PANVALET library. You may specify a maximum of 20 member
names, each separated by a comma, and a maximum string length of 253 bytes.
17. INIT1
The custom code placed in the beginning of the Q-N100-PROGRAM-INIT section
of the generated program before the CA-Telon-generated initialization code.
Initialization code is generated if the RPTDEST value is PRINTER, to verify that

the printer used (specified in SYSWK-PRINTER-ID (COBOL) or

SYSWK_PRINTER_ID (PL/I)) is defined in the CICS TCT. Refer to
Programming Concepts Guide for the non-terminal program flowchart.
18. INIT2
The custom code placed in the Q-N100-PROGRAM-INIT section of the generated
program after generated initialization processing. Refer to Programming Concepts
Guide for the non-terminal program flowchart.
19. GETTRAN
The custom code placed in the C-N100-GET-TRAN section of the generated
program. C-N100-GET-TRAN controls TRANSACT auto exec data access; it is
performed first after program initialization, and then from the main process loop
after each performance of A-N100-PROCESS-TRAN. Refer to Programming
Concepts Guide for the non-terminal program flowchart.
20. PRCTRAN
The custom code is placed in the A-N100-PROCESS-TRAN section of the
generated program. A-N100-PROCESS-TRAN processes the data item (segment,
record, row, or item) retrieved in C-N100-GET-TRAN. If a report is produced,
A-N100-PROCESS-TRAN selects the first detail group in the non-terminal panel
definition printed in the report. Selection of detail groups other than the first must
be done in PRCTRAN custom code. Refer to Programming Concepts Guide for
the non-terminal program flowchart.
21. TERM
The custom code placed in the T-N100-PROGRAM-TERM section of the
generated program. This routine is performed after completion of the main
process loop. Refer to Programming Concepts Guide for the non-terminal
program flowchart.
22. SECTION
The names of custom code COPY or INCLUDE members added as COBOL
sections or PL/I procedures and performed from other parts of the program.
You can specify as many as 35 members, and a maximum string length of 253
bytes.
23. PGMCUST
and the name of the custom code member added. You can make multiple
Section-name
or at the end (T).

program.
Member-name
Thus, the value A100I,OUTIDC specifies the custom code named OUTIDC is
The following section names are available for CICS nonterminal programs:
Section Description
AN100I A-N100-PROCESS-TRAN (beginning of section)
AN100T A-N100-PROCESS-TRAN (end of section)
BN100I B-N100-PROCESS-DETAIL (beginning of section)
BN100T B-N100-PROCESS-DETAIL (end of section)
BN200I B-N200-END-REPORT (beginning of section)
BN200T B-N200-END-REPORT (end of section)
BN500I B-N500-FORMAT-<groupname> (beginning of every
B-N500-FORMAT-<groupname> section)
BN500T B-N500-FORMAT-<groupname> (end of every
B-N500-FORMAT-<groupname> section)
BN600I B-N600-PRINT-<groupname> (beginning of every
B-N600-PRINT-<groupname> section)
BN600T B-N600-PRINT-<groupname> (end of every
B-N600-PRINT-<groupname> section)
BN900I B-N900-PAGE-BREAK (beginning of section)
BN900T B-N900-PAGE-BREAK (end of section)
CN100I C-N100-GET-TRAN (beginning of section)
CN100T C-N100-GET-TRAN (end of section)
CN200I C-N200-WRITE-REPORT (beginning of section)
CN200T C-N200-WRITE-REPORT (end of section)
MAIN_PROCESS MAIN_PROCESS_LOOP (beginning and end of procedure;
_LOOP PL/I CICS Nonterminal)

Section Description
QN100I Q-N100-PROGRAM-INIT (beginning of section)
QN100T Q-N100-PROGRAM-INIT (end of section)
QN200I Q-N200-PSB-SCHEDULE (beginning of section)
QN200T Q-N200-PSB-SCHEDULE (end of section)
QN210I Q-N210-PSB-TERM (beginning of section)
QN210T Q-N210-PSB-TERM (end of section)
QN300I Q-N300-ACQUIRE-WORKAREAS (beginning of section)
QN300T Q-N300-ACQUIRE-WORKAREAS (end of section)
TN100I T-N100-PROGRAM-TERM (beginning of section)
TN100T T-N100-PROGRAM-TERM (end of section)

5.33 List Environments

Program ID: S401
Function: Displays a list of existing environments for an SD or DR program.
LIST HHNNNN.SD ENVIRONMENTS

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
ENV STATUS USER UPDATE

_ CICS_____ ENV SAVED MANRI2 4163
_ IMS______ __________ MANRI2 4163
2 3 4 5 6

1. COMMAND
For more information, refer to the Design Facility Reference Guide.
2. FUNCTION
A column position to the left of the NAME field in which you can enter a control
character to manipulate the item on the line. Valid values are:
■ U - Update
■ S - Show
■ P - Purge with confirmation
■ Z - Zap (delete without confirmation)
3. ENV
The environment type.
4. STATUS
Displays the status of the environment after action is taken, depending on the
value in the Function field.
Valid values, their meanings, and the associated messages are:

Value Description Message

U Update *ENV SAVED
S Show *ENV SHOWN
P Purge N/A (no longer displayed)
Z Zap *PURGED
5. USER
Protected field identifying the last user to access the member.
6. UPDATE
Protected field identifying the date of the last access of the member.

5.34 List Stored Procedures To Be Called

Access: Select the Stored Procedures option on any of the following screens:
Program ID: S225
Function: Allows specification of one or more stored procedures to be called by the

current program being defined.
LIST STORED PROCEDURES TO BE CALLED

COMMAND ==> 1_____________________________________________________ PAGE 1
ENTITY EXTERNAL RESULT
NAME NAME SETS PRESP POSTSP CALL IGNORE CONDITIONS
2 3_________ 4_______ 5__ 6_______ 7_______ 8___________________________
_ __________ ________ __ ________ ________ ________________________________
_ __________ ________ __ ________ ________ ________________________________
_ __________ ________ __ ________ ________ ________________________________
_ __________ ________ __ ________ ________ ________________________________
_ __________ ________ __ ________ ________ ________________________________
_ __________ ________ __ ________ ________ ________________________________
_ __________ ________ __ ________ ________ ________________________________
_ __________ ________ __ ________ ________ ________________________________
_ __________ ________ __ ________ ________ ________________________________
_ __________ ________ __ ________ ________ ________________________________
_ __________ ________ __ ________ ________ ________________________________
_ __________ ________ __ ________ ________ ________________________________
_ __________ ________ __ ________ ________ ________________________________
_ __________ ________ __ ________ ________ ________________________________
_ __________ ________ __ ________ ________ ________________________________
_ __________ ________ __ ________ ________ ________________________________
_ __________ ________ __ ________ ________ ________________________________
_ __________ ________ __ ________ ________ ________________________________
_ __________ ________ __ ________ ________ ________________________________

1. COMMAND
For more information, refer to the section Primary Commands in chapter 9.
2. FUNCTION
One of the following may be specified on any line containing a stored procedure
entry:
Code Function Description

U Update Branch to the Create/Update Stored Procedure Program
Definition screen B210.
S Show Branch to the Show/Purge Stored Procedure Program
Definition screen B214.
Z Zap Delete the stored procedure call from the current program
being defined.

3. ENTITY (output-only)
The entity name for the stored procedure to be called by the current program
being defined.
4. NAME (output-only)
The external name (if specified) for the stored procedure to be called by the
current program being defined.
5. RESULTS (output-only)
The number of result sets (if any) being returned from the specified stored
procedure.
6. PRESP
The name of a custom code member to place in the S-100-CALL-spname
paragraph prior to the call to the stored procedure with a name of spname.
7. POSTSP
The name of a custom code member to place in the S-100-CALL-spname
paragraph after the call to the stored procedure with a name of spname.
8. IGNORE
A comma-separated list of IGNORE codes to be included in the check of the
SQLCODE return value after the call to the stored procedure spname, in addition
to the check for a value of +466 (indicating the presence of at least one result set).
A single IGNORE value of ALL may be specified, which will essentially leave
the IGNORE checking up to the user; otherwise, ignore codes must be numeric,
with a leading + or - sign.

Chapter 6. Batch Program Definition
Chapter 6. Batch Program Definition 6-1

6.1 Introduction
6.1 Introduction
This chapter documents the screens that you use to create a batch program definition,
Option 5 on the TDF Main Menu. It also discusses other screens that you use to
create a panel definition and program definition for a batch program.
The following diagram shows the components of a batch program definition:
If the batch program produces a report, the first steps in creating the program are to
create a panel image and a panel definition. If not, you begin with the Batch Program
Definition menu.
Note: Previously-exported batch program definitions can be imported into the TDF
for maintenance using CA-Telon definition import utilities defined in
Programming Concepts Guide.

6.2 Update Panel Fields (Batch)

■ PD in the ITEM field
If you did not specify a group when you created the panel image, CA-Telon displays
the Panel Definition menu. From there, access the Line Edit screen and specify a
group. CA-Telon displays the Update Panel Fields (Batch) screen.
You can also access this screen from the Create/Update Nonterminal Definition screen
by entering a nonblank character to select PANEL DEF.
Program ID: P255
Function: Specifies the characteristics of all the fields in the panel image, the first
step in creating a panel definition.
TRBD11.PD UPDATE PANEL FIELDS

COMMAND ==>1 PAGE 1 MORE
LINE 1 COL 2 2
SIZE 55 133
LINE ───+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+----5----+----6----+----7----
1 GROUP
2 TRBD11 EMPLOYEE LIST BY ID
3
4 5 6 7 8GPTYPE OR 9 1 11
GP A TOPPAGE
i 1 53 8 OU
1 7 2 OU
GP B DETAIL
1 4 2 OU
1 8 6 OU
1 16 2 OU
1 38 12 OU
1 52 3 OU
1 58 7 OU
1 67 5 OU
2 16 25 OU
3 16 25 OU
3 44 2 OU
3 49 5 OU

1. COMMAND
For information, see 9.5, “Primary Commands” on page 9-13 and 4.6, “Update
Panel Fields (Online)” on page 4-16.

2. LINE COL
Protected fields identifying the starting line position and starting column position
of the field. In a batch panel definition, these values represent the location of the
field in its group, not in the report.
3. SIZE
The size of the field.
4. U
A field in which you can specify update or deletion of any field in this panel
definition. Valid values for a batch definition are:
D
Delete this item
U
Display the appropriate screen for this item:
■ Update Batch Output Fields
■ Update Batch Literal Fields
I
Insert a blank line to add a field or literal to the image
5. LN COL LTH
The starting line position, starting column position, and length of the field. In a
batch panel definition, these values represent the location of the field in its group,
not in the report.
Note: When the USE value is GP, these fields are blank and protected.
6. USE
The use of the field. Valid values are:
LI
Literal field
OU
Output field
GP
This field signifies the beginning of a batch group
7. NAME
The name of the field.
8. GPTYPE OR FLDTYPE
For a literal or output field, the type of editing performed on this field. See 4.6,
“Update Panel Fields (Online)” on page 4-16 for valid values.
For a separator, the type of batch group. Valid values are listed in the table
below.
Batch Group Description

TOPPAGE Page heading. This group is printed only at the top of a report
page.

Batch Group Description

TOPDTL Detail heading. This group is printed only at the top of a detail
group.
DETAIL This group is an output detail.
BOTPAGE Page footing. This group is printed only at the bottom of a report
page.
CONTROL This group defines a control break.
SUMMARY Report footing. This group is printed at the end of the report.
Only one summary group is allowed in a batch definition.
In the example below:

■ TITLE is a page heading (TOPPAGE).
■ EMPDET is a detail group. It defines a detail line of the report.
■ MORE in the upper-right corner indicates that there is at least one more page
of data for this field listing. Page down to view the next screen of data.
TRBD11.PD UPDATE BATCH PANEL FIELDS

COMMAND ==> PAGE 1 MORE
LINE 1 COL 2 SIZE 55 133
LINE ───+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+----5----+----6----+----7----
1 GROUP NAME=TITLE TYPE=TOPPAGE
2 TRBD11 EMPLOYEE LIST BY ID >>>>>>>> PAGE >>
3
GPTYPE OR
GP TITLE TOPPAGE
1 53 8 OU CURDATE CURRENT-DATE
1 7 2 OU PAGENO NONE
GP EMPDET DETAIL
1 4 2 OU SEQNUM
1 8 6 OU ID EMPL-ID
1 16 2 OU NAME EMPL-NAME
1 38 12 OU PHONE EMPL-PHONE
1 52 3 OU DEPT EMPL-DEPARTMENT
1 58 7 OU RATE NUMERIC EMPL-HOURLY-RATE
1 67 5 OU HRWEEK NUMERIC EMPL-HOURS-PER-WEEK
2 16 25 OU STREET EMPL-STREET
3 16 25 OU CITY EMPL-CITY
3 44 2 OU STATE EMPL-STATE
3 49 5 OU ZIP EMPL-ZIP

9. DBNAME OR TEXT
The mapping name. On an output field, it indicates the program data field that is
mapped out.
10. REQ
(Not applicable to a batch panel field definition.)
11. MORE
A field that allows CA-Telon to signify, by displaying a plus sign (+), that there
is additional detail data for this field that cannot be displayed on this screen.

To display the additional data (or enter additional data), enter U in the U field;
this transfers you to the appropriate screen:
■ Update Batch Literal Fields
■ Update Batch Output Fields

6.3 Update Batch Literal Fields

Access: On the Update Panel Fields (Batch) screen, enter U in the U field of a
listing for a literal field. Alternatively, on the Panel Definition menu, enter UP in the
FUNCTION field and specify values in other fields on the menu that identify the
literal field to be updated.
After you press [End] to save your entries, this screen displays data on the next literal
field that you selected for update (on the Update Panel Fields (Batch) screen). If there
are no more literal fields to update, control returns to the screen from which you
accessed this screen.
Program ID: P280
Function: Updates the definition of a literal field in a batch program report.
XXXXXX.PD UPDATE LITERAL FIELD

COMMAND ==> 1__________________________________________________________________
FIELD NAME 2_______ USAGE 3ITERAL LINE 43 COL 26 LTH 2
MAPPING: TEXT 5 SAMPLE BATCH PROGRAM__________________________________________

______________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________
MAPOUT BLANK.WHEN.SAME 6_ (Y/N)

1. COMMAND
2. FIELD NAME
The name of the field, originally defined on the Edit Panel Image screen or the
Line Edit screen. You can rename the field here.
3. USAGE
The usage of the field. The value (always LITERAL) is established in the USE
field on the Update Panel Fields (Batch) screen.
4. LINE COL LTH
Protected fields identifying the starting line position, starting column position, and
length of the field. In a batch panel definition, these values represent the location
of the field in its group, not in the report.

5. TEXT
The text of the literal field.
6. BLANK.WHEN.SAME
A field that allows you to specify spaces on output when the value in the field has
not changed between the last printing of the line and the current printing of the
line.
Y
Automatically sets the field to spaces on output when it has the same value as
the previous detail line
N
Do not automatically set the field to spaces

6.4 Update Batch Output Fields

Access: On the Update Panel Fields (Batch) screen, enter U in the U field of a
listing for an output field. Alternatively, on the Panel Definition menu, enter UP in
the FUNCTION field and specify values in other fields on the menu that identify the
literal field to be updated.
After you press [End] to save your entries, this screen displays data on the next output
field that you selected for update on the Update Panel Fields (Batch) screen. If there
are no more output fields to update, control returns to the screen from which you
accessed this screen.
Program ID: P281
Function: Updates the definition of an output field in a batch program report.
XXXXXX.PD UPDATE OUTPUT FIELD

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
FIELD NAME 2 TESTDIL USAGE 3 OUTPUT LINE 4 1 COL 2 LTH 8
MAPPING: DBNAME 5_____________________________________________________________

OF 6_____________________________________________________________
INIT 7_____________________________________________________________
MAPOUT 8_____________________________________________________________
BLANK.WHEN.SAME 9 (Y/N)
GENERAL: PIC 1___________________________
EDIT: FLDTYPE 11______ PARM LIST EXTENSION 12__

SPEC 13______ (FORMAT/CONVERT)
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
ALT CNTGRP 14______ SCOPE 15____ GROUP 16____
MAPPING: TOTREF 17______ TOTSIZE 18__ __ SCOPE 15____ GROUP 16____
CALC 19____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________

1. COMMAND
2. FIELD NAME
The name of the field, originally defined on the Edit Panel Image screen or the
Line Edit screen. You can rename the field here.
3. USAGE
The usage of the field. The value is established in the USE field on the Update
Panel Fields (Batch) screen. If you specify LITERAL and press brk.Enter],
control transfers to the Update Batch Literal Fields screen.

4. LINE COL LTH

Protected fields identifying the starting line position, starting column position, and
length of the field. In a batch panel definition, These values represent the location
of the field in its group, not in the report.
5. DBNAME
The name of the field (in the file description or work area) from which the data is
mapped.
Note: To have CA-Telon generate special code to support the COBOL II
"ACCEPT ... FROM DATE" or COBOL for MVS and VM "MOVE
FUNCTION CURRENT-DATE ..." use the reserved word @DATE This
reserverd word is appropriate for OUTPUT only; it should not be used for
INPUT-only fields. A separate INPUT DBNAME must be specified for
OUTIN fields.
6. OF
(COBOL only.) The name of high-level qualifiers for work areas containing the
data field names defined by the specification in the DBNAME field.
7. INIT
The initialized value of the output field when there is no data written to it. If a
value is specified here, the BLANK.WHEN.SAME field value must be N.
8. MAPOUT
The name of a COBOL or PL/I field in the CA-Telon program whose value
determines whether the field is mapped to the output buffer. When the value in
the program field is Y, CA-Telon maps the field to the output buffer. Otherwise,
CA-Telon does not map the field.
9. BLANK.WHEN.SAME
A field that allows you to specify spaces on output when the value in the field has
not changed between the last printing of the line and the current printing of the
line.
Y
Automatically sets the field to spaces on output when it has the same value as
the previous detail line
N
Do not automatically set the field to spaces
10. PIC
The COBOL or PL/I picture clause that identifies display control on output for
NUMERIC, FULLNUM, or DOLLAR fields. You can specify any valid COBOL
or PL/I numeric format control characters.
Note: If the value in the FLDTYPE field is FLOAT, the value in the PIC field is
ignored.
11. FLDTYPE
The field editing performed on the field. When you specify a DBNAME value,
the default is ALPHA; otherwise, the default is NONE.
Note: Use of this field is not valid when CONVERT or FORMAT is used in the
SPEC field.


A field in which you can request transfer to the Update Parameter List Extension
screen. Use this screen to specify extended fields for installation-defined
FLDTYPE edits. A value must exist in the FLDTYPE field.
To transfer, enter any nonblank character.
13. SPEC
FORMAT
CONVERT
space below the SPEC field. The syntax for entering each specification and a full
description of its function follow.
FORMAT mask
In mask, 9s represent numbers and Xs represent characters. All other characters
are inserted into the corresponding positions on output and stripped from the
corresponding positions on input. Here are examples of how an input value is
stored after formatting by the mask and how that same value is displayed on
output through the same mask:
Input Mask Stored value Output
123-45-678 999-99-999 12345678 123-45-678
ABCD343 ABXX993 CD34 ABCD343
RTXY887 ABXX993 XY88 ABXY883
CDQ34 XXT99 CD34 CDT34
All characters except the mask-defined value 9 are stripped for storage. CA-Telon
does not verify the value in X position on input. (In the third example, CA-Telon
accepts but does not store the input value RT.) CA-Telon does verify that
characters specified as 9s are numbers.
The length of mask must equal the length of the input field. If the data field is
longer, it is blank-padded to the right during mapping. Remember, the target data
field must be alphanumeric even though the mask is all 9s.
CONVERT screen-val-1,stored-val-1 [, screen-val-2,stored-val-2 ...]
Screen-val is the value as it appears on the screen; stored-val is the value as it is
stored. If you define more than one pair, the length of all occurrences of
screen-val must be the same; this is also true for all occurrences of stored-val. If
you use blanks to pad the length, enclose the value in single quotes.
In this example, the two pairs specified result in the indicated screen value and
stored value:

CONVERT FEMALE,F,'MALE ',M
Valid screen value Stored value
FEMALE F
MALE M
For input or select fields, CA-Telon puts the pairs in a table to be searched at
runtime. During execution, the application user's input must match a specified
screen-val. If not, CA-Telon flags the field and an error is returned.
If there is no corresponding stored-val during output, the program displays the
stored value as is.
RANGE start-range-1,end-range-1 [,sta rt-range-2,end-range-2 ...]
Start-range and end-range can be numeric constants or data field names. Values
must be specified lowest to highest. The range is inclusive; that is, the numbers
defining the range are themselves within the range.
In the following example, valid input values for the field are defined as between 4
and 9, 23 and 33, or 53.8 and 75.
RANGE 4, 9, 23, 33, 53.8, 75
14. CNTGRP
The name of a group whose detail occurrences are counted, with the result
displayed in the field identified in FIELD NAME. Alternatively, you can specify
ALLDETAIL for all groups to be counted.
The counter is incremented by 1 each time the group specified in CNTGRP field
is printed. It is initialized when the count itself is printed (that is, when the field
specified in FIELD NAME is printed), unless you specify otherwise in the SCOPE
field.
If you specify a group here, do not specify a value for the DBNAME, FLDTYPE,
SPEC (CONVERT), CALC, or TOTREF fields.
15. SCOPE
The indicator of the point at which the count (if CNTGRP contains a value) or the
total (if TOTREF contains a value) is initialized. Valid values are:
GROUP
Initialize the count or total each time the group specified in the GROUP field
on this screen is printed
PAGE
Initialize the count or total at the end of each page
REPORT
Initialize the count or total only at the beginning of the report
16. GROUP
The name of a group, when the value in the SCOPE field is GROUP. (A value
here is ignored if the value in the SCOPE field is not GROUP.)
17. TOTREF
The name of a field name whose values are totaled with the result displayed in the
field identified in FIELD NAME. This must be the name of a field with a

numeric DBNAME or a CALC specification; it must belong to this batch

definition.
The total is incremented by the value in the field identified in TOTREF each time
the field is printed. It is initialized when the total itself is printed (that is, when
the field specified in FIELD NAME is printed), unless you specify otherwise in
the SCOPE field.
If you specify a field here, do not specify a value for the DBNAME, FLDTYPE,
SPEC (CONVERT), CNTGRP, or CALC fields.
18. TOTSIZE
Two values representing the size of the variable used to map to the TOTREF
fieldname.
The first value is the number of positions to the left of the decimal point; the
second value is the number of positions to the right of the decimal point. The
default size is 9(11)V9(7) for COBOL and 10(9)V4(9)T for PL/I.
A value in this field is not valid without a value in the TOTREF field.
19. CALC
The COBOL or PL/I expression to calculate the value contained in the field
specified in FIELD NAME. The expression may refer to program-defined
variables only and not to CA-Telon field names specified on the Update Panel
Fields (Batch) screen.
If you specify an expression here, do not specify a value for the DBNAME,
FLDTYPE, SPEC (CONVERT), CNTGRP, or TOTREF fields.

6.5 Update Panel Group

■ On the Update Panel Fields (Batch) screen, enter U in the U field of a listing for a
group field (that is, the USE field value is GP)
■ On the Line Edit screen, enter U in the line number field displaying the =GRP=>
message
■ On the Batch Program Definition menu, enter UP in the FUNCTION field, GP in
the ITEM field, and name the group
After you press [End] to save your entries, this screen displays data on the next group
that you selected for update (on the Update Panel Fields (Batch) screen). If there are
no more groups to update, control returns to the screen from which you accessed this
screen.
Program ID: P290
Function: Specifies additional characteristics of fields with a usage of GP.
XXXXXX.PD UPDATE PANEL GROUP

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
GROUP NAME 2 GRP1__ TYPE 3 TOPPAGE
GENERAL: SKIPBEF 4___ (NN/PAGE) SKIPAFT 5___ (NN/PAGE)

FMTCUST 6_______
PRINT 7__________________________________________________________
DETAIL: TDSKIP 8_
REPSEQ 9_ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ ____ __ __ _
CONTROL: CTLVAR 1__________________________________________________________

CTLLTH 11___ CTLPIC 12____________________________
MINOR 13_______
GRP REF: (TOPPAGE, TOPDTL, CONTROL)

FORGRP 14 ALLDETAIL _______________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________

1. COMMAND
2. GROUP NAME
The one- to eight-character name of the group. It is established on the Update
Panel Fields (Batch) screen but can be modified here.
The value in this field must begin with an alphabetic character and contain no
special characters. It is used to generate section name
B-5000-FORMAT-groupname and B-6000-PRINT-groupname.

3. TYPE
The type of batch group. Valid values are:
TOPPAGE (Page heading)
This group is printed only at the top of a report page.
TOPDTL (Detail heading)
This group is printed only at the top of a detail group.
DETAIL
This group is an output detail.
BOTPAGE (Page footing)
This group is printed only at the bottom of a report page.
CONTROL
This group defines a control break.
SUMMARY (Report footing)
This group is printed at the end of the report. Only one summary group is
allowed in a batch definition.
4. SKIPBEF
The number of lines to skip before printing this group. Valid values are:
nn
Skip nn lines before printing
PAGE
Go to the next page before printing
5. SKIPAFT
The number of lines to skip after printing this group. Valid values are:
nn
Skip nn lines after printing
PAGE
Go to the next page after printing
6. FMTCUST
Custom code inserted at the end of section B-5000-FORMAT-groupname.
7. PRINT
A value to specify whether the group is printed. Enter the name of the variable
which controls printing of the group.
You must control the value in this field using custom code. The value of the
variable name can be set in custom code to Y (print the group) or N (do not print
the group.).
8. TDSKIP
The number of lines to skip before printing a detail group when the previously
printed group is not the current group (that is, when a page break, control break,
or detail change occurs). A value in this field is meaningful only when the TYPE
value is DETAIL.
9. REPSEQ
The repeating sequence of line skips when the previously printed group is the
same as this group.
For example, if you enter 1 2 2 1, the repeating sequence is:

Lines After
skipped printing of:
1 First group
2 Second group
2 Third group
1 Fourth group
1 Fifth group
2 Sixth group
2 Seventh group
1 Eighth group
. .
. .
. .
10. CTLVAR
The name of the control variable name that the program must check for control
breaks. When the variable's value changes, the group is printed.
This field is required when the TYPE value is CONTROL, but is otherwise not
meaningful.
11. CTLLTH
The length of the control variable checked for a control break. You can use this
field to cause a control break on a field shorter than what is specified in
CTLVAR.
This field is required when the TYPE value is CONTROL, but is otherwise not
meaningful.
12. CTLPIC
The picture clause used to check the control variable named in the CTLVAR field.
If you specify a picture clause, the value in CTLLTH must specify the actual
length in the core of the CTLPIC clause.
This field is valid only when the value in the TYPE field is CONTROL.
13. MINOR
A minor control group; that is, a control group printed in the report before printing
the control group whose definition is currently displayed.
This field is valid only when the value in the TYPE field is CONTROL.
14. FORGRP
A detail group or a list of detail groups that are logically related to the control
group whose definition is currently displayed. The reserved word "ALLDETAIL"
(the default)can be used to indicate all detail groups are logically related to the
control group.
The type of the group specified here must be DETAIL. The type of the group
currently displayed must be TOPPAGE, TOPDTL, or CONTROL.
This value is applied differently depending on the type of the currently displayed
group:
■ For a TOPPAGE group, this value specifies detail groups that require the
TOPPAGE heading when printed as the first detail group on the page. Thus,

you can specify this value to create continuation headings or to suppress a

heading on a summary page.
■ For a TOPDTL group, this value specifies detail groups that require the
TOPDTL heading when the previous group printed in the report is unlike the
detail group(s) specified (that is, the TOPDTL heading is to be printed before
the detail group when a page break, control break, or detail change occurs).
■ For a CONTROL group, this value specifies the detail groups which, when
printed, require that this control break be checked (that is, for which details is
the control break valid). If you omit a value, control break checking takes
place regardless of the detail group being printed.

6.6 Batch Program Definition

Access: On the TDF Main menu, enter 5 in the FUNCTION field. You can return
to the Update Session Controls menu by pressing [PF3].
Program ID: B100
Function: Specifies values required for a batch or stored procedure program

definition.
Short form: If the value in the USER MODE field of the Update Session Controls
screen is 1 o r spaces, the short form of the Batch Program Definition menu is
displayed:
BATCH PROGRAM DEFINITION MENU

COMMAND ==> 1__________________________________________________________________
ITEM: 3_ BD-BATCH SP-STORED PROCEDURE
MEMBER NAME:
HEADER 4___
ID 5___
DESC 7_____________________________________
BASE DEFN : 8____ (FOR CREATE - NAME OF BASE BD OR SP)

Switching menu mode: Depending on the value in the USER MODE field of the
Update Session Controls screen, CA-Telon displays the long form or the short form of
this menu. See 2.9, “Update Session Controls” on page 2-30 for more information.
To switch from one to the other, enter SETMODE in the COMMAND field.
Long form: If the value in the USER MODE field of the Update Session Controls
screen is 2, the long form of the Batch Program Definition menu is displayed:

BATCH PROGRAM DEFINITION MENU

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
ITEM: 3_ BD-BATCH SP-STORED PROCEDURE PI-IMAGE PD-DEFIN

DG-DATA GROUP CC-CUSTCODE EN-ENVIRON GP-GROUP
MEMBER NAME:
HEADER 4____
ID 5____ TYPE 6_ (BD, SP)
DESC 7______________________________________
BASE DEFN : 8_____ (FOR CREATE - NAME OF BASE BD)

1. GROUP 9_______ (NAME OF GROUP)
2. CUSTCODE 1_______ (NAME OF CUSTOM CODE)
3. ENVIRON 11______ (MVS,AS4,UNIX,WINCH)

1. COMMAND
You can also enter the SETMODE command to swap to the long form of the
menu.
2. FUNCTION
The type of function to perform on the definition. This table shows valid values
with respect to the type of item being defined.
Function BD SP PI PD DG CC EN GP
(Action)
CR (Create) Y Y N N Y Y Y N
UP (Update) Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
PU (Purge) Y Y Y Y N Y N N
SH (Show) Y Y Y Y N Y N N
LI (List) Y Y Y Y Y Y N N
3. ITEM
The item that is the subject of the function specified in the FUNCTION field.
Valid values are:
BD
Batch definition
SP
Stored Procedure definition
PI
Panel image

PD
Panel definition
CC
COBOL or PL/I custom code
EN
Program environment
GP
Group
DG
A group of databases, data sets, or IMS TP PCBs
Note: On the short form of the Batch Program Definition menu, only BD is a
valid value.
4. HEADER
The character string that identifies the prefix to be processed, the program ID, or
group of programs. Its length is determined at installation.
You can list the members associated with this header. For example, you can
request a list of members associated with the header ZZ by specifying:
■ BD in the ITEM field
■ ZZ in the HEADER field
5. ID
The one- to five-character name which uniquely identifies the definition within a
group sharing the same header. The length is set at installation.
6. TYPE
The type pf program definition. Valid values are:
BD
Batch definition
SP
7. DESC
The description. If you accessed this screen from the Panel Definition menu, the
description is carried over from that menu; otherwise, this field is blank. A
description is optional.
8. BASE DEFN
An existing batch definition used as a base for the definition you are creating.
Enter the concatenation of the HEADER and ID values that identify the base
definition to be copied.
The copy action is initiated only if the FUNCTION field value is CR.
9. GROUP
The name of a group created with the panel definition function. A value is
required when you request updating a specific group of the panel definition by
specifying UP in the FUNCTION field and GP in the ITEM field.

10. CUSTCODE
The name of the custom code member you are creating or updating. A value is
required; in the FUNCTION field, specify either:
■ CR
■ UP
■ PU
and CC in the ITEM field.
11. ENVIRON
The target environment for the batch program. Valid values are:
■ MVS (MVS, OS/390, z/OS)
■ AS400
■ UNIX
■ WINCH
Note: ( — Valid on PWS or on OS/390 if the corresponding target option is
installed.)

6.7 Create/Update Batch Definitions

Access: On the Batch Program Definition menu, enter:
Program ID: B110
Function: Specifies values required to create a batch program, including:

■ The name of the program work area custom code
■ The printed output size
■ The names of other custom code members added to the program
To save your entries and return to the Batch Program Definition menu, press [End].
XXXXXX.BD UPDATE BATCH DEFINITION

COMMAND ==> 1__________________________________________________________________
2OPTIONS ==> CUSTOM CODE _ DATA GROUP _ PANEL DEF _ ENV MVS _
STORED PROCEDURES _
LANGLVL 6___ SIZE 7_ X ___ LANG 8__ (COB/PLI)
STRUCTURE: 9_ STANDARD 1_ MAIN SORT 11_ MERGE 12_ MATCH
APPLID 13__ 14_ USER SORTS
CMPLOPT 15______________ 4 IDENTIF 16______ 4 PROCEDR 17______
FILES: RPTDEST 18______
4 COBFCPY:SELECT 19______ FILEDEF 2______
AREAS: 4 WKAREA 21__________________________________________________________
Q-1 4 INIT1 22______ 4 INIT2 23______

C-1 4 GETTRAN 24______
INMAST 25______ 4 INTRAN 26______ 4 ENDTRAN 27______
A-1 4 PRCTRAN 28______
MATCH 29______ 4 MGREATR 3______ 4 TGREATR 31______
T-1 4 TERM 32______
MISC: 4 SECTION 33____________________________________________________________

PGMCUST 34_______________________________________________________
LINKAGE: PARMS 35 __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ ____ __ __

Note: If you press [Enter] to save your entries, this screen is redisplayed. However,
depending on the structure you have defined, certain custom code points may
not be redisplayed.
Show/Purge screen: You can access the Show/Purge Batch Definitions (B114)
screen from the Online Program Definition menu by entering:


command for a batch definition (BD).
The Show/Purge Batch Definitions screen fields are the same as the Create/Update
Batch Definitions screen fields.
1. COMMAND
You can also enter one of the following commands to invoke the custom code
editor for a specified member:
■ CREATE member-name [member-description]
■ EDIT member-name [member-description]
Note: Member-description is optional.
2. OPTIONS
The screen to which you transfer to complete the necessary specifications of the
program definition.
The table below shows the options by field name and the associated screen to
which control transfers. Select a field by entering a nonblank character.
OPTIONS Field Screen to Which Control Transfers

DATA GROUP Update Database Segment
PANEL DEF Update Panel Fields (Online)
ENV Update Batch Environment
STORED PROCEDURE List stored procedures to be called
3. DESC
The description entered on the Batch Program Definition menu. You can change
4. EDIT Flag fields
A one-byte field immediately succeeding several fields, as shown on the screen
illustration. Valid values are presented below:

Value Meaning Remarks

O Open Allows you to rename the custom code member or
associate it with another entry point. It erases any value
displayed in the field's name field (this is also true for
the name "**DFLT**"). This action only disconnects the
association between this entry and the custom code
member. It does not delete the member's contents.
S Show Allows you to browse the associated member name.
U Update Allows you to update or create the member name.
Note: — Not valid for purge or show modes. Open some members and show
others.
5. REMARKS
Protected field identifying the name of the custom code member added in the
COBOL REMARKS section of the program or at the beginning of the PL/I
program.
6. LANGLVL
The CA-Telon release version. For batch, the default is the current release at your
site.
7. SIZE
The length and width of the report. The default is 60 lines x 133 columns.
Note: The size of the panel definition has no bearing on the size of the report.
8. LANG
The programming language in which the definition is generated. This field is used
only when both COBOL and PL/I options are installed with CA-Telon The value
specified here overrides the default-entered LANG field on the Update Program
Definition Defaults screen.
9. STANDARD
A field in which a plus sign (+) indicates that the original batch program structure
is the current structure of the program.
If the structure is standard, you can modify it using the MAINSORT, MERGE, or
MATCH field.
10. MAIN SORT
A field in which a plus sign (+) indicates that mainline sort is the current structure
of the program. You can overtype + with one of these valid values:
U
Transfer to the Update Sort Definition screen to enter the required sort data.
On this screen you can set up a new structure type (if the current structure
type is standard) or update data associated with the current structure.

P
Purge the current structure and restore the standard structure. CA-Telon
displays the Update Sort Definition screen, where you confirm the purge.
You can also proceed to select the match sort or merge sort structure.
Z
Purge the current structure and all data associated with it, and restore the
standard structure.
11. MERGE
A field in which a plus sign (+) indicates that merge sort is the current structure
of the program. You can overtype + with one of these valid values:
U
Transfer to the List Merge Key Groups screen to enter the required sort data.
On this screen you can set up a new structure type (if the current structure
type is standard) or update data associated with the current structure.
P
displays the List Merge Key Groups screen, where you confirm the purge.
(You can then proceed to select the mainline sort or match sort structure.)
Z
standard structure.
12. MATCH
A field in which a plus sign (+) indicates that the program contains
master/transaction match processing. You can overtype + with one of these valid
values:
U
Transfer to the Update Match Keys screen to enter the required sort data. On
this screen you can set up a new structure type (if the current structure type is
standard) or update data associated with the current structure.
P
displays the Update Match Keys screen, where you confirm the purge. You
can also proceed to select the mainline sort or merge sort structure.
Z
standard structure.
13. APPLID
The application ID. The default is the value entered in the APPLID field on the
Update Program Definition Defaults screen.
The use of the application ID is defined during CA-Telon installation. See your
system administrator for details.
14. USER SORTS
A field in which a plus sign (+) indicates that the program contains a user sort.
You can overtype + with one of these valid values:

U
Transfer to the List Sorts screen to enter the required sort data.
P
displays the List Sorts screen, where you confirm the purge.
15. CMPLOPT
16. IDENTIF
PROC statement.
desired.
17. COBFCPY (COBOL Only)
Two copy member names placed in the ENVIRONMENT DIVISION and DATA
DIVISION of the program, respectively, specified in the SELECT and FILEDEF
fields, respectively.
18. PROCEDR
PL/I program.
19. RPTDEST
The destination of report output (if any). Valid values include:
■ The DDNAME of a sequential file
■ A GSAM DBD
■ The DDNAME of a VSAM ESDS data set
The default value is REPORT. The value must be defined in the data group for
this batch definition. Otherwise, the FD OPEN and CLOSE for the output report
are not generated and must be handled in custom code.
20. SELECT
The member containing select statements for the FILE-CONTROL section of the
program.
21. FILEDEF
The member containing user-defined file definitions for the FILE section of the
program.

22. WKAREA
The name of each copy member that contains the definition of a work area added
to the DATA DIVISION section of the COBOL program.
There is a maximum string length of 253 bytes.
You can specify as many as 20 member names. Separate member names with
commas.
You can include the members as part of the batch definition or as members of a
library.
23. INIT1
Custom code placed in the Q-1000 section, after the R-1000 section and before
open files. Use this code to perform any setup necessary before opening files,
cursors, and so forth.
24. INIT2
Custom code placed in the Q-1000-PROGRAM-INIT section of the generated
program. It is executed after the program opens the files.
25. GETTRAN
Custom code placed in the C-1000-GET-TRAN section of the generated program,
which controls the retrieval of a batch input transaction.
It is performed first after program initialization and then from the main process
loop after the printing of each detail. Once a valid transaction has been retrieved,
A-1000-PROCESS-TRAN is performed to process the retrieved transaction.
This field and its select field and label are protected and blank for any match sort
programs or mainline sort programs with an input procedure, since this custom
code point is not used in those programs.
26. INMAST
(Match sort structure only.) Custom code placed in the C-1000-GET-MAST
section of the generated program. Use it for processing immediately after a
master record fetch.
Select, label, and name fields remain blank and protected until you select the
program structure in the MATCH field on this screen.
27. INTRAN
(Match sort structure only.) Custom code placed in the C-1000-GET-TRAN
section of the generated program. Use it for processing immediately after a
transaction fetch.
28. ENDTRAN
(Match sort structure only.) Custom code placed in the C-1000-TRAN-DONE
section of the generated program. Use it for processing after all transactions have
been fetched for a single key.

29. PRCTRAN
Custom Code placed in the A-1000-PROCESS-TRAN section of the program,
which processes a transaction retrieved in C-1000-GET-TRANSACTION. By
default, this routine selects the first detail group in the batch definition printed into
the report. Selection of other detail groups must be done using the custom code
specified here.
This field and its select field and label are protected and blank for any match sort
programs or mainline sort programs with an input procedure, since this custom
code point is not used in those programs.
30. MATCH
(Match sort structure only.) Custom code placed in the A-1000-MAST-EQ-TRAN
section of the generated program. Use it for processing when the master and
transaction keys are equal.
Note: This custom code is invoked from A-1000-MATCH.
31. MGREATR
(Match sort structure only.) Custom code placed in the
A-1000-MAST-MGREATER section of the generated program. Use it for
processing when the master key is greater than the transaction key.
32. TGREATR
(Match sort structure only.) Custom code placed in the
A-1000-TRAN-TGREATER section of the generated program. Use it for
processing when the transaction key is greater than the master key.
33. TERM
Custom code placed in the T-1000-PROGRAM-TERM section of the program
before closing the batch files.
34. SECTION
Custom code COPY or INCLUDE members added as COBOL sections or PL/I
procedures, performed from other parts of the program. Specify a maximum of 35
members, each separated with a comma.
The members can be located in a common library or can be unique to this
program.

35. PGMCUST
and the name of the custom code member added.
You can make multiple specifications using this format:
Section-name
or at the end (T).
For example, H100I specifies that section H100 is included at the beginning
of the program and E100T specifies that section E100 is included at the end
of the program.
Member-name
Thus, the value A100I,OUTIDC specifies that the custom code named
The following section names are available for Batch programs:
Section Description
A1000I A-1000-PROCESS-TRAN, A-1000-MATCH (beginning
of section; batch standard, batc h match, respectively)
A1000T A-1000-PROCESS-TRAN, A-1000-MATCH (end of
section; batch standard, batch matc h, respectively)
A1000_2I A_1000_TRAN_GREATER (beginning of section; PL/I
batch match)
A1000_3I A-1000-MAST-GREATER (beginning of section; PL/I
batch match)
A1000_4I A-1000-MAST-EQUAL-TRAN (beginning of section;
PL/I batch match)
A1000-2I A-1000-TRAN-GREATER (beginning of section;
COBOL batch match)
A1000-3I A-1000-MAST-GREATER (beginning of section;
COBOL batch match)
A1000-4I A-1000-MAST-EQUAL-TRAN (beginning of section;
COBOL batch match)
B1000I B-1000-PROCESS-DETAIL (beginning of section)

Section Description
B1000T B-1000-PROCESS-DETAIL (end of section)
B2000I B-2000-END-REPORT (beginning of section)
B2000T B-2000-END-REPORT (end of section)
B5000I B-5000-FORMAT-<groupname> (beginning of every
B-5000-FORMAT-<groupname> secti on)
B5000T B-5000-FORMAT-<groupname> (end of every
B-5000-FORMAT-<groupname> section)
B6000I B-6000-PRINT-<groupname> (beginning of every
B-6000-PRINT-<groupname> section )
B6000T B-6000-PRINT-<groupname> (end of every
B-6000-PRINT-<groupname> section)
B9000I B-9000-PAGE-BREAK (beginning of section)
B9000T B-9000-PAGE-BREAK (end of section)
C1000I C-1000-GET-TRAN (beginning of section)
C1000T C-1000-GET-TRAN (end of section)
C1000_2I C_1000_FIND_MIN_KEY (beginning of section; PL/I
batch match)
C1000_2T C_1000_FIND_MIN_KEY (end of section; PL/I batch
match)
C1000_3I C_1000_CHECK_KEY_LEVELS (beginning of section;
PL/I batch merge)
C1000_3T C_1000_CHECK_KEY_LEVELS (end of section; PL/I
batch merge)
C1000_4I C_1000_SET_INDICATORS (beginning of section; PL/I
batch merge)
C1000_4T C_1000_SET_INDICATORS (end of section; PL/I batch
merge)
C1000-2I C-1000-FIND-MIN-KEY (beginning of section; PL/I
batch merge)
C1000-2T C-1000-FIND-MIN-KEY (end of section; PL/I batch
merge)
C1000-3I C-1000-CHECK-KEY-LEVELS (beginning of section;
COBOL batch merge)
C1000-3T C-1000-CHECK-KEY-LEVELS (end of section;
COBOL batch merge)

Section Description
C1000-4I C-1000-SET-INDICATORS (beginning of section;
COBOL batch merge)
C1000-4T C-1000-SET-INDICATORS (end of section; COBOL
batch merge)
C2000I C-2000-WRITE-REPORT (beginning of section)
C2000T C-2000-WRITE-REPORT (end of section)
MAININLOOP MAIN_INPUT_LOOP (beginning of section; PL/I batch)
MAININLOOPE MAIN_INPUT_LOOP (end of section; PL/I batch)
MAINLOOP MAIN_PROCESS_LOOP (beginning of procedure; PL/I
batch only)
MAINOUTLOOP MAIN_OUTPUT_LOOP (beginning of procedure; PL/I
batch only)
MAINOUTLOOPE MAIN_OUTPUT_LOOP (end of procedure; PL/I batch
only)
Q1000I Q-1000-PROGRAM-INIT (beginning of section)
Q1000T Q-1000-PROGRAM-INIT (end of section)
R1000I R-1000-PARSE-PARM (beginning of section)
R1000T R-1000-PARSE-PARM (end of section)
S1000I S-1000-USER-SORT (beginning of section)
S1000T S-1000-USER-SORT (end of section)
SRTINPUTLOOP MAIN-INPUT-LOOP (beginning of section; batch
mainline sort)
SRTINPUTLPE MAIN-INPUT-LOOP (end of section; batch mainline
sort)
SRTOUTPUTLOOP MAIN-OUTPUT-LOOP (beginning of section; batch
mainline sort)
SRTOUTPUTLPE MAIN-OUTPUT-LOOP (end of section; batch mainline
sort)
T1000I T-1000-PROGRAM-TERM (beginning of section)
T1000T T-1000-PROGRAM-TERM (end of section)

Section Description
(beginning of section); COBOL progr ams only)
Z980I Z-980-ABNORMAL-TERMINATION (beginning of
section)
36. PARMS
The length of each parameter field parsed from the JCL parameter passed to the
batch program. The number of parameters is equal to the number of lengths you
enter here.
Fields are parsed by commas, quotes, and parentheses, and placed in generated
fields with lengths corresponding to the length values you specify.

6.8 Update Batch Environment

Program ID: B168
Function: Specifies required information about environmental characteristics under

which the generated batch program operates.
XXXXXX.BD UPDATE _____ BATCH ENV

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
GENERAL: TRACE 2 (Y/N)

DBMS 3
PGMNAME 4_______

USGCOPY 6_______
DLI: GENPCBS 7 (Y/N)

DLIWGHT 8 (Y/N)
PSBNAME 9_______
DBMS: COMMIT 1 (Y-YES/N-NO/H-YES, WITH HOLD)
PL/I: PLIXOPT 11_ (C-CREATE/U-UPDATE/P-PURGE)

1. COMMAND
2. TRACE
A value to specify whether CA-Telon is to generate and maintain trace variables
in the program to allow the CA-Telon Test Facility to provide added information
that facilitates the testing and debugging process. Valid values are:
Y
(Default) Generate and maintain trace variables in the program
N
Do not generate and maintain trace variables in the program

3. DBMS
The database management system. For OS/390 batch, valid values are:
■ DL/I
■ EXEC DLI
■ VSAM
■ SEQ
■ DB2
■ IDMSSQL (SQL)
■ DATACOM (SQL)
4. PGMNAME
The name of the load module created by the linkage editor, required only when
the load module name is different from the name that CA-Telon generates for the
program.
You specify this name in the format hhxxnnnn, where:
hh
The header
xx
One or two constant characters as specified in the PGMNAMES macro by
target environment (for example, batch, IMS, CICS)
nnnn
The identifier
For example, hhBPnnnn is the default for a COBOL batch program.
5. LNKCOPY
The name of the COPY member containing required PCB definitions. These are
required 01-level declarations included in the linkage section of the COBOL batch
program.
6. USGCOPY
The list of variable declarations in the linkage member appended to the COBOL
PROCEDURE DIVISION or the PL/I procedure statements.
7. GENPCBS
A value to specify whether CA-Telon is to generate DL/I PCB masks in the
generated program. Valid values are:
Y
Automatically generate PCB masks in the program.
N
Do not automatically generate PCB masks. In this case, the programmer must
supply PCB masks in the LNKCOPY and USGCOPY custom code members.
Note: If the DBMS field value is EXEC DLI, CA-Telon expects the GENPCBS
value to be N. If you have included the I/O PCB in data access, you are
responsible for coding that PCB as well as any other PCBs. You should
define it as IO-PCB (or IO_PCB for PLI) to avoid compiler errors.

8. DLIWGHT
A value to specify whether the generated program automatically weight DL/I calls.
Valid values are:
Y
Automatically weigh DL/I calls
N
Do not automatically weigh DL/I calls
If you enter Y, the variable DLI-ACCUM-WEIGHT is generated. During
execution it is incremented by 3 for each DL/I ISRT or DLET and by 1 for any
other call. This allows you to determine when to take a checkpoint. Custom code
is required to check and reset this variable.
9. PSBNAME
The PSBNAME for the DLIPSB statement for this batch program.
10. COMMIT
A field that is displayed only in the AS/400 environment. Valid values are:
Y
Yes
N
(Default) No
H
Yes, with hold processing
11. RDBMS
The relational database management system for the specified amount. Valid
values are:
■ DATACOM (WINCH only)
■ INGRES (UNIX only)
■ ORACLE (UNIX only)
■ XDB (WINCH only)
12. CONNECT
A field to specify the generation of a CONNECT paragraph. Valid values are:
Y
Yes
N
No
(AS/400, UNIX, and WINCH only)
13. PLIXOPT (PL/I only)
A field in which a plus sign (+) indicates the existence of a PLIXOPT statement
for this environment. You can overtype + with one of these valid values:
C
Create a PLIXOPT statement for this environment
U
Update an existing PLIXOPT statement for this environment

6.9 Update Match Keys
P
Purge an existing PLIXOPT statement for this environment


Access: On the Create/Update Batch Definitions screen, enter U, S, or P in the
MATCH field of the STRUCTURE line.
You can enter S in the same field on the Show/Purge Batch Definitions screen to
display this screen with all fields except the COMMAND line protected.
Program ID: B1MA
Function: Supplies keys and other data required to drive the match sort function.
XXXXXX.BD LIST MATCH KEYS

COMMAND==> 1___________________________________________________ SCROLL ==> ____
MASTER FILE 2______ TRANSACTION FILE 3______
MASTER KEY FIELDS: TRANSACTION KEY FIELDS: - SAVE KEY -

SEQ DATANAME MORE DATANAME MORE LTH FORM SIZE
TOP OF DATA
4_____ 5_______________________ 6 5________________________ 6 7__ 8 9_ _
______ ________________________ _ _________________________ _ ___ _ __ _
______ ________________________ _ _________________________ _ ___ _ __ _
______ ________________________ _ _________________________ _ ___ _ __ _
______ ________________________ _ _________________________ _ ___ _ __ _
______ ________________________ _ _________________________ _ ___ _ __ _
______ ________________________ _ _________________________ _ ___ _ __ _
______ ________________________ _ _________________________ _ ___ _ __ _
______ ________________________ _ _________________________ _ ___ _ __ _
______ ________________________ _ _________________________ _ ___ _ __ _
______ ________________________ _ _________________________ _ ___ _ __ _
______ ________________________ _ _________________________ _ ___ _ __ _
______ ________________________ _ _________________________ _ ___ _ __ _
______ ________________________ _ _________________________ _ ___ _ __ _
______ ________________________ _ _________________________ _ ___ _ __ _
BOTTOM OF DATA

1. COMMAND
2. MASTER FILE
A protected field displaying the name of the match master file identified on the
Create/Update Data Group screen when MATCHM is specified in the REQUEST
field.
3. TRANSACTION FILE
A protected field displaying the name of the match transaction file identified on
the Create/Update Data Group screen when MATCHT is specified in the
REQUEST field.
4. SEQ
A field in which to enter line commands that manipulate the sequence key groups.
Valid values are:

A
After
B
Before
D
Delete
X
Exclude
F
Show first excluded line
I
Insert
L
Show last excluded line
M
Move
5. DATANAME
Key field for a master file or a transaction field.
The screen provides space for 15 keys for the master file and 15 keys for the
transaction file. You must identify at least one key field for the master and
transaction files, and you must enter the same number of keys for each file.
6. MORE
A field in which to request to transfer to the Update Parameter Overflow screen to
enter a DATANAME value longer than the 25 characters permitted on this screen,
increasing the maximum to 60 characters. To request transfer, enter a nonblank
character.
7. LTH
The length of the match key field, in bytes. A value is required here when you
enter a DATANAME field value.
This value is used with the values in the FORM and SIZE fields to generate a
save area for each file's match keys.
8. FORM
The key field group's format. Valid values are:
A
(Default) Alphanumeric
N
Numeric
9. SIZE
Two fields defining the size of the key field when the FORM value is N
(numeric). The first field specifies the number of positions to the right of the
decimal point; the second field specifies the number of positions to the left of the
decimal point.
The sum of the SIZE fields must equal the value in the LTH field.


6.10 List Sorts
6.10 List Sorts

Access: On the Create/Update Batch Definitions screen, enter U in the USER SO
RTS field.
Program ID: B1S1
Function: Lists up to 20 user sorts (and the mainline sort, for a mainline sort
program) that are included in a program, and allows access to the Update Sort
Definition screen where you can enter sort specification details for a selected sort.
hhtttt.BD LIST USER SORTS

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
SORTNAME DESCRIPTION
2 3_______ 4_____________________________________
_ ________ ______________________________________
_ ________ ______________________________________
_ ________ ______________________________________
_ ________ ______________________________________
_ ________ ______________________________________
_ ________ ______________________________________
_ ________ ______________________________________
_ ________ ______________________________________
_ ________ ______________________________________
_ ________ ______________________________________
_ ________ ______________________________________
_ ________ ______________________________________
_ ________ ______________________________________
_ ________ ______________________________________
_ ________ ______________________________________
_ ________ ______________________________________
_ ________ ______________________________________
_ ________ ______________________________________
_ ________ ______________________________________
_ ________ ______________________________________

1. COMMAND
You can also specify CREATE sortname ["description"].
2. (Line Command)
A field in which to enter one of these line commands:
U
Go behind the list entry to update the sort on the Update Sort Definition
screen, where the full sort specifications are made
C
Copy an existing sort, with all its data
P
Delete the sort
Z
Delete the sort immediately

6.10 List Sorts
S
Show the Sort Definition screen
Note: For a mainline sort, only U and S line commands are valid.
3. SORTNAME
The name to identify a sort, used in generating an S-1000-sortname section.
The value MAINLINE is not valid because it is reserved for the mainline sort. If a
mainline sort program has user-defined sorts, the mainline sort is listed first on the
screen. You can access the mainline sort in the same manner used to access
user-defined sorts, but to alter or delete it, you must go to the Create/Update
Batch Definitions screen.
4. DESCRIPTION
Description of the sort. This value is informational only. It is stored in the TDF
database, but is not used in code generation. You can update it by typing over it.

6.11 List Merge Key Groups

Access: On the Create/Update Batch Definitions screen, enter U, S, or P in the
MERGE field of the STRUCTURE line.
You can enter S in the same field on the List Merge Key Groups screen to display this
screen with all fields except the COMMAND line protected.
Program ID: B1M1
Function: Lists the key groups used to drive the merge function.
hhtttt.BD LIST MERGE KEY GROUPS

COMMAND==>1______________________________________________________ SCROLL ==>___
LTH FORM SIZE DESCRIPTION

TOP OF DATA
2_____ 3___ 4 5_ __ 6_______________________________________________
______ ____ _ __ __ _______________________________________________
______ ____ _ __ __ _______________________________________________
______ ____ _ __ __ _______________________________________________
______ ____ _ __ __ _______________________________________________
______ ____ _ __ __ _______________________________________________
______ ____ _ __ __ _______________________________________________
______ ____ _ __ __ _______________________________________________
______ ____ _ __ __ _______________________________________________
______ ____ _ __ __ _______________________________________________
______ ____ _ __ __ _______________________________________________
______ ____ _ __ __ _______________________________________________
______ ____ _ __ __ _______________________________________________
______ ____ _ __ __ _______________________________________________
______ ____ _ __ __ _______________________________________________
______ ____ _ __ __ _______________________________________________
______ ____ _ __ __ _______________________________________________
BOTTOM OF DATA

1. COMMAND
2. (Line command)
A field in which to enter one of these line commands to sequence fields:
A
After
B
Before
C
Copy
D
Delete
X
Exclude
F

I
Insert
L
M
Move
R
Repeat
U
Update
3. LTH
The length of the merge key field, in bytes. This value is used with the values in
the FORM and SIZE fields to generate a save area for each file's merge keys.
4. FORM
The key field group's format. Valid values are:
A
(Default) Alphanumeric
N
Numeric
5. SIZE
Two fields defining the size of the key field when the FORM value is N
(numeric). The first field specifies the number of positions to the right of the
decimal point; the second field specifies the number of positions to the left of the
decimal point.
6. DESCRIPTION
Description of the group. This value is informational only. It is stored in the
TDF database, but is not used in code generation. You can update it by
overtyping it.

6.12 Update Sort Definition

■ On the List Sorts screen, enter U as a line command for the listing of the sort to
update
■ On the Create/Update Batch Definitions screen, enter U, S, or P in the
MAINSORT field
■ On the Show/Purge Batch Definitions screen, enter S in the MAINSORT field
Program ID: B1S2
Function: Specifies the values needed to define a sort (mainline or user-defined).
Screen display for COBOL
XXXXXX.BD UPDATE SORT ________ SIZE _______

COMMAND ===> 1_____________________________________________ SCROLL ===> ______
SRTNAME 2________ DESCRIPTION _________________________________________
DEFINITION:
PROCIN 3________ FILEIN 4________
PROCOUT 5________ FILEOUT 6________
COLLATE 7________
FILE LRECL 1____ ____ (MIN MAX)
COPY 11_______ COPYLV1 12_ (Y/N)
COPYLBL 13___________________________________
FIELDS:
START LTH ORDER FORM SIZE DATANM MORE
TOP OF DATA
14____ 15__ 16__ 17_ 18__ 19_ __ 2_____________________________________ _
______ ____ ____ _ __ __ __ _______________________________________ _
______ ____ ____ _ __ __ __ _______________________________________ _
______ ____ ____ _ __ __ __ _______________________________ ______ _
______ ____ ____ _ __ __ __ _______________________________________ _
______ ____ ____ _ __ __ __ _______________________________________ _
______ ____ ____ _ __ __ __ _______________________________________ _
______ ____ ____ _ __ __ __ _______________________________________ _
______ ____ ____ _ __ __ __ _______________________________________ _
______ ____ ____ _ __ __ __ _______________________________________ _
______ ____ ____ _ __ __ __ _______________________________________ _
______ ____ ____ _ __ __ __ _______________________________________ _
______ ____ ____ _ __ __ __ _______________________________ ______ _
BOTTOM OF DATA

COBOL programs require the following:
■ Input proc (PROCIN field) or file (FILEIN field)
■ Output proc (PROCOUT field) or file (FILEOUT field)
■ An LRECL specification
■ At least one set of the key fields

For a COBOL program containing a sort (either mainline or user-defined), one

COBOL SELECT is built with the name SORTWK01. For COBOL programs,
CA-Telon builds a single COBOL SELECT statement for each file being sorted,
regardless of the number of sorts each is used in.
For user-defined sorts, input and output PROC names must be different. It is the
programmer's responsibility to release the sort record in the input PROC and return the
sort record in the output PROC.
Screen display for PL/I
XXXXXX.BD UPDATE SORT ________ SIZE ______

COMMAND ===> 1_____________________________________________ SCROLL ===> _____
SRTNAME 2________ DESCRIPTION ________________________________________
DEFINITION:
PROCIN 3________
PROCOUT 5________
COLLATE 7________ PREFIX 8____ STORAGE 9_______
FILE LRECL 1____ ____ (MIN MAX)
COPY 11_______ COPYLV1 12_ (Y/N)
COPYLBL 13___________________________________
FIELDS:
START LTH ORDER FORM

14___ 15__ 16__ 17_ 18_
_____ ____ ____ _ __
_____ ____ ____ _ __
_____ ____ ____ _ __
_____ ____ ____ _ __
_____ ____ ____ _ __
_____ ____ ____ _ __
_____ ____ ____ _ __
_____ ____ ____ _ __
_____ ____ ____ _ __
_____ ____ ____ _ __
_____ ____ ____ _ __

PL/I programs require:
■ An LRECL specification
■ At least one set of the key fields
If you do not enter PROCIN or PROCOUT values for a PL/I sort, CA-Telon assumes
the sort is FILEIN/FILEOUT (for example, PLISRTA).
If a PREFIX value is not entered, the FILEIN file name defaults to SORTIN and the
FILEOUT name defaults to SORTOUT. If a PREFIX value is entered (for example,
TASK), CA-Telon adds the suffixes IN and OUT to the PREFIX value to create the
file names (for example, TASKIN and TASKOUT).
If you enter a PROCIN but not a PROCOUT value for a PL/I sort, CA-Telon assumes
the sort is PROCIN/FILEOUT (for example, PLISRTB), and the FILEOUT name is
built using the PREFIX value (either what you enter or the default value SORT).

If you enter a PROCOUT value but not a PROCIN value for a PL/I sort, CA-Telon
assumes the sort is FILEIN/PROCOUT (for example, PLISRTC), and the FILEIN
name is built using the PREFIX value (either what you enter or the default value
SORT).
If you enter both PROCIN and PROCOUT values for a PL/I sort, CA-Telon assumes
the sort is PROCIN/PROCOUT (for example, PLISRTD).
1. COMMAND
2. SORTNAME
Protected field displaying the name of the sort. Possible values are MAINLINE
or, for a user-defined sort, the value entered in the SORTNAME field on the List
Sorts screen.
3. PROCIN
A custom code member included in the sort's INPUT PROCEDURE.
4. FILEIN (COBOL Only)
A SORT USING (that is, with no processing to prepare input).
5. PROCOUT
A custom code member included in the sort's OUTPUT PROCEDURE.
6. FILEOUT (COBOL Only)
A SORT GIVING (that is, with no processing on output).
7. COLLATE
The collating sequence. Valid values are:
E
(Default) EBCDIC
A
ASCII
(name) (COBOL Only)
Custom code member containing a user-defined collating sequence
8. PREFIX (PL/I Only)
Input a four-character code used to construct names for USING and/or GIVING
files that can be referenced before or after a sort (also SORTWK files).
The default prefix is SORT, which means the default name for a USING file is
SORTIN and for a GIVING file is SORTOUT. However, if you enter a prefix
value, such as TASK, references to an input file are to TASKIN (for a file-in
sort), and to an output file are TASKOUT (for a file-out sort). For a procedure-in
or procedure-out sort, no file references are generated.
9. STORAGE (PL/I Only)
A numeric value equaling the amount of main storage to be made available to the
sort program. Minimum allowed is 88K (90112). If not specified here, the
default is handled by generating the following code (which uses the maximum
storage available):

DCL MAXSTOR FIXED BINARY(31,);

UNSPEC(MAXSTOR) = ''B ││ UNSPEC ('MAX');
.
.
.
CALL PLISRTX
(...
...
MAXSTOR ...
About FILE fields: The four FILE fields are LRECL, COPY, COPYLV1, and
COPYLBL. These fields define the sort file used for input and/or output procedure
sorts. In COBOL sort programs, a sort COBOL SELECT statement is built for the
sort file based on the FILE fields; in PL/I programs, the information is used to build
the sort statement and input and/or output procedures.
10. LRECL
The maximum and minimum record size of the sort file used for sorts with both
input and output procedures.
For sorts with an input or output file, record size is taken from the file's data
group definition. For sorts with both input and output files, the LRECL of values
of the files must match.
11. COPY
The name of the COPY member containing the layout of the sort file used for
input and/or output procedure sorts. If this value is used for COBOL, the sort
field must be identified in the DATANAME field. Sort fields must not be
defined positionally.
12. COPYLV1
A value to specify that the layout of the sort file specified in the COPYLBL field
begins with an 01 level. If you specify a COPYLBL value, enter Y here.
13. COPYLBL
The I/O area name of the sort file used for input and/or output procedure sorts.
This value overrides any existing specification.
About FIELDS fields: The FIELDS fields are SEQ, START, LTH, ORDER,
FORM, and (COBOL only) SIZE and DATANAME. Use the appropriate combination
of values in these fields to define a maximum of five fields per sort key.
For both PL/I and COBOL, values are required in the START, LENGTH, FORM, and
ORDER fields for each key field. Alternatively, for COBOL, you can specify no
values in these fields but instead enter a COPY member name in the DATANAME
field.
14. SEQ
A field in which you can enter one of these line commands to manipulate the
sequence of sort keys listed:
A
After

B
Before
D
Delete
X
Exclude
F
I
Insert
L
M
Move
15. START
The starting byte for the sort key.
16. LTH
The length of the sort key, in bytes.
17. ORDER
The sorting sequence for the field. Valid values are:
A
(Default) Ascending
D
Descending
18. FORM
The format of the sort field. Valid values are:
CH
(Default) Character
ZD
Picture/zoned decimal
PD
Packed decimal
BI
Binary
FI
Fixed point
FL
Floating point
19. SIZE (COBOL Only)
Two fields defining the size of the key field when its type is ZD or FI. The first
field specifies the number of positions to the right of the decimal point; the second
field specifies the number of positions to the left of the decimal point.

20. DATA- NAME (COBOL Only)

The name of the field to be sorted.
21. MORE
A field in which to request to transfer to the Update Parameter Overflow screen to
enter a DATANAME value longer than the 25 characters permitted on this screen,
increasing the maximum to 60 characters. To request transfer, enter a nonblank
character.

6.13 Update Group Merge Keys
6.13 Update Group Merge Keys

Access: On the List Merge Key Groups screen, enter U or P in the SEQ field of the
listing for a merge key group. If you enter U for more than one listing, each update
requested is processed in sequence.
Program ID: B1M2
Function: Specifies the keys required to drive the merge function. There are two
fields for each key.
XXXXXX.BD UPDATE GROUP ## MERGE KEYS

COMMAND==> 1____________________________________________________________
DATA SET DATANAME

2_______ 3___________________________________________________________
________ ____________________________________________________________
________ ____________________________________________________________
________ ____________________________________________________________
________ ____________________________________________________________
________ ____________________________________________________________
________ ____________________________________________________________
________ ____________________________________________________________
________ ____________________________________________________________
________ ____________________________________________________________
________ ____________________________________________________________
________ ____________________________________________________________
________ ____________________________________________________________
________ ____________________________________________________________
________ ____________________________________________________________
________ ____________________________________________________________
________ ____________________________________________________________
________ ____________________________________________________________
________ ____________________________________________________________
________ ____________________________________________________________

1. COMMAND
2. DATA SET
Protected field displaying the name of the merge data set to which the key
belongs, derived from the LABEL field on the Create/Update Data Group screen.
Data Set names are shown in the merge order defined on the Create/Update Data
Group screen; that is, the first data set has auto exec access MERGE01, the fifth,
MERGE05, and so on.
3. DATANAME
The name of the host variable for the key field. The variable must be defined in
the program.
A DATANAME value is required for each DATA SET value displayed on the
screen.

6.14 Create/Update Stored Procedure Definition

■ SP in the ITEM field
Program ID: B210
Function: Specifies values required to create a stored procedure program, including:
■ The name of the program work area custom code

■ The names of other custom code members added to the program
To save your entries and return to the Batch Program Definition menu, press [End].
XXXXXX.SP UPDATE STORED PROCEDURE

COMMAND ==>1__________________________________________________________________
2OPTIONS ==> CUSTOM CODE _ DATA GROUP _ PARAMETERS _ ENV STORED _

LANGLVL 6___ SPNAME 7_______ LANG 8__ (COB/PLI)
APPLID 9______
CMPLOPT 1______________ 4 IDENTIF 11______ 4 PROCEDR 12______
FILES: 4 COBFCPY:SELECT 13______ FILEDEF 14______
AREAS: 4 WKAREA 15__________________________________________________________ _
Q-1 4 INIT1 16______ 4 INIT2 17______

A-1 4 SPINIT 18______
C-3 4 SPPROC 19______
D-3 4 SPTERM 2______
T-1 4 TERM 21______
MISC: 4 SECTION 22__________________________________________________________ _

PGMCUST 23__________________________________________________________ _
RUNOPTS 24__________________________________________________________ _

Show/Purge screen: You can access the Show/Purge Stored Procedure Definitions
(B214) screen from the Online Program Definition menu by entering:
command for a stored procedure definition (SP).

The Show/Purge Stored Procedure Definitions screen fields are the same as the
Create/Update Stored Procedure Definitions screen fields.
1. COMMAND
For information, see 9.5, “Primary Commands” on page 9-13. You can also enter
one of the following commands to invoke the custom code editor for a specified
member:
■ CREATE member-name member-description‘
■ EDIT member-name member-description‘
Note: Member-description is optional.
2. OPTIONS
The screen to which you transfer to complete the necessary specifications of the
program definition.
The table below shows the options by field name and the associated screen to
which control transfers. Select a field by entering a nonblank character.
OPTIONS Field Screen to Which Control Transfers

DATA GROUP Update Database Segment
PARAMETERS Update Stored Procedure Parameters
ENV STORED Update Stored Procedure Environment
3. DESC
The description entered on the Stored Procedure Program Definition menu. You
can change the description here.
4. EDIT FLAG FIELD
A one-byte field immediately succeeding several fields, as shown on the screen
illustration. Valid values are presented below:

O Open Allows you to rename the custom code member or associate
it with another entry point. It erases any value displayed in
the field's name field (this is also true for the name
"**DFLT**"). This action only disconnects the association
between this entry and the custom code member. It does
not delete the member's contents.
S Show Allows you to browse the associated member name.


U Update Allows you to update or create the member name.
Note: Not valid for purge or show modes. Open some
members and show others.
5. REMARKS
Protected field identifying the name of the custom code member added in the
COBOL REMARKS section of the program or at the beginning of the PL/I
program.
6. LANGLVL
The CA-Telon release version. For stored procedures, the default is the current
release at your site.
7. SPNAME (output-only)
The external name of the stored procedure. This is an output-only field, only
displaying a value if the name exists. The external name may only be specified
through use of the DB2 Stored Procedure Catalog Extract.
8. LANG
The programming language in which the definition is generated. This field is used
only when both COBOL and PL/I options are installed with CA-Telon. The value
specified here overrides the default-entered LANG field on the Update Program
Definition Defaults screen.
9. APPLID
The application ID. The default is the value entered in the APPLID field on the
Update Program Definition Defaults screen. The use of the application ID is
defined during CA-Telon installation. See your system administrator for details.
10. CMPLOPT
IDENTIFICATION DIVISION line or the PL/I PROC statement. The field on this
screen contains 16 bytes. Once an entry has been made in the field, an extension
field is presented after the field. If you need to enter a longer value, place a "U"
in the extension field to go to the "Update Parameter Overflow" screen, where you
can enter a total of 253 bytes, including commas.
11. IDENTIF
PROC statement.
12. PROCEDR
DIVISION line for specification of Declaratives after the Procedure Division. This
copybook is valid only for COBOL; it does not appear on the screen for a PL/I
program.

13-14. COBFCPY (COBOL Only)

Two copy member names placed in the ENVIRONMENT DIVISION and DATA
DIVISION of the program, respectively, specified in the SELECT and FILED EF
fields, respectively.
13. SELECT
The member containing select statements for the FILE-CONTROL section of the
program.
14. FILEDEF
The member containing user-defined file definitions for the FILE section of the
program.
15. WKAREA
The name of each copy member that contains the definition of a work area added
to the DATA DIVISION section of the COBOL program. There is a maximum
string length of 253 bytes. You can specify as many as 20 member names.
Separate member names with commas. You can include the members as part of
the batch definition or as members of a library.
16. INIT1
Custom code placed in the Q-1000-PROGRAM-INIT section, before open files.
Use this code to perform any setup necessary before opening files, if specified.
17. INIT2
Custom code placed in the Q-1000-PROGRAM-INIT section of the generated
program. It is executed after the program opens the files, if specified.
18. SPINIT
Custom code placed in the A-1000-STORED-INIT section of the generated
program, which controls the mapping of stored procedure parameters to program
variables.
19. SPPROC
Custom code placed in the C-3000-STORED-PROCESS section of the generated
program. Use it for processing immediately after a generated
DECLARE CURSOR and OPEN of the cursor.
20. SPTERM
Custom code placed in the D-1000-STORED-TERM section of the generated
program, which controls the mapping of program variables to stored procedure
parameters.
21. TERM
Custom code placed in the T-1000-PROGRAM-TERM section of the program
before closing any opened files.
22. SECTION
Custom code COPY or INCLUDE members added as COBOL sections or PL/I
procedures, performed from other parts of the program. Specify a maximum of 35
members, each separated with a comma. There is a maximum string length of
253 bytes.

23. PGMCUST
and the name of the custom code member added. There is a maximum string
length of 253 bytes. You can make multiple specifications using this format:
section-name1, member-name1,section-name2, member-name2,...
Section-name The four-character identifier of the section or procedure in which to

include the custom code (for example, H100) and a suffix (I or T) that specifies
whether to include the code at the beginning (I) of the section or procedure, or at
the end (T).
For example, H100I specifies that section H100 is included at the beginning of the
program and E100T specifies that section E100 is included at the end of the
program.
Member-name The name of the custom code added at the location specified by
section-name.
Thus, the value A100I,OUTIDC specifies that the custom code named OUTIDC is
The following section names are available for stored procedure programs:
Section Description
A1000I A-1000-STORED-INIT (beginning of section)
A1000T A-1000-STORED-INIT (end of section)
C3000I C-3000-STORED-PROCESS (beginning of section)
C3000T C-3000-STORED-PROCESS (end of section)
D1000I D-1000-STORED-TERM (beginning of section)
D1000T D-1000-STORED-TERM (end of section)
MAINI MAIN-PROCESS (beginning of section)
S100I S-100-STP-CALLS (beginning of section)
S100T S-100-STP-CALLS (end of section)
S200I S-200-STP-CURSORS (beginning of section)

Section Description
S200T S-200-STP-CURSORS (end of section)
24. RUNOPTS
A comma-separated list of stored procedure Run Options to be specified in the
CREATE PROCEDURE statement generated for this program definition.

6.15 Update Stored Procedure Environment

Access: To access the stored procedure definition view of this update screen, on the
Create/Update Stored Procedure screen, enter a nonblank character to select the ENV
STORED Field.
You can access a view of this screen also by entering the following on the Batch
Program Definition menu:
■ CR, UP, or SH in the FUNCTION field
■ STORED in the ENVIRON field
Program ID: B268
Function: Specifies the environment data for the stored procedure definition.
HHNNNN.SP UPDATE STORED ENV

COMMAND ==> 1__________________________________________________________________
LANG 2__
RESULTS 3_ ASUTIME 4____ WLMENV 5_________________
COLLID 6_________________ SCHEMA 7_______
PARAMETERS:
EXTSCUR:8_ (2-DB2 U-USER D-DEFINER)
PRMSTYL:9_ (N-GENERAL WITH NULLS G-GENERAL D-DB2SQL J-JAVA)
PROGTYP:1 (M-MAIN S-SUB)
SQLMOD :11 (M-MODIFIES SQL DATA N-NO SQL S-CONTAINS SQL
R-READS SQL DATA)
SELECT ALL THAT APPLY (Y/N):

12_ COMRETN 13_ DBINFO 14_ DETERM
15_ FENCED 16_ NULCALL 17_ STAYRES

Show/Purge screen: You can access the Show/Purge Stored Procedure
Environment (B269) screen from the Batch Definition menu screen by entering:

The Show/Purge Stored Procedure Environment screen fields are the same as the
Update Stored Procedure Environment screen fields.

1. COMMAND
For information, see 9.5, Primary Commands on page 9-13.
2. LANG
The language for the stored procedure (COB or PLI). This is an output-only field.
3. RESULTS
Specifies the maximum number of result sets that the stored procedure can return.
The default is 0, which indicates that there are no result sets.
4. ASUTIME
Specifies the total amount of processor time, in CPU service units, that a single
invocation of a stored procedure can run.
5. WLMENV
Identifies the MVS Workload Manager (WLM) environment in which the stored
procedure is to run when the DB2 stored procedure address space is
WLM-established. The name of the WLM environment is a long identifier.
Note: If a WLM ENVIRONMENT is not specified, the stored procedure runs in
the default WLM-established stored procedure address space specified at in
stallation time.
6. COLLID
Identifies the package collection to be used when the stored procedure is executed.
This is the package collection into which the DBRM that is associated with the
stored procedure is bound.
If COLLID is not specified, the package collection for the stored procedure is the
same as the package collection of the calling program.
7. SCHEMA
Part of the qualified name for of the stored procedure.
The qualified form of stored procedure name is a short SQL identifier (the
SCHEMA name) followed by a period and a long SQL identifier.
8. EXTSCUR
Specifies how the stored procedure interacts with an external security product,
such as RACF, to control access to non-SQL resources.
2 - The stored procedure does not require a special external security
environment. This is the only valid choice when a Workload
Manager environment is not specified (DB2).
U - An external security environment should be established for the
stored procedure. Access is performed using the authorization ID
of the user who invoked the stored procedure (USER).
D - An external security environment should be established for the
stored procedure. Access is performed using the authorization
ID of the stored procedure owner (DEFINER).
9. PRMSTYL
Identifies the linkage convention (parameter style) used to pass parameters to the
stored procedure. All of the linkage conventions provide arguments to the stored

procedure that contain the parameters specified on the CALL statement. Some of
the linkage conventions pass additional arguments to the stored procedure that
provides more information to the stored procedure.
D - (DB2SQL) In addition to the parameters on the CALL statement,
the following arguments are also passed to the stored procedure:
■ a null indicator for each parameter on the CALL statement;
■ the SQLSTATE to be returned to DB2;
■ the qualified name of the stored procedure;
■ the specific name of the stored procedure;
■ the SQL diagnostic string to be returned to DB2; and
■ the DB2INFO structure, if DBINFO is specified.
G - (GENERAL) Only the parameters on the CALL statement are passed
to the stored procedure. The parameters cannot be null.
N - In addition to the parameters on the CALL statement,
another argument is passed to the stored procedure. The
additional argument contains a vector of null indicators for
each of the parameters on the CALL statement that enables the
stored procedure to accept or return null parameter values
(GENERAL WITH NULLS).
J - The stored procedure uses a convention for passing parameters
that conforms to the Java and SQLJ specifications. INOUT and OUT
parameters are passed as single-entry arrays. The DBINFO
structure is not passed (JAVA).
10. PROGTYP
Specifies whether the stored procedure will run as a main routine or a subroutine.
S - The stored procedure will run as a subroutine (SUB).
M - The stored procedure will run as a main routine (MAIN).
11. SQLMOD
Indicates whether or not the stored procedure can execute SQL statements and, if
so, what type it can execute.
N - The stored procedure cannot execute any SQL statements (NO SQL).
M - The stored procedure can execute any SQL statement except
those statements that are not supported in any stored procedure
(MODIFIES SQL DATA).
R - The stored procedure cannot execute SQL statements that modify
data. SQL statements that are not supported in any stored
procedure return a different error (READS SQL DATA).
S - The stored procedure cannot execute any SQL statements that
read or modify data. SQL statements that are not supported in
any stored procedure return a different error (CONTAINS SQL).

12. COMRETN
Indicates whether DB2 commits the transaction immediately on return from the
stored procedure (COMMIT ON RETURN).
N - DB2 does not issue a COMMIT when the stored procedure returns.
Y - DB2 issues a COMMIT when the stored procedure returns if the
following statements are true:
■ The SQLCODE that is returned by the CALL statement is not negative.
■ The stored procedure is not in a must-abort state.
■ The COMMIT operation includes work that is performed by the calling

application process and the stored procedure.
If the stored procedure returns result sets, the cursors that are associated with the
result sets must have been defined as WITH HOLD to be usable after the
COMMIT.
13. DBINFO
Specifies whether specific information known by DB2 is passed to the stored
procedure when it is invoked.
N - Additional information is not passed.
Y - An additional argument is passed to the stored procedure when
it is invoked. This argument is a structure that contains
information such as the application run-time authorization ID,
the schema name, the name of a table or column that the
procedure might be inserting into or updating, and
identification of the database server that invoked the procedure.
14. DETERM
Specifies whether the stored procedure returns the same result from successive
calls with identical input arguments.
Y - The stored procedure returns the same result from
successive calls with identical input arguments (DETERMINISTIC).
N - The stored procedure might not return the same result
from successive calls with identical input arguments
(NOT DETERMINISTIC).
15. FENCED
Specifies whether or not the stored procedure runs in an external address space (to
prevent user programs from corrupting DB2 storage).
Y - The stored procedure will run in an external address
space (FENCED).
N - The stored procedure will not run in an external address
space (NOT FENCED).

16. NULCALL
Determines whether or not the stored procedure will be called even when any of
the input arguments is null, making the procedure responsible for testing for null
argument values.
Y - The stored procedure will be called even when any of the
input arguments is null; the stored procedure is responsible
for testing for null argument values.
N - The stored procedure will not be call when any of the input
arguments is null.
17. STAYRES
Specifies whether the stored procedure load module remains resident in memory
when the stored procedure ends.
Y - The load module remains resident in memory after the stored
procedure ends.
N - The load module is deleted from memory after the stored procedure
ends.

6.16 Update Stored Procedure Parameters

Access: On the Create/Update Stored Procedure screen, enter a non-blank character
in the PARAMETERS field.
Program ID: B2P1
Function: Lists the parameters for the stored procedure.
XXXXXX.SP UPDATE STORED PARAMETERS ______ PARMS

COMMAND ===> 1____________________________________________ SCROLL ===> ___
NAME KND DBNAME TYPE LTH DEC IND
TOP OF DATA
2_____ 3_________________ 4 5________________________ 6 7___ 8____ 9_ 1
______ __________________ _ _________________________ _ ____ _____ __ _
______ __________________ _ _________________________ _ ____ _____ __ _
______ __________________ _ _________________________ _ ____ _____ __ _
______ __________________ _ _________________________ _ ____ _____ __ _
______ __________________ _ _________________________ _ ____ _____ __ _
______ __________________ _ _________________________ _ ____ _____ __ _
______ __________________ _ _________________________ _ ____ _____ __ _
______ __________________ _ _________________________ _ ____ _____ __ _
______ __________________ _ _________________________ _ ____ _____ __ _
______ __________________ _ _________________________ _ ____ _____ __ _
______ __________________ _ _________________________ _ ____ _____ __ _
______ __________________ _ _________________________ _ ____ _____ __ _
______ __________________ _ _________________________ _ ____ _____ __ _
______ __________________ _ _________________________ _ ____ _____ __ _
______ __________________ _ _________________________ _ ____ _____ __ _
______ __________________ _ _________________________ _ ____ _____ __ _
______ __________________ _ _________________________ _ ____ _____ __ _
______ __________________ _ _________________________ _ ____ _____ __ _
BOTTOM OF DATA

1. COMMAND
For more information, see 9.5, “Primary Commands” on page 9-13.
2. (Line command)
A field in which to enter one of these line commands to sequence fields:
■ A—After
■ B—Before
■ C—Copy
■ D—Delete
■ X—Exclude
■ F—Show first excluded line
■ I—Insert
■ L—Show last excluded line
■ M—Move
■ R—Repeat

■ U—Update
For more information, see 9.6, “Line Commands” on page 9-45.
3. NAME
The name of the parameter.
4. KIND
This field describes the direction of the parameter to/from the calling program.
Valid values are:
Value Meaning Description

O OUT Output from stored procedure into calling program
I IN Input into stored procedure from calling program
B INOUT Both Input into and Output from the stored procedure
5. DBNAME
The variable name to or from which the stored procedure parameter is mapped. If
the DBNAME is too long to fit on this screen, then the PF10 key may be used to
toggle to the B2P2 program, which allows DBNAME specifications up to
60-characters in length.
6. EXTENSION (output only)
When the DBNAME is longer than 25 characters, and the B2P2 program has been
used to specify a long DBNAME, then this field is displayed with a plus (+) sign,
and the DBNAME field is protected.
7. TYPE
Specifies the parameter type. These values result in generation of a COBOL or
PL/I declaration, as follows (lth = user-supplied length; dec = user-supplied scale):
Type SQL Type COBOL PL/I

DATE DATE X(10) CHAR(10)
CHAR CHAR,CHARACTER X(lth) X(lth)
DEC DEC, DECIMAL 9(lth)V9(dec) DEC FIXED(lth,dec)
(NUMERIC)
FL FLOAT COMP-2 BIN FLOAT(53)
GR GRAPHIC G(lth/2) GRAPHIC(lth/2)
INT INT, INTEGER S9(9) COMP BIN FIXED(31)
STMP TIMESTAMP X(26) CHAR(26)
NUM NUMERIC (DEC, 9(lth)V9(dec) DEC FIXED(lth,dec)
DECIMAL)

Type SQL Type COBOL PL/I

DBLP DOUBLE, DOUBLE COMP-2 BIN FLOAT(53)
PRECISION
REAL REAL COMP-1 BIN FLOAT(31)
SINT SMALLINT S9(4) COMP BIN FIXED(15)
TIME TIME X(8) CHAR(8)
VCHR VARCHAR, CHAR *X(lth) CHAR(lth)
VARYING
VGR VARGRAPH, *G(lth/2) GRAPHIC(lth/2) VAR
VARGRAPHIC
Note: * includes S9(4) COMP length variable

Valid values include the following:
8. LTH
The length of the stored procedure parameter, which is used to the declaration for
the parm. This field is required for the following parameter types (lth =
user-supplied length; dec = user-supplied scale):
SQL Type COBOL PL/I

CHAR, CHARACTER X(lth) CHAR(lth)
DEC, DECIMAL 9(lth)V9(dec) DEC FIXED(lth,dec)
(NUMERIC)
GRAPHIC G(lth/2) GRAPHIC(lth/2)
NUMERIC (DEC, 9(lth)V9(dec) DEC FIXED(lth,dec)
DECIMAL)
VARCHAR CHAR *X(lth) CHAR(lth)
VARYING
VARGRAPH VARGRAPHIC GRAPHIC(lth/2) VAR
*G(lth/2)
Note:
* includes S9(4) COMP length variable of the parameter.
9. DEC
The scale of the parameter (if applicable). Used only for DECIMAL and
NUMERIC parameters.

10. IND
If the IND value is set to "Y" (yes), a nullable indicator is generated for this
stored procedure parameter, and used as a parameter in the calling sequence for
the stored procedure.

6.17 Stored Procedure Parameter DBNAME Extension
6.17 Stored Procedure Parameter DBNAME Extension

Access: On the Update Stored Procedure Parameters screen, select the PF10 key.
Program ID: B2P2
Function: Allows specification of full 60-byte DBNAME mappings for stored

procedure parameters.
XXXXXX.SP STORED PROC PARM DBNAME EXT

COMMAND ==> 1____________________________________________________ PAGE 1
PARAMETER NAME DBNAME MAPPING

2_________________ 3___________________________________________________________
__________________ ____________________________________________________________
__________________ ____________________________________________________________
__________________ ____________________________________________________________
__________________ ____________________________________________________________
__________________ ____________________________________________________________
__________________ ____________________________________________________________
__________________ ____________________________________________________________
__________________ ____________________________________________________________
__________________ ____________________________________________________________
__________________ ____________________________________________________________
__________________ ____________________________________________________________
__________________ ____________________________________________________________
__________________ ____________________________________________________________
__________________ ____________________________________________________________
__________________ ____________________________________________________________
__________________ ____________________________________________________________
__________________ ____________________________________________________________
__________________ ____________________________________________________________
__________________ ____________________________________________________________

1. COMMAND
2. PARAMETER (output-only)
The name of the stored procedure parameters.
3. DBNAME
The DBNAME which is mapped to the stored procedure parameter. When all
desired mappings have been specified, use PF10 to toggle back to the B2P1
program. The page forward and page backward keys may be used to reposition the
screen, if there are more parameters to be displayed.

Chapter 7. Prototyping Facility
Chapter 7. Prototyping Facility 7-1

7.1 Introduction
7.1 Introduction
This chapter documents the screens of the CA-Telon prototyping facility, a tool for
prototyping panel images (screens) and panel definitions.
The prototyping facility shows the application user how screens actually appear during
system execution and how screens interact with each other during execution.
Requirements: To use the prototyping facility, you must have one or more panel
images, with or without panel definitions.
To simulate application execution, you must:

■ Enter data
■ Edit the data
■ Transfer from screen to screen
You can edit the data by including allowable FLDTYPEs and/or SPECIAL EDITS.
Refer to Target Option for Windows Character Guide for more information about
FLDTYPE and SPECIAL EDITS.
Controlling screen flow: You control flow from screen to screen in one of these
ways:
■ By entering the ID of next program in the COMMAND field
■ By entering a panel ID as the value in one of the following:
– NEXTPGM field of select fields on the Update Select Fields screen
– INPUT or OUTIN fields, when NEXT-PROGRAM-NAME-ID is the
DBNAME
– The NEXTPGM field on the Create/Update Screen Definition screen
Note: CA-Telon does not support multiple prototyping facility sessions (using
HOLD/SWAP). Use of HOLD for multiple prototyping facility sessions can
produce unpredictable results.

7.2 Prototyping Facility Menu

This section discusses how to use the Prototyping Facility menu.
Access: On the TDF Main menu, enter 6 in the FUNCTION field. On other
screens, enter =6 in the COMMAND field.
Program ID: M100
Function: Displays the capabilities and features that you can use to perform panel
prototyping.
PROTOTYPING FACILITY MENU

COMMAND ==> 1_________________________________________________________________
FUNCTION: 2_ VI-VIEW LI-LIST
ITEM: 3_ AP-APPLIC PS-PRESENTATION STORE
START NAME:
HEADER 4____
ID 5____
PS NAME 6_______
7 ENTER DEFAULTS FOR INITIALIZING SCREEN FIELDS:

PRESENTATION: 7a + < 1 > (OUTIN INPUT SELECT OUTPUT CHARACTERS)
7b_ _ _ _ (OUTIFIL OVERRIDE - B=BLANK U=UNDERLINE N=NULL)
7c% (UNDEFINED STORE CHARACTER)
7dY (CONVERT INPUT TO UPPER CASE - Y/N)
7e2 (PROTOTYPE LEVEL - 1-WITHOUT DATA, 2-WITH DATA)
7dY (FIELD EDIT AND FLOW EXECUTION - Y/N)
8 COMMAND POS: 8a __ ___ (ROW - COLUMN OR

8b ________ NAME OF FIELD)
8c N INTENSITY (N-NORMAL,B-BLANK,H-HIGH)

1. COMMAND
2. FUNCTION
The function performed. Valid values are:
VI
View an application or presentation store
LI
List application panels or presentation stores
3. ITEM
The item on which the specified function is performed.
This table presents valid ITEM values and the result, depending on the
FUNCTION value:

FUNCTION ITEM Result

VI AP Begin an application scenario.
PS View a presentation store.
LI AP List application panels by header.
PS List existing presentation stores.
4. HEADER
(Valid when the ITEM value is AP.) A one- to five-character prefix for a series
of screens.
This table explains what the header identifies, depending on the FUNCTION field
value:
FUNCTION What the Header Identifies

VI The application for which panels are viewed in the prototyping
scenario
LI The application for which screens are listed
Note: If you enter LI in the FUNCTION field and AP in the ITEM field, you
must enter a HEADER value. If you do not, CA-Telon displays an error
message. Determine the appropriate header for your application before
proceeding.
5. ID
(Valid when the ITEM value is AP.) A one- to five-character unique identifier for
a screen in the series represented by the HEADER value.
This table explains what the ID value identifies, depending on the FUNCTION
field value:
FUNCTION What the ID Value Identifies

VI The screen with which the TDF is to begin the prototyping scenario
LI The starting point for which panels are listed
If you do not enter a value here, a screen listing application panels starting with
the lowest ID value of existing applications is displayed.
6. PS NAME
A one- to eight-character presentation store name for the prototyping facility to
use with the scenario. This field is required only if you are using prototyping
with mapping and a panel definition exists for the scenario.
A presentation stores represents sample data and is not necessarily tied to a
specific panel or a specific application HEADER; therefore, CA-Telon does not

force a naming convention for presentation stores. However, recommended

naming conventions are:
■ Begin the name of a presentation store related to a single panel with the
concatenation of the HEADER and ID values for the panel
■ Begin the name of a presentation store related to a single application header
with the application header
■ Begin presentation stores that are versions of the same kind of data with a
common prefix
7. PRESENTATION
Defaults for the prototyping facility session:
7
Enter the characters displayed on the screen for outin, input, select, and output
fields, respectively. See 2.9, “Update Session Controls” on page 2-30 for
CA-Telon defaults.
Literals are automatically displayed.
7a
Enter the character used to fill the outin, input, select, and output fields,
respectively, on the application.
B
Blank; fields are filled with spaces
N
Null; fields are filled with low values
U
Underline; fields are filled with underscores
7c
Enter the undefined store character. CA-Telon uses this character to fill an
outin or output field when there is no DBNAME data value to display in the
active presentation store.
If you change the undefined store character, the original undefined store
character is used for fields defined before the change and the new character is
used for fields defined after the change.
7d
Character conversion specification. Valid values are:
Y
Lower characters are converted to upper case characters during the
prototyping session
N
No character conversion occurs
This allows you to control how values entered are mapped to subsequent
panels in the scenario.
7e
The level of information used to build the panel scenario. Valid values are:

1
Only panel image information is used to build and display the panels,
with the following results:
■ No editing takes place
■ Since no mapping can occur, the prototyping facility does not modify
your active presentation store
■ The undefined store character does not appear
■ SEGLOOP screens show all occurrences of the SEGLOOP
■ You may use the exclamation point (!) character to access the field
update screens
2
(Default) Panel definition information is used to build the panels, with the
following results:
■ Editing takes place
■ Since mapping can occur, the prototyping facility modifies your
active presentation store
■ The undefined store character appears
■ You may use the exclamation point (!) character to access the field
update screens
7f
Method of editing and flow control. Valid values are:
Y
All editing and flow control methods documented in data administration
are available.
N
Field editing is turned off. All flow control must be handled by the
entries made in the COMMAND field or by .COMMAND-INIT/.
COMMAND-FLOW DBNAMES in the presentation store.
Refer to Target Option for Windows Character Guide for information
about these entries.
8. COMMAND POS
The position of the command field and the intensity of its display:
8a
Two fields specifying, respectively, the row and column position at which to
begin the COMMAND field. The COMMAND field allows you to enter
commands when you are prototyping. The default location is the lower-right
corner of the View Panel Definition screen.
8b
A panel field name from the existing panel definition (for example,
ERRMSG1). The panel field name specifies where to place the COMMAND
field and overrides a row and column position specified in the line above.
8c
The intensity of the COMMAND field display:
B
The field is invisible to the viewer but still accessible to enter commands

H
High intensity using the outin character selected
N
(Default) Normal intensity using the outin character selected enter
commands


Access: On the Prototyping Facility menu, enter:
■ AP in the ID field
Program ID: M401
Function: Lists application definition IDs by panel image or panel definition

(PI/PD) name and allows you to view and/or maintain a panel.
Note: If a panel definition exists for a panel image, this screen lists only the panel
definition.
LIST PANEL DEFINITIONS

COMMAND ==> 1_____________________________________________________ PAGE 1
PI/PD PR STORE/
2 XXXXXX.PD PANEL DEFINITION FOR DOCUMENTATION MANRI2 5193
YYYYYY.PD PANEL DEFINITION FOR MODELING TEST MANRI2 5193
ZZZZZZ.PD PANEL DEFINITION FOR MODELING TEST MANRI2 5193
3 4 5 6 7

1. COMMAND
Note: You can specify the starting point of the list by entering L entity-name. If
entity-name is found, the list begins with entity-name. If entity-name is not found,
the list begins with the name of the member that follows entity-name in
alphabetical order.
2. (Line command)
A field preceding each listed definition in which you can enter one of the
commands documented in this table:

Command Function Description

D Description Changes the description of the ID. Enter the new
description in the DESCRIPTION field. When you
press [Enter], the screen is redisplayed with the new
description and, in the RENAME field, a
confirmation message:
DESC UP
P Purge Purges the ID with confirmation. When you press
[Enter], control passes to the Line Edit screen.
CA-Telon displays this message: ENTER 'PURGE'
or 'PPPP' to delete member. Enter PURGE on the
COMMAND line or, to cancel the purge and return
the List Panel Definitions screen, enter CANCEL.
Confirmation message:
PURGED.
If you purge a panel definition, you must zap or
purge the panel image separately. To list the panel
image after returning to the List Panel Definitions
screen, press [Enter].
R Rename Renames the ID. Enter the new name in the
RENAME field. When you press [Enter], the screen
is redisplayed with the new name and, in the
RENAME field, a confirmation message:
RENAMED.
S Show Shows the panel image for the ID.
When you press [Enter], the screen is redisplayed in
browse mode.
U Update Updates the panel image or panel definition of the
ID.
When you press [Enter], the next screen is displayed
in edit mode. If you request an update of a panel
image, the next screen is the Edit Panel Image
screen. If you request an update of a panel
definition, the next screen is the Update Panel Fields
(Online) screen.
PNL SAVED.


V View Displays the specified ID. When you press [Enter],
the next screen displayed is in edit mode. You enter
the name of the presentation store in the RENAME
field to begin a scenario.
PNL VIEWED.
Z Zap Purges the ID without confirming the purge.
If the panel definition is zapped, the panel image
must also be zapped or purged separately.
C Copy Copies the ID.
You must also make an entry in the DESCRIPTION
field. When you press [Enter], the screen is
redisplayed with this confirmation message in the
RENAME field:
COPIED
3. PI/PD NAME
Protected field displaying the name of a panel definition or panel image.
4. PR STORE/ RENAME
A field whose value is used depending on the line command entered for the
listing:
Line Command PR STORE/RENAME Value

V The name of the presentation store used in the scenario. If the
presentation store is to supply the panel with data, enter the
value that is entered in the PS NAME field.
R The new ID for the renamed definition. CA-Telon adds .PI or
.PD as appropriate to the value you enter and also displays
confirmation message in this field.
C The ID assigned to the copied definition. CA-Telon adds .PI or
.PD as appropriate to the value you enter and also displays
confirmation message in this field.
5. DESCRIPTION
A 1- to 39-character description of the panel image or panel definition.
To change the displayed description of the panel, enter D in the line command
field and enter a new description in this field.
6. USER
Protected field displaying the ID of the user that last updated the definition.

7. UPDATE
Protected field displaying, in mmddyy format, the date the definition was last
updated.

7.4 List Presentation Stores

■ PS in the ITEM field
■ Presentation-store in the PS NAME field (optional)
Program ID: M200
Function: Lists presentation stores by presentation store name and allows you to
maintain and edit them.
LIST PRESENTATION STORES LIST AT END OF HEADER REQUESTED

COMMAND ==> 1_____________________________________________________ PAGE 1

2 XXPSTR1 ACTIVE PANEL AT CREATION WAS TRCC2K.SD MANRI2 4153
3 4 5 6 7

1. COMMAND
2. (Line command)
A field preceding each listed presentation store in which you can enter one of the
commands documented in this table:

D Description Changes the description of the presentation store.
Enter the new description in the DESCRIPTION field.
When you press [Enter], the screen is redisplayed with
the new description and, in the RENAME field, a
confirmation message:
DESC UP


P Purge Purges the presentation store. When you press [Enter],
control passes to the presentation store editor.
CA-Telon displays this message: ENTER 'PURGE' or
'PPPP' to delete member. Enter PURGE on the
COMMAND line or, to cancel the purge and return the
List Panel Definitions screen, enter CANCEL.
PURGED.
R Rename Renames the presentation store. Enter the new name
in the RENAME field. When you press [Enter], the
screen is redisplayed with the new name and, in the
RENAME field, a confirmation message:
RENAMED.
S Show Shows the presentation store via the presentation store
editor.
When you press [Enter], the screen is redisplayed in
browse mode.
U Update Updates the presentation store.
When you press [Enter], the next screen is displayed in
edit mode.
PS SAVED.
V View Same as Update.
PS VIEWED.
Z Zap Purges the presentation store without confirming the
purge.
C Copy Copies the presentation store.
You may make an entry in the DESCRIPTION field or
accept the base description, which you can modify
later, if necessary. When you press [Enter], the screen
is redisplayed with this confirmation message in the
RENAME field:
COPIED
3. NAME
Protected field displaying the name of a presentation store.

4. RENAME
The name for the presentation store to be renamed (line command R) or copied
(line command C). CA-Telon also uses this field to display confirmation
messages as presented in this table:
Line Description Confirmation

Command Message
D Changes the description of a presentation store *DESC UP
P Purges a presentation store and confirms the delete *PURGED
R Renames a presentation store *RENAMED
S Shows a presentation store None
U Updates a presentation store *PS SAVE
V Updates a presentation store *PS SAVE
Z Purges a presentation store without confirming the None
delete
C Copies a presentation store *COPIED
5. DESCRIPTION
A one- to 39-character description of the presentation store. A value is required if
line command D or C is entered for this presentation store. The initial value is
the ID of the panel for which the presentation store was created.
6. USER
Protected field displaying the ID of the user that last updated the presentation
store.
7. UPDATE
Protected field displaying, in MMDDYY format, the date that the presentation
store was last updated.

7.5 View Presentation Store

■ VI in the FUNCTION field
■ PS in the ID field
■ Presentation-store or blank (for the active presentation store) in the PS NAME
field
You can also access this screen in one of these ways:

■ On the View Panel Definition screen, enter .VPS in the command field (accesses
the active presentation store only)
■ On the List Presentation Stores screen, enter U or V as a line command for a
specific presentation store
Program ID: M151
Function: Allows you to edit an active presentation store, a presentation store saved
previously, or a newly created presentation store.
EDIT ──── XXPSTR1 STORE 1 OF 1 SIZE 3 COL 1

COMMAND ==> 1 SCROLL ===> PAGE
2 3 4 5 6
VALUE DBNAME SUB LTH
TOP OF DATA
1 RANDOM DATA VALUES TEST-FIELD-1 1 3
2 99 TEST-NUMERICS 1 2
3 X TEST-ALPHA 1 1

Adding a field: You can add a new field to the presentation store on this screen in
one of these ways:
■ On an empty line, enter VALUE and DBNAME values
■ Enter I as a line command to insert. When inserting:
– Enter the correct LTH value, if necessary (default is 30)
– Enter the correct SUB value, if necessary (default is 1)

A presentation store may contain a maximum of 1000 named fields.

1. COMMAND
Note: You can enter EDIT presentation-store to edit multiple presentation stores
concurrently or to add a new store to the editing session.
Specify backward and forward paging in the COMMAND field to view multiple
stores. If the presentation stores you are editing are small, you can display and
edit them on the same screen. For editing, they are displayed as one entity,
allowing you to copy variables across stores with line copy commands and change
data in multiple stores with one CHANGE command.
When the edit session is complete, you can treat each store separately with
commands such as END presentation-store and CANCEL presentation-store, or
treat them as a group with commands such as END ALL and CANCEL ALL.
2. (Line command)
A field in which you can enter standard line commands. See 9.6, “Line
Commands” on page 9-45 for more information.
3. VALUE
A value supplied for a data field in the presentation store. You can modify,
delete, or add values:
■ To modify a value, type the new value over the old and press [Enter]
■ To delete a value, enter D on the line and press [Enter]
■ To add a value, type it in this field and press [Enter]
If the length of a field is greater than the number of characters that can be keyed
into the VALUE field, you can continue the VALUE entry into the next line by
pressing [Enter] without entering DBNAME and LTH values.
4. DBNAME
The name of the field. Modifying this value does not change the DBNAME value
on the panel definition.
When you enter a new DBNAME on a line with an existing value, CA-Telon adds
the new variable to the presentation store and maintains the specified VALUE.
These DBNAME values have special meaning to the prototyping facility. Only
one of each may exist in a given presentation store:
■ .COMMAND-FLOW — Permits you to transfer control to another application
panel when that panel ID is in the corresponding VALUE field.
.COMMAND-FLOW is executed only upon detection of a ..MRG or .LOD
command in the COMMAND field.
Note: .LOD or ..MRG — can either be keyed into the COMMAND field or
exist in the loaded or merged presentation store with
.COMMAND-INIT as a DBNAME.
■ .COMMAND-INIT — Permits you to issue .LOD, .SAV, etc. when the
appropriate COMMAND field is in the corresponding VALUE field.

5. SUB
The subscript number of variables in an array. Subscripted variables are used in
displaying multiple entries on a list screen or with non-list screens when the .
SUB command has been used to set a subscript value. The default value for
subscripts is 1 because unsubscripted variables are considered the same as
subscripted variables with a subscript of 1.
Note: If multiple occurrences of a DBNAME do have the same subscript, the
presentation store editor discards all but the last occurrence of the
DBNAME.
6. LTH
The length of the value established in the panel definition. You can modify it
here without changing the panel definition.

7.6 View Panel Definition

■ VI in the FUNCTION field
■ AP in the ID field
You can also access this screen from the List Panel Definitions screen by entering V
as a line command for the listing of the definition.
Program ID: M120
Function: Displays the application scenario. You can enter data in the prototype for
demonstration purposes. You can control the flow of the scenario, access the panel
image and panel definition (if one exists), and execute other commands in the
command field.
%%%%%%%% T E L O N S A M P L E S O L U T I O N

EMPLOYEE %%%%%%
EMPLOYEE ID %%%%%%
1. NAME %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
2. STREET %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
3. CITY %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
4. STATE %%
5. ZIP %%%%%%
6. PHONE %%%%%%%%%%%%
7. SEX %
8. DATE OF BIRTH %%%%%%%%
9. DEPARTMENT %%%%
1. DATE OF EMPLOYMENT %%%%%%%%
11. HOURLY RATE %%%%%%
12. HOURS PER WEEK %%%%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
PFKEYS: 2-HOLD 3-END 4-ENDHOLD 5-CANCEL 6-MENU 1____________

1. (Command field)
The field for entry of commands for:
■ Screen flow control
■ Prototyping commands
■ TDF commands
The default position is the lower right corner of the screen.

Screen flow control: To transfer control from one panel to the next panel, identify
the panel to receive control:
■ When a panel is in the series represented by the current panel's header, enter the
ID of the panel to be displayed next
■ To call a panel under a different header, enter both the concatenation of the header
and ID of the panel to be displayed next
For example, the header of the panel you are viewing is AB and the ID is 0001. To
view panel AB0002, enter 0002 in the command field. To view panel 0001 in the DE
series, enter DE0001 in the command field.
Note: For panels having a panel definition that contains outin or input fields, press
[Enter]. Data from the current screen is edited (if specified) and mapped to the
active presentation store. To transfer to another panel without editing data or
mapping to the active presentation store, prefix the panel ID with a greater
than sign (>) (for example, >0001).
Prototyping commands: This table presents commands you can use to control a
prototyping session.
Command Action
.CLR Clears variable names and data from the active
presentation store.
.CV Clears values in the active presentation store, but does
not clear the DBNAMEs.
.LOD presentation-store Loads presentation-store and makes it the active
presentation store. Data values in the prior active
presentation store are lost.
. .MRG presentation-store Merges the presentation store name into the active
presentation store. Replaces data values of similar
DBNAMEs. Adds DBNAMEs and values.
.SAV presentation-store Saves the active presentation store in presentation-store.
If presentation-store already exists, it is overlaid. This
operation does not affect values in the active
presentation store.

Command Action
.SUB subscript Sets the subscript for any array variables when used by
non-list screens. The subscript is not used or affected by
list screens. For non-list screens that use variables from
an array, the .SUB command identifies which occurrence
of the array is used. The subscript number entered stays
in effect until a new .SUB command is entered.
For example, if you enter .SUB 1, the subscript is
cleared. Non-subscripted variables operate as if they are
subscripted with (1). For example, if you enter .SUB 3,
the third occurrence of any array variables is used for all
panels executed until the next .SUB command.
.UPI Transfer control to the Edit Panel Image screen. When
you press the END PF key, control returns to the
application scenario from which you entered the .UPI
command.
.UPD Transfer control to the Update Panel Fields (Online)
screen. When you press [End], control returns to the
application scenario from which you entered the .UPD
command.
.VPS Transfer control to the presentation store editor to edit
the active presentation store. From there, you can
update, delete, or add any variable to the active
presentation store. When you press the END PF key,
control returns to the application scenario from which
you entered the .VPS command.
Note: The active presentation store is not permanently
saved when you press [End]. Only the .SAV
presentation-store command saves the active
presentation store to a new presentation-store or replace
an existing ps-name.
Note: All commands begin with a period.
TDF commands: This table presents the general TDF commands that are valid in
the command field and are useful in a prototyping session.
Command Action
/END End prototyping facility execution and return to the Prototyping
Facility menu
/MENU Transfer control to the TDF Main menu
/HOLD Hold execution and transfer to the TDF Main menu

Command Action
/SWAP Swap to another function executing concurrently through use of the
HOLD command
/HELP Request help for use of the prototyping facility function
/=n End prototyping facility execution and transfer to TDF option n
Note: These commands must begin with a forward slash.

Chapter 8. Utility Functions
Chapter 8. Utility Functions 8-1

8.1 Introduction
8.1 Introduction
With the CA-Telon Design Facility (TDF) Utilities option you can copy, rename, list,
print, and export these items created with the TDF:
■ Panel image
■ Screen definition
■ Report definition
■ Driver definition
■ Nonterminal definition
■ Batch definition

8.2 Utilities Menu
8.2 Utilities Menu

Access: On the TDF Main menu, enter U in the FUNCTION field.
Program ID: U100
Function: Allows you to perform the following for each type of item:
■ Create a copy of an item
■ Rename an item
■ List specific items and allow you to update, modify, or remove selected items
■ Print the panel image (not available to TDF under CICS)
■ Export a screen, report, driver, nonterminal, or batch definition into a CA-Telon
source code listing
UTILITIES MENU

COMMAND ==> 1___________________________________________________________________
FUNCTION: 2_ CO-COPY RE-RENAME LI-LIST PR-PRINT

XP-EXPORT XR-EXPORT/REPLACE LH-LIST HEADERS
MEMBER NAME:
HEADER 3_____
ID 4_____ TYPE 5__
DESC 6_______________________________________
(COPY/RENAME) TO HEADER 7_____

ID 8_____ __
FORMATTING CONTROL: COMPRESSED 9__ (YES/NO)

ENVIRONMENT 1_ (C-CICS/I-IMS/T-TSO/B-BATCH/R-STORED
A-AS4/U-UNIX/W-WINCH/S-CLIENT)
ENV FORMAT 11_ (YES/NO) (CICS:CICSBMS IMS:IMSMFS
ENV PSB 12_ (YES/NO) (CICS:DLIPSB IMS:IMSPSB
BATCH:DLIPSB)
PRINT CONTROL: LINENUM 13_ (YES/NO)
DBLSPC 14_ (YES/NO)
SHIFT 15_ (YES/NO)
USECOL1 16_ (YES/NO)

1. COMMAND
2. FUNCTION
The utility function to perform. Valid values are:
CO
Copy the named member to the indicated header and ID. All lower levels are
copied.
RE
Rename the named member to indicated header and ID. All lower levels are
renamed.

8.2 Utilities Menu
LI
List members beginning with the member identified in the HEADER field
(and, optionally, the ID field).
The list starts at the HEADER and ID you specify and continues to the end of
the existing entities. It includes all panel images, panel definitions, screen
definitions, driver definitions, and report definitions.
PR
Print a hard copy of the panel image identified by the HEADER and ID field
values.
XP
Export the program definition identified by the HEADER and ID values.
This creates a CA-Telon source code listing of the named member that
includes any custom code that is part of the program definition. The listing is
stored in a partitioned data set (PDS). All lower levels are exported.
XR
The same function as XP except that it replaces an existing export stored in
the PDS with a new export.
LH
List all headers currently in use in the TDF.
3. HEADER
A required field in which you enter the one- to five-character name prefixed to a
series of programs in the same application. Its length is determined at installation.
4. ID
The one- to five-character name used to identify a particular program within a
header group.
5. TYPE
The type of item type to work with. Valid values are:
BD
Batch definition
DR
Driver definition
PD
Panel definition
PI
Panel Image
ND
Nonterminal definition
RD
Report definition
SD
(Default) Screen definition
SP
6. DESC
The description that has been defined for the header and ID that identifies the
member, for informational purposes only.

8.2 Utilities Menu
7. TO HEADER
The new header for the item being copied (FUNCTION is CO) or renamed
(FUNCTION is RE).
8. (TO) ID
The new ID for the item being copied (FUNCTION is CO) or renamed
(FUNCTION is RE).
9. COMPRESSED
The format of an exported member. Valid values are:
Y
Compress the format. Place as many fields as possible on each line.
N
(Default) Do not compress the format. Place only one field per line (this
improves readability).
10. ENVIRONMENT
The environment in which the exported program will run after generation into a
COBOL or PL/I program. Valid values are:
A
AS/400
B
BATCH
C
CICS
W
WINCH
I
IMS
S
CICS
T
TSO
U
UNIX
Note: ( Valid on PWS or on OS/390 if the corresponding target option is
installed.)
11. ENV FORMAT (CICS and IMS Only)
A value to specify whether the CA-Telon Generator is to create IMS MFS control
blocks or a CICS BMS map. Valid values for CICS are:
Y
Create a BMS map during generation of the program.
N
(Default) Do not create a BMS map. Use CA-Telon's own terminal mapping
facility (this is the recommended option when using 3270 type terminals).
Valid values for IMS are:

8.2 Utilities Menu
Y
Create IMS MFS control blocks during program generation. This creates the
DIF/DOF, MID, and MOD control blocks. They are named according to
conventions established at CA-Telon installation.
N
(Default) Do not create IMS MFS control blocks.
12. ENV PSB (CICS and IMS Only)
A value to specify whether the CA-Telon Generator is to create a PSB for the
Y
Create a PSB for the program. It is named according to conventions
established at CA-Telon installation.
N
(Default) Do not create a PSB.
13. LINENUM (Panel image only)
A value to specify whether each panel image line should be numbered. The line
numbers appear at each end of the print line and are separated from the panel
image by asterisks. Valid values are:
Y
Print with line numbers
N
Do not print with line numbers
When the value is Y, JUXPRT prints in this format:
1 TRAINING SYSTEM 1
2 MENU 2
3 3
14. DBLSPC (Panel image only)
A value to specify whether the numbered lines are printed double-spaced. A value
here is meaningful only if the LINENUM value is Y. Valid values are:
Y
Double-space the printed lines (that is, insert a blank line, bordered by
asterisks after each panel image line except the last)
N
Do not double-space the printed lines of the panel image
When the DBLSPC is Y and the LINENUM is Y, JUXPRT prints in this format:

1 TRAINING SYSTEM 1

2 MENU 2

3 3
15. SHIFT (Panel image only)
A value to specify whether to print column 1 of the panel image. A value here is
meaningful only if the LINENUM value is N. Valid values are:

8.2 Utilities Menu
Y
Print column 1 characters of the panel image in column 2 of the output line
N
Print column 1 characters of the panel image in column 1 of the output line
You can use this option for batch output in which column 1 contains values other
than attribute bytes and carriage control characters.
16. USECOL1 (Panel image only)
A value to specify, in conjunction with the value in the SHIFT field, whether to
ignore screen control characters in column 1. Valid values are:
Y
Print any characters found in column 1; do not treat them as control
characters
N
Set column 1 output to a space

8.3 List Headers
8.3 List Headers

Access: On the Utilities menu, enter LH in the FUNCTION field.
Program ID: F144
Function: Allows you to list the application header in use in the TDF.
LIST APPLICATION HEADERS

COMMAND ==> 1_____________________________________________________ PAGE __
U HDR U HDR U HDR U HDR U HDR U HDR

2 TR 2 2 2 2 2

1. COMMAND
For information, refer to 9.5, “Primary Commands” on page 9-13.
2. (Function)
A column position to the left of the HEADER field in which you can enter any
non-blank character to list all the IDs with that HEADER.
Note: Only one header may be selected at a time.

Chapter 9. Editors and Commands
Chapter 9. Editors and Commands 9-1

9.1 Introduction
9.1 Introduction
About this chapter: This chapter documents the TDF editing functions and valid
TDF commands.
Editors: The CA-Telon editors are:

■ The panel editor, which can operate in one of these modes:
– Full screen edit mode
– Line edit mode
■ The custom code editor
■ The presentation store editor
Commands: CA-Telon commands are in two categories:

■ Primary commands, which can be entered in the COMMAND field of a TDF
screen
■ Line commands, which can be entered in line command fields that appear on some
TDF screens

9.2 The Panel Editor

About the panel editor: The panel editor is a tool that you use to create, modify,
browse, and purge panel image and panel definition data in the TDF.
Panel editor editing modes: The panel editor may be used in either of two
modes:
■ Full screen edit mode — Presents the full panel image; you invoke edit
commands by pressing PF keys
■ Line edit mode — Presents the panel with the TDF COMMAND field at the top
and line numbers at the left; you invoke edit commands by entering primary
commands in the COMMAND field, line commands in the line command fields,
or by pressing PF keys.
See 9.5, “Primary Commands” on page 9-13 and 9.6, “Line Commands” on page 9-45
for information about edit commands.
9.2.1 Invoking the Edit Mode

Full screen edit: You can invoke full screen edit mode in any of these ways:
■ For a new panel, on the Panel Definition menu, enter CR (create) in the
FUNCTION field or PI (panel image) in the ITEM field
■ For an existing panel, on the Panel Definition menu you can:
– Enter UP (update) in the FUNCTION field or PI (panel image) in the ITEM
field
– Enter LI (list items) in the ITEM field and, on the resulting screen, enter U
(update) as a line command for a listed item
■ When in line edit mode, enter LINE EDIT or LINE OUT (primary commands)
Line edit mode: You can invoke line edit mode in any of these ways:
■ On the Panel Definition menu, enter CR (create) or UP (update) in the
FUNCTION field and PD (panel data) in the ITEM field, and on the resulting
screen enter LINE EDIT (primary command)
■ On the Panel Definition menu, enter LI (list items) in the FUNCTION field and
PD (panel definition) in the ITEM field, and on the resulting screen enter LINE
EDIT (primary command)
■ When in full screen mode, enter LINE EDIT or LINE OUT (primary commands)

9.2.2 General Rules for Updating Fields

About panel fields: All panel fields consist of two components:
■ An attribute — A one-byte field that precedes the painted image. CA-Telon uses
the attribute to store display information about the field.
■ The painted image — The value you entered or the value that the panel editor
generates.
Sets of rules: Panel editing follows a set of general field update rules and a set of
specific rules depending on the type of field:
■ Variable field
■ Literal field
■ Field with panel data
■ Wrapped variable field
■ Wrapped literal field
■ Long literal field
General rules:
■ Fields cannot overlap.
■ A field cannot start in line 1, column 1 of a panel
■ If a field starts in column 1, the attribute byte for the field is at the end of the
previous line
■ You can associate panel data with a field, using the Update Panel Fields (Online)
screen or the Update Panel Fields (Batch) screen
Note: In the panel editor, panel lines that contain fields with panel data (PD)
information have special highlighting, protection, and update rules
associated with them. These rules attempt to minimize the unintentional
loss of user-entered data during the editing session.
■ Update rules are applied line by line and are invoked based on the entire contents
of the line, not just the contents being displayed
Rule violation: If an update rule is violated, CA-Telon:

■ Highlights the invalid line and places the cursor there
■ Issues the message REQUESTED UPDATES NOT ALLOWED
You can correct the update to the line, or you can use the RESET line command to
cancel the update and redisplay the line.
Note: If you enter the RESET primary command, CA-Telon cancels all updates on
the screen and redisplays the screen as it was before updates.

Transposing fields: To transpose fields on a line:

1. Use the FIELD SPLIT command to split the line such that there is a new line for
each field contained on the original line
2. Use the MOVE and OVER line commands to resequence the fields on the original
line
9.2.3 Rules for Variable Fields

You designate a variable field by making the first character the image character that
represents the usage of the field (input, output, outin, or select). See 2.9, “Update
Session Controls” on page 2-30 for more information about image characters.
If you specify a number following the image character, that number is the field length.
After you press [Enter], the variable field is redisplayed as a number of image
characters equal to the specified length minus one (for the attribute byte), provided
there are no other fields already defined in the range which the requested length spans.
If the specified length would extend the field beyond the column size of the panel (that
is, beyond the rightmost column of the panel), CA-Telon truncates the length so that
the field ends in the last column of the panel.
If you enter only the image character, CA-Telon determines the length of the field by
locating the next space that follows the last character of the variable. CA-Telon
converts all intervening characters to the image character.
9.2.4 Rules for Literal Fields

A literal is a field that does not begin with a variable character. A literal field ends in
one of these ways:
■ One or more spaces followed by a variable character (field)
■ Three or more spaces until the next literal character
■ A literal break character
9.2.5 Rules for Fields with Panel Data

A field with panel data is a field for which specifications exist in the panel definition
(that is, a field whose definition consists of more than an attribute byte and a painted
image).
In full screen edit mode:

■ Lines containing fields with panel data are highlighted
■ If a line contains more than one field, the entire line is protected
■ You can use the PD command to unprotect the lines that are protected
■ If the screen contains a single field, then it is unprotected and you can update it

In line edit mode:

■ The same rules stated above for full screen edit mode apply.
■ Lines containing fields with panel data also display special messages in the line
number field instead of a number. The possible messages and their meanings are:
– ==PD=> — Single field with panel data
– =PROT=> — A protected line with two or more fields displayed, at least one
having panel data
– =PD==> — An unprotected line with multiple fields
– ++PD+> — A line containing fields with panel data that are not displayed
You can use the PD command to redisplay line numbers.
Note: On color terminals, the color of protected lines is different from PD lines.
Non-PD lines are displayed in the normal color.
Single fields and multiple fields: Panel update rules differ depending on whether
the screen contains a single field or multiple fields.
You can make single fields longer or shorter or move them to any position on the line.
If the field is a variable, you can change it to another type of variable by altering the
field's first character.
If two or more fields are displayed, you can perform any one of these operations to
update all displayed variables:
■ Shift fields to the right or left by changing the starting column positions of the
fields.
■ Lengthen or shorten the field by adding characters to or deleting them from the
right side. All variable types and starting positions must remain the same. Any
character can be used to lengthen a field since it is converted into the variable's
paint character.
■ Change variables to another type by changing the first character. All starting
positions and lengths must remain the same.
■ Add or delete variables.
Note: To do these operations, fields with panel data must be unprotected. Use the
PD primary command if necessary.
Adding and erasing fields: You add new fields by painting a new variable. You
can delete fields by erasing their painted image. You cannot perform other changes to
the other displayed variable fields when adding or erasing.
Literal fields with panel data: You can add, change, or delete a literal field with
panel data. If the field does not change position and length, the panel data remains the
same. If these changes do occur, CA-Telon assigns the panel data only to fields
whose starting positions do not change.

9.2.6 Rules for Wrapped Variable Fields

A wrapped variable field is a variable field that spans more than one line. A wrapped
variable field consists of three components:
■ A one-byte head
■ A middle section
■ A one-byte tail
There are special update rules associated with each section of a wrapped variable field.
To define a wrapped variable, enter the image character that represents the use of the
field (input, output, outin, or select) followed by a number that specifies the length of
the field. Then enter W to end the wrapped variable. For example, a complete entry
might be +100W.
CA-Telon creates the field with the specified length, provided that the field does not
overlap an existing field on the initial line.
Note: If the field does not span a line, CA-Telon creates a regular field.
Edit mode considerations: In full screen edit mode, wrapped fields are treated as
if they have panel data.
In line edit mode, displays messages in place of line numbers of unprotected fields.
The possible messages and their meanings are:
■ ==WF=> — A wrapped variable field with no panel data
■ =WPD=> — A wrapped variable field with panel data
■ ++WF+> — An undisplayed wrapped variable field with no panel data
■ +WPD+> — An undisplayed wrapped variable field with panel data
Update rules
■ CA-Telon ignores updates to the middle of a wrapped variable field.
■ You can update the head or tail when the wrapped variable field is the only field
on the line.
■ If there is more than one field on the line, the line is unconditionally protected
regardless of the protection status specified with the PD command).
■ If the head is deleted, the entire wrapped variable field is deleted, except the blank
lines that the middle and tail use.
■ You can change to another type of wrapped variable by changing the first
character of the head.
■ You can change the length of a wrapped variable field only from the tail.
CA-Telon ignores length changes to the head. If you change the starting position
of the head, CA-Telon moves the entire field (this causes the tail to move).

■ If the tail is deleted, it decreases the length of the field by the tail's originally
displayed length. If the tail no longer starts in column 1 of the screen, the same
thing happens.
■ You change the length of the field by adding or deleting characters from the right
side of the tail.
■ The maximum field size is 240 bytes. If the field's length exceeds the maximum,
CA-Telon automatically truncates the field and displays a warning message.
■ If you increase the panel size (columns) and a wrapped variable field can now fit
on one line, CA-Telon automatically unwraps the field.
9.2.7 Rules for Wrapped Literal Fields

Wrapped literal fields are literal fields that span more than one line. The maximum
length allowed for a wrapped literal field is 240 bytes. No special update rules are
associated with updating wrapped literal fields.
Exceeding maximum field length: If you create a wrapped literal that exceeds
the maximum 240 bytes, END and SAVE command processing:
■ Issues a warning message
■ Breaks the field into two (or more) literals
■ Every 240th byte of the original literal is lost because it becomes the attribute byte
for the next literal field created by CA-Telon as part of this processing
Wrapped literals with panel data: Since wrapped literals are physically contained
on two or more lines, each segment of the wrapped literal can have different panel
data associated with it. However, during END or SAVE command processing,
CA-Telon uses only the first segment with panel data. If this condition is detected
before END or SAVE command processing is initiated, CA-Telon issues a warning
message.
9.2.8 Rules for Long Literal Fields

A long literal field is a literal field that contains more than three spaces. For example,
this literal contains six spaces:
PROJECTED UNITS IN STOCK - 3 DAYS:
Long literal fields are created on the Update Panel Fields (Online) screen or the
Update Panel Fields (Batch) screen.
In full screen edit mode, lines containing long literals are highlighted. If the line
contains more than one field, the line is unconditionally protected; if the long literal is
the only field on the line, updates are allowed.
In line edit mode, messages are displayed in the line number field. The possible
messages and their meanings are:

■ =WPD=> — A long literal field (displayed)

■ +WPD+> — A long literal field (not displayed)
Update rules: By definition, long literals have panel data associated with them and
invoke special update rules:
■ Variables cannot be added to a line containing a long literal.
■ By default, all literals entered on a line are assumed to be part of a long literal.
To place more than one literal on a line, use MOVE or COPY with OVER to
move or copy a literal from another line.
Wrapped long literals: CA-Telon supports wrapped long literals. However, if you
create a long literal on the Update Panel Fields (Online) screen or Update Panel Fields
(Batch) screen that spans more than one line and is not wrapped, it is automatically
broken into two or more literal fields. The original panel data (that is, the original
field attributes) is replicated for each segment of the field or fields created as a result.

9.3 The Custom Code Editor

You use the custom code editor to create, modify, browse, and purge custom code
stored in the TDF. Custom code members may be one of these types:
■ COBOL
■ PL/I
■ JCL
The type of custom code member that you edit determines the default value of the
display column for the editing session:
■ 07 for COBOL members
■ 02 for PL/I members
■ 01 for JCL members
The display column value appears at the upper right of the screen during an editing
session.
Converting to JCL: To convert a COBOL or a PL/I member into a JCL member,

change the member's start column to 01 and enter two forward slashes (//) as the first
two characters on the first line of the member. When you save or submit the member,
it is recognized as a JCL member.
Editing multiple members: You can edit multiple custom code members in a
single editing session, if all members are of the same type. In a multiple-member
editing session, a member line for each member in the session is displayed
immediately before the first data line of the member. Thus, member lines serve as
headers for the members that you are editing. A member line is signified by the
appearance of this message in the line number field:
=MBR=>
The line contains a full identification of the member, including its total number of data
lines.
Note: You can enter certain line commands in the line number field of a member line
to edit the entire member.
Size considerations: The custom code editor displays a maximum of 32 lines and
80 columns per screen regardless of the 3270 terminal model used, or less, if limited
by the 3270 model type.
The maximum size for a custom code member is 9,999 lines. If you edit a member
that exceeds this limit, the custom code editor cannot perform END and SAVE
command processing.

Invoking the custom code editor: You can invoke the custom code editor in any
of these ways:
■ On the Online Program Definition menu or the Nonterminal Program Definition
menu, specify create, update, or list as the function, and enter CC in the ITEM
field. For create or update, also identify the member in the CUSTCODE field.
■ On the List/Show Custom Code screen, select a member to edit. You can access
this screen by selecting the custom code option on any of these screens:
– Create/Update Screen Definitions
– Create/Update Driver Definitions
– Create/Update IMS/DC Report Definitions
– Create/Update Nonterminal Definition
– Create/Update Batch Definitions
When you are in the custom code editor, the word EDIT is displayed in the upper left
corner of the screen.

9.4 The Presentation Store Editor
9.4 The Presentation Store Editor

You use the presentation store editor to create, modify, browse, and purge presentation
stores in the TDF.
Editing multiple members: You can edit multiple presentation stores in a single
editing session. In this case, a member line for each member in the session is
displayed immediately before the first data line of the member. Thus, member lines
serve as headers for the members that you are editing. A member line is signified by
the appearance of this message in the line number field:
=MBR=>
The line contains a full identification of the member, including its total number of data
lines.
Note: You can enter certain line commands in the line number field of a member line
to edit the entire member.
Invoking the presentation store editor: You can invoke the presentation store
editor in one of these ways:
■ On the Prototyping Facility menu, enter VI (view) in the FUNCTION field and
PS (presentation store) in the ITEM field
■ On the Prototyping Facility menu, enter LI (list) in the FUNCTION field (and PS
(presentation store) in the ITEM field) to display the List Presentation Stores
screen, where you can enter U as a line command for the listing of the
presentation store to be edited
■ On the List Panel Definitions screen, enter .VPS in the COMMAND field to view
the active presentation store
When you are in the presentation store editor, the word EDIT is displayed at the top
left of the screen.

9.5 Primary Commands

About primary commands: Primary commands are commands that you can
submit to a CA-Telon editor to control the editing session.
You enter primary commands in the COMMAND field of the screen. If a primary
command has been assigned to a PF key, you can invoke the command by pressing the
key. See 2.9, “Update Session Controls” on page 2-30 for more information about
assigning commands to PF keys.
When you edit a panel in full screen edit mode, you can invoke a primary command
only by pressing a PF key because the COMMAND field is not displayed in full
screen edit mode.
Not all primary commands are valid in each editor. Restrictions on individual
commands are noted in the documentation of those commands.
Syntax conventions: These are the conventions for the primary command syntax
in this section:
UPPERCASE ROMAN Required keyword, or required part of a keyword

lowercase roman Optional keyword, or optional part of a keyword
lowercase italic Variable
{parameter}A A required parameter; one of these must be
specified in the command
{parameter}B
{parameter}C
[parameter]A An optional parameter; it is valid but not required
in the command
[parameter]A An optional choice of parameters; any one is valid
but none is required in the command
[parameter]B
[parameter]C

9.5.1 BACKWARD
Command Format for BACKWARD
┌─CSR───┐
──BAckward──┼───────┼─────────────────────────────────────────
├─lines─┤
├─Page──┤
├─Half──┤
├─Pn────┤
├─Hn────┤
└─Max───┘
BAckward
Scroll backward the value displayed in the SCROLL field. (In the panel editor
full screen mode, you can invoke BACKWARD only without options and only by
pressing the assigned PF key.) You can modify the SCROLL field with one of
these valid values:
CSR
(Default) Scroll backward beginning at cursor position.
lines
The number of lines to scroll backward.
Page
Scroll backward one page.
Half
Scroll backward one half-page.
Pn
The number of pages to scroll backward.
Hn
The number of half pages to scroll backward.
Max
Scroll backward to the beginning.
9.5.2 CANCEL
Command Format for CANCEL
──CANcel──┬──┬───────────────────┬─custom-code─┬──────────────
│ └─program.qualifier─┘ │
├─presentation-store─────────────────┤
└─ALL────────────────────────────────┘
CANcel
End an editing session, deleting the edits made during the session, and return to
the screen from which the session was requested.

program
The program header and identifier.
qualifier
To identify a program type (SD, ND, BD, RD, DR).
custom-code
Removes the named custom code member from the editing session.
presentation-store
Removes the named presentation store from the editing session.
ALL
Cancels all custom code or presentation stores in an editing session.
9.5.3 CAPS
Command Format for CAPS
┌─ON──┐
──CAPs──┼─────┼───────────────────────────────────────────────
└─OFF─┘
CAPs
Specifies the case of characters you input during the editing session.
ON
(Default) All characters are entered in uppercase.
OFF
Characters may be entered in mixed lower and uppercase.
9.5.4 CH
Command Format for CH
┌──
─────────────────────────────────┐
─┬────────┬──┬─────────────────┬─┴─────────────────────
──CH───
├─IN─────┤ └─image-character─┘
├─OU─────┤
├─OI─────┤
├─SELECT─┤
└─BREAK──┘
CH
(Panel editor line edit mode only.) Changes a character that identifies the usage
of a panel field or changes the literal break character. You can change more than
one character in a single command; for example, entering CH IN ? OUT X
changes the image characters for input and output fields to ? and X, respectively.

IN
Field used for input only.
OU
Field used for output only.
OI
Field used for either output or input.
SELECT
Field used for selection by the application user.
BREAK
The literal break character.
image-character
The character to represent the specified usage. Characters that you cannot use as
image characters are:
■ ( — Left parenthesis
■ ) — Right parenthesis
■ , — Comma
■ ' — Single quotation mark
9.5.5 CHANGE
Command Format for CHANGE
──┬─Change─┬──┬─string1──string2─┬──┬───────────┬──┬──────┬────
├─CHG────┤ ├─string1─────────┤ └─direction─┘ ├─col1─┤
├─C──────┤ ├─────────string2─┤ └─col2─┘
└─Cn─────┘ └────────────────┘
──┬─────────────┬──┬───────────┬───────────────────────────────
└─string-type─┘ └─line-type─┘
Change|CHG|C|Cn
Changes a specified character string to another specified character string. (Custom
code members and presentation stores only.)
Note: Cn saves the CHANGE command you are entering. The value of n can be
1 to 9; therefore, you can save 10 CHANGE commands (including C
itself) for the editing session. You can invoke a saved CHANGE
command with the REPEAT CHANGE command.
string1
The string to be changed.
string2
The string to replace string1.
*
The string specified for this parameter in the most recent prior CHANGE
command issued during this session.

direction
Controls the direction and starting point in which to perform the change operation.
Valid values are:
■ ALL — Search begins at the TOP-OF-DATA line and proceeds forward to
find all matches with string1 until BOTTOM-OF-DATA line is reached
■ FIRST — Search begins at the TOP-OF-DATA line and proceeds forward to
find the first string1 match
■ LAST — Search begins at the TOP-OF-DATA line and proceeds forward to
find the last string1 match
■ NEXT — (Default) Search begins at the current cursor location and proceeds
forward to find the next string1 match
■ PREV — Search begins at the current cursor location and proceeds backward
until the string1 match occurs
col1 col2
The range of columns searched for occurrences of string1. Col1 delimits the left
of the range; col2 delimits the right of the range.
string-type
The type of string on which to perform the change operation. Valid values are:
CHARS
(Default) Considered successful irregardless of what precedes or follows
string1
PREFIX
Considered successful only if string1 is not preceded with a word-character
and is followed with a word-character
SUFFIX
Considered successful only if string1 is preceded with a word-character and is
not followed with a word-character
WORD
Considered successful only if string1 is not preceded and not followed with a
word-character
line-type
The type of line on which to perform the change operation. Valid values are:
ALL
(Default) All lines
X
Excluded lines only
NX
Non-excluded lines only
In the Data Group, the CHANGE and REPEAT CHANGE commands must be used
with extreme care.

Telon CANNOT change: Inherited key values (marked by "@"), Table labels,Database
lables, File labels.
Telon CAN change: Non-inherited key values, Segment labels, Row labels,Record
labels.
When a change or repeat-change command is issued, the unchangeable items may

APPEAR to change, but when the screen is saved, they revert to their original values.
In the example below, the command CHANGE ALL EMPL XXXX was issued, then
the Data Group was saved and updated again. Note the occurrences of "EMPL" that
remain, and the occurrences of "XXXX" when the changes took place. Note also the
values in the IGNORE column that tie the rows, records, segments, etc. to their
respective tables, files and databases (PCB's).
LABEL REQUEST KEY/WHERE IGNORE
TAB==> TRGEMPL TELON.TRGEMPL
%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
ROW=> TRGEMPLB @DUMMY @EMPL-ID TRGEMPL
VSAM=> TRGEMPLB
%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
REC=> TRGXXXXB @DUMMY XFER-XXXX-ID TRGEMPLB
PCB==> TRGEMPL TRGXXXX

%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
SEG=> TRGXXXX @DEFINE @XFER-EMPL-ID TRGEMPL

9.5.6 COPY
Command Format for COPY
──COpy──┬─panel-image.PI─────────────────────┬─────────────────
├─panel-definition.PD────────────────┤
├─program.qualifier──────────────────┤
├──┬───────────────────┬─custom-code─┤
└─presentation-store─────────────────┘
──┬──────────────────────────┬─────────────────────────────────
└─start-line──┬──────────┬─┘
└─end-line─┘
COpy
Copies text from the named entity into the entity that you are editing. Also, issue
either the AFTER line command or the BEFORE line command to specify where
the copied lines are placed.
For information about line commands, see 9.6, “Line Commands” on page 9-45.
panel image
The panel image header and identifier.
panel-definition
The panel definition header and identifier.
program
qualifier
custom-code
The name of the custom code member. (When a COPY command is issued for a
copy member alone, it is copied from the same program as the copy member the
command is being issued from.)
presentation-store
The name of the presentation store.
start-line
The first line to be copied.
end-line
The last line to be copied.

9.5.7 CREATE
Command Format for CREATE
──CReate───────────────────────────────────────────────────────
──┬─panel-image.PI─┬───────────────┬──────────────────────┬────
│ └─'description'─┘ │
├─panel-definition.PD─┬───────────────┬─────────────────┤
├─program.qualifier─┬───────────────┬───────────────────┤
├──┬───────────────────┬─custom-code─┬───────────────┬──┤
│ └─program.qualifier─┘ └─'description'─┘ │
└─presentation-store────────────────────────────────────┘
CReate
Create the entity you are editing by copying the named entity. Also, use either
the COPY or the MOVE line command to specify the lines that you want to use
for the create.
panel-image
panel-definition
program
qualifier
custom-code
description
The description of the panel or custom code member.
presentation-store
9.5.8 EDIT
Command Format for EDIT
──EDIT──┬──┬───────────────────┬─custom-code─┬────────────────
EDIT
Performs one of these functions:
■ In show mode, transfers to edit mode, if entity is named

■ Adds the named entity to the current editing session

program
qualifier
custom-code
The custom code member to edit. If the member does not exist, a new member is
created for the current screen definition.
presentation-store
The presentation store to edit. If it does not exist, a blank presentation store with
the name you specified is created for you to edit.
9.5.9 END
Command Format for END
──ENd──┬──┬───────────────────┬─custom-code─┬─────────────────
└─ALL────────────────────────────────┘
ENd
Ends the current editing session, saves the edits you made during the session, and
returns you to the screen from which you requested the session.
program
qualifier
custom-code
Ends editing of the custom code member, but if you are editing multiple members,
does not end the editing session.
Note: To end an editing session successfully, no member that you are editing can
exceed 9,999 lines.
presentation-store
Ends editing of the presentation store, but if you are editing multiple members,
does not end the editing session.
ALL
Ends an editing session in which you are editing multiple members.

9.5.10 END HOLD

Command Format for END HOLD
──END ──HOLD─────────────────────────────────────────────────
END HOLD
Ends the current TDF session and transfers to the previous held session.
9.5.11 EQUATE
Command Format for EQUATE
──EQuate ──location-name─────────────────────────────────────
EQuate
Equates a name with a line number in the entity being edited. (Not valid in the
full screen mode or the panel editor.)
location-name
A one- to eight-character name assigned to the first numbered line currently at the
top of the screen (or, if it is displayed for a single edit, to the TOP OF DATA
line, which is line number 000000).
The following actions cause the location name to be deleted:
■ Deleting a member where custom-code matches location-name
■ Deleting a line to which location-name has been assigned
9.5.12 FIND
Command Format for FIND
──┬─Find ─┬──string──┬───────────┬──┬─────────────┬───────────
├─F──────┤ └─direction─┘ └─string-type─┘
└─Fn─────┘
──┬───────────┬──┬──────────────┬──────────────────────────────
└─line-type─┘ └─col1 ──col2─┘
Find|F|Fn
(Custom code members and presentation stores only.) Finds the specified
character string.
Note: Saves the FIND command you are entering. The value of n can be 1 to 9;
therefore, you can save 10 FIND commands (including F itself) for the
editing session. You can invoke a saved FIND command with the
REPEAT FIND command.

string
The string to be located. Search string rules are the same as for the ISPF editor
except that a leading left parenthesis must be delimited by single quotes, as shown
here:
'('
direction
Controls the direction and starting point in which to perform the find operation.
Valid values are:
■ ALL — Search begins at the TOP-OF-DATA line and proceeds forward to
find all matches with string1 until BOTTOM-OF-DATA line is reached
■ FIRST — Search begins at the TOP-OF-DATA line and proceeds forward to
find the first string1 match
■ LAST — Search begins at the TOP-OF-DATA line and proceeds forward to
find the last string1 match
■ NEXT — (Default) Search begins at the current cursor location and proceeds
forward to find the next string1 match
■ PREV — Search begins at the current cursor location and proceeds backward
until the string1 match occurs
string-type
The type of string on which to perform the find operation. Valid values are:
■ CHARS
■ PREFIX
■ SUFFIX
■ WORD
line-type
The type of line on which to perform the find operation. Valid values are:
ALL
(Default) All lines
X
Excluded lines only
NX
Nonexcluded lines only
col1 col2
The range of columns to be searched for occurrences of string. Col1 delimits the
left of the range; col2 delimits the right of the range.

9.5.13 FORWARD
Command Format for FORWARD
┌─CSR───┐
──FOrward──┼───────┼──────────────────────────────────────────
├─lines─┤
├─Page──┤
├─Half──┤
├─Pn────┤
├─Hn────┤
└─Max───┘
FOrward
Scroll forward the value displayed in the SCROLL field. (In the panel editor full
screen mode, you can invoke FORWARD only without options and only by
pressing the assigned PF key.) You can modify the SCROLL field with one of
these valid values:
CSR
(Default) Scroll forward beginning at cursor position.
lines
The number of lines to scroll forward.
Page
Scroll forward one page.
Half
Scroll forward one half-page.
Pn
The number of pages to scroll forward.
Hn
The number of half pages to scroll forward.
Max
Scroll forward to the end.
9.5.14 HELP
Command Format for HELP
──HElp────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
HElp
Displays help information about the current screen.

9.5.15 HOLD
Command Format for HOLD
──HOld────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
HOld
Stores the current screen in its current state and transfers control to the TDF Main
menu. You can restore the screen with the SWAP command.
9.5.16 INSTALL
Command Format for INSTALL
──INSTALL─────────────────────────────────────────────────────
INSTALL
Transfers control to the TDF Installation screen.
9.5.17 ISPF/PDF
Command Format for ISPF/PDF
──ISPF/PDF ──command─────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF/PDF
(Not valid in PWS.) Submits a specified command to ISPF/PDF. If no such
command is specified, transfers control to TDF Main menu.
command
The command to be executed.
9.5.18 LEFT
Command Format for LEFT
──LEft──┬────────┬────────────────────────────────────────────
├─number─┤
├─Page───┤
├─Half───┤
└─Max────┘
LEft
Specifies the leftmost column of the screen display, thereby shifting the screen
display to the right. If no option is specified, the default beginning column
number of the display is:

■ 02 for a panel
■ 02 for a PL/I members
■ 01 for JCL
This is not a valid command for editing a presentation store.
number
Shift the display right by the number of columns specified, not to exceed position
1.
Page
Shift the display right by the number of columns equal to the full size of the
terminal screen or until column 1 appears.
Half
Shift the display right by the number of columns equal to half the size of the
terminal screen.
Max
Shift the display right until column 1 appears.
9.5.19 LINE EDIT

Command Format for LINE EDIT
──LINE EDIT───────────────────────────────────────────────────
LINE EDIT
(Panel editor only.) Switches the editing session between line edit mode and full
screen edit mode. Changes made in the session are saved when you switch
modes.
Issued from the Update Panel Fields (Online) screen and the Update Panel Fields
(Batch) screen, this command transfers you to line edit mode.
9.5.20 LINE OUT

Command Format for LINE OUT
──LINE OUT────────────────────────────────────────────────────
LINE OUT
(Panel editor only.) This command performs the same function as LINE EDIT.

9.5.21 LOCATE
Command Format for LOCATE
──LOCATE──┬─line-number────────────────────────┬──────────────
├─group──────────────────────────────┤
├─location name──────────────────────┤
├──┬───────────────────┬─custom-code─┤
Locate
Redisplays the screen at the specified location.
line-number
The line number.
custom code
group
(Panel editor only.) The beginning of the named batch group.
location-name
A location previously named in an EQUATE command.
program
qualifier
custom-code
The beginning of the named custom code member.
presentation-store
The beginning of the named presentation store.
9.5.22 MBCOPY (MARK AND BOUND COPY)

Command Format for MARK AND BOUND COPY
──MBCopy──first-line──first-column──last-line──last-column─────
──target-line──target-column───────────────────────────────────
MBCopy
(Panel editor line mode and custom code members only.) Copies a marked and
bounded block of fields from one location in the entity you are editing to another
but only if the copy will not cause existing fields to be overlaid.
For example, if you enter MBC 7 2 9 40 15 2, fields contained in the block in the
line range 7-9 and column range 2-40 are copied to the same relative positions

beginning at line 15, column 2, if the copy action will not cause existing fields to
be overlaid.
first-line
The line where the block begins.
first-column
The leftmost column in first-line where the block begins.
last-line
The line where the block ends.
last-column
The rightmost column in last-line where the block ends.
target-line
The line on which the copy is marked and block is to begin.
target-column
The leftmost column on target-line where the copy is marked and block is to
begin.
9.5.23 MBMOVE (MARK AND BOUND MOVE)

Command Format for MBMOVE (MARK AND BOUND MOVE)
──MBMove──first-line──first-column──last-line──last-column─────
──target-line──target-column───────────────────────────────────
MBMove
(Panel editor line mode and custom code members only.) Moves a marked and
bounded block of fields from one location in the entity you are editing to another
but only if the move will not cause existing fields to be overlaid.
For example, if you enter MBM 7 2 9 40 15 2, fields contained in the block in
the line range 7-9 and column range 2-40 are moved to the same relative positions
beginning at line 15, column 2, if the move action will not cause existing fields to
be overlaid.
first-line
first-column
last-line
last-column
target-line
The line on which the copy is marked and block is to begin.

target-column
The leftmost column on target-line where the copy is marked and block is to
begin.
9.5.24 MBPURGE (MARK AND BOUND PURGE)

Command Format for MBPurge (MARK AND BOUND PURGE)
──MBPurge──first-line──first-column──last-line──last-column───
MBPurge
(Panel editor line mode and custom code members only.) Deletes a marked and
bounded block of fields from the specified location in the entity you are editing.
For example, if you enter MBP 7 2 9 40, fields contained in the block in the line
range 7-9 and column range 2-40 are deleted.
first-line
first-column
last-line
last-column
9.5.25 MENU
Command Format for MENU
──MEnu────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
MEnu
Ends the current editing session, saves the edits, and transfers control to the TDF
Main menu.
9.5.26 MOVE
Command Format for MOVE
──MOve──┬──┬───────────────────┬─custom-code─┬─────────────────
──┬──────────────────────────┬─────────────────────────────────
└─start-line──┬──────────┬─┘
└─end-line─┘

MOve
Moves text from the named entity into the entity that you are editing. Also, issue
either the AFTER line command or the BEFORE line command to specify where
the moved lines are to be placed.
program
qualifier
custom-code
presentation-store
start-line
The first line to be moved.
end-line
The last line to be moved.
9.5.27 NOSHOW
Command Format for NOSHOW
──NOShow──┬─────────┬─────────────────────────────────────────
├─LIteral─┤
├─INput───┤
├─OUTIN───┤
├─OI──────┤
└─SELect──┘
NOShow
(Panel definition edit mode only). Excludes the requested field types from the
display.
LIteral
Excludes literal fields from the display.
INput
Excludes input fields from the display.
OUTput
Excludes output fields from the display.
OUTIN
Excludes outin fields from the display.
OI
(Same as OUTIN). Excludes outin fields from the display.

SElect
Excludes select fields from the display.
9.5.28 NULLS
Command Format for NULLS
──NULLS──┬─ON──┬──────────────────────────────────────────────
└─OFF─┘
NULLs
Specifies whether trailing spaces are nulls or blanks. Entered without an option,
this command toggles between the two specifications.
ON
Trailing spaces are null. You can enter characters in these spaces without first
pressing [EOF].
OFF
Trailing spaces are blanks. You must erase these blanks by pressing [EOF] before
you can enter characters in these spaces.
9.5.29 PANEL COLUMNS

Command Format for PANEL COLUMNS
──PANELC──columns─────────────────────────────────────────────
PANELC columns
(Panel editor line edit mode only.) Changes the width of the panel you are editing
to columns. However, if a loss of data would result, CA-Telon displays an error
message and no change occurs.
9.5.30 PANEL LINES

Command Format for PANEL LINES
──PANELLine──lines────────────────────────────────────────────
PANELLine lines
(Panel editor line edit mode only.) Changes the depth of the panel you are editing
to lines.
When using a Model 3 or Model 4 terminal, if you modify a panel to 24 lines, the
next time you update this panel it is displayed in a Model 2 mode. If you ended
your current editing session and began a new editing session, this change of
display mode would still be present. You can return to your original display mode
in one of these ways:

■ SWAP EDIT
■ UPDATE GROUP
■ Change panel lines to any number other than 24, end the editing session, and
begin a new editing session
9.5.31 PANEL SIZE

Command Format for PANEL SIZE
──PANELSize──lines──columns───────────────────────────────────
PANELSize lines columns

(Panel editor line edit mode only.) This command allows you to perform the
functions the PANEL LINES and PANEL COLUMNS commands in a single
command.
9.5.32 PD
Command Format for PD
──PD──┬─PROTect───┬──┬─ON──┬──────────────────────────────────
└─UNPROTect─┘ └─OFF─┘
PD
(Panel editor only.) Protects or unprotects fields defined on the Update Panel
Fields (Online) screen or the Update Panel Fields (Batch) screen. In full screen
edit mode, the PF key to which PD is assigned acts as a toggle switch between
PD PROTECT and PD UNPROTECT. In the line edit mode, the default values
are PROTECT ON.
A line is protected if two or more fields are displayed and one of those fields:
■ Has panel data
■ Is a wrapped variable
■ Is a long literal
If PROTECT is in effect, the line number is replaced with:
=PROT>
If UNPROTECT is in effect, the line number is replaced with:
■ ==WF=> — If the line contains a wrapped variable without panel data
■ =WPD=> — If the line contains a wrapped variable or long literal
■ ==PD=> — If the line contains a single field with panel data (these lines are
automatically unprotected) or any other data
■ +++PD+> — If the line contains one or more fields with panel data that are
not displayed

■ ++WF+> — If there is an undisplayed wrapped variable without panel data

■ +WPD+> — If the line contains a wrapped variable with panel data or a long
literal that is not displayed
9.5.33 PDF
See ISPF/PDF.
9.5.34 PDSCOPY
Command Format for PDSCOPY
──PDSCOPY──┬──────────┬──pds-member-name───────────────────────
└─pds-name─┘
──┬───────────────────────────┬────────────────────────────────
└─first-line──┬───────────┬─┘
└─last-line─┘
PDScopy
(Custom code editor only; not valid for PWS.) Copies all or part of a specified
member in a partitioned data set into the member that you are currently editing, at
a location you must specify with either the BEFORE or AFTER line command.
pds-name
The name of the partitioned data set. If not specified, the default name is the
value in the PDSCOPY DSNAME field on the Update Session Controls screen.
pds-member-name
The name of the member to be copied from the partitioned data set.
first-line
The line number of the first line to be copied from the member of the partitioned
data set. If not specified, the default is line 1.
last-line
The line number of the last line to be copied from the member of the partitioned
data set. If not specified, the default is the last line of the member.
9.5.35 POSITION
Command Format for POSITION
──POSition──┬──────┬──┬────────┬──────────────────────────────
└─line─┘ └─column─┘
POSition
(Panel definition edit mode only.) Redisplays the panel field rows beginning with
the field that matches or is nearest to the line and column specified.

line
Line number of the field with which the list begins.
column
Column number of the field on the line value specified.
9.5.36 PROFILE
Command Format for PROFILE
──PRofile──┬──────────┬───────────────────────────────────────
├─ALL──────┤
├─Change───┤
├─COMmands─┤
├─Find─────┤
├─LOCation─┤
├─MEMber───┤
└─PFK──────┘
PRofile
Displays the profile of the current editing session. If you do not qualify the
command, the profile information is:
■ For editing panels:
– Caps
– Nulls
– PD protect/unprotect
– PD on/off
– Variable characters
– Literal break character
■ For editing custom code members and presentation stores:
– Caps
– Nulls
– Members
ALL
Lists all the information available for the editing session. For panel editing in full
screen mode, use the assigned PF key to enter PROFILE ALL.
Change
List CHANGE commands entered during this editing session.
COMmands
Lists the incomplete line commands and line commands currently awaiting
execution.

Find
List FIND commands entered during this editing session.
GROUP
(Panel editing.) Lists information on the batch groups that have been defined.
LOCATION
Lists the current location names that have been defined with the EQUATE
command.
MEMber
The names of the members you are editing.
PFK
Displays the current PF key definitions.
9.5.37 PURGE
Command Format for PURGE
──PUrge──member-name──────────────────────────────────────────
PUrge
Confirms a purge that you have requested by:
■ Entering PU in the FUNCTION field of the Panel Definition menu
■ Entering PU in the FUNCTION field of the Online Program Definition menu
■ Entering P as a line command for a member listing on the List Presentation
Stores screen
member-name
The name of the custom code or presentation store to be purged.
9.5.38 RCHANGE (REPEAT CHANGE)

Command Format for REPEAT CHANGE
┌─C──┐
──RCHANGE──┼────┼─────────────────────────────────────────────
└─Cn─┘
RCHANGE
Repeats a specified CHANGE command. Alone, it executes the most recent
CHANGE command.
C
(Default) The most recently executed CHANGE command.

Cn
A CHANGE command that you saved during a previous execution.
9.5.39 RFIND (REPEAT FIND)

Command Format for REPEAT FIND
┌─F──┐
──RFIND──┼────┼───────────────────────────────────────────────
├─Fn─┤
├─Cn─┤
└─C──┘
RFIND
Repeats a specified FIND command or the FIND portion of a CHANGE
command. Alone, it executes the most recent FIND command.
F
(Default) The most recently executed FIND command.
Fn
A FIND command that you saved during a previous execution.
C
The FIND portion of the most recently executed CHANGE command.
Cn
The FIND portion of a CHANGE command that you save during a previous
execution.

9.5.40 REPLACE
Command Format for REPLACE
──REPlace──┬─panel-image.PI─────────────────────┬─────────────
├─panel-definition.PD────────────────┤
├─program.qualifier──────────────────┤
├──┬───────────────────┬─custom-code─┤
REPlace
Replaces the named entity with part or all of the entity that you are editing. Use
the COPY or MOVE line command to specify the part of the entity you are
editing that is to replace the named entity.
See 9.6, “Line Commands” on page 9-45 for information about line commands.
panel image
panel-definition
program
qualifier
custom-code
presentation-store

9.5.41 RESET
Command Format for RESET
┌─ALL──────┐
──RESet──┼──────────┼─────────────────────────────────────────
├─COLs─────┤
├─COMmands─┤
└─EXclude──┘
RESet
Cancels the specified group of line commands.
ALL
(Default) Causes all COLS, line commands, EXCLUDE commands to become
inactive.
COLS
All COLS commands.
COMmands
All pending line commands or line commands currently in force.
EXclude
All EXCLUDE commands.
9.5.42 RESTORE
Command Format for RESTORE
──RESTORE──┬────────────────────────────────────┬─────────────
├─ALL────────────────────────────────┤
├──┬───────────────────┬─custom code─┤
RESTORE
For the current entity, cancels all edits that you made since you entered the current
editing session or since the last SAVE command, and restores the current editing
session to its state when you entered it.
ALL
For editing multiple custom code members or presentation stores, performs restore
processing on all members in the session.
program
qualifier
custom-code
The custom code member to be restored.

presentation-store
The presentation store to be restored.
9.5.43 RESTORE FIND

Command Format for RESTORE FIND
──&──┬─F──┬───────────────────────────────────────────────────
├─Fn─┤
├─C──┤
└─Cn─┘
&
Redisplays a FIND command or a CHANGE command.
F
The last FIND command that was entered in this session.
Fn
A FIND command defined when previously entered.
C
The last CHANGE command that was entered in this session.
Cn
A CHANGE command defined when previously entered.
9.5.44 RESUME
Command Format for RESUME
──RESUME──────────────────────────────────────────────────────
RESUME
Ends the current TDF session and transfers to the previous held session.

9.5.45 RIGHT
Command Format for RIGHT
──RIght──┬────────┬───────────────────────────────────────────
├─number─┤
├─Page───┤
├─Half───┤
└─Max────┘
RIght
Shift display left but never further than the rightmost position of the custom code
member or panel image. If no option is specified, the default beginning column
number of the display is:
■ 02 for a panel
■ 02 for a PL/I members
■ 01 for JCL
This is not a valid command for editing a presentation store.
number
Shift the display left by the number of columns specified, but not further than the
rightmost position of the custom code member or panel image.
Page
Shift display left by the number of columns equal to the size of the terminal
screen or until column 1 appears.
Half
Shift the display left by the number of columns equal to half the size of the
terminal screen.
Max
Shift the display left until the rightmost position of the member or panel image
appears.
9.5.46 SAVE
Command Format for SAVE
──SAve──┬────────────────────────────────────┬────────────────
├──┬───────────────────┬─custom code─┤
└─ALL────────────────────────────────┘
SAve
Saves the edits you have made during the session.

program
qualifier
custom-code
The custom code member whose edits are to be saved.
Note: To save successfully, the member cannot exceed 9,999 lines.
presentation-store
The presentation store whose edits are to be saved.
ALL
Saves edits to all members of a multiple-member editing session.
9.5.47 SHOW
Command Format for SHOW
──SHow──┬────────────────────────────────────┬────────────────
├──┬───────────────────┬─custom code─┤
SHow
If you are in edit mode, switches you to browse mode.
program
qualifier
custom-code
Adds a custom code member to the editing session.
presentation-store
Adds a presentation store to the editing session.
Syntax for the SHOW command in panel definition edit mode is provided below.
Command Format for SHOW

──SHow──┬─────────┬───────────────────────────────────────────
├─LIteral─┤
├─INput───┤
├─OUTIN───┤
├─OI──────┤
└─SELect──┘

SHow
(Panel definition edit mode only). Displays the requested field types.
LIteral
Displays requested literal fields.
INput
Displays requested input fields.
OUTput
Displays requested output fields.
OI
(Same as OUTIN). Displays requested outin fields.
SElect
Displays requested select fields.
9.5.48 SUBMIT
Command Format for SUBMIT
──SUBmit──────────────────────────────────────────────────────
SUBmit
(Custom code only.) Submits the member that you are currently editing for
execution. The member name must be of JCL type and must be the only member
being edited in the current editing session.
To convert a COBOL or a PL/I member into a JCL member, change the member's
start column to column 01 and enter two forward slashes (//) as the first two
characters on the first line of the member.
9.5.49 SWAP
Command Format for SWap
──SWap────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
SWap
Transfers from the current session to the previously-held session.
Note: Press [Enter] to reactivate the held session.
9.5.50 SWAP EDIT

Command Format for SWAP
──SWAP──EDIT──────────────────────────────────────────────────

SWAP EDIT
(Panel editor only.) Transfers to the Update Panel Fields (Online) screen.
Note: From the Update Panel Fields (Online) screen, this command switches the
session to full screen edit mode.
9.5.51 TRANSFER
Command Format for TRANSFER
──=n──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
=n
Transfers to another TDF screen. Valid n values are:
1
User Profile Maintenance menu
1C
Color Profile Maintenance Manu (PWS only)
1D
Update Program Definition Defaults
1P
Update Environment Definition Defaults
1S
Update Session Controls
2
Data Administration menu
3
Panel Definition menu
4
Online Processing menu
4N
Nonterminal Program Definition menu
4S
Online Program Definition menu
5
Batch Program Definition menu
6
Prototyping Facility menu
U
Utilities menu
X
(Exit the TDF)

9.5.52 TSO
Command Format for TSO
──TSO──tso-command────────────────────────────────────────────
TSO tso-command
Submits the specified command to TSO for execution.
Note: This command is not valid for PWS or when running under CICS.

9.6 Line Commands
9.6 Line Commands

About line commands: Line commands are commands that you can submit to a
CA-Telon editor to control the editing session.
You enter line commands in the line command field of the screen. (Not all screens
have line command fields.)
Not all line commands are valid in each editor. Restrictions on individual commands
are noted in the documentation of those commands.
PF key assignments: If a line command has been assigned to a PF key, you can
invoke the command by pressing the key. PF key assignments are made on the
Update PF Keys Definition screen. This is the correspondence between the short form
of the line command listed on the screen and the full name of the command as
presented in this section:
D — DELETE
I — INSERT
R — REPEAT
C — COPY
M — MOVE
A — AFTER
B — BEFORE
O — OVER
) — RIGHT SHIFT
( — LEFT SHIFT
X — EXCLUDE
XX — EXCLUDE (block)
F — FIRST
L — LAST
COLS — COLS
FS — FIELD SPLIT
LC — LINE CLEAR
D — DEFINE GROUP
U — UPDATE GROUP
DG — DELETE GROUP

9.6 Line Commands
See 2.8, “Update PF Keys Definition” on page 2-28 for information about assigning
commands to PF keys.
When you edit a panel in full screen edit mode, you can invoke a line command only
by pressing a PF key because no line command field is displayed in full screen edit
mode.
Syntax conventions: These are the conventions for the primary command syntax
in this section:
UPPERCASE ROMAN Required keyword

lowercase italic Variable
[parameter]A An optional parameter; it is valid but not required
in the command
A separator to indicate a choice between the
command to the left of the separator and a
command to the right
ZZ . . . ZZ Where ZZ is the command, this indicates that ZZ is
entered on two lines and the operation it invokes is
performed on the range of lines thus marked
AFTER: Syntax: A[n]
Function: Specifies the location after which the text is to be moved or copied, in
conjunction with the MOVE or COPY command. N specifies the number of
occurrences of marked text to move or copy after this location. Valid values for n are
1 to 9. If n not specified, the default is 1.
AFTER MULTIPLE: Syntax: AM[n]
Function: Specifies one or more locations after which lines are to be copied or
moved, in conjunction with the COPY or MOVE line command.
If you enter AM or AMn on only one line, this command functions exactly as the
AFTER line command does.
Unlike the AFTER command, AFTER MULTIPLE command allows you to specify, at
the same time, multiple locations for a line or block of lines to be copied or moved. If
you enter AM or hp2.AMn on multiple lines, the line or block of lines marked for
copy or move is copied or moved after each line at which you enter a form of the
AFTER MULTIPLE command. The line or block of lines will be repeated n times
following a line at which you enter AMn.
BEFORE: Syntax: B[n]
Function: Specifies the location before which the text is to be moved or copied, in

9.6 Line Commands
conjunction with the MOVE or COPY command. N specifies the number of

occurrences of marked text to move or copy before this location. Valid values for n
are 1 to 9. If n not specified, the default is 1.
BEFORE MULTIPLE: Syntax: BM[n]
Function: Specifies one or more locations before which lines are to be copied or
moved, in conjunction with the COPY or MOVE line command.
If you enter BM or BMn on only one line, this command functions exactly as the
BEFORE line command does.
Unlike the BEFORE command, BEFORE MULTIPLE allows you to specify, at the
same time, multiple locations for a line or block of lines to be copied or moved. If
you enter BM or BMn on multiple lines, the line or block of lines marked for copy or
move is copied or moved before each line at which you enter a form of the BEFORE
MULTIPLE command. The line or block of lines will be repeated n times before a
line at which you enter BMn.
BOX: Syntax: BOX[n] BOX*[n] BOX-[n]
Function: (Custom code editor only.) Inserts a formatted box into the member that
you are currently editing, allowing you to enter comments into the boxed area.
In COBOL members:
■ Entering BOX without a qualifier creates a box, bounded by asterisks, that
contains three blank lines into which you can insert comments. Use n to override
the default three lines.
■ Entering BOX*n creates a box, bounded by asterisks in columns 7 and 70 that
contains n lines.
■ Entering BOX-n creates a box, bounded by hyphens in that contains n lines. An
asterisk at the beginning and end of the line identifies each comment line.
In PL/I members, the PL/I comment characters /* and */ delimit the boundaries of the
box.
In JCL, the JCL comment characters (//*) delimit the boundaries of the box.
CANCEL: Syntax: CAN
Function: For editing custom code and presentation stores, this command ends the
participation of a member in the current multiple member editing session, without
saving the edits you made in that member for that session. Enter this command in the
line number field of the member line header for the member to be canceled. You can
enter this command for as many members as you are editing.

9.6 Line Commands
COLS: Syntax: COLS COL
Function: Displays a column number line to identify the column location of one or
more characters below the line. Cancel this command with the RESET COLS primary
command.
COMMENT: Syntax: COM[n]
Function: (Custom code editor only.) Inserts comment lines into the member that
you are currently editing, providing lines in the member into which you can enter
comments. You can override the default three lines provided by specifying n as the
number of lines.
In COBOL members, an asterisk at the beginning of the line identifies each comment
line. In PL/I members, the comment lines are delimited with the PL/I comment
characters /* and */ located in columns 2-3 and 70-71. In JCL, the comment lines are
delimited with the JCL comment characters //*.
COPY: Syntax: C[n] CC ... CC
Function: Copies a line or a block of lines to another location.
To mark a single line to copy, enter C on the line.
To mark more than one line to copy, do one of the following:

■ Enter Cn on the first line to copy, where n is the number of consecutive lines,
including the first one, to be copied
■ Enter CC on both the first and last line of the block to be copied
Note: For editing a panel you cannot COPY OVER any lines containing fields in a
way that would require separating the fields
For editing custom code or presentation stores, Cn or CC are not valid on a

member line.
Specify the location of the copy with AFTER, BEFORE, or OVER. AFTER and
BEFORE cause the lines to be inserted. OVER causes the lines to overlay existing
lines.
You can use COPY with the CREATE and REPLACE primary commands.
Note: Excessive simultaneous multiple entry of this command will cause the editor's
performance to degrade.
DEFINE GROUP: Syntax: G
Function: (Panel editor only.) Creates a batch group from panel image and/or panel
definition data. The editor creates a line on the screen called a batch group header that

9.6 Line Commands
specifies the length of the batch group. Also, use the UPDATE GROUP line
command to specify the name and type of the batch group.
DELETE: Syntax: D[n] DD ... DD
Function: Deletes a line or a block of lines.
To mark a single line to delete, enter D on the line.
To mark more than one line to delete, do one of the following:

■ Enter Dn on the first line to delete, where n is the number of consecutive lines,
including the first one, to be deleted
■ Enter DD on both the first and last line of the block to be deleted
Note: Delete SEGLOOP information by entering D on the start or end line of the
SEGLOOP.
Deletes will not cross member boundaries.
DELETE GROUP: Syntax: DG
Function: (Panel editor only.) Deletes an entire batch group created with the
DEFINE GROUP command. Enter DG in the number field of the batch group header
line.
Note: To delete the last batch group in a panel:
1. Transfer from the panel to the Panel Definition menu
2. Enter PU (purge) in the FUNCTION field for the panel
3. After returning to the panel, enter the PURGE primary command
END: Syntax: END
Function: For custom code and presentation stores, this command ends the
participation of a member in the current multiple member editing session, saving the
edits that you made in the member for that session. Enter this command in the line
number field of the member line header for the member to be ended. You can enter
this command for as many members as you are editing.
EXCLUDE: Syntax: X[n] XX ... XX
Function: Ends display of a line or a block of lines without deleting.
To mark a single line to exclude, enter X on the line.
To mark more than one line to exclude, do one of the following:

■ Enter Xn on the first line to exclude, where n is the number of consecutive lines,
including the first one, to be excluded

9.6 Line Commands
■ Enter XX on both the first and last line of the block to be excluded
For editing custom code, this command may not be entered on a member line.
To cancel this command, use the FIRST or LAST line command, or the RESET
primary command.
Note: When one or more lines are excluded from the Data Group and the
Create/Update Data Group screen is saved on exit, the exclusion is retained. The next
time the Data Group is displayed with the exclusion, issue the "RESET" command to
remove the exclusion.
FIELD SPLIT: Syntax: FS
Function: (Panel editor only.) Splits a line at each field, starting with the second
field.
For example, if you enter FS at a line with three fields, two lines are added to the
panel following the line at which you enter the command. The first of the three fields
remains on the original line; the second field appears on the first added line, and the
third field appears on the second added line. Thus, if you issue FIELD SPLIT for this
line on a panel image:
Name: >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>
the result is:
Name:
>>>>>>>>
>>>>>>>>>>>>>>
To maintain the screen size, delete one line for each line inserted.
FIRST: Syntax: F[n]
Function: Redisplays lines excluded with the EXCLUDE line command, beginning
with the first excluded line and redisplaying n consecutive lines.
INSERT: Syntax: I[n SPACEBAR [EOF]]
Function: Inserts one or n blank lines into the panel or member that you are editing.
To insert one line, type I (without n) and press SPACEBAR or [EOF] before pressing
[Enter].
After the INSERT command is processed, the line number field of each blank line
inserted is filled with single quotation marks instead of numbers. You can enter valid
line commands in these line number fields.

9.6 Line Commands
INSERT SPACE: Syntax: IS[n]
Function: Inserts one or n blank lines immediately after the line on which you enter
the command. To insert one line, type IS without n.
LAST: Syntax: L[n]
Function: Redisplays lines excluded with the EXCLUDE line command, beginning
with the last excluded line and redisplaying n consecutive lines.
LEFT SHIFT: Syntax: ([n] (([n] ... ((
Function: Shifts the text in a line or a block of lines to the left.
To mark a single line to shift two spaces to the left, enter ( on the line. To override
the default 2, enter (n where n is the number of spaces to shift.
To mark a block of lines to shift left, enter ((n on the first line and (( on the last line
of the block to be shifted, where n is the number of spaces to shift, overriding the
default 2.
For editing custom code:

■ This command may not be entered on a member line
■ If you shift text off the side of the screen, that text will be lost
LINE CLEAR: Syntax: LC
Function: (Panel editor only.) Cancels the panel definition(s) associated with the
field(s) in the line on which you enter the command.
MOVE: Syntax: M[n] MM ... MM
Function: Moves a line or a block of lines to another location.
To mark a single line to move, enter M on the line.
To mark more than one line to move, do one of the following:

■ Enter Mn on the first line to move, where n is the number of consecutive lines,
including the first one, to be moved
■ Enter MM on both the first and last line of the block to be moved
Specify the location of the move with AFTER, BEFORE, or OVER:

■ For editing a panel, AFTER and BEFORE cause the lines to be inserted, and
OVER causes the lines to overlay existing lines. However, you cannot MOVE

9.6 Line Commands
OVER any lines containing fields in a way that would require separating the
fields.
■ For editing custom code, AFTER and BEFORE cause the lines to be inserted, and
OVER causes the lines to overlay existing lines. However, if you use the OVER
command, the editor deletes moved lines from their original locations only if the
overlayed lines do not contain data in such a way as to prevent the move from
succeeding. If you move an entire member, only the lines within the member are
moved, thus leaving a custom code member that is empty. This command is not
valid on a member line.
■ For editing a presentation store, AFTER and BEFORE cause the lines to be
inserted, and OVER causes the lines to overlay existing lines. If you move an
entire member, only the lines within the member are moved, thus leaving a
presentation store. This command is not valid on a member line.
You can use MOVE with the CREATE and REPLACE primary commands.
Note: Excessive simultaneous multiple entry of this command will cause the editor's
OVER: Syntax: O[n] OO ... OO
Function: Specifies the location of a line or block of lines at which to begin

overlaying lines marked for copy or move, in conjunction with the COPY or MOVE
line command.
For editing a panel, you cannot COPY OVER or MOVE OVER any line containing
fields in a way that would require separating the fields.
REPEAT: Syntax: R[n] RR[n] ... RR
Function: Repeats a line or a block of lines one or n times.
To mark a single line to repeat, enter R or Rn on the line.
To mark a block of lines to repeat, enter RRn on the first line and RR on the last line
of the block to be repeated, where n is the number of times the block is to be repeated.
For editing custom code, if you type Rn or RRn, press SPACEBAR or [EOF] before
pressing [Enter].
Note: The value of n may not exceed 50.
Excessive simultaneous multiple entry of this command will cause the editor's
RESET LINE: Syntax: RESET
Function: (Panel editor only.) In line edit mode, this command cancels your most

9.6 Line Commands
recent updates to a line containing PDs and displays the line as it was before those
updates.
RESTORE: Syntax: REST
Function: For editing custom code or presentation stores, this command cancels all
edits made to a member during an editing session since the last SAVE command, and
restores the member to the state it was in when you issued the SAVE command (or
when the editing session began). Enter this command in the line number field of the
member line header for the member to be ended. You can enter this command for as
many members as you are editing.
RIGHT SHIFT: Syntax: )[n] ))[n] ... ))
Function: Shifts the text in a line or a block of lines to the right.
To mark a single line to shift two spaces to the right, enter ) on the line. To override
the default 2, enter )n where n is the number of spaces to shift.
To mark a block of lines to shift right, enter ))n on the first line and )) on the last line
of the block to be shifted where n is the number of spaces to shift, overriding the
default 2.
For editing custom code:

■ This command may not be entered on a member line
■ If you shift text off the side of the screen, that text will be lost
SAVE: Syntax: SAVE
Function: For editing custom code or presentation stores, this command saves the
edits made to a member during the current editing session. Enter this command in the
line number field of the member line header for the member to be ended. You can
enter this command for as many members as you are editing.
UPDATE GROUP: Syntax: U
Function: (Panel editor only.) Updates information for a batch group created with
the DEFINE GROUP command.
On the Update Panel Fields (Batch) screen, enter U in the line number field of the
batch group's HEADER line. This transfers you to the Update Panel Group screen,
where you can enter information on the batch group.

9.7 CA-Telon Command Summary

The primary and line command tables in this section are in alphabetical order. Each
table contains a column for each editor; a bullet () in the column means the command
is valid for the editor.
9.7.1 Primary Commands
Primary Panel Editor Custom Presenta- Panel Definition Editor

Command Code tion Store
Full Line
Screen
BACKWARD
CANCEL
CAPS
CH
CHANGE
COPY
CREATE
EDIT
END
END HOLD
EQUATE
FIND
FORWARD
HELP
HOLD
ISPF
LEFT
LINE
EDIT OUT
LOCATE
MAXLINE
MBCOPY
MBMOVE


Full Line
Screen
MBPURGE
MENU
MERGE
MOVE
NOSHOW
NULLS
PANEL
COLUMNS
PANEL
LINES
PANEL SIZE
PD
PDF
PDS COPY
POSITION
PROFILE
PURGE
REPEAT
CHANGE
REPEAT
FIND
REPLACE
RESET
RESTORE
RESTORE
FIND
RESUME
RIGHT
SAVE
SHOW
SUBMIT


Full Line
Screen
SWAP
SWAP EDIT
TRANSFER
TSO
9.7.2 Line Commands
Primary ** Panel Editor ** Custom Presenta- Panel Definition Editor

Full Line
Screen
AFTER
AFTER
MULTIPLE
BEFORE
BEFORE
MULTIPLE
BOX
CANCEL
COLS
COMMENT
COPY
DEFINE
GROUP
DELETE
DELETE
GROUP
END
EXCLUDE
FIELD SPLIT
FIRST

Primary ** Panel Editor ** Custom Presenta- Panel Definition Editor

Full Line
Screen
INSERT
INSERT
SPACE
LAST
LEFT SHIFT
LINE
CLEAR
MOVE
OVER
REPEAT
RESET LINE
RESTORE
RIGHT
SHIFT
SAVE
UPDATE
GROUP


Appendix A. Field Edit Formats
Appendix A. Field Edit Formats A-1

A.1 Introduction
A.1 Introduction
About field edits: Advantage CA-Telon-generated programs perform field edits:
■ On output when fields are moved from a file or work area to the screen. On
output, a field edit simply reformats the field as it is moved.
■ On input when fields are moved from the screen to a file or work area. On input,
a field edit first checks the field for valid format and/or content before
reformatting it for storage.
Standard field edit routines and modules: Advantage CA-Telon supplies a

number of standard field edit routines. This appendix documents these routines, the
parameters they pass, and the processing they perform.
Customized field edit routines: You can also code your customized edit routines
for use at your installation. Refer to Target Option for Windows Character Guide for
information about customized edit routines.
Specifying a field edit: In the TDF, you can specify a field edit when you create a
panel definition. The value of the FLDTYPE field, appearing on TDF panel field
update screens, defines the data type of the application screen field (date, dollar, state
code, etc.) and determines the corresponding edit logic for Advantage CA-Telon to
include in the program.
A-2 Design Facility Reference Guide

A.2 Standard Field Edit Routines

The tables below identify valid FLDTYPE values associated with standard field edit
routines. In these tables, the data type processed Alpha is defined as PIC X for
COBOL and CHAR for PL/I. The data type Numeric is defined as PIC 9 for COBOL
and PIC BINARY, or FLOAT for PL/I.
A.2.1 Advantage CA-Telon Output Edit Routines
FLDTYPE Module Type Output Edit Action

Value Name
CAR OCAR Alpha Replaces unprintable characters with a period.
CART OCART Alpha Replaces unprintable characters with a period.
CJULIAN OCJULIAN Numeric (INTDATE=U ) Converts a date stored in ccyyddd
format to the U.S. format of mm/dd/ccyy or mmddccyy,
OINTCJUL
depending on the output field length.
(INTDATE=I) Generates a call to OINTCJUL that
converts a date stored in ccyyddd format to the
international format of dd/mm/ccyy or ddmmccyy,
INTDATE is a parameter in TLNIIS, and the default is
U.
CDATE OCDATE Numeric (INTDATE=U ) Converts a date stored in ccyymmdd
format to the U.S. format of mm/dd/ccyy or mmddccyy,
(INTDATE=I) Generates a call to OINTCDT that
converts a date stored in ccyymmdd format to the
international format of dd/mm/ccyy or ddmmccyy,
U.
DATE ODATE Numeric (INTDATE=U ) Converts a date stored in yymmdd
format to the U.S. format of mm/dd/yy or mmddyy,
OINTLDT
(INTDATE=I) Generates a call to OINTLDT that
converts a date stored in yymmdd format to the
international format of dd/mm/yy or ddmmyy, depending
on the output field length.
U.


Value Name
FLNULL OFLNULL SQLNULL If the field is null, spaces are moved to
TPO-FLDNAME. Otherwise, the data is processed as
the OFLOAT field edit does.
FLOAT OFLOAT Numeric Right-justifies a floating-point or signed-numeric field
with an implied decimal point, using the smallest
OFORMAT
character representation possible with no loss of digits
to the left of the (implied) decimal point.
HEX OHEX Alpha Converts an EBCDIC character format item to
hexadecimal.
HEXA OHEXA Alpha Converts an EBCDIC character format item to
hexadecimal.
HEXP OHEXP Alpha Converts an EBCDIC character format item to
hexadecimal.
HEXT OHEXT Alpha Converts an EBCDIC character format item to
hexadecimal.
JULIAN OJULIAN Numeric (INTDATE=U) Converts a date stored in yyddd format
to the U.S. format of mm/dd/yy or mmddyy, depending
OINTJUL
(INTDATE=I) Generates a call to OINTLJUL that
converts a date stored in yyddd format to the
international formats dd/mm/yy or ddmmyy, depending
Note: INTDATE is a parameter in TLNIIS, and the
default is U.
NULL ONULL SQLNULL If the field is null, spaces are moved to
TPO-FLDNAME. Otherwise, the output field name is
moved to TPO-FLDNAME.
NUMNULL OFLNULL ONUMNULL If the field is null, spaces are moved to
TPO-FLDNAME. Otherwise, TPO-FLDNAME is
formatted using the output fieldname integers, and they
are right-justified and blank-filled.
SSA OSSA Alpha (DL/I processing only.) Parses an IMS SSA to
determine the input SSA length. Returns both the SSA
length and the SSA itself. Specified in the PIC field of
the Update Output/Input/Outin Field screen.
VCHAR OVCHAR Variable Maps data from DBNAME hvname to TPO-fldname,
character where hvname is defined for the SQL VARCHAR
column.


Value Name
VNULL OVNULL SQLNULL If the field is null, spaces are moved to
TPO-FLDNAME. Otherwise, the data is mapped from
DBNAME hvname to TPO-FLDNAME, where hvname
is defined for SQL VARCHAR column.
A.2.2 Advantage CA-Telon Input Edit Routines
FLDTYPE Module Type Input Edit Action

Name Value
CDATE ICDATE Numeric (Set INTDATE=U) Edits a
date field for a valid U.S.
IINTCDT
format of mm/dd/ccyy,
mm-dd-ccyy, or mmddccyy,
depending on the input field
length; then converts it to
ccyymmdd format.
(INTDATE=I) Generates a
call to IINTCDT that edits a
date field for a valid
International format of
dd/mm/ccyy, dd-mm-ccyy, or
ddmmccyy, depending on the
input field length; then
converts it to ccyymmdd
format.
INTDATE is a parameter in
TLNIIS and the default is U.


Name Value
CJULIAN ICJULIAN Numeric (Set INTDATE=U) Edits a
IINTCJUL
format of mm/dd/ccyy,
mm-dd-ccyy, or mmddccyy,
ccyyddd format.
call to IINTCJUL that edits a
dd/mm/ccyy, dd-mm-ccyy, or
ddmmccyy, depending on the
converts it to ccyyddd
format.
DATE IDATE Numeric (Set INTDATE=U) Edits a
IINTLDT
format of mm/dd/yy,
mm-dd-yy or mmddyy,
yymmdd format.
call to IINTLDT that edits a
dd/mm/yy, dd-mm-yy, or
ddmmyy, depending on the
converts it to yymmdd
format.


Name Value
DOLLAR IDOLLAR Numeric (INTDATE=U) Edits a field
for a valid U.S. dollar and
IBDOL
cents format (that is, two
decimal places preceded by a
period). This field does not
accept negatives.
call to ICURRNCY that edits
a field for a valid
International currency format
(that is, two decimal places
preceded by a comma).
FLNULL IFLNULL SQLNULL If completely blank on input,
FLNULL sets the null
indicator. Otherwise,
FLNULL edits a field for
numeric format, allowing for
a decimal point and a leading
sign.
FLOAT IFLOAT Numeric Edits a field for valid
a decimal point and leading
sign.
FULLCAR IFULLCAR Alpha Edits an input field to ensure
there are no blanks in the
field.
FULLNUM IFULLNUM Numeric Edits a numeric field to
ensure that all characters are
numeric.


Name Value
JULIAN IJULIAN Numeric (INTDATE=U) Edits a date
field for a valid U.S. format
of mm/dd/yy, mm-dd-yy, or
mmddyy, depending on the
converts it to yyddd format.
call to IINTLJUL that edits a
dd/mm/yy, dd-mm-yy, or
ddmmyy, depending on the
converts it to yyddd format.
LALPHA ILALPHA Alpha Left-justifies a character
field.
LNULL ILNULL SQLNULL If blank on input, LNULL
sets the null indicator.
Otherwise, LNULL
left-justifies a character field.
LVCHAR ILVCHAR Variable Left-justifies a character field
character (hvname is defined for SQL
VARCHAR column).
LVNULL ILVNULL SQLNULL If blank on input, LVNULL
Otherwise, LVNULL
left-justifies a variable-length
character field into
DBNAME hvname (hvname
is defined for the SQL
VARCHAR column).
NBALPHA INBALPHA Alpha Edits a field to ensure there
are no embedded blanks.
NBALPHA allows leading
and/or trailing blanks;
FULLCAR does not.


Name Value
NBNULL INBNULL SQLNULL If blank on input, NBNULL
Otherwise, NBNULL edits a
field to ensure there are no
embedded blanks.
NBVCHAR INBVCHAR Variable Edits a field to ensure there
character are no embedded blanks.
(hvname is defined for SQL
VARCHAR column.)
NBVNULL INBVNULL SQLNULL If blank on input,
NBVNULL sets the null
NBVNULL edits a
variable-length character
field to ensure there are no
embedded blanks.
NULL INULL SQLNULL If blank on input, NULL sets
the null indicator.
Otherwise, NULL maps data
from TPI-FLDNAME to
DBNAME.
NUMERIC INUMERIC Numeric Edits a field for valid
leading or trailing blanks (or
both).
NUMNULL INUMNULL SQLNULL If blank on input,
NUMNULL sets the null
NUMNULL edits a field for
valid numeric format,
allowing for leading and/or
trailing spaces.
STATE ISTATE Alpha Edits a field for valid
two-character postal state
code.
VCHAR IVCHAR Variable Maps data from
character TPO-fldname to DBNAME
hvname (hvname is defined
for SQL VARCHAR
column).


Name Value
VNULL IVNULL SQLNULL If blank on input, VNULL
Otherwise, VNULL maps
data from TPI-fldname to
DBNAME hvname (hvname
is defined for the SQL
VARCHAR column.)

A.3 Standard Field Edit Modules

The table below lists standard field edit modules provided by Advantage CA-Telon
and summarizes the edit function associated with each module.
Following the table is detailed documentation of each call module that includes:
■ A description
■ Input parameters
■ Output parameters
■ Edit processing
See A.4, “Calls to Field Edit Modules” on page A-54 for more information about edit
processing.
Module Name Edit Function

OCAR Replace unprintable characters
OCART Replace unprintable characters
OCDATE Format century date
OCJULIAN Convert century Julian date to mm/dd/ccyy
ODATE Format date
OFLNULL Format a floating-point field that may be null
OFLOAT Format a floating-point field
OFORMAT Reformat for output
OHEX Convert character to hex
OHEXA Convert characters to hex representation
OHEXP Convert characters to hex representation
OHEXT Convert characters to hex representation
OINTCDT Format century date (international)
OINTCJUL Format century Julian date (international)
OINTLDT Format date (international)
OINTLJUL Format Julian date (international)
OJULIAN Convert Julian date to mm/dd/yy
ONULL Format field based on null indicator
ONUMNULL Format integer field based on null indicator
OSSA Determine length of SSA


OVCHAR Alphanumeric move from variable-length character field
OVNULL Alphanumeric move from variable-length character field
IBDOL Validate dollar entry
IBCURR Validate international currency entry
ICURRNCY Validate international currency entry
IBNUM Validate numeric entry
ICDATE Check for valid century date
ICJULIAN Convert century date to century Julian
IDATE Check for valid date
IDOLLAR Check for dollar/currency entry
IFLNULL Validate floating-point entry and set null indicator
IFLOAT Check for floating-point number
IFULLCAR Check for blanks
IFORMAT Validate and reformat on input
IFULLNUM Check for all numeric characters
IHEX Convert hex representation to hex characters
IHEXA Convert hex representation to hex characters
IINTCDT Validate century date (international)
IINTCJUL Convert century date to century Julian (international)
IINTLDT Validate date (international)
IINTLJUL Validate date (international)
IJULIAN Convert date to Julian
ILALPHA Left-justify a character field
ILNULL Set null indicator and left-justify character field
ILVCHAR Left-justify a variable-length character field
ILVNULL Left-justify a variable-length length field and set null indicator
INBALPHA Check for imbedded blanks
INBNULL Check for imbedded blanks and set null indicator
INBVCHAR Check for imbedded blanks
INBVNULL Check blanks for variable-length field and set null indicator
INULL Set null indicator


INUMERIC Check for valid integer
INUMNULL Check for valid integer and set null indicator
ISTATE Check for valid state code
IVCHAR Alphanumeric move to variable-length character field
IVNULL Set null indicator for variable-length field
A.3.1 OCAR
Function: Replaces unprintable characters with periods.
Parameters:
Type Name Description

Input TPO-fieldname-LTH The length of the edited field. This must be
between 1 and 256.
Input output-fieldname The field to be edited by this routine.
Output TPO-fieldname The edited output of the routine that is
returned to the TPO buffer.
Edit processing:
1. Search the output field for unprintable characters.
2. Translate unprintable characters to periods (X'4B').
A.3.2 OCART
Function: Replaces unprintable characters with periods. The difference between this
field edit and IHEX is that this edit is passed the address of the field to be converted,
rather than the value of the field itself.
Parameters:

between 1 and 256.
Input output-fieldname The field to be edited by this routine.
Output TPO-fieldname The edited output of the routine that is

Edit processing:
1. Search output-fieldname for unprintable characters.
2. Translate unprintable characters to periods (X'4B').
A.3.3 OCDATE
Function: Format a date stored as ccyymmdd for output as either mm/dd/cc/yy (if
TPO-datefield-LTH is 10) or mmddccyy (if the TPO-datefield-LTH is 8).
Note: If the INTDATE parameter in the TLNIIS is set to I, a call to OINTCDT is
generated in place of a call to ODATE. For more information, refer to A.3.13,
“OINTCDT” on page A-20.
Parameters:

Input WORKFLD-NUMERIC The date to be edited. In a COBOL PIC
S9(11)V9(7) field, the date is laid out as
000ccyymmdd0000000. In a PL/I PIC
10(9)V(4)9T field, it is laid out as
00ccyymmdd00000.
Input TPO-datefield-LTH The length of the output field.
Output TPO-datefield The edited date returned to the TPO buffer.
Edit processing:
1. Move ccyy in WORKFILED-NUMERIC to make the result mmddccyy.
2. For 10-character output, insert the slashes.
3. Move the edited form to the output field.
A.3.4 OCJULIAN
Function: Formats a date stored in ccyyddd for output as mm/dd/ccyy (if
TPO-datefield-LTH is 10) or mmddccyy (if TPO-datefield-LTH is 8).
Note: If the INTDATE parameter in the TLNIIS is set to 'I,' a call to OINTCJUL is
generated in place of a call to OCJULIAN. See A.3.14, “OINTCJUL” on
page A-21 for more information.
Parameters:


0000ccyyddd0000000. In a PL/I PIC
(10)9V(4)9T field, it is laid out as
000ccyyddd00000.
Input TPO-fieldname-LTH The length of the output field.
Output TPO-fieldname The converted output of the routine that is
Edit processing:
1. Convert ddd from the ccyyddd of WORKFLD-NUMERIC to mmdd.
Note: If ddd is greater than 365 (366 for leap year), yy is adjusted one year for
each additional 365 (366) days.
2. If TPO-fieldname-LTH is 10, insert slashes (/) into the mmddccyy to create the
mm/dd/ccyy format.
3. Move the reformatted value to TPO-fieldname.
A.3.5 ODATE
Function: Formats a date stored as yymmdd for output as either mm/dd/yy (if
TPO-datefield-LTH is 8) or mmddyy (if the TPO-datefield-LTH is 6).
Note: If the INTDATE parameter in the TLNIIS is set to 'I', a call to OINTLDT is
generated in place of a call to ODATE. For more information, see A.3.15,
“OINTLDT” on page A-22.

Parameters:

00000yymmdd0000000. In a PL/I
0000yymmdd00000.
Output TPO-datefield The edited date returned to the TPO buffer.
Edit processing:
1. Move yy in WORKFLD-NUMERIC to make the result mmddyy.
2. For eight-character output, insert the slashes.
3. Move the edited form to the output field.
A.3.6 OFLNULL
Function: Right-justifies a floating-point or signed-numeric field.
If the null indicator is set, the output field is set to spaces. The edit uses the minimum
number of characters required to include all significant digits to the left of the implied
decimal point. Then, given the output field length, it formats as many significant
digits to the right of the decimal point as possible. Extra digits to the right of the
decimal are truncated, not rounded.
The routine signifies an overflow condition (the output field is too small to contain the
whole number) by filling the output field with all asterisks (*).
Parameters:

Input WORKFLD-NUMERIC The numeric value from the DBNAME field
to be edited. In COBOL, PIC S9(11)V9(7);
in PL/I, PIC (10)9V(7)9T.
Input TPO-fieldname-LTH The length of the output field. It must be 1
to 18 bytes for COBOL, 1 to 15 for PL/I.
Input WK-fieldname-NV Null indicator variable, set to -1 by SQL
when the DBNAME is null.
Output TPO-fieldname The edited field returned to the TPO output
buffer.

Edit processing:
1. Determine if the field is null by checking the null indicator.
2. If the field is null, move spaces to the TPO buffer field. Otherwise, if
WORKFLD-NUMERIC is negative, store a minus sign in the first position of
TEMP-OUT-FIELD, a temporary, internal, alphanumeric work area.
3. Bypass any leading zeros encountered before the implied decimal.
4. Find any significant digits to the right of the decimal point and store them in
TEMP-OUT-FIELD after any minus sign.
5. If the significant positions after the implied decimal are all zeros, exit the edit
processing. Otherwise, store a decimal point in TEMP-OUT-FIELD following the
digits already there.
6. Check to see if there are more significant characters in the TEMP-OUT-FIELD
than specified by TPO-fieldname-LTH. If so, fill TPO-fieldname with all asterisks
(*). Then exit the edit processing.
7. Find all remaining digits after the decimal and up to the last group of all zeros.
Store these digits in TEMP-OUT-FIELD after the decimal point.
8. Right-justify the TEMP-OUT-FIELD value in TPO-fieldname and end the routine.
A.3.7 OFLOAT
Function: Right-justify a floating-point or signed-numeric field.
The edit uses the minimum number of characters required to include all significant
digits to the left of the implied decimal point. Then, given the output field length, it
formats as many significant digits right of the decimal point as possible. Extra digits
right of the decimal are truncated, not rounded.
The routine signifies an overflow condition by filling the output field with all plus (+)
or minus (-) signs, depending on the sign of the input value.
Parameters:

Input WORKFLD-NUMERIC The value to be edited. Before editing, the
value is moved to this field from the
DBNAME field to be output. In COBOL,
PIC S9(11)V9(7); in PL/I, PIC (10)9V(4)9T.
Input TPO-fieldname-LTH The length of the edited field. It must be
from one to 18 bytes.
buffer.

Edit processing:
1. If WORKFLD-NUMERIC is negative, store a minus sign in the first position of
TEMP-OUT-FIELD, a temporary, internal, alphanumeric work area.
2. Bypass any leading zeros encountered before the implied decimal.
3. Find any significant digits right of the decimal point and store them in
TEMP-OUT-FIELD after any minus sign.
4. If the significant positions after the implied decimal are all zeros, exit the edit
processing. Otherwise, store a decimal point in TEMP-OUT-FIELD following the
digits already there.
5. Check to see if there are more significant characters in TEMP-OUT-FIELD than
specified by TPO-fieldname-LTH. If so, fill TPO-fieldname with all plus (+) or
all minus (-) signs, depending on the sign of the input field. Then exit the edit
processing.
6. Find all remaining digits after the decimal up to the last group of all zeros and
store these in TEMP-OUT-FIELD after the decimal point.
7. Right-justify TEMP-OUT-FIELD value in TPO-fieldname and end the routine.
A.3.8 OFORMAT
Function: Reformats output.
Specification for this special edit is made by entering the FORMAT command in the
SPEC field on the Update Output/Input/Outin Field screen or the Update Batch Output
Fields screen. See 4.11, “Update Output/Input/Outin Field” on page 4-32 for more
information.
A.3.9 OHEX
Converts a character string to the hexadecimal equivalent for each character.
Parameters:

Input output-fieldname The field holding the characters to be
converted to hex.
Input TPO-fieldname-LTH The length of the edited field. It can be from
2 to 256 bytes long.
Output TPO-fieldname The edited field returned to the TPO buffer.

Edit processing:
1. Determine the output field length.
2. Use the assembly language TRANSLATE instruction and convert the input in
eight-byte pieces.
3. If fewer than eight characters remain, convert the last bytes individually.
A.3.10 OHEXA
Function: Converts a one- to four-character string to the hexadecimal equivalent for
each character (for example, 'AB12' converts to 'C1C2F1F2'). This field edit is
designed specifically for converting addresses.
Parameters:

between 1 and 256.
Input output-fieldname The field to be converted by this routine.
Edit processing:
2. Use the assembler language TRANSLATE instruction to convert the output.
3. If the output length is not equal to 8, the first byte of input is ignored, and bytes 2
through 4 are converted (with the assumption that the input is a 24-bit address).
Otherwise, all four bytes are converted.
A.3.11 OHEXP
each character (for example, 'AB12' converts to 'C1C2F1F2'). The difference between
this field edit and OHEX is that this edit is passed the address of the field to be
converted, rather than the value of the field itself.
Parameters:

between 1 and 256.


Edit processing:
3. Move the output to TPO-fieldname.
A.3.12 OHEXT
each character (for example, 'AB12' converts to 'C1C2F1F2'). The difference between
this field edit and OHEX is that this edit is passed the address of the field to be
converted, rather than the value of the field itself.
Parameters:

between 1 and 256.
Edit processing:
3. Move the output to TPO-fieldname.
A.3.13 OINTCDT
Function: Reformats a date stored in ccyymmdd to dd/mm/ccyy (if
TPO-datefield-LTH is 10) or to ddmmccyy (if the TPO-datefield-LTH is 8).
A call to this field is generated in either of the following cases:

■ It is requested directly (that is, 'INTCDT' is identified as the output field edit)
■ The INTDATE parameter in the TLNIIS is set to 'I' and DATE is identified as the
output field edit

Parameters:

00ccyymmdd00000.
Output TPO-datefield The converted output of the routine that is
Edit processing:
2. Reformat the WORKFLD-NUMERIC date value from ccyymmdd to ddmmccyy. If
TPO-datefield-LTH is 10, insert slashes (/) to produce dd/mm/ccyy.
3. Move the reformatted value to TPO-datefield.
A.3.14 OINTCJUL
Function: Reformats a date stored in ccyyddd format to dd/mm/ccyy (if
TPO-datefield-LTH is 10) or ddmmccyy (if TPO-datefield-LTH is 8).
A call to this field edit is generated in either of these cases:

■ It is requested directly (that is, 'INTCDT' is identified as the output field edit)
■ The INTDATE parameter in the TLNIIS is set to 'I' and JULIAN is identified as
the output field edit
Parameters:

000ccyyddd00000.

Edit processing:
2. Reformat the WORKFLD-NUMERIC date value from ccyyddd to ddmmccyy. If
TPO-datefield-LTH is 10, insert slashes (/) to produce dd/mm/ccyy.
Note: If ddd is greater than 365 (366 for leap year), yy is adjusted one year for each
additional 365 (366) days.
A.3.15 OINTLDT
Function: Reformats a date stored in yymmdd format to dd/mm/yy (if
TPO-datefield-LTH is 8) or ddmmyy (if TPO-datefield-LTH is 6).

■ It is requested directly (that is, 'INTLDT' is identified as the output field edit)
■ The INTDATE parameter in TLNIIS is set to 'I' and DATE is identified as the
output field edit
Parameters:

00000yymmdd0000000. In a PL/I
PIC(10)9V(4)9T field, the date is laid out as
0000yymmdd00000.
Edit processing:
2. Reformat the WORKFLD-NUMERIC date value from yymmdd to ddmmyy. If
TPO-datefield-LTH is 8, insert slashes to produce dd/mm/yy.

A.3.16 OINTLJUL
Function: Reformat a date stored in yyddd format to dd/mm/yy (if the
TPO-datefield-LTH is 8) or ddmmyy (if the TPO-datefield-LTH is 6).

■ It is requested directly (that is, 'INTLJUL' is identified as the output field edit)
■ The INTDATE parameter in TLNIIS is set to 'I' and JULIAN is identified as the
output field edit
Parameters:

000000yyddd0000000. In a PL/I PIC
(10)9V(4)9T field, the date is laid out as
00000yyddd00000.
Edit processing:
2. Reformat the WORKFLD-NUMERIC date value from yyddd to ddmmyy. If
TPO-datefield-LTH is 8, insert slashes to produce dd/mm/yy.
Note: If ddd is greater than 365 (366 for leap year), yy is adjusted one year for
each additional 365 (366) days.
A.3.17 OJULIAN
Function: Formats a date stored as yyddd for output as mm/dd/yy (if
TPO-datefield-LTH is 8) or mmddyy (if TPO-datefield-LTH is 6).
Note: If the INTDATE parameter in the macro TLNIIS is set to 'I', a call to
OINTLJUL is generated in place of a call to OJULIAN. For more
information, see A.3.16, “OINTLJUL.”

Parameters:

Input WORKFLD-NUMERIC The date to be edited. It is the numeric
value moved from the DBDNAME field. In
a COBOL PIC S9(11)V9(7) field the date is
last out as 000000yyddd0000000. In a PL/I
as 00000yyddd00000.
buffer.
Edit processing:
1. Convert ddd from the yyddd of WORKFLD-NUMERIC to mmdd.
Note: If ddd is greater than 365 (366 for leap year), yy is adjusted up one year
for each additional 365 (or 366) days.
2. Insert slashes into the mmddyy to create the mm/dd/yy format.
A.3.18 ONULL
Function: Formats an output character field based on the null indicator.
Parameters:

Input OUTPUT-fieldname The field containing the characters to be
output.
The length of OUTPUT-fieldname
(DBNAME) must be at least as long as
TPO-fieldname.
Input WK-fieldname-NN Null indicator variable, set to -1 by SQL
when OUTPUT-fieldname is null.
buffer.
Edit processing:
2. If the field is null, move spaces to TPO-fieldname. Otherwise,
OUTPUT-fieldname is moved to TPO-fieldname.

A.3.19 ONUMNULL
Function: Right-justify an output integer to conform with a length specified by a
PIC parameter on a Field statement.
If the null indicator is set, the output field is set to spaces. Otherwise, this edit
right-justifies a numeric field.
The routine signifies an overflow condition by filling the output field with asterisks
(*).
Parameters:

Input WORKFLD-NUMERIC The numeric value from the DBNAME field
to be edited. In COBOL, PIC S9(11)V9(7);
in PL/I, PIC(10)9V(4)9T.
when the DBNAME is null.
buffer.
Edit processing:
2. If the field is null, move spaces to TPO-FIELDNAME. Otherwise, the numeric
value from the DBNAME field (WORKFLD-NUMERIC) is right-justified,
blank-filled into TPO-fieldname.
A.3.20 OSSA
Function: Determines the length of an input SSA.
Parameters:

Input segmentname-SSA The IMS SSA.
Output TPO-ssaname The SSA moved to the TPO output buffer.
Output TPO-ssaname-LTH The length of the SSA, to a maximum of
256.

Edit processing:
1. Search through the SSA to check for qualification.
2. If a space is found during the search, process the SSA as qualified, then branch to
compute the length below.
If, instead, a left paren is found, process the SSA as unqualified. Search until an
equal number of right and left parentheses is found, or until the maximum
TPO-ssaname-LTH (256) is reached.
3. Compute the length of the SSA and move the length to TPO-ssaname-LTH.
4. Move the SSA to TPO-ssaname.
A.3.21 OVCHAR
Function: Outputs variable-length character fields.
Parameters:

Input output-fieldname The variable-length character field containing
the characters to be output.
Input TPO-fieldname-LTH The length of the edited field.
Output TPO-fieldname The edited field returned to the TPO buffer.
Edit processing:
1. Determine the output field length (the lesser of the variable-length character field
length and TPO-fieldname-LTH).
2. Move the character portion of the variable-length character field to the output
buffer (TPO-fieldname).
A.3.22 OVNULL
Function: Outputs variable-length character fields by performing an alphanumeric
move from a variable-length character field based on the null indicator.
If the null indicator is set, the output field is set to spaces. Otherwise, the character
portion of the variable-length character field is moved to the output buffer.
Parameters:

Input OUTPUT-fieldname The variable-length character field containing
the characters to be output.


when DBNAME is null.
buffer.
Edit processing:
2. If the field is null, move spaces to TPO-fieldname. Otherwise, determine the
output length (the lesser of the variable-length character field length and
TPO-fieldname-LTH).
3. Move the character portion of the variable-length character field to the output
buffer.
A.3.23 IBDOL
Function: Checks input for valid dollar format, with a period (.) separating dollars
and cents.
The difference between this field edit and IDOLLAR is that it allows larger numbers
to be validated because the WORKFLD-NUMERIC-1 field in which the validated
entry is returned is defined as PIC S9(16)V9(2) for COBOL, PIC (13)9V9T for PL/I.
Note: If the INTDATE parameter in the macro TLNIIS is set to 'I', a call to IBCURR
is generated in place of a call to IBDOL. For more information, see A.3.24,
“IBCURR” on page A-28.
Parameters:

Input TPI-fieldname-LTH The length of the output field.
Input TPI-fieldname The value to be edited for valid dollar
amount, from the TP input buffer.
Output FIELD-EDIT-ERROR The error status of the edit. Possible
values are:
■ Spaces — No error was detected
■ G121 — An error was detected
during the edit


Output WORKFLD-NUMERIC-1 The validated value, in format PIC
S9(16)V9(2) for COBOL, PIC (13)9V9T
for PL/I.
Edit processing:
1. Strip incoming TPI field of leading and trailing blanks.
2. Test the antipenultimate position for a decimal point.
3. Strip the decimal point and move the justified number to
WORKFLD-NUMERIC-1.
4. Zero-fill the value in WORKFLD-NUMERIC-1.
5. Test WORKFLD-NUMERIC-1 for valid numeric value.
6. Assign FIELD-EDIT-ERROR, based on outcome of decimal point placement test
and numeric validation.
A.3.24 IBCURR
Function: Checks for valid international currency entry (that is, with a comma
separating the last two digits of the numeric entry). The difference between this field
edit and ICURRNCY is that it allows larger numbers to be validated because the
WORKFLD-NUMERIC-1 field in which the validated entry is returned is defined as
PIC S9(16)V9(2) for COBOL, PIC (13)9V9T for PL/I.

■ It is requested directly (that is, 'BCUR' is identified as the OUTPUT field edit).
■ The INTDATE parameter in TLNIIS is set to 'I'and 'BDOL' is identified as the
output field edit.
Parameters:

Input TPI-fieldname The value to be edited for valid currency
values are:
during the edit


S9(16)V9(2) for COBOL, PIC (13)9V9T
for PL/I.
Edit processing:
2. Test the antipenultimate position for a comma.
3. Strip the comma and move the justified number to WORKFLD-NUMERIC.
A.3.25 IBNUM
Function: Checks a field for valid integer characteristics. The difference between
this field edit and ICURRNCY is that it allows larger numbers to be validated because
the WORKFLD-NUMERIC-1 field in which the validated entry is returned is defined
as PIC 9(16)V9(2)T for COBOL, PIC (13)9V9T for PL/I.
Parameters:

Input TPI-fieldname The value to be edited for valid integer
values are:
during the edit
9(16)V9(2) for COBOL, PIC (13)9V9T
for PL/I.
Edit processing:
2. Justify the input entry and move it to WORKFLD-NUMERIC-1.


A.3.26 ICDATE
Function: Checks input for valid date format, mm/dd/ccyy or mm-dd-ccyy (if
TPO-datefield-LTH is 10) or mmddccyy (if TPO-datefield-Lth is 6), and stores it as
ccyymmdd.
Note: If the INTDATE parameter in the TLNIIS macro is set to 'I,' a call to
IINTCDT is generated in place of a call to IDATE. See A.3.37, “IINTCDT”
on page A-38 for more information..
Parameters:

Input TPI-datefield-LTH The length of the input field. It must be a
halfword binary with a value of 8 or 10.
Input TPI-datefield The contents of the TP input buffer (the date
to be edited).
Output FIELD-EDIT-ERROR The error status of the edit. Possible values
are:
■ ERR1 — Length error
■ G123 — An error was detected during
processing of an eight-byte date
■ G130 — An error occurred during
processing of a ten-byte date
Output WORKFLD-NUMERIC The result of the edit, in a COBOL PIC
S9(11)V9(7)9 field, the date is laid out as
000ccyymmdd0000000 for COBOL or
00ccyymmdd00000. The program moves this
to the appropriate storage area after return
from the edit routine.
Edit processing:
1. If the field length is ten bytes, check for valid delimiters. If invalid delimiters are
found, exit with error code G130.

2. Move the date to WORKFLD-NUMERIC and test for valid month, day, and year.
If invalid, return appropriate error code. Otherwise, return edited date in
WORKFLD-NUMERIC.
Note: The characters cc and yy are tested for only valid numeric characters. The
characters dd and mm are edited for valid characters.
.
A.3.27 ICURRNCY
Function: Checks for valid international currency entry (that is, with a comma
separating the last two digits of the numeric entry).

■ It is requested directly (that is, 'CURRNCY' is identified as the output field edit)
■ The INTDATE parameter in TLNIIS is set to 'I' and 'DOLLAR' is identified as the
output field edit
Parameters:

Input TPI-fieldname The value to be edited for valid currency
are:
the edit
Output WORKFLD-NUMERIC The validated value, in format PIC
S9(11)V9(7) for COBOL, PIC (10)9V(4)9T
for PL/I.
Edit processing:
2. Test the antipenultimate position for a comma.
3. Strip the comma and move the justified number to WORKFLD-NUMERIC.
4. Zero-fill the value in WORKFLD-NUMERIC.
5. Test WORKFLD-NUMERIC for valid numeric value.

A.3.28 IDATE
Function: Checks input for valid date format, mm/dd/yy or mm-dd-yy (if
TPI-datefield-LTH is 8) or mmddyy (if TPI-datefield-LTH is 6), and stores it as
yymmdd.
Note: If the INTDATE parameter in the macro TLNIIS is set to 'I,' a call to
IINTLDT is generated in place of a call to IDATE. For more information, see
A.3.40, “IINTLDT” on page A-41.
Parameters:

Input TPI-datefield-LTH The length of the input field. It must be a
halfword binary with a value of 6 or 8.
Input TPI-datefield The contents of the TP input buffer (the date
to be edited).
are:
■ Spaces — No error was detected.
processing of an item in mmddyy or
ddmmyy format.
■ G130 — An error occurred during
processing of an item in mm/dd/yy,
dd/mm/yy, mm-dd-yy, or dd-mm-yy
format.
Output WORKFLD-NUMERIC The result of the edit in a COBOL PIC
00000yymmdd0000000. For PL/I PIC
(10)9V(4)9T field, the date is laid out as or
0000yymmdd00000. The program moves this
to the appropriate storage area after return
from the edit routine.
Edit processing:
1. If the field length is eight, check for valid delimiters. If invalid delimiters are
found, exit with error code G130.
2. Move date to WORKFLD-NUMERIC and test for valid month, day, and year. If
invalid, return appropriate error code. Otherwise, return edited date in
WORKFLD-NUMERIC.
Note: Yy is tested for only valid numeric characters. Dd and mm are edited for
valid characters.

A.3.29 IDOLLAR
Function: Checks input for valid dollar format, with a period (.) separating dollars
and cents.
ICURRNCY is generated in place of a call to IDOLLAR. For more
information, see A.3.27, “ICURRNCY” on page A-31.
Parameters:

Input TPI-fieldname-LTH The length of the input field.
Input TPI-fieldname The contents of the TP input buffer (the
dollar amount to be edited).
are:
the edit
Output WORKFLD-NUMERIC The result of the edit in the COBOL PIC
S9(11)V9(7) format or PL/I PIC (10)9V(4)9T
format.
Edit processing:
2. Test the third from the last position for a valid decimal point (when
INTDATE=U) or comma (when INTDATE=I).
3. Strip the decimal point or comma and move the justified number to
WORKFLD-NUMERIC.
4. Zero-fill the value in WORKFLD-NUMERIC.
5. Test WORKFLD-NUMERIC for a valid numeric value.

A.3.30 IFLNULL
Function: Checks a field for a valid number. This allows for a leading sign and an
optional decimal point.
Parameters:

number to be edited).
are:
■ NXXX — An error was detected during
the edit
Output WORKFLD-NUMERIC The result of the edit in the COBOL
format.
Output WK-fieldname-NN Null indicator variable.
Edit processing: If the input field is blank, set the null indicator to -1. Otherwise,
set the null indicator to 0 and:
1. Skip leading blanks.
2. Check to see if the next character is a plus (+) or minus (-) sign.
3. Move all remaining characters, up to the decimal point, or a space, to a temporary
work area DIGIT-GROUP.
4. If DIGIT-GROUP has more than 11 digits in a COBOL program or more than 10
digits in a PL/I program, exit with error code NXXX. Otherwise, move the
contents of DIGIT-GROUP to a second temporary work area WS-FIELD-NUM.
5. If a decimal was found, place all numeric characters following the decimal point
into DIGIT-GROUP.
6. If the resulting DIGIT-GROUP has more than seven digits in a COBOL program
or more than five digits in a PL/I program, exit with error code NXXX.
Otherwise, move DIGIT-GROUP to WS-FIELD-NUM following the original
digits and a decimal point.
7. If the remaining unprocessed characters are blank, perform the following
calculation to obtain the correct sign:
WORKFLD-NUMERIC = +│- WS-FIELD-NUM

+ - is the sign stored as the first nonblank character from the input field. If no
character is found, plus (+) is assumed.
8. If any of the remaining unprocessed characters are not blanks, exit with error code
NXXX.
A.3.31 IFLOAT
Function: Checks a field for a valid number. This allows for a leading sign and
optional decimal point.
Parameters:

are:
the edit
format.
Edit processing:
1. Skip leading blanks.
2. Check to see if the next character is a plus (+) or minus (-) sign.
3. Move all remaining characters, up to the decimal point, or a space, in a temporary
work area DIGIT-GROUP.
4. If DIGIT-GROUP has more than eleven digits in a COBOL program or more than
nine digits in a PL/I program, exit with error code G122. Otherwise, move the
contents of DIGIT-GROUP to a second temporary work area WS-FIELD-NUM.
5. If a decimal was found, place all the following numeric characters in
DIGIT-GROUP.
6. If there are more than seven digits in the resulting DIGIT-GROUP value, exit with
error code G122. Otherwise, move DIGIT-GROUP to WS-FIELD-NUM
following the original digits and a decimal point.
7. If the remaining unprocessed characters are blank, perform the following
calculation to obtain the correct sign:
WORKFLD-NUMERIC = {+│-} ES-FIELD-NUM.

+ - is the sign stored as the first nonblank character from the input field. If no
character is found, plus (+) is assumed.
If any of the remaining unprocessed characters are not blanks, exit with error code
G122.
A.3.32 IFULLCAR
Function: Verify that there are no blanks in an input field. The difference between
IFULLCAR and INBALPHA is that IFULLCAR allows no blanks at all. INBALPHA
allows leading and trailing blanks.
Parameters:

character field being checked for blanks).
are:
the edit
Output WORKFLD-ALPHA The edited field. It is a 256-byte
alphanumeric field.
Edit processing:
1. Scan for blanks.
2. Return an error code of G122 if any blanks are found. Otherwise, move the field
to WORKFLD-ALPHA and exit.
A.3.33 IFORMAT
Function: Reformats input.
Specification for this special edit is made by entering the FORMAT command in the
SPEC field on the Update Output/Input/Outin Field screen.
See 4.11, “Update Output/Input/Outin Field” on page 4-32 or 6.4, “Update Batch
Output Fields” on page 6-9 for more information..

A.3.34 IFULLNUM
Verify that all input characters in the field are numeric.
Parameters:

number being checked).
are:
the edit
Output WORKFLD-NUMERIC The edited field in the COBOL S9(11)V9(7)
format or the PL/I PIC (10)9V(4)9T format.
Edit processing:
1. Test all positions for valid numeric characters.
2. If any non-numeric characters are found, exit with error code G124.
3. Right-justify and zero-fill the input value and move it to WORKFLD-NUMERIC.
A.3.35 IHEX
Function: Converts a hex-character string to the hexadecimal equivalent for each
pair of hex-character representations (for example, 'C1F2' converts to 'A1').
Parameters:

Input TPI-fieldname-LTH The length of the edited field. This must be
between 1 and 256.
Input TPI-fieldname The field to be converted by this routine,
from the TP input buffer.
Output FIELD-EDIT-ERROR The error status of the edit.
Output WORKFLD-ALPHA The converted value.

Edit processing:
1. Determine the length of the input field.
2. Use the assembler language TRANSLATE instruction to convert the output from
hex-representation to it's character equivalent.
3. Assign FIELD-EDIT-ERROR.
A.3.36 IHEXA
Function: Converts a hex-character string of one to eight bytes to the hexadecimal
equivalent for each pair of hex-character representations (for example, 'C1F2' converts
to 'A1'). This field edit is designed specifically for converting addresses.
Parameters:

Input TPI-fieldname-LTH The length of the edited field. This must be
between 1 and 256.
Input TPI-fieldname The field to be converted by this routine,
Output FIELD-EDIT-ERROR The error status of the edit.
Output WORKFLD-ALPHA The converted value.
Edit processing:
1. Determine the length of the input field.
2. Use the assembly language TRANSLATE instruction to convert the output from
hex-representation to hexadecimal.
3. Right-justify the input into the full-word output field.
4. Assign FIELD-EDIT-ERROR.
A.3.37 IINTCDT
Function: Validates a date entered as dd/mm/ccyy or dd-mm-ccyy (if
TPI-datefield-LTH is 10) and stores it in ccyymmdd format.

■ It is requested directly (that is, 'INTCDT' is identified as the input field edit)
■ The INTDATE parameter in TLNIIS is set to 'I' and CDATE is identified as the
input field edit
Parameters:


Input TPI-datefield-LTH The length of the input field. It must be
eight or ten bytes.
Input TPI-datefield The field to be validated by this routine,
are:
validation of an eight-byte date
validation of a ten-byte date
Output WORKFLD-NUMERIC The converted date. In a COBOL PIC
00ccyymmdd00000.
Edit processing:
1. Determine the input field length.
2. If 10, check for valid delimiters ('/' or '-'). If invalid delimiters are found, set
FIELD-EDIT-ERROR to G130.
3. Move date to WORKFLD-NUMERIC and test for valid day, month, century, and
year.
4. If invalid, set FIELD-EDIT-ERROR to the appropriate error code. Otherwise,
return edited date in WORKFLD-NUMERIC.
Note: Cc and yy are tested only for valid numeric characters. Dd and mm are
edited for both numeric and valid month-day combinations.
A.3.38 IINTCJUL
Function: Validates a date entered as dd/mm/ccyy or dd-mm-ccyy (if
TPI-datefield-LTH is 10) and stores it in ccyyddd format.

■ It is requested directly (that is, 'INTCJUL' is identified as the input field edit)
■ The INTDATE parameter in TLNIIS is set to 'I' and CJULIAN is identified as the
input field edit

Parameters:

Input TPI-datefield-LTH The length of the input field. It must be
eight or ten bytes.
are:
000ccyyddd00000.
Edit processing:
FIELD-EDIT-ERROR to ERR1.
3. Test for valid day, month, and year. If invalid, set FIELD-EDIT-ERROR to the
ERR1 error code. Otherwise, convert the edited date to ccyyddd and move it to
WORKFLD-NUMERIC.
Note: Cc and yy are tested only for valid numeric characters. Dd and mm are
edited for both numeric and valid month-day combinations.
A.3.39 ICJULIAN
Function: Checks input for a valid date format, mm/dd/ccyy or mmd-dd-ccyy (if
TPI-datefield-LTH is 10) or mmddccyy (if TPI-datefield-LTH is 8).
Note: If the INTDATE parameter in TLNIIS is set to 'I,' a call to IINTCJUL is
generated in place of a call to ICJULIAN. See A.3.38, “IINTCJUL” on
page A-39 later in this appendix.
Parameters:

Input TPI-fieldname-LTH The length of the input field. It must be
eight or ten bytes.


Input TPI-fieldname The field to be validated by this routine,
from the TP input buffer (the date to be
edited).
are:
Output WORKFLD-NUMERIC The Julian date in a COBOL PIC
S9(11)V9(7) format laid out as
0000ccyyddd0000000 or a PL/I PIC
(10)9V(4)9T format laid out as
000ccyyddd00000 in PL/I.
Edit processing:
1. If the length is 10, test for valid delimiters ('/' or '-'). Exit with error code ERR1
if they are not found.
2. Test for valid day, month, and year (cc is checked simply for valid numeric
value). Exit with error code ERR1 if any one is invalid.
3. Convert the date to Julian format (ccyyddd) and move the results to
WORKFLD-NUMERIC.
A.3.40 IINTLDT
Function: Validates a date entered as dd/mm/yy or dd-mm-yy (if TPI-datefield-LTH
is 8), or ddmmyy (if TPI-datefield-LTH is 6), and stores it in yymmdd format

■ It is requested directly (that is, 'INTLDT' is identified as the input field edit)
■ The INTDATE parameter in TLNIIS is set to 'I' and DATE is identified as the
input field edit
Parameters:

Input TPI-datefield-LTH The length of the input field. It must be six
or eight bytes.


are:
validation of a six-byte date
validation of an eight-byte date
00000yymmdd0000000. In a PL/I PIC
0000yymmdd00000.
Edit processing:
FIELD-EDIT-ERROR to G130.
3. Move date to WORKFLD-NUMERIC and test for valid day, month, and year.
4. If invalid, set FIELD-EDIT-ERROR to the appropriate error code. Otherwise,
return edited date in WORKFLD-NUMERIC.
Note: Yy is tested only for valid numeric characters. Dd and mm are edited for
both numeric and valid month-day combinations.
A.3.41 IINTLJUL
Function: Validates a date entered as dd/mm/yy or dd-mm-yy (if TPI-datefield-LTH
is 8) or ddmmyy (if TPI-datefield-LTH is 6), and store it in yyddd format.

■ It is requested directly (that is, 'INTLJUL' is identified as the input field edit)
■ The INTDATE parameter in TLNIIS is set to 'I' and JULIAN is identified as the
input field edit
Parameters:

Input TPI-datefield-LTH The length of the input field. It must be six
or eight bytes.


are:
■ ERR1 — An error was detected during
validation.
000000yyddd0000000. In a PL/I PIC
00000yyddd00000.
Edit processing:
FIELD-EDIT-ERROR to ERR1.
3. Test for valid day, month, and year. If invalid, set FIELD-EDIT-ERROR to
ERR1. Otherwise, convert edited date to yyddd and move it to
WORKFLD-NUMERIC.
Note: Yy is tested only for valid numeric characters. Dd and mm are edited for
both numeric and valid month-day combinations.
A.3.42 IJULIAN
Function: Checks input for a valid date format, mm/dd/yy or mm-dd-yy (if
TPI-datefield-LTH is 8) or mmddyy (if TPI-datefield-LTH is 6).
IINTLJUL is generated in place of a call to IJULIAN. For more information,
see A.3.41, “IINTLJUL” on page A-42.
Parameters:

Input TPI-fieldname-LTH The length of the input field. This must be 6
or 8.
Input TPI-fieldname The contents of the TP input buffer (the date
to be edited).


are:
■ ERR1 — An error was detected during
validation.
Output WORKFLD-NUMERIC This returns the Julian date in a COBOL PIC
000000yyddd0000000 in a PL/I PIC
00000yyddd00000.
Edit processing:
1. If the field length is 8, test for valid delimiters (/ or -). Exit with error code
ERR1 if they are not found.
2. Test for valid day, month, and year. (Yy is checked simply for valid numeric
value.) Exit with error code ERR1 if any one is invalid.
3. Convert the date to Julian format of yyddd and move the results to
WORKFLD-NUMERIC.
A.3.43 ILALPHA
Function: Left-justifies a character field.
Parameters:

Input TPI-fieldname-LTH The length of the input fields.
Input TPI-fieldname The contents of the TP input buffer (the field
to be left-justified).
Output WORKFLD-ALPHA The edited field as a 256-byte alphanumeric
field.
Edit processing:
1. Start on left and search for the first nonblank character.
2. Compute length of remaining field.
3. Use the result to left-justify the result in WORKFLD-ALPHA.

A.3.44 ILNULL
Function: Left-justifies a character field.
Parameters:

to be left-justified).
are:
Output WORKFLD-ALPHA The result of the edit as a 256-byte
alphanumeric field.
set the null indicator to 0 and:
1. Start on the left and search for the first nonblank character.
3. Use the result to left-justify the remaining characters into WORKFLD-ALPHA.
A.3.45 ILVCHAR
Function: Left-justifies a variable-length character field.
Parameters:

variable length field to be left-justified).
Output WORKFLD-VCHAR The edited field as a 256-byte alphanumeric
variable-length field.
Edit processing:
1. Start on left and search for the first nonblank variable-length character.
2. Search for the last nonblank variable-length character.


4. Use the result to left-justify the result in WORKFLD-VCHAR.
5. Move the length to the length part of WORKFLD-VCHAR.
A.3.46 ILVNULL
Function: Left-justifies a variable-length character field.
Parameters:

variable-length field to be left-justified).
are:
Output WORKFLD-VCHAR The result of the edit as a 256-byte
variable-length alphanumeric field.
set the null indicator to 0, and:
1. Start on the left and search for the first nonblank character.
2. Search for the last nonblank character.
4. Use the result to left-justify the remaining characters into WORKFLD-VCHAR.
5. Move the length of the remaining field to the length portion of the
WORKFLD-VCHAR.

A.3.47 INBALPHA
Function: Checks for imbedded blanks. INBALPHA differs from IFULLCAR
because it allows leading and trailing blanks. IFULLCAR allows neither.
Parameters:

character field being checked for imbedded
blanks).
are:
the edit
Output WORKFLD-ALPHA The edited field in a 256-byte alphanumeric
field.
Edit processing:
1. Search for the first nonblank character.
2. Search for the next nonblank character or end-of-field.
3. If end-of-field is reached before the next nonblank, move the input field to
WORKFLD-ALPHA and exit without an error code.
4. If a blank is found, make sure all remaining characters are blank. If they are,
move the input field to WORKFLD-ALPHA and exit without an error code. If
another nonblank is found, exit with error code G122.
A.3.48 INBNULL
Function: Checks for imbedded blanks. This edit allows for leading and trailing
blanks.
Parameters:

being checked for imbedded blanks).


are:
■ N122 — An error was detected during
the edit
Output WORKFLD-ALPHA The result of the edit as a 256-byte
alphanumeric field.
3. If end-of-field is reached before the next nonblank character, move the input field
to WORKFLD-ALPHA and exit without an error code.
4. If a blank is found, make sure all remaining characters are blank. If they are,
move the input field to WORKFLD-ALPHA and exit without an error code. If
another nonblank character is found, exit with error code N122.
A.3.49 INBVCHAR
Function: Checks for imbedded blanks. This edit allows leading and trailing blanks.
Parameters:

variable-length character field being checked
for imbedded blanks).
are:
the edit
Output WORKFLD-VCHAR The edited field in a 256-byte alphanumeric
variable-length field.

Edit processing:
3. If end-of-field is reached before the next nonblank, move the input field to
WORKFLD-VCHAR and exit without an error code.
4. If a blank is found, make sure all remaining variable-length characters are blank.
If they are, move the input field to the character part of WORKFLD-VCHAR,
move the length to the length part of WORKFLD-VCHAR and exit without an
error code. If another nonblank is found, exit with error code G122.
A.3.50 INBVNULL
Function: Checks for imbedded blanks in a variable-length character field. This
edit allows for leading and trailing blanks.
Parameters:

variable-length field being checked for
imbedded blanks).
are:
the edit
3. If end-of-field is reached before the next nonblank character, move the input field
to the character portion of WORKFLD-VCHAR, move the length to the length
portion of WORKFLD-VCHAR, and exit without an error code.
4. If a blank is found, make sure all remaining variable-length characters are blank.
If they are, move the input field to the character portion of the

WORKFLD-VCHAR, move the length to the length portion of

WORKFLD-VCHAR, and exit without an error code. If another nonblank
character is found, exit with error code N122.
A.3.51 INULL
Function: Checks for a completely blank field.
Parameters:

to be checked).
are:
Output WORKFLD-ALPHA This returns the result of the edit as a
256-byte alphanumeric field.
set the null indicator to 0, and move the contents of TPI-fieldname to
WORKFLD-ALPHA.
A.3.52 INUMERIC
Function: Checks for a valid integer. This field edit allows for leading and trailing
blanks, but not imbedded blanks and non-numeric characters.
Parameters:

are:
the edit


Output WORKFLD-NUMERIC The edited field in the COBOL S9(11)V9(7)
format or the PL/I (10)9V(4)9T format.
Edit processing:
1. Search for the first nonblank character. Make sure it is numeric.
2. Search for the earlier of the next nonblank or the end-of-field. Make sure there
are no imbedded blanks and that all characters are numeric.
3. If no imbedded blanks or non-numeric characters are found, right-justify and
zero-fill the field in WORKFLD-NUMERIC and exit. Otherwise, exit with error
code G122.
A.3.53 INUMNULL
Function: Checks for a valid integer. This edit allows leading and trailing blanks,
but not imbedded blanks and non-numeric characters.
Parameters:

being edited).
are:
the edit
S9(11)V9(7) format or PL/I (10)9V(4)9T
format.
1. Search for the first nonblank character. Make sure it is numeric.
2. Search for the earlier of the next nonblank character or end-of-field. Make sure
there are no imbedded blanks and that all characters are numeric.

3. If no imbedded blanks or non-numeric characters are found, right-justify and

zero-fill the field in WORKFLD-NUMERIC, and exit the edit. Otherwise, exit the
edit with an error code of N122.
A.3.54 ISTATE
Function: Verify that a valid two-character postal state code is entered.
Parameters:

Input TPI-fieldname-LTH The length of the input field. It must always
be 2.
Input TPI-fieldname The contents of the TP input buffer (the state
code to be checked).
are:
the edit
Output WORKFLD-ALPHA This returns the edited field in a 256-byte
alphanumeric field.
Edit processing:
1. Move TPI-fieldname to WORKFLD-ALPHA.
2. Verify the contents of WORKFLD-ALPHA against a state-code table that includes
the 50 states, the District of Columbia, and Puerto Rico.
3. If there is a match, exit with no error. Otherwise, exit with error code G133.
A.3.55 IVCHAR
Function: Moves a variable-length character field.
Parameters:

variable-length character field to be moved).


Output WORKFLD-VCHAR The edited field in a 256-byte (maximum)
alphanumeric variable-length character field
and the length of the variable-length
character field.
Edit processing:
1. Search for the last nonblank character.
2. Determine remaining length of field.
3. Move the input field to the character part of WORKFLD-VCHAR.
4. Move the length to the length part of WORKFLD-VCHAR.
A.3.56 IVNULL
Function: Sets a null indicator based on the contents of a variable-length character
field. This edit can be used to check for a blank input field.
Parameters:

variable-length field to be checked).
are:
2. Determine the remaining length of field.
3. Move the input field to the character portion of WORKFLD-VCHAR.
4. Move the length to the length portion of WORKFLD-VCHAR.

A.4 Calls to Field Edit Modules

Automatic calls to input or output edits, whether Advantage CA-Telon- or
user-supplied always pass parameters in the order shown in the examples below.
A.4.1 Output edit processing

The following code shows an automatic call to an output edit, the Advantage
CA-Telon-supplied DATE output edit routine. DAY is the screen field to receive the
edited output.
COBOL:
CALL 'ODATE ' USING TPO-DAY
TPO-DAY-LTH,
WORKFLD-NUMERIC.
PL/I:
CALL ODATE (TPO_DAY,
TPO_DAY_LTH,
WORKFLD_NUMERIC);
A.4.2 Input edit processing

The following code shows the automatic call to an input edit, the Advantage
CA-Telon-supplied DATE input edit routine. DAY is the screen field holding the
input to be edited. The edited data is returned to WORKFLD-NUMERIC.
COBOL:
CALL 'IDATE ' USING FIELD-EDIT-ERROR TPI-DAY-LTH
TPI-DAY
WORKFLD-NUMERIC.
PL/I:
CALL IDATE (FIELD_EDIT_ERROR,
TPI_DAY_LTH,
TPI_DAY,
WORKFLD_NUMERIC);

Appendix B. Screen Program Identifiers
Appendix B. Screen Program Identifiers B-1

B.1 Introduction
B.1 Introduction
This appendix lists Advantage CA-Telon screens in two ways:
■ Alphabetically by screen program ID
■ Alphabetically by screen title
Each list associates the screen title with the identifier of the program that displays the
screen.
B-2 Design Facility Reference Guide

B.2 Screen Program IDs

The table below lists Advantage CA-Telon screen program identifiers and their screen
titles in alphabetical order by program identifier.
Program ID Screen Title

B100 Batch Program Definition
B110 Create/Update Batch Definitions
B114 Show/Purge Batch Definitions
B168 Update Batch Environment
B1M1 List Merge Key Groups
B1M2 Update Group Merge Keys
B1MA Update Match Keys
B1S1 List Sorts
B1S2 Update Sort Definition
B210 Create/Update Stored Procedure Definition
B214 Show/Purge Stored Procedure Definition
B268 Update Stored Procedure Environment
B269 Show/Purge Stored Procedure Environment
B2P1 Update Stored Procedure Parameters
B2P2 Stored Procedure Parameter DBNAME Extension
D100 Data Administration
D111 Create/Update DBD
D112 Update DBD Segment
D114 Show/Update Data Set Default Data
D115 List Search Fields
D116 Update DLIDSCs For Segment Member
D117 Show/Purge DBDs
D118 Create/Update SSA/Command for DL/I DB/Segment
D11J Update CICS Journal Default Data
D11Q Update CICS Queue Default Data
D120 Verify DLIDSC Count
D141 Create/Update SQL Tables/TLNROWs


D142 Specify SQL Tables Being Joined
D143 Update SQL Join — Join Columns
D144 Update SQL Join — Access Columns
D145 Update SQL Join — Alias
D147 Show/Purge DB2 Definitions
D151 Update CA-IDMS/CA-Datacom SQL Tables/TLNROWs
D152 Update SQL Alias
D157 Show/Purge UNIX Definitions
D167 Show/Purge SQL Definitions
D211 Create/Update PSB Or File Group
D215 Update Sensitive Segment
D216 Update Sensitive TLNROWs
D217 Show/Purge PSBs Or File Groups
D401 List Data Administration Information
D402 List SQL Tables/Joins
D411 Catalog/Import DB2 Tables
F100 TDF Main Menu
F105 User Profile Maintenance
F110 Update PF Keys Definition
F112 Update Program Definition Defaults
F113 Update Environment Definition Defaults
F114 Update Session Controls
F116 Color Profile
F120 TDF Installation
F121 List TDF Users
F130 Update Installation Restrictions
F140 List Headers
F151 Update UNIX Environment Defaults
F153 Update WINCH Environment Defaults
F154 Update Stored Procedure Environment Definition Defaults
F401 WIP Processing — List Definitions


F402 WIP Processing — List Data Administration Information
F403 WIP Processing — List SQL
M100 Prototyping Facility
M120 View Panel Definition
M151 View Presentation Store
M200 List Presentation Stores
M401 List Panel Definitions
N100 Nonterminal Program Definition
N110 Create/Update Nonterminal Definition
N114 Show/Purge Nonterminal Definition
P100 Panel Definition
P103 Edit Panel Image
P104 Line Edit
P113 PI/PD Editor
P114 Image Line Editor
P150 Summary Update Literal Field Data
P151 Summary Update Input Field Data
P152 Summary Update Output Field Data
P153 Summary Update Outin Field Data
P154 Summary Update Select Field Data
P155 Update Panel Fields (Online)
P156 Update Help Message Parameters
P157 Update Select Parameters
P158 Update Attribute Parameter
P159 Update Mapout Parameter
P161 List Consistency Edits
P165 Update Cross-Field Edit (XFEDIT)
P168 Update Segment Edit (SEGEDIT)
P170 Create/Update Table Segloop
P175 Create/Update File Segloop
P180 Update Literal Fields


P181 Update Output/Input/Outin Field
P182 Update Select Fields
P186 Update Parameter List Extension
P255 Update Panel Fields (Batch)
P280 Update Batch Literal Fields
P281 Update Batch Output Fields
P290 Update Panel Group
P401 List Panel Definitions
PHL2 Help for Help
PHLP Telon Help Facility
PHLU Help Update
S100 Online Program Definition
S110 Create/Update Screen Definition
S112 Update/Show Screen Parameters
S114 Show/Purge Screen Definition
S125 Create/Update Data Group
S127 Update DBMS Characteristics
S135 Update Database Segment
S136 Update Data Set Record
S137 Select New Row Name
S13J Update CICS Journal Record
S13Q Update CICS Queue Record
S144 SQL Field Extension Screen
S145 Update DL/I Detail Data Access
S146 Update VSAM or Sequential Detail Data Access
S147 Update SQL Detail Data Access
S149 Update TPPCB Detail Data Access
S14J Update CICS Journal Data Access
S14Q Update CICS Queue Data Access
S151 Edit Custom Code
S159 List/Show Custom Code


S161 Show/Purge TSO or IMS Screen Environment
S162 Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment
S163 Update IMS MFSs
S164 Update PL/I Executable Options
S165 Update CICS Screen Environment
S166 Show/Purge CICS Screen Environment
S167 Update IMS/DC Driver Environment
S168 Update IMS/DC Report Environment
S169 Update AS/400 Screen Environment
S170 Show/Purge AS/400 Screen Environment
S171 Show/Purge AS/400 Driver Environment
S172
S175 Update UNIX Screen Environment
S176 Show/Purge UNIX Screen Environment
S177 Update WINCH Screen Environment
S179
S180 Show/Purge WINCH Screen Environment
S185 Update Database User I/O SSALIST
S187 Select Columns
S210 Create/Update Driver Definitions
S214 Show/Purge Driver Definitions
S225 List Stored Procedures To Be Called
S269 Update AS/400 Driver Environment
S275 Update UNIX Driver Environment
S276 Show/Purge UNIX Driver Environment
S277 Update WINCH Driver Environment
S278 Show/Purge WINCH Driver Environment
S279
S310 Create/Update IMS/DC Report Definitions
S314 Show/Purge IMS/DC Report Definitions
S401 List Environments


U100 Utilities
U300 WINCH Command Processor
Z100 Update Parameter Overflow
Z101 Show Parameter Overflow
Z102 Extended Parameter Utility
Z103 Update Parameter Overflow

B.3 Screen Titles
B.3 Screen Titles

The table below lists Advantage CA-Telon screen program titles and their program
identifiers in alphabetical order by screen title.
Screen Title Program ID

Batch Program Definition B100
Catalog/Import DB2 Tables D411
Color Profile F116
Create/Update Batch Definitions B110
Create/Update Data Group S125
Create/Update Driver Definitions S210
Create/Update DBD D111
Create/Update SQL Tables/TLNROWs D141
Create/Update File Segloop P175
Create/Update IMS/DC Report Definitions S310
Create/Update Nonterminal Definition N110
Create/Update PSB Or File Group D211
Create/Update Screen Definition S110
Create/Update SSA/Command For DL/I DB/Segment D118
Create/Update Stored Procedure Definition B210
Create/Update Table Segloop P170
Data Administration D100
WINCH Command Processor U300
Edit Custom Code S151
Edit Panel Image P103
Extended Parameter Utility Z102
Field Extension S144
Help For Help PHL2
Help Update PHLU
Image Line Editor P114
Line Edit P104
List Application Headers F140

B.3 Screen Titles

List Consistency Edits P161
List Data Administration Information D401
List Environments S401
List SQL Tables/Joins D402
List Merge Key Groups B1M1
List Panel Definitions M401
List Panel Definitions P401
List Presentation Stores M200
List Search Fields D115
List Select Columns S187
List Sorts B1S1
List Stored Procedures To Be Called S225
List TDF Users F121
List/Show Custom Code S159
Online Program Definition S100
Panel Definition P100
Prototyping Facility M100
PI/PD Editor P113
Select New Row Name Z101
Show Parameter Overflow S137
Show/Purge AS/400 Driver Environment S171
Show/Purge AS/400 Screen Environment S170
Show/Purge Batch Definitions B114
Show/Purge CICS Screen Environment S166
Show/Purge DB2 Definitions D147
Show/Purge DBDs D117
Show/Purge Driver Definitions S214
Show/Purge IMS/DC Report Definitions S314
Show/Purge Nonterminal Definition N114
Show/Purge WINCH Driver Environment S278
Show/Purge WINCH Screen Environment S180

B.3 Screen Titles

Show/Purge PSBs Or File Groups D217
Show/Purge Screen Definition S114
Show/Purge SQL Definitions D167
Show/Purge Stored Procedure Definition B214
Show/Purge Stored Procedure Environment B269
Show/Purge TSO or IMS Screen Environment S161
Show/Purge UNIX Definitions D157
Show/Purge UNIX Driver Environment S276
Show/Purge UNIX Screen Environment S176
Show/Update Data Set Default Data D114
Specify SQL Tables Being Joined D142
SQL Field Extension Screen S144
Stored Procedure Parameter DBNAME Extension B2P2
Summary Update Input Field Data P151
Summary Update Literal Field Data P150
Summary Update Outin Field Data P153
Summary Update Output Field Data P152
Summary Update Select Field Data P154
TDF Installation F120
TDF Main Menu F100
Telon Help Facility PHLP
Update Attribute Parameter P158
Update AS/400 Driver Environment S269
Update AS/400 Screen Environment S169
Update Batch Environment B168
Update Batch Literal Fields P280
Update Batch Output Fields P281
Update Color Profile F116
Update Cross-Field Edit (XFEDIT) P165
Update CICS Journal Data Access S14J
Update CICS Journal Default Data D11J

B.3 Screen Titles

Update CICS Journal Record S13J
Update CICS Queue Data Access S14Q
Update CICS Queue Default Data D11Q
Update CICS Queue Record S13Q
Update CICS Screen Environment S165
Update Data Set Record S136
Update Database Segment S135
Update Database User I/O SSALIST S185
Update DBD Segment D112
Update DBMS Characteristics S127
Update DL/I Detail Data Access S145
Update DLIDSCs For Segment Member D116
Update Environment Definition Defaults F113
Update Group Merge Keys B1M2
Update Help Message Parameters P156
Update Installation Restrictions F130
Update IDMS Record Information S138
Update IDMS Set/Area Information S139
Update IMS MFSs S163
Update IMS/DC Driver Environment S167
Update IMS/DC Report Environment S168
Update Literal Fields P180
Update Mapout Parameter P159
Update Match Keys B1MA
Update Output/Input/Outin Field P181
Update Panel Fields (Batch) P255
Update Panel Fields (Online) P155
Update Panel Group P290
Update Parameter List Extension P186
Update Parameter Overflow Z103
Update Parameter Overflow Z100

B.3 Screen Titles

Update WINCH Driver Environment S277
Update WINCH Environment Defaults F153
Update WINCH Screen Environment S177
Update PF Keys Definition F110
Update PL/I Executable Options S164
Update Program Definition Defaults F112
Update Segment Edit (SEGEDIT) P168
Update Select Fields P182
Update Select Parameters P157
Update Sensitive IDMS Segments D218
Update Sensitive Segment D215
Update Sensitive TLNROWs D216
Update Session Controls F114
Update Sort Definition B1S2
Update SQL Detail Data Access S147
Update SQL Join — Access Columns D144
Update SQL Join — Alias D145
Update SQL Join — Join Columns D143
Update Stored Procedure Environment B268
Update Stored Procedure Environment Definition Defaults F154
Update Stored Procedure Parameters B2P1
Update TPPCB Detail Data Access S149
Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment S162
Update UNIX Driver Environment S275
Update UNIX Environment Defaults F151
Update UNIX Screen Environment S175
Update VSAM or Sequential Detail Data Access S146
Update/Show Screen Parameters S112
User Profile Maintenance F105
Utilities U100
Verify DLIDSC Count D120

B.3 Screen Titles

View Panel Definition M120
View Presentation Store M151
WIP Processing — List Data Administration Information F402
WIP Processing — List Definitions F401
WIP Processing — List SQL F403

Index
ABC field
Special Characters Create/Update PSB Or File Group 3-32
/=n, TDF command 7-21 Update DBMS Characteristics 5-32
/END, TDF command 7-20, 7-21 ABCALL, see ABC field 3-32
/FORMAT, TDF command 5-99, 5-102 AC
/HELP, TDF command 7-21 Add/Update SQL Join Alias 3-86
/HOLD, TDF command 7-20 Create/Update IDMS SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-64
/MENU, TDF command 7-20 AC field
/SWAP, TDF command 7-20 Create/Update SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-57
.CLR, prototyping command 7-19, 7-20 Select Columns 5-59
.CV, prototyping command 7-19 Update SQL Join — Access Columns 3-84
.LOD, prototyping command 7-19 access code, I/O, identifying a 4-58
.MRG, prototyping command 7-19 ACCESS COLUMNS field
.SAV, prototyping command 7-19 Update SQL Join — Join Columns 3-81
.UPD, prototyping command 7-20 ACCESS field
.UPI, prototyping command 7-20 Create/Update DBD 3-8
.VPS, prototyping command 7-20 Create/Update SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-57
@DEFINE usage 5-25, 5-33, 5-36, 5-41 Show/Update Data Set Default Data 3-38
@DUMMY usage 5-25, 5-33, 5-36, 5-42 Update Data Set Record 5-40
^N (NOTNULL) Update SQL Join — Access Columns 3-84
Create/Update IDMS SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-68 ACCMODE field
Show/Update Data Set Default Data 3-40
Update Data Set Record 5-44
A Add/Update SQL Join Alias 3-85
A-100 INIT, custom code 5-123, 5-124
adding custom code
A-100-OUTPUT-INIT 5-12, 5-135
PGMCUST field 5-124, 5-136
A-100-OUTPUT-INIT program section 5-12
SECTION field 5-124, 5-136
OINIT1 field 5-135
AFTER line command 9-46
A-1000-PROCESS-TRAN batch program section
AFTER MULTIPLE line command 9-46
PRCTRAN field 6-27
ALARM field
A100I 5-125, 5-136
Update Program Definition Defaults 2-6
A100t 5-125, 5-136
Update/Show Screen Parameters 5-117
A4 status code 5-102, 5-130
alarm, terminal 5-117
A4EMSG field
ALIAS
Update IMS/DC Driver Environment 5-130
Add/Update SQL Join Alias 3-86
Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-102
Create/Update IDMS SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-63
A4EPGM field
Update SQL ALIAS 3-76
Update IMS/DC Driver Environment 5-130
ALIAS field
Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-102
Create/Update SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-56
Index X-1
ALIAS field (continued)
Select Columns 5-59 B
Update SQL Join — Access Columns 3-83 B-100-OUTPUT-EDITS program section 5-13, 5-136
use with COPY 3-55 B-100-OUTPUT-EDITS section 4-24
use with FROM 3-83 B100 screen identifier 6-18
ALIGN field B100I 5-136
Update PL/I Executable Options 5-107 B100T 5-136
aligning program variables, see ALIGN field 5-107 B110 screen identifier 6-22
ALLDETAIL 6-12 B114 screen identifier 6-22
alphanumeric field, formatting a 4-35, 6-11 B168 screen identifier 6-33
AN100I 5-147 B1M2 screen identifier 6-50
AN100T 5-147 B1MA screen identifier 6-37
AND Boolean operator, see BOOLOOP field 3-25 B1S1 screen identifier 6-40
APPLID field B1S2 screen identifier 6-44
Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-25 BACKWARD primary command 9-14
Create/Update Driver Definitions 5-123 BASE DEFN field
Create/Update IMS/DC Report Definitions 5-134 Batch Program Definition menu 6-20
Create/Update Nonterminal Definition 5-144 Online Program Definition menu 5-7
Update Program Definition Defaults 2-6 BASE field
Update/Show Screen Parameters 5-115 Data Administration menu 3-5
Arithmetic symbols (syntax diagrams) 1-9 batch
ASCII 6-46 panel definition example 6-5
ASUTIME batch definition
ASUTIME 2-23 TDF Main menu 1-17
attribute byte, panel field 9-4 batch environment 2-16, 2-32
attributes, protection of, see ATTRPRO field 4-26 Batch Program Definition 6-18
ATTRINT field Batch Program Definition menu (long form) 6-18
Update Attribute Parameter 4-26 Batch Program Definition menu (short form) 6-18
Update Literal Fields 4-30 BEFORE line command 9-46
Update Output/Input/Outin Field 4-37 BEFORE MULTIPLE line command 9-47
Update Select Fields 4-43 BLANK.WHEN.SAME field
ATTRPRO field Update Batch Literal Fields 6-8
Update Attribute Parameter 4-26 Update Batch Output Fields 6-10
Update Output/Input/Outin Field 4-36 blanks, checking for A-36
Update Select Fields 4-43 BLKSIZE field
auto exec 5-3 Show/Update Data Set Default Data 3-38
create/update segments requested for 4-41 BLKSZ field
auto exec requests Update Data Set Record 5-40
online programs 5-20 BLL-POINTER-LIST options 2-12
AUTOEXEC requests blocking factor, see BLKSIZE field 3-38
defined 5-24 BMS
match master (MATCHM) 5-26 control blocks, generation of 4-17, 4-29, 4-32, 4-40
match transaction (MATCHT) 5-26 creation 8-5
TRANSACT data access 5-146 BMS field
automatic PSB scheduling 2-11 Update CICS Screen Environment 5-114
AUX/MAIN field Update Environment Definition Defaults 2-11
Update CICS Queue Data Access 5-80 BMSMAP field
Update CICS Queue Default Data 3-44 Update CICS Screen Environment 5-112
Update CICS Queue Record 5-73 BN100I 5-147
auxiliary storage BN100T 5-147
queues 3-44, 5-73, 5-80
X-2 Design Facility Reference Guide

BN200I 5-147 C950T 5-126
BN200T 5-147 C960I 5-126
BN500I 5-147 C960T 5-126
BN500T 5-147 C970I 5-126, 5-137
BN600I 5-147 C970T 5-137
BN600T 5-147 C980I 5-137
BN900I 5-147 C980T 5-137
BN900T 5-147 C985I 5-137
BOOLOOP field C985T 5-137
Create/Update SSA/Command For DL/I C995I 5-126, 5-137
DB/Segment 3-25 C995T 5-126, 5-137
BOTPAGE 6-5, 6-15 CALC field
BOX line command 9-47 Update Batch Output Fields 6-13
BROWSE usage 5-23, 5-25, 5-36, 5-41 CALL FUNC field
buffer area, user defined 5-101 Update Segment Edit (SEGEDIT) 4-58
BWS 6-10 CANCEL line command 9-47
BYTES=, DBD FIELD statement 3-10, 3-16 CANCEL primary command 9-14
BYTES=, DBD SEGM statement 3-10, 3-15 CAPS field
Update/Show Screen Parameters 5-116
C CAPS primary command 9-15
C command code 3-24, 5-62 CAR A-3
C-1000-GET-MAST section code 6-27 CASE field
C-1000-GET-TRAN batch program section Panel Definition menu 4-6
GETTRAN field 6-27 procedure for modifying 4-6
C-1000-GET-TRAN section code 6-27 Catalog/Import DB2 Tables 3-49
C-1000-GET-TRANSACTION batch program section CDATE A-3, A-5
PRCTRAN field 6-27 CH primary command 9-15
C-1000-TRAN-DONE section code 6-27 CHANGE primary command 9-16
C-300 XFER, custom code 5-124 CHAR 3-57
C-920-GET-WORKSPA program section 2-15 character field, left justify A-44
C-CNT field check for all numeric characters A-36, A-37
Select New Row Name 5-34 check for blanks A-36
Update Sensitive TLNROWs 3-36 check for floating point number A-35
C100I 5-125 check for imbedded blanks A-47
C100T 5-125 check for valid dollar entry A-33
C200I 5-125, 5-136 check for valid integer A-50
C200T 5-125, 5-137 checking for valid date A-27
C300I 5-125 checking for valid state A-52
C3ooT 5-125 CICS 5-147, 5-148
C900I 5-125 BMS 2-11, 5-114
C900T 5-125 BMS map 8-5
C910I 5-125 DATA SET options 3-40, 5-71
C910T 5-125 environment 2-32
C920I 5-125 environment fields 2-10
C920T 5-126 environment, updating 5-109
C925I 5-126 handle conditions 5-81, 5-84
C925T 5-126 show (display) environment 5-110
C940I 5-137 CICS DATA SET options 5-44
C940T 5-137 CICS, program sections
PSBSCHD field 2-11
Index X-3
CINCRE field COL field (continued)
Create/Update File Segloop 4-70 Update Batch Output Fields 6-10
Create/Update Table Segloop 4-66 Update Help Message Parameters 4-21
CJNAME field 3-47 Update Literal Fields 4-29
Update CICS Journal Default Data 3-46 Update Mapout Parameter 4-23
Update CICS Journal Record 5-77 Update Output/Input/Outin Field 4-33
CJULIAN A-3, A-5 Update Panel Fields (Batch) 6-4
clear data, from active presentation store 7-19, 7-20 Update Panel Fields (Online) 4-17
clear values, in the active presentation store 7-19 Update Select Fields 4-40
clear variable names, from Active presentation Update Select Parameters 5-140
store 7-19, 7-20 COLLATE field
CMDCODE field Update Sort Definition 6-46
Create/Update SSA/Command For DL/I COLLID
DB/Segment 3-23 COLLID 2-24
Update Segment Edit (SEGEDIT) 4-59 color attribute
CMND field Update Program Definition Defaults 2-7
Update Database Segment 5-37 Update/Show Screen Parameters 5-118, 5-119
Update DBD Segment 3-13 color, see EACOLOR field or EAHIGH field 4-26
Update DL/I Detail Data Access 5-64 COLS field
Update DLIDSCs For Segment Member 3-20 Catalog/Import DB2 Tables 3-50
CMND field, also see CMDCODE field 3-13 COLS line command 9-48
CMPLOPT field column
Create/Update Batch Definition 6-26 accessing a 3-57, 3-81, 3-84, 5-59
Create/Update Driver Definitions 5-123 naming a 3-56, 3-82, 3-84
Create/Update IMS/DC Report Definition 5-134 column 1
Create/Update Nonterminal Definition 5-144 ignore 8-6
Create/Update Screen Definition 5-11 printed output 8-7
CN100I 5-147 column count, see C-CNT field 3-36
CN100T 5-147 COLUMN field
CN200I 5-147 Create/Update File Segloop 4-70
CN200T 5-147 Create/Update Table Segloop 4-66
CNTGRP field COLUMN NAME
Update Batch Output Fields 6-12 Add/Update SQL Join Alias 3-85
COBDIV field Create/Update IDMS SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-63
Show/Update Data Set Default Data 3-39 Update SQL ALIAS 3-76
Update Data Set Record 5-43 COLUMN NAME field
COBFCPY field Create/Update SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-56
Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-26 Select Columns 5-59
COBOL Update SQL Join — Access Columns 3-84
specified as programming language 2-5 Update SQL Join — Join Columns 3-82
COBOL BLL-POINT-LIST options, see USGCOPY column size, screen 5-11
field 5-112 column spacing
COBOL code generation Create/Update File Segloop 4-70
nonterminal programs 5-144 Create/Update Table Segloop 4-66
sorts 6-45 columns 5-34
COBVSKY field generated I/O sensitive, see SENCOLS field 5-50
Show/Update Data Set Default Data 3-39 GROUP BY clause 5-51
Update Data Set Record 5-43 HAVING clause 5-52
COL field keys for TELON generated I/O, see KY or KEYCOLS
Update Attribute Parameter 4-25 field 5-52
Update Batch Literal Fields 6-7 number of 3-50

columns (continued) consistency edits (continued)
number of lines and columns on report 5-134 Create/Update File Segloop 4-69
ORDERBY clause, see ORDERBY field 5-51 Create/Update Table Segloop 4-65
COLUMNS DEFINED field example 4-61
Select New Row Name 5-34 List Consistency Edits 4-49
Update Sensitive TLNROWs 3-36 Update Segment Edit (SEGEDIT) 4-55
Comma CONTROL 6-16
repeat symbol, use in 1-12 FORGRP field 6-16
COMMAND 5-149 GPTYPE field 6-5, 6-15
Add/Update SQL Join Alias 3-85 control breaks 6-16
Create/Update IDMS SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-61 CONVERS field
Update SQL ALIAS 3-75 Update Environment Definition Defaults 2-13
Command Code field Update IMS/DC Driver Environment 5-127
overriding of 3-13, 3-20 CONVERS parameter
overriding the 3-23, 5-64 Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-97
Command Code field, overriding of 5-37 conversational system, generating a 2-13
command line CONVERT
line edit mode 4-14 FIELD 6-11
COMMAND POS field convert character to hex A-18
Prototyping Facility menu 7-6 convert date to Julian A-37
COMMAND-FLOW 7-16 convert Julian to mm/dd/yy A-19
COMMAND-INIT 7-16 converting literals to uppercase 2-33
COMMENT line command 9-48 COPY
comments, see REMARKS field 5-10 Create/Update IDMS SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-61
COMMIT field Update SQL ALIAS 3-75
Show/Update Data Set Default Data 3-38 COPY EDIT BASE field
Update Batch Environment 6-35 Update Cross-Field Edit (XFEDIT) 4-52
Update Environment Definition Defaults 2-17 Update Segment Edit (SEGEDIT) 4-55
COMPAT field COPY field
Create/Update PSB Or File Group 3-29 Create/Update SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-55
COMPRESS STATEMENTS field Show/Update Data Set Default Data 3-38
Update Session Controls 2-32 Update CICS Journal Default Data 3-47
COMPRESSED field Update CICS Journal Record 5-79
Utilities menu 8-5 Update CICS Queue Default Data 3-45
COMRETN Update CICS Queue Record 5-75
COMRETN 2-25 Update Data Set Record 5-42
concatenated key 3-23 Update Database Segment 5-36
length of 5-31 Update DBD Segment 3-12
qualify an I/O request 3-24 Update Sort Definition 6-47
to qualify an I/O request 5-62 COPY line command 9-9, 9-48
CONCATK field COPY member
Create/Update SSA/Command For DL/I I/O area of segment, see COPYLV1 field 3-12
DB/Segment 3-24 listing of, batch 6-28
Update DL/I Detail Data Access 5-62 maximum number, batch definition 6-27
CONNECT field segment definition, see COPY field 3-12
Update Batch Environment 6-35 COPY primary command 9-19
CONSIS field COPY/INCLUDE
Create/Update Screen Definition 5-13 linkage section inclusion 5-111
Panel Definition menu 4-7 copying member 8-3
consistency edits 5-13 COPYLBL
CONSIS field 4-7 Create/Update IDMS SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-62
Index X-5
COPYLBL (continued) Create/Update IDMS SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-60
Update SQL ALIAS 3-76 Create/Update IMS/DC Report Definitions 5-132
COPYLBL field Create/Update Nonterminal Definition 5-142, 5-149
Create/Update SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-55 Create/Update PSB Or File Group 3-28
Show/Update Data Set Default Data 3-39 Create/Update Screen Definition 5-8
Update CICS Queue Default Data 3-45 Create/Update SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-53
Update CICS Queue Record 5-76 Create/Update SSA/Command For DL/I
Update Data Set Record 5-42 DB/Segment 3-22
Update Database Segment 5-37 Create/Update Table Segloop 4-65
Update DBD Segment 3-13 creating a batch definition 6-18
Update Sort Definition 6-47 creating a panel definition 4-3
COPYLV1 creating BMS 8-5
Create/Update IDMS SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-62 creating MFS 8-5
Update SQL ALIAS 3-76 creating PSB 8-6
COPYLV1 field creating Telon source code 8-3
Create/Update SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-55 cross-field edit
Show/Update Data Set Default Data 3-38 XFEDIT 4-52
Update CICS Journal Default Data 3-47 CTLLTH field
Update CICS Journal Record 5-79 Update Panel Group 6-16
Update CICS Queue Default Data 3-45 CTLPIC field
Update CICS Queue Record 5-75 Update Panel Group 6-16
Update Data Set Record 5-42 CTLVAR field
Update Database Segment 5-36 Update Panel Group 6-16
Update DBD Segment 3-12 currency format
Update Sort Definition 6-47 international A-7, A-33
CORRELATION NAME CURRENT field
Add/Update SQL Join Alias 3-85 Create/Update SSA/Command For DL/I
CORRELATION NAME field DB/Segment 3-23
Specify Tables Being Joined 3-79 Update DL/I Detail Data Access 5-63
Update SQL Join — Access Columns 3-84 CURRENT ROW NAME field
Update SQL Join — Join Columns 3-82 Select New Row Name 5-33
CPYCALL field CURSCUS field
Update SQL Detail Data Access 5-53 Create/Update Screen Definition 5-12
CPYINIT field CURSOR AT FIELD field
Update SQL Detail Data Access 5-54 Update Cross-Field Edit (XFEDIT) 4-54
CPYKEY field Update Segment Edit (SEGEDIT) 4-58
Update SQL Detail Data Access 5-54 CURSOR field
CPYTERM field Create/Update Screen Definition 5-11
Update SQL Detail Data Access 5-54 cursor positioning 5-11, 5-12
CQNAME field 3-45 CURSOR, declaring for delete, see DELETE field 5-50
Update CICS Queue Default Data 3-43 CURSOR, declaring for update, see UPDATE field 5-49
Update CICS Queue Record 5-73 CUSTCODE field
CREATE I/O requests 5-23 Batch Program Definition menu 6-20
CREATE primary command 9-20 Online Program Definition menu 5-7
CREATE usage 5-25 custom code 5-4, 5-12
Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-22 A-100 INIT 5-123, 5-124
Create/Update Data Group screen 5-20 A-1000-PROCESS-TRAN 6-27
Create/Update DBD 3-8 adding with PGMCUST 2-7, 5-124, 5-136
Create/Update Driver Definitions 5-120 adding with SECTION 5-124, 5-136
Create/Update File Segloop 4-69 B-100-OUTPUT-EDITS 5-13, 5-136
batch definition, editing and listing 6-27, 6-28

custom code (continued) D100 screen identifier 3-3
C-1000-GET-TRAN 6-27 D100T 5-126
C-300 XFER 5-124 D111 screen identifier 3-8
CPYCALL field 5-53 D112 screen identifier 3-11
CPYINIT field 5-54 D114 screen identifier 3-37
CPYKEY field 5-54 D115 screen identifier 3-15
CPYTERM field 5-54 D116 screen identifier 3-18
creating 5-10, 5-53, 5-121, 5-133 D118 screen identifier 3-22
CURSCUS 5-11, 5-12 D11J screen identifier 3-46
CUSTCODE field 5-7 D11Q screen identifier 3-43
D-100 TERM 5-124 D120 screen identifier 3-27
D-100-INPUT-INIT 5-13 D141 screen identifier 3-53
DESCRIPTION field 5-92 D142 screen identifier 3-79
E-100-INPUT-EDITS 5-13 D143 screen identifier 3-81
following call (EXEC SQL) 5-54, 5-55 D144 screen identifier 3-83
H-100-INPUT-TERM 5-14 D151 screen identifier (CA-IDMS/SQL) 3-53
ICUST2 4-73 D161 screen identifier 3-53
in the body of the call (EXEC SQL) 5-54 D211 screen identifier 3-28
last accessed 5-92 D215 screen identifier 3-33
members list 5-133 D216 screen identifier 3-35
name of 5-91 D217 screen identifier 3-28
nonterminal definition, editing 5-93, 5-143 D401 screen identifier 3-6
nonterminal definition, listing 5-143, 5-146 D402 screen identifier 3-51
OCUST1 4-67, 4-72 D411 screen identifier 3-49
OCUST2 4-67, 4-72 data access 5-3
OCUST3 4-67, 4-72 data administration
OINIT1 5-12 TDF Main menu 1-17
OINIT1 field 5-135 Data Administration menu 3-3
OINIT2 5-12, 5-135 data area name, defining the 4-59
PGMCUST field 5-14 data base processing options 5-31
prior to the call (EXEC SQL) 5-54 data group
Q-1000-PROGRAM-INIT 6-27 separator line 5-22
renaming 5-91 data group, referencing the DLIDSC 3-19
RESLTCC field 5-54 data search criterion, see DLIDSC field 3-13
RESLTPR field 5-55 data set
termination section 5-14 I/O 3-42
termination section of the driver program 5-124 index 3-41, 5-45
transfer control section of the driver program 5-124 label 3-38, 5-41
user that last accessed the 5-92 opening a 3-38, 5-40
X-100-CONSIS-EDITS 5-13 record layout 3-38, 3-39, 5-42, 5-43
custom code editor 9-10 DATA SET field
invoking 9-11 Show/Update Data Set Default Data 3-37
CUSTOM CODE field Update Data Set Record 5-40
Create/Update IMS/DC Report Definitions 5-133 Update Group Merge Keys 6-50
DATA SET options, CICS 3-40, 5-44, 5-71
DATA SET, DBD statement 3-9
D DATA SET=, DBD statement 3-9
D command code 3-23, 5-63 database description, see DBD 3-2
D-100 TERM, custom code 5-124 database processing options 3-31, 3-34
D-100-INPUT-INIT program section 5-13 DATANAME field
Update Group Merge Keys 6-50
Index X-7
DATANAME field (continued) DBMS field
Update Match Keys 6-38 Update Batch Environment 6-34
Update Sort Definition 6-48 Update CICS Screen Environment 5-110
DATE A-3, A-5 DBNAME field
international A-3, A-15, A-23, A-32, A-43 Update Batch Output Fields 6-10
Julian A-4, A-7, A-43 Update Output/Input/Outin Field 4-34
U.S. format A-3, A-15, A-23, A-32, A-43 Update Panel Fields (Online) 4-19
date, checking for valid A-27 Update Select Fields 4-41
date, formatting the A-15 Update Sensitive Segment 3-33
DB field View Presentation Store 7-16
SQL type 3-52 DBNAME OR TEXT field
DB processing options 3-31, 5-31 Update Panel Fields (Batch) 6-5
DB2 DCLCOPY field
qualifier 3-50, 3-79 Create/Update SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-55
read-only access 1-17 DCLGEN 3-55
DB2 I/O WHERE conditions 3-81, 3-84 DCLLBL field
DBD Create/Update SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-55
adding a segment 5-22 DCLRDEF field
BYTES= 3-10, 3-15, 3-16 Create/Update SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-55
DATA SET 3-9 DD1=, DBD DATA SET statement 3-9
DATA SET statement 3-10 DEBKEY, OPTLIST field 3-40, 5-44, 5-71
DATA SET= 3-9 DEBREC, OPTLIST field 3-40, 5-44, 5-71
DD1= 3-9 DEBUG field
defining/maintaining a 3-2 Update Environment Definition Defaults 2-17
description of 3-5, 3-7 DEC
DEVICE= 3-10 Create/Update IDMS SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-68
FIELD statement 3-10, 3-13, 3-15, 3-16, 3-20, 3-24, DEC field
5-38, 5-64 Create/Update SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-58
importing 3-3 Select Columns 5-60
last update of 3-7 DECIMAL 3-57
LCHILD 3-9 DEDB 3-8
maintaining a 3-8 DEFAULT HEADER field
name of 3-5, 3-11, 3-18, 3-22, 3-27 Update Session Controls 2-30
NAME= 3-10, 3-13, 3-15, 3-20, 3-24, 5-38, 5-64 Default values (syntax diagrams) 1-12
PARENT= 3-10, 3-15 defaults
SEGM 3-9 PF keys 2-28
SEGM statement 3-10, 3-15 session controls 2-30
START= 3-10, 3-16 Update Program Definition Defaults 2-5
DBD field User Profile Maintenance 2-3
Create/Update SSA/Command For DL/I DEFIN field
DB/Segment 3-22 Panel Definition menu 4-6
Update DLIDSCs For Segment Member 3-18 DEFINE GROUP line command 9-48
Verify DLIDSC Count 3-27 DEFINE usage 5-25, 5-33, 5-36, 5-41
DBDNAME operand, PCB statement 3-31, 5-31 defining field characteristics 4-16
dbdname-PCB 3-31 DELETE field
DBDNAME=, PCB statement 3-30 Update SQL Detail Data Access 5-50
DBINFO DELETE GROUP line command 9-49
DBINFO 2-26 DELETE line command 9-49
DBLSPC field DELETE usage 5-25
Utilities menu 8-6 Delimiters
syntax diagrams, use in 1-10

delimiting SEGLOOP, see SEGLOOP DELIMITERS DIR 3-40, 5-44
field 4-20 direct access 3-40, 5-44
dependent AND Boolean operator, see BOOLOOP DITTO CHARACTER field
field 3-25 Update Session Controls 2-33
DESC field DL/I
Batch Program Definition menu 6-20 automatic weighting of calls 2-16
Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-23 PCB masks 2-12
Create/Update Driver Definitions 5-121 PSBs, scheduling and terminating 2-11
Create/Update IMS/DC Report Definitions 5-133 DL/I segment name, accessed by the SEGEDIT 4-56
Create/Update Nonterminal Definition 5-143 DL/I SSA overrides, list of 4-59
Create/Update Screen Definition 5-10 DL/I SSA, defining the 4-59
Data Administration menu 3-5 DLI QUALIFY field
Online Program Definition menu 5-7 Update Segment Edit (SEGEDIT) 4-59
Panel Definition menu 4-5 DLIDSC 3-22, 3-23, 3-27
Utilities menu 8-4 selecting 3-18, 5-37, 5-64
DESCR DLIDSC field
Create/Update IDMS SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-61 Create/Update SSA/Command For DL/I
Update SQL ALIAS 3-75 DB/Segment 3-22
DESCR field Update DBD Segment 3-11, 3-13
Create/Update SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-54 Update DLIDSCs For Segment Member 3-19
DESCRIPTION field Verify DLIDSC Count 3-27
List Consistency Edits 4-50 DLIDSC, data group references the 3-19
List Data Administration Information 3-7 DLIWGHT field
List Merge Key Groups 6-43 Update Batch Environment 6-35
List Panel Definitions 4-10, 7-10 Update Environment Definition Defaults 2-16
List Presentation Stores 7-14 DOLLAR A-5
List Sorts 6-41 dollar, check for valid entry A-33
List SQL Tables/Joins 3-52 driver definition
List/Show Custom Code 5-92 creating/updating/purging/showing a 5-5
destination of report output 6-26 description of 5-7
DETAIL DSCREF field
FORGRP field 6-16 Update DL/I Detail Data Access 5-64
GPTYPE field 6-5, 6-15 DUMMY usage 5-25, 5-33, 5-36, 5-41
DETERM DUPLICATE 3-39
DETERM 2-26 DYNAMIC 3-40, 5-44
determine length of SSA A-25 dynamic access 3-40, 5-44
DEVICE field
Update IMS/DC Report Environment 5-139
device type, specifying the 5-104 E
DEVICE=, DBD DATA SET statement 3-10 E-100 program section
DFHCOMMAREA, defining size of 2-10 INEDIT field 5-141
DG SEPARATORS field E-100-INPUT-EDITS program section 4-41, 5-13
Update Session Controls 2-34 EACOLOR field
DGADD Update Attribute Parameter 4-26
queues 5-73 Update Literal Fields 4-30
DGADD command 5-20 Update Output/Input/Outin Field 4-37
DGADDing Update Select Fields 4-44
journals 3-46 EAERR field
DICTNAM Update Program Definition Defaults 2-8
Create/Update IDMS SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-62 Update/Show Screen Parameters 5-119
Index X-9
EAHIGH field ENV PSB field
Update Attribute Parameter 4-27 Utilities menu 8-6
Update Literal Fields 4-30 ENVIRON field
Update Output/Input/Outin Field 4-38 4.0B Online Program Definition menu 5-7
Update Select Fields 4-44 Batch Program Definition menu 6-21
EAIN field environment 5-7
Update Program Definition Defaults 2-7 environment characteristics 5-127
Update/Show Screen Parameters 5-118 environment definition defaults, updating of 2-9, 2-10
EALIT field ENVIRONMENT field
Update Program Definition Defaults 2-8 Update PL/I Executable Options 5-107
Update/Show Screen Parameters 5-118 Update Session Controls 2-32
EAOUT field environment PSB 2-33
Update Program Definition Defaults 2-8 EOFKEY field
Update/Show Screen Parameters 5-118 Update Program Definition Defaults 2-6
EATTR field Update/Show Screen Parameters 5-117
Update IMS MFSs 5-105 EQUATE primary command 9-22
Update Program Definition Defaults 2-7 ERASE EOF key 2-6, 5-117
Update/Show Screen Parameters 5-117 erase fields
EAVALID field with ERASE EOF key 2-6
Update Attribute Parameter 4-27 ERRCHAR FIELDS field
Update Output/Input/Outin Field 4-38 Update Cross-Field Edit (XFEDIT) 4-54
Update Select Fields 4-44 Update Segment Edit (SEGEDIT) 4-57
EBCDIC 6-46 ERRMSG1 4-58, 5-102
EDIT CONDITION field ERROR CONDITION field
Update Cross-Field Edit (XFEDIT) 4-53 Update Segment Edit (SEGEDIT) 4-57
Edit Custom Code 5-93 error condition, during import 3-50
EDIT FLAG FIELD field error condition, highlighting a 4-54, 4-57
Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-23 ERROR MESSAGE field
Edit Flag fields Update Cross-Field Edit (XFEDIT) 4-53
Create/Update Nonterminal Definition 5-143 Update Segment Edit (SEGEDIT) 4-58
Update SQL Detail Data Access 5-53 error message output field 4-12
edit flags ERROR-ATTR 2-6, 5-117
non-mix of 6-24 ESDS 3-40, 5-43, 6-26
EDIT NAME field EXCLUDE line command 9-49
Update Cross-Field Edit (XFEDIT) 4-52 EXEC SQL statement access 3-57, 5-59
Update Segment Edit (SEGEDIT) 4-55 execution options 5-108
Edit option fields exit routine, MFS 5-104
Create/Update Driver Definitions 5-121, 5-133 EXP field
Edit Panel Image 4-11 Create/Update PSB Or File Group 3-31
EDIT primary command 9-20 exporting a program definition 8-3
editing control, prototyping facility 7-6 EXPRESS field
editing, type of 4-34 Update DBMS Characteristics 5-31
END line command 9-49 EXPRESS value, see EXP field 3-31
END primary command 9-21, 9-22 extended attributes 2-7, 5-105, 5-117
ENDTRAN field extended attributes characteristics 5-115
Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-27 extended field list
entries, required 4-54 input edits 4-47
entry-sequenced data set 3-40, 5-43 output edits 4-48
ENV 5-149 EXTSCUR
ENV FORMAT field EXTSCUR 2-24
Utilities menu 8-5

FIELD SPLIT line command 9-5, 9-50
F FIELD Statement
F command code 3-23 FLDTYPE parameter A-2
F105 screen identifier 2-3, 2-35 field types 2-32
Color Profile Maintenance 2-35 APPLID field 2-6
F110 screen identifier 2-28 OUTIFIL field 2-6
F112 screen identifier 2-5 FIELD UPDATE field
F113 screen identifier 2-10 Catalog/Import DB2 Tables 3-50
F114 screen identifier 2-30 field update rules
F144 screen identifier 8-8 fields with panel data 9-5
F151 screen identifier 2-19 general rules 9-4
F153 screen identifier 2-21 literal fields 9-5
F154 screen identifier 2-23 long literal fields 9-8
fast path DEDB 3-8 panel editors 9-4
FDREC field variable fields 9-5
Update VSAM or Sequential Detail Data wrapped literal fields 9-8
Access 5-70 wrapped variable fields 9-7
FEAT field field usage 2-31
Update IMS MFSs 5-105 fields
feedback area, PCB 3-31 (Command field) 7-18
FENCED (Edit flags) 5-143
FENCED 2-26 (Edit line) 5-95
FETCH ONLY field (Function) 4-9
Update SQL Detail Data Access 5-47 (Item manipulation) 5-91
FGNAME field (KEY extension) 5-39
Update Sensitive TLNROWs 3-35 (Line command) 3-18, 3-82, 3-83, 5-22, 5-64, 5-94,
field 6-40, 6-42, 7-8, 7-12, 7-16
CONVERT 6-11 (Line commands) 4-14
FORMAT 6-11 (Message area) 3-50
Type 3-16 (Panel image display window) 4-21, 4-23, 4-25
field edits (Select field) 3-51
input routines A-5 (Sequence number) 3-13, 3-16
output routines A-3 (TO) ID 8-5
standard modules A-11 (Update field) 3-14
standard routines A-3 ^N (NOTNULL) 3-59, 3-68
field entries 4-57 ^NULL 5-60
field entries, required 4-54 A4EMSG 5-102, 5-131
Field Extension 5-56 A4EPGM 5-102, 5-130
FIELD field ABC 3-32
Panel Definition menu 4-7 ABCALL 5-32
FIELD NAME field AC 3-57, 3-64, 3-84, 3-86
Update Batch Literal Fields 6-7 AC (ACCESS) 5-59
Update Batch Output Fields 6-9 ACCESS 3-8, 3-38, 5-40
Update Literal Fields 4-29 ACCESS COLUMNS 3-81
Update Output/Input/Outin Field 4-32 ACCMODE 3-40, 5-44
Update Parameter List Extension 4-47 ALARM 2-6, 5-117
Update Select Fields 4-40 ALIAS 3-56, 3-63, 3-76, 3-83, 3-86, 5-59
FIELD NAME OR POSITION field ALIGN 5-108
Update Parameter List Extension 4-47 APPLID 2-6, 5-115, 5-123, 5-135, 5-145, 6-25
FIELD SELECTION field ATTRINT 4-26, 4-30, 4-37, 4-43
Update Session Controls 2-32 ATTRPRO 4-26, 4-37, 4-43
Index X-11
fields (continued) fields (continued)
auto exec requests 6-50 CPYKEY 5-54
AUX/MAIN 3-44, 5-73, 5-80 CPYTERM 5-54
BASE 3-5 CQNAME 3-43, 5-73
BASE DEFN 5-7, 6-20 CTLLTH 6-16
BLANK.WHEN.SAME 6-8, 6-10 CTLPIC 6-16
BLKSIZ 5-40 CTLVAR 6-16
BLKSIZE 3-38 CURRENT 3-23, 5-63
BMS 2-11, 5-112 CURRENT ROW NAME 5-33
BMSMAP 5-112 CURSCUS 5-13
BOOLOP 3-25 CURSOR 5-11
C-CNT 3-36, 5-34 CURSOR AT FIELD 4-54, 4-58
CALC 6-13 CUSTCODE 5-7, 6-21
CALL FUNC 4-58 DATA SET 3-37, 5-40, 6-50
CALLTYP 2-20, 2-22 DATANAME 6-38, 6-49, 6-50
CANCEL 2-20, 2-22 DBD 3-18, 3-22, 3-27, 5-35
CAPS 2-6, 5-116 DBLSPC 8-6
CASE 4-6 DBMS 2-17, 5-110, 6-34
CINCRE 4-66, 4-70 DBNAME 3-33, 4-34, 4-42, 6-10, 7-16
CJNAME 3-46, 5-77 DBNAME OR TEXT 4-19, 6-5
CMDCODE 3-23, 4-59 DCLCOPY 3-55
CMND 3-13, 3-20, 5-38, 5-64 DCLLBL 3-55
CNTGRP 6-12 DCLRDEF 3-55
COBDIV 3-39, 5-43 DEC 3-58, 3-68, 5-60
COBVSKY 3-39, 5-43 DEFAULT HEADER 2-30
COL 4-17, 4-21, 4-23, 4-25, 5-140 DEFIN 4-6
COLLATE 6-46 DELETE 5-50
COLS 3-50 DESC 3-5, 4-5, 5-7, 5-10, 5-121, 5-133, 5-143, 6-20,
COLUMN 4-66, 4-70 6-23, 8-4
COLUMN NAME 3-56, 3-63, 3-76, 3-82, 3-84, DESCR 3-54, 3-61, 3-75
3-85, 5-59 DESCRIPTION 3-7, 3-52, 4-10, 4-50, 5-92, 6-41,
COLUMNS DEFINED 3-36, 5-34 6-43, 7-10, 7-14
COMMAND 3-61, 3-75, 3-85 DEVICE 5-139
COMMIT 2-17, 3-38, 6-35 DG SEPARATORS 2-34
COMPAT 3-29 DICTNAM 3-62, 3-76, 5-58
COMPRESS STATEMENTS 2-32 DITTO CHARACTER 2-33
COMPRESSED 8-5 DLI QUALIFY 4-59
CONCATK 3-24, 5-62 DLIDSC 3-12, 3-13, 3-19, 3-22, 3-27
CONNECT 6-35 DLIWGHT 2-16, 6-35
CONSIS 4-7, 5-14 DSCREF 5-37, 5-64
CONVERS 2-13, 5-97, 5-127 EACOLOR 4-27, 4-30, 4-37, 4-44
COPY 3-12, 3-38, 3-45, 3-47, 3-55, 3-61, 3-75, 5-36, EAERR (color attribute) 2-9, 5-119
5-42, 5-75, 5-79, 6-47 EAERR (highlight attribute) 2-9, 5-119
COPY EDIT BASE 4-52, 4-55 EAHIGH 4-27, 4-31, 4-38, 4-44
COPYLBL 3-13, 3-39, 3-45, 3-48, 3-55, 3-62, 3-76, EAIN (color attribute) 2-7, 5-118
5-37, 5-42, 5-76, 5-79, 6-47 EAIN (highlight attribute) 2-8, 5-118
COPYLV1 3-12, 3-38, 3-45, 3-47, 3-55, 3-62, 3-76, EALIT (color attribute) 2-8, 5-118
5-37, 5-42, 5-75, 5-79, 6-47 EALIT (highlight attribute) 2-8
CORRELATION NAME 3-79, 3-82, 3-84, 3-85 EAOUT (color attribute) 2-8, 5-119
CPYCALL 5-53 EAOUT (highlight attribute) 2-8, 5-119
CPYINIT 5-54 EASLIT (highlight attribute) 5-118

EATTR 2-7, 5-105, 5-117 GET 2-15
EAVALID 4-27, 4-38, 4-44 GETTRAN 5-146, 6-27
EDIT CONDITION 4-53 GPTYPE OR FLDTYPE 6-4
EDIT FLAG FIELD 6-23 GROUP 6-12, 6-20
Edit Flag fields 5-53 GROUP NAME 6-14
EDIT NAME 4-52, 4-55 GROUPBY 5-52
Edit option 5-121 HAVING 5-52
Edit option fields 5-133 HEADER 4-5, 5-6, 6-20, 7-4, 8-4
ENDTRAN 6-27 HELP 2-6, 5-116
ENV FORMAT 8-5 HELPMSG 4-22, 4-33, 4-41
ENV PSB 8-6 HIGHLIGHT FIELDS 4-54, 4-57
ENVIRON 5-7, 6-21 HOLD 2-6, 5-115, 5-122
ENVIRONMENT 2-32, 5-107, 8-5 HOLD CURSOR 5-50
EOFKEY 2-6, 5-117 HOLDLTH 2-17, 2-19, 2-21
ERRCHAR FIELDS 4-54, 4-57 I/O AREA 4-59
ERROR CONDITION FOUND/NOTFOUND 4-57 ICTLNM 4-68, 4-73
ERROR MESSAGE 4-53, 4-58 ICUST1 4-68, 4-73
EXP 3-32 ICUST2 4-68, 4-73
EXPRESS 5-31 ID 4-5, 5-6, 6-20, 7-4, 8-4
FDREC 5-70 IEXTEND 4-47
FEAT 5-105 IGNORE 5-28, 5-49, 5-62, 5-67, 5-69, 5-81, 5-84
FETCH ONLY 5-47 IMAGE 4-5
FGNAME 3-35 IMAGE CHARACTERS 2-30
FIELD 4-7 IMSKEY 3-13, 3-16, 3-20, 3-25, 5-38, 5-64
FIELD NAME 4-29, 4-32, 4-40, 6-7, 6-9 INCRE 4-66, 4-70
FIELD NAME OR POSITION 4-47 INDBIO 4-41, 5-141
FIELD SELECTION 2-32 INDEXOF 3-41, 5-45
FILEDEF 6-26 INDICES 3-34
FILEIN 6-46 INEDIT 4-41, 5-141
FILEOUT 6-46 ININIT1 5-13
FIRST 4-66, 4-70 ININIT2 5-13
FLDEDIT 5-13 INIT 4-34, 4-42, 5-124, 6-10
FLDTYPE 4-18, 4-34, 4-42, 6-10 INIT1 5-145, 6-27
FMTCNTL 4-39, 4-45 INIT2 5-146, 6-27
FMTCUST 6-15 INITIALIZATION 5-106
FMTEXIT 4-38, 4-45 INMAST 6-27
FORGRP 6-16 INTERM 5-14
FORM 6-38, 6-43, 6-48 INTRAN 6-27
FORMAT 2-33 IOAREA 5-49, 5-63, 5-68, 5-70, 5-82, 5-85
FROM 4-7 IOASIZE 5-131
FROM QUAL.TABLE 3-84 IOASTG 2-12, 5-113
FRSTMOD 5-127 ISEGIDX 4-68, 4-73
FRSTPGM 5-123 ITEM 3-4, 4-5, 5-6, 5-83, 6-19, 7-3
FUNC 5-62, 5-66, 5-70, 5-85, 5-88 ITEMLBL 5-83
FUNCTION 1-16, 2-3, 3-4, 3-6, 4-4, 5-5, 6-19, 7-3, JFILEID 3-47, 5-77, 5-84
8-3 JOIN COLUMNS 3-83
GEN KEY LTH 4-59 JTYPEID 3-47, 5-77, 5-84
GENKEYL 3-41, 5-45, 5-71 KEY 3-14, 3-21, 3-25, 3-39, 4-56, 5-38, 5-43, 5-48,
GENPCBS 2-12, 2-13, 2-16, 2-17, 5-98, 5-113, 5-65, 5-70
5-128, 5-138, 6-34 KEY OR WHERE 5-34
Index X-13
KEY/WHERE 5-28 MSGPGM 5-101, 5-129
KEYCOLS 5-52 MSGTBL 5-101, 5-130
KEYFEED 3-23 MSGTRAN 5-101, 5-130
KEYLEN 3-31, 3-40, 5-37, 5-43 NAME 3-5, 3-7, 3-9, 3-15, 3-30, 3-34, 4-7, 4-10,
KEYLTH 5-31 4-17, 4-22, 4-24, 4-26, 5-91, 5-140, 6-4, 7-13
KEYPIC 3-16, 3-17, 5-36 NEXTPGM 4-40, 5-11, 5-141
KY 3-57, 3-64, 3-85 NITMLBL 5-83
KY (KEY) 5-59 NOSUSP 5-83, 5-87
LABEL 3-12, 3-34, 3-38, 3-44, 3-47, 5-23, 5-35, NUMITEM 5-83
5-41, 5-75, 5-78, 5-106 OCUST1 4-67, 4-72
LANG 2-5, 3-29, 5-11, 5-123, 5-134, 5-144, 6-24 OCUST2 4-67, 4-72
LANGLVL 5-116, 5-122, 5-134, 5-144, 6-24 OCUST3 4-67, 4-72
LAST 4-66, 4-70 OEXTEND 4-48
LENGTH 3-10, 3-16, 3-17 OF 4-34, 4-42, 6-10
LINE 4-66, 4-70, 5-140 OFFSET 3-24
LINE COL 4-17, 4-21, 4-23, 4-25, 6-4 OINIT1 5-12, 5-135
LINE COL LTH 4-29, 4-33, 4-40, 6-7, 6-10 OINIT2 5-12, 5-136
LINE COMMAND 3-62 OP 3-14, 3-20, 3-25, 5-38, 5-65
LINECNT 4-67, 4-71 OPCODE 3-40, 4-59, 5-43, 5-53, 5-71
LINENUM 8-6 OPEN 3-38, 5-40
LINEOPT 2-11, 2-14, 5-97, 5-111 OPTIMIZE FOR 5-47
LINKDYN 5-130 OPTION 3-23
LINKOPT 2-13, 5-97 OPTIONS 4-16, 5-9, 5-121, 5-133, 5-143, 6-23
LINKPGM 5-100, 5-129 OPTLIST 3-40, 5-44, 5-71
LINKWKA 5-135 ORDER 6-48
LN 4-17, 4-21, 4-23, 4-25, 5-140 ORDERBY 5-51
LN COL LTH 6-4 OSEGIDX 4-67, 4-72
LNKCOPY 2-12, 2-14, 2-16, 2-17, 2-19, 2-21, 5-98, OUTATTR 4-26, 4-30, 4-33
5-99, 5-112, 5-128, 5-138, 6-34 OUTIFIL 2-6, 5-116
LOCKED 3-24, 5-63 OUTPUT FIELD 5-34
LRECL 3-38, 3-44, 3-47, 5-40, 5-74, 5-78, 6-47 OUTPUT LINE 3-79
LTERM 3-32, 5-31 OUTTERM 5-13, 5-136
LTH 3-58, 3-68, 4-17, 4-21, 4-23, 4-25, 5-60, 5-105, PAGE 4-71
5-140, 6-38, 6-43, 6-48, 7-17 PAGEKEY 4-72
LTHLBL 5-74, 5-78, 5-82, 5-85 PAGESAV 4-71
LTHOPT 5-74, 5-78, 5-82, 5-85 Panel image display window 4-17
MAIN SORT 6-24 PANEL SIZE 2-33
MAPOUT 4-24, 4-34, 6-10 PARENT 3-15
MASTER FILE 6-37 PARENT/DEVICE 3-10
MATCH 6-25, 6-28 PARENTG 3-24, 5-63
MAX LTH 3-10, 3-15 PARM LIST EXTENSION 4-35, 4-43, 6-11
MERGE 6-25 PARMS 6-32
MFSMOD 5-102, 5-104, 5-139 PASSHV 2-17
MGREATR 6-28 PATH 3-23, 5-63
MIDONLY/DEVICE 5-102 PCB 5-30
MIDSOURCE 5-105 PCB PARMS 3-11, 5-35
MINOR 6-16 PCBNAME 3-31, 3-33, 4-60, 5-31
MORE 3-21, 4-19, 6-5, 6-38, 6-49 PDSCOPY DSNAME 2-34
MSGBUF 5-102, 5-130 PF/PA KEY DEFINITIONS 2-28
MSGCALL 5-32 PFKEYS 5-13

PFXLBL 5-78, 5-86 SCHFLDI 4-74
PFXLTH 5-78, 5-86 SCHFLDL 4-74
PGM/PSB NAME 5-98, 5-127, 5-139 SCONSIS 4-41, 5-141
PGMCUST 2-7, 5-14, 5-125, 5-136, 5-146, 6-29 SCOPE 6-12
PGMNAME 6-34 SCREEN XFEDIT/SEGEDIT 5-13
PI/PD NAME 7-10 SEARCH FIELDS 3-11
PIC 4-33, 6-10 SECTION 5-14, 5-124, 5-136, 5-146, 6-28
PKYLTH 4-71 SEGEXIT 5-104
PKYUNIQ 4-71 SEGLOOP 4-7, 4-65, 4-69
PLIXOPT 5-103, 5-114, 5-131, 5-139, 6-35 SEGLOOP DELIMITERS 4-20
PR STORE/ RENAME 7-10 SEGM 3-11, 5-35
PRCTRAN 5-146, 6-28 SEGMENT 3-13, 3-18, 3-22, 3-27, 5-37, 5-64, 5-68
PREFIX 6-46 SEGMENT KEY 3-10
PRESENTATION 7-5 SEGMENT NAME 4-56
PREVIEW 5-47, 5-61, 5-66, 5-69, 5-80, 5-84 SELECT 5-34, 6-26
PRINT 5-32, 6-15 SELECT FIELDS 5-13
PRNTDEST 5-145 SELKEY 4-41
PROCIN 6-46 SENCOLS 5-50
PROCOPT 3-31, 3-34, 5-31 SEQ 3-8, 3-29, 3-33, 3-35, 4-49, 6-37, 6-47
PROCOUT 6-46 SET 5-82
PROCSEQ 3-23, 3-31, 5-31 SETLBL 5-82
PRT (PRINT) 3-32 SHIFT 8-6
PS NAME 7-4 SIZE 4-6, 5-11, 5-134, 5-140, 5-144, 6-4, 6-24, 6-38,
PSB 2-33 6-43, 6-48
PSBNAME 2-11, 5-113, 6-35 SKIPAFT 6-15
PSBSCHD 2-11, 5-113 SKIPBEF 6-15
PUT 2-15 SORTNAME 6-41, 6-46
QUAL 3-50, 3-80 SPACMPT 2-14, 5-99
QUELBL 5-75 SPASIZE 2-10, 2-13, 2-20, 2-22, 5-99, 5-111, 5-128
RDBMS 2-20, 2-22, 3-5, 3-76, 6-35 SPASTG 2-12, 5-112
RECLTH 3-41, 5-44, 5-72 SPEC 4-35, 4-43, 6-11
REFRESH 5-117 SQL QUAL.NAME 3-52
REMARKS 5-10, 5-122, 5-134, 5-144, 6-24 SRCHFLD NAME 3-17
RENAME 3-7, 4-10, 5-91, 7-14 SSA LIST HOST VARIABLE 5-68
REORDER 5-108 SSALIST 4-59, 5-62, 5-67
REPEAT 4-66, 4-70 STANDARD 6-24
REPSEQ 6-15 START 3-10, 3-16, 3-17, 6-48
REQ 4-19, 4-33, 6-5 STARTIO 5-86
REQID 5-86 STBRKEY 4-73
REQIDLBL 5-86 STORAGE 5-108, 6-46
REQUEST 5-24 SUB 7-17
RESLTPR 5-55 SYNONYM 3-55, 3-62, 5-31
REUSE 3-42 SYSID 3-44, 5-74, 5-82
RMNAME 3-8 SYSMSG 5-102, 5-104
ROW NAME 3-63, 5-58 TABLE 3-85, 5-31
RPTDEST 5-145, 6-26 TABLE NAME 3-80, 5-33, 5-58
S 5-59 TABLE-NAME 3-50
SAVEKEY 4-67, 4-72 TBLNAME 3-35
SCHEMA 3-62, 3-76, 5-58 TDSKIP 6-15
SCHFLDC 4-74 TERM 5-124, 5-146, 6-28
Index X-15
TEXT 4-30, 6-8 VARLTH 3-24
TGREATR 6-28 VSAM SEGMENT LTH 4-59
TLN 3-50 WHEN 4-56
TLNNAME 3-50, 3-52, 3-54, 3-61, 3-76, 3-79, 3-80, WHERE 5-48
3-82, 3-83, 3-85, 5-30 WKAREA 5-12, 5-124, 5-135, 5-145, 6-27
TLNROW 3-35, 3-75, 5-34 WKSPAIN 2-15, 5-100, 5-129
TO 4-8 WKSPAIO 5-100, 5-129
TO HEADER 8-5 WKSPASZ 2-15, 5-100, 5-128
TOTREF 6-12 XFEDIT/SEGEDIT 5-141
TOTSIZE 6-13 XFER 5-124
TPBSTG 2-12, 5-113 XFERWKA 2-7, 5-12, 5-124, 5-135, 5-145
TPISIZE 5-131 XOPTS 5-108
TPOSIZE 5-131 file
TPPARMS 5-89 defining/maintaining a 3-2
TRACE 2-11, 2-14, 2-16, 2-19, 2-21, 5-98, 5-111, description of 3-5, 3-7
5-128, 5-139, 6-33 field name for mapping data 4-41
TRANCDE 2-15, 5-99, 5-111, 5-128 last update of 3-7
TRANFLD 2-15, 5-99 name of 3-5
TRANMFS 2-15, 5-99 file group
TRANSACTION FILE 6-37 defining/maintaining a 3-2, 3-28
TYPE 3-9, 3-17, 3-30, 3-40, 3-44, 3-57, 3-61, 3-64, description of 3-5, 3-7
4-50, 5-7, 5-30, 5-43, 5-60, 5-73, 5-80, 5-104, 6-15, last update of 3-7
8-4 name of 3-5
U 3-24, 4-17, 6-4 file SEGLOOP
U/S 5-141 Create/Update File Segloop 4-69
UPDATE 3-7, 3-50, 4-10, 5-50, 7-11, 7-14 FILEDEF field
Update CICS Screen Environment 5-113 Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-26
UPDATE DBD 3-11 FILEIN field 6-44
UPDATE ENVIRON DEFN DEFAULTS 2-9 Update Sort Definition 6-46
UPDATED 5-92 FILEOUT field 6-44
UPDCOLS 5-57 Update Sort Definition 6-46
UPDTA 5-116, 5-123 FIND primary command 9-22
UPPER CASE LITERALS 2-33 FIRST command option 3-23
USAGE 4-29, 4-32, 4-40, 5-33, 5-36, 5-41, 5-75, FIRST field
5-78, 6-7, 6-9 Create/Update File Segloop 4-69
USE 4-17, 4-21, 4-23, 4-25, 6-4 Create/Update Table Segloop 4-65
USECNT 3-20 FIRST line command 9-50
USECOL1 8-7 FLDEDIT field
USED BY 3-27 Create/Update Screen Definition 5-13
USER 3-7, 4-10, 5-92, 7-10, 7-14 FLDTYPE field
USER MODE 2-34 Update Batch Output Fields 6-10
USER SORTS 6-25 Update Output/Input/Outin Field 4-34
USERID 3-50 Update Panel Fields (Batch) 6-4
USGCOP1 2-12 Update Panel Fields (Online) 4-18
USGCOP2 2-13 Update Select Fields 4-42
USGCOPY 2-14, 2-16, 2-17, 2-19, 2-21, 5-98, 5-99, use with prototyping 7-2
5-128, 5-139, 6-34 FLDTYPE parameter
USGCOPY (1) 5-112 FIELD Statement A-2
USGCOPY (2) 5-112 FLNULL A-3, A-5
VALUE 7-16

FLOAT A-3, A-7 FUNCTION field (continued)
floating point number, checking for A-35 Online Program Definition menu 5-5
floating point, sort format 6-48 Panel Definition menu 4-4
floating-point field, formatting a A-16 Prototyping Facility menu 7-3
flow control, prototyping facility 7-6 TDF Main menu 1-16
flow control, View Panel Definition 7-18 Update Database User I/O SSALIST 5-66
FMTCNTL field User Profile Maintenance 2-3
Update Output/Input/Outin Field 4-38 Utilities menu 8-3
Update Select Fields 4-45
FMTCNTL=MIDONLY 5-105
FMTCUST field G
Update Panel Group 6-15 GEN KEY LTH field
FMTEXIT field Update Segment Edit (SEGEDIT) 4-59
Update Output/Input/Outin Field 4-38 generic key, length of 3-41, 4-59, 5-45, 5-71
Update Select Fields 4-45 GENKEYL field
FORGRP field 6-16 Show/Update Data Set Default Data 3-41
FORM field Update Data Set Record 5-45
List Merge Key Groups 6-43 Update VSAM or Sequential Detail Data
Update Match Keys 6-38 Access 5-71
Update Sort Definition 6-48 GENPCBS
FORMAT Update Environment Definition Defaults 2-12
FIELD 6-11 GENPCBS field
format a floating-point field A-16 Update Batch Environment 6-34
format date A-15, A-20 Update CICS Screen Environment 5-113
FORMAT field Update Environment Definition Defaults 2-13, 2-16,
Update Session Controls 2-33 2-17
FORMAT, TDF command 2-15, 5-99, 5-102 Update IMS/DC Driver Environment 5-127
FORWARD primary command 9-24 Update IMS/DC Report Environment 5-138
FROM field Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-98
Panel Definition menu 4-7 GET type commands 3-23
FROM QUAL.TABLE field GETTRAN field
Update SQL Join — Access Columns 3-84 Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-27
use with ALIAS field 3-84 Create/Update Nonterminal Definition 5-146
FRSTMOD field GPTYPE OR FLDTYPE field
Update IMS/DC Driver Environment 5-127 Update Panel Fields (Batch) 6-4
FRSTPGM field GRAPHIC 3-58
Create/Update Driver Definitions 5-123 GROUP BY clause 5-51
full screen edit mode 9-3 GROUP field
invoking 9-3 Batch Program Definition menu 6-20
FULLCAR A-7 Update Batch Output Fields 6-12
FUNC field GROUP NAME field
DB2/Catalog Import 3-49 Update Panel Group 6-14
Update CICS Journal Data Access 5-85 GROUPBY field
Update DL/I Detail Data Access 5-62 Update SQL Detail Data Access 5-51
Update TPPCB Detail Data Access 5-88 GSAM DBD 6-26
Update VSAM or Sequential Detail Data
Access 5-70
FUNCTION field
H
H-100 program section
Batch Program Definition menu 6-19
create/update segments for Auto Exec 4-41
List Data Administration Information 3-6
INDBIO field 5-141
List Panel Definitions 4-9
Index X-17
H-100-INPUT-TERM program section 5-14 HVNAME 4-53, 4-58
handle conditions
CICS 5-81, 5-84
HAVING clause 5-52 I
HAVING field I/O access code, identifying a 4-58
Update SQL Detail Data Access 5-52 I/O area
HDAM database 3-8 column 3-56, 5-59
head, wrapped variable field 9-7 default 3-13, 3-39, 3-55, 5-37, 5-42
HEADER field defining the 5-49
Batch Program Definition menu 6-20 record 3-38, 5-42
Online Program Definition menu 5-6 segment 3-12, 5-36
Panel Definition menu 4-5 SQL 3-55
Prototyping Facility menu 7-4 I/O AREA field
Utilities menu 8-4 Update Segment Edit (SEGEDIT) 4-59
help facility 2-6, 5-115, 5-116 I/O area, record
HELP field overriding of 3-39, 5-42
Update Program Definition Defaults 2-6 I/O area, segment
Update/Show Screen Parameters 5-116 overriding of 3-13, 5-37
help message, field level 4-22 I/O area, segment, maximum size required 5-131
HELP primary command 9-24 I/O request
help, online qualifying a 3-24
for TDF screens, fields 1-6 IBCURR A-28
HELPMSG field IBDOL A-27
Update Help Message Parameters 4-22 IBM system environment 2-32
Update Output/Input/Outin Field 4-33 IBNUM A-29
Update Select Fields 4-41 ICDATE A-5, A-30
HEX A-3 ICJULIAN A-5
hex, converting character to A-18 ICTLNM field
highlight attribute Create/Update File Segloop 4-73
EAHIGH field 4-27 Create/Update Table Segloop 4-68
Update Program Definition Defaults 2-8 ICURRNCY A-7, A-31
Update/Show Screen Parameters 5-118, 5-119 ICUST1 field
HIGHLIGHT field Create/Update File Segloop 4-73
Update Cross-Field Edit (XFEDIT) 4-54 Create/Update Table Segloop 4-68
HIGHLIGHT FIELDS field ICUST2 field
Update Segment Edit (SEGEDIT) 4-57 Create/Update File Segloop 4-73
HISAM database 3-8 Create/Update Table Segloop 4-68
HOLD capability 5-115, 5-122 ID field
HOLD command Batch Program Definition menu 6-20
prototyping facility restriction 7-2 Online Program Definition menu 5-6
HOLD CURSOR field Panel Definition menu 4-5
Update SQL Detail Data Access 5-50 Prototyping Facility menu 7-4
hold facility 5-115 Utilities menu 8-4
HOLD field IDATE A-5, A-27
Create/Update Driver Definitions 5-122 IDENTIF field
Update Program Definition Defaults 2-6 Create/Update Batch Definition 6-26
Update/Show Screen Parameters 5-115 Create/Update Driver Definitions 5-123
HOLD primary command 9-25 Create/Update IMS/DC Report Definition 5-134
HOLD usage 5-25, 5-36, 5-42 Create/Update Nonterminal Definition 5-144
HOLDLTH field Create/Update Screen Definition 5-11
Update Environment Definition Defaults 2-17

IDOLLAR A-5, A-33 IMS (continued)
IEXTEND field environment fields 2-13
Update Parameter List Extension 4-47 generating programs 2-15
IFLNULL A-5, A-34 linking in a program 2-13
IFLOAT A-7, A-35 SPA 2-13
IFORMAT A-36 transaction code 2-15
IFULLCAR A-7 IMS database segment search fields 3-15
IFULLCHAR A-36 IMS key picture clause 3-16
IFULLNUM A-36, A-37 IMS message switches 5-101, 5-129, 5-130
IGNCLOS field IMS MFS
Update Data Set Record 5-41 environment characteristics 5-127
IGNEMPT field IMS MFS control blocks 8-5
Update Data Set Record 5-41 IMS program
IGNOPEN field environment characteristics 5-127
Update Data Set Record 5-41 IMS PSB
IGNORE field environment characteristics 5-127
Create/Update Data Group 5-28 IMS SPA 5-97, 5-127
Update CICS Journal Data Access 5-84 IMS transaction codes 5-101
Update CICS Queue Data Access 5-80 IMSDRV statements 5-127
Update Database User I/O SSALIST 5-67 IMSKEY field
Update DL/I Detail Data Access 5-62 Create/Update SSA/Command For DL/I
Update SQL Detail Data Access 5-49 DB/Segment 3-24
Update VSAM or Sequential Detail Data List Search Fields 3-15
Access 5-69 Update Database Segment 5-38
IHEX A-37 Update DBD Segment 3-13
IHEXA A-38 Update DL/I Detail Data Access 5-64
IINTCDT A-5, A-38 Update DLIDSCs For Segment Member 3-20
IINTCJUL A-5, A-39 INBALPHA A-8, A-47
IINTLDT A-5, A-6, A-41 INBNULL A-8
IINTLJUL A-8, A-42 INBVCHAR A-9, A-48
IJULIAN A-7, A-37 INBVNULL A-9, A-49
ILALPHA A-8, A-44 INCLUDE, EXEC SQL 3-55
ILNULL A-8, A-45 INCRE field
ILVCHAR A-8, A-45 Create/Update Table Segloop 4-66
ILVNULL A-8, A-46 INDBIO field
image character 9-5 Update Select Fields 4-41
image characters 4-11 Update Select Parameters 5-141
IMAGE CHARACTERS field independent AND Boolean operator, see BOOLOOP
Update Session Controls 2-30 field 3-25
IMAGE field index name for array 4-67, 4-72, 4-73
Panel Definition menu 4-5 index, data set 3-41, 5-45
imbedded blanks, check for A-47 index, secondary 5-31
import INDEXOF field
date of 3-50 Show/Update Data Set Default Data 3-41
DB2 tables 3-49 Update Data Set Record 5-45
DB2 views 3-49 INDICES, PCB field 3-11, 5-35
error condition 3-50 INEDIT field
importing PSBs or DBDs 3-3 Update Select Fields 4-41
IMS Update Select Parameters 5-141
conversational system, generating a 2-13 ININIT1 field
environment 2-32 Create/Update Screen Definition 5-13
Index X-19
ININIT2 field INULL A-9, A-50
Create/Update Screen Definition 5-13 INUMERIC A-9, A-50
INIT field INUMNULL A-9, A-51
Create/Update Driver Definitions 5-124 INVREQ condition 5-81
Update Batch Output Fields 6-10 IOA-recname-SEGMENT host variable name 3-39, 5-42
Update Output/Input/Outin Field 4-34 IOA-record-name-SEGMENT host variable name 5-43
Update Select Fields 4-42 IOA-segname-SEGMENT host variable name 3-13,
INIT1 field 5-37, 5-42
Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-27 IOA-TLNNAME-SEGMENT host variable name 3-55
Create/Update Nonterminal Definition 5-145 IOAREA field
INIT2 field Update CICS Journal Data Access 5-85
Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-27 Update CICS Queue Data Access 5-82
Create/Update Nonterminal Definition 5-146 Update Database User I/O SSALIST 5-68
INITIALIZATION field Update DL/I Detail Data Access 5-63
Update IMS MFSs 5-106 Update SQL Detail Data Access 5-49
INMAST field IOASIZE field
Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-27 Update IMS/DC Driver Environment 5-131
input buffer names 4-17, 4-29, 4-32, 4-40 IOASTG field
input buffer, TP, maximum size 5-131 Update CICS Screen Environment 5-113
input edit, extended field list 4-47 Update Environment Definition Defaults 2-11
input field 2-31 IOERR condition 5-81
Create/Update File Segloop 4-69 ISCINVREQ condition 5-81
Create/Update Table Segloop 4-65 ISEGIDX field
mapping and editing 4-41 Create/Update File Segloop 4-73
input values Create/Update Table Segloop 4-68
acceptable 4-36, 6-11 ISPF/PDF primary command 9-25
how the program stores them 4-36, 6-11 ISRT type commands 3-23
input, field type ISTATE A-9, A-52
acceptable input values 4-36, 6-12 ITEM field
CURSOR AT FIELD field 4-54, 4-58 Batch Program Definition menu 6-19
required 4-54 Data Administration menu 3-4
screen field entries 4-57 Online Program Definition menu 5-6
insert criterion 5-33 Panel Definition menu 4-4
INSERT line command 9-50 Prototyping Facility menu 7-3
INSERT SPACE line command 9-51 Update CICS Queue Data Access 5-83
INSTALL primary command 9-25 item manipulation field
INTDATE A-3, A-23, A-32, A-33, A-43 List/Show Custom Code 5-91
INTEGER 3-57 ITEMERR condition 4-57, 5-81
integer, checking for valid A-50 ITEMLBL field
INTENSITY Update CICS Queue Data Access 5-83
prototyping facility 7-6 IVCHAR A-9, A-52
intensity of a field, see ATTRINT field 4-26 IVNULL A-9, A-53
INTERM field
Create/Update Screen Definition 5-14
international currency J
format A-7, A-33 J-100 paragraph execution for select field 4-41
international date J-100 program section
format A-3, A-5, A-6, A-15, A-23, A-32, A-33, Update Select Parameters 5-140
A-43 JCL utilities 3-3
INTRAN field JFILEID field
Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-27 Update CICS Journal Data Access 5-84

JFILEID field (continued)
Update CICS Journal Default Data 3-47 K
Update CICS Journal Record 5-77 key
join generic, length of 3-41, 5-45, 5-71
correlation name 3-79, 3-82, 3-84 identifying the record/segment to be read 4-56
defining/maintaining a 3-2 relative 3-39, 5-43
description of 3-5 variable 3-39, 5-43
identifier 3-81 key feedback area, PCB 3-31
key name 3-81 KEY field
name of 3-5, 3-52 Create/Update SSA/Command For DL/I
naming a 3-50, 3-79, 3-83 DB/Segment 3-25
qualifier 3-79 Show/Update Data Set Default Data 3-39
WHERE clause 3-81, 3-82, 3-84 Update Data Set Record 5-43
join columns 3-81 Update Database Segment 5-38
JOIN COLUMNS field Update DBD Segment 3-14
Update SQL Join — Access Columns 3-83 Update DL/I Detail Data Access 5-65
join tables Update DLIDSCs For Segment Member 3-21
defining access for 3-83 Update Segment Edit (SEGEDIT) 4-56
journals Update SQL Detail Data Access 5-48
accesses, group level variable name 3-48 KEY field, also see SEGKEY 3-39
asynchronous output specification 5-86 key name, join or table 3-81
COBOL COPY, overriding 5-78 key-sequenced data set 3-39, 3-40, 5-43
defining 3-4 key, for which I/O is performed, see WHERE field 5-28
DGADDing 3-46 key, generic, length of 4-59
IDs, valid 3-47, 5-77 KEY/WHERE field
inheritance of name 5-77 Create/Update Data Group 5-28
length of record 3-47, 5-77, 5-86 Select New Row Name 5-33
output initiation for 5-86 KEYCOLS field
PL/I INCLUDE, overriding 5-78 Update SQL Detail Data Access 5-52
prefix for 5-78, 5-86 KEYFEED field
previewing 5-84 Create/Update SSA/Command For DL/I
REC line, use of 5-24 DB/Segment 3-23
record, defining 3-46 KEYLEN field
types of 5-77 Create/Update PSB Or File Group 3-31
WAIT 5-86 Show/Update Data Set Default Data 3-39
waiting specification 5-86 Update Data Set Record 5-43
journals, CICS Update Database Segment 5-37
DGADD 5-22 KEYLEN=, PCB statement 3-31
JTYPEID field KEYLTH field
Update CICS Journal Data Access 5-84 Update DBMS Characteristics 5-31
Update CICS Journal Default Data 3-47 KEYPIC field
Update CICS Journal Record 5-77 List Search Fields 3-16, 3-17
JULIAN A-3, A-7 Update Database Segment 5-36
Julian date format A-7, A-44 Keys 5-33
DATE A-4 segment, retrieving 3-14
Julian, convert date to A-37 Keywords (syntax diagrams) 1-9
Julian, converting characters A-19 KSDS 3-39, 3-40, 5-43
KY
Create/Update IDMS SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-64
Index X-21
KY field LINE COL field
Select Columns 5-59 Update Attribute Parameter 4-25
Update SQL Join — Access Columns 3-84 Update Help Message Parameters 4-21
Update Mapout Parameter 4-23
Update Panel Fields (Batch) 6-3
L Update Panel Fields (Online) 4-16
L command code 3-23 LINE COMMAND
LABEL field Create/Update IDMS SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-62
Create/Update Data Group 5-23 Line Edit 4-14
Create/Update PSB Or File Group 3-34 line edit mode 9-3
Show/Update Data Set Default Data 3-38 command line 4-14
Update CICS Journal Default Data 3-47 invoking 9-3
Update CICS Journal Record 5-78 panel image 4-14
Update CICS Queue Default Data 3-44 LINE field
Update CICS Queue Record 5-75 Create/Update File Segloop 4-70
Update Data Set Record 5-41 Create/Update Table Segloop 4-66
Update Database Segment 5-35 Update Batch Literal Fields 6-7
Update DBD Segment 3-12 Update Batch Output Fields 6-10
Update IMS MFSs 5-105 Update Literal Fields 4-29
LALPHA A-8 Update Output/Input/Outin Field 4-33
LANG field Update Panel Fields (Batch) 6-4
Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-24 Update Select Fields 4-40
Create/Update Driver Definitions 5-122 Update Select Parameters 5-140
Create/Update IMS/DC Report Definitions 5-134 line optimization 5-97
Create/Update Nonterminal Definition 5-144 line optimization logic 2-12
Create/Update PSB Or File Group 3-29 LINE primary command 9-26
Create/Update Screen Definition 5-11 line size, screen 5-11
Update Program Definition Defaults 2-5 LINE-INPUT-COUNT 4-73
LANGLVL field LINE-INPUT-COUNT field 4-68
Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-24 LINE-INPUT-ERROR 4-73
Create/Update Driver Definitions 5-122 LINE-INPUT-ERROR field 4-68
Create/Update IMS/DC Report Definitions 5-134 LINECNT field
Create/Update Nonterminal Definition 5-144 Create/Update Table Segloop 4-67
Update/Show Screen Parameters 5-116 LINENUM field
language Utilities menu 8-6
specifying for the program 2-5 LINEOPT
LAST command option 3-23 Update Environment Definition Defaults 2-14
LAST field LINEOPT field
Create/Update File Segloop 4-70 Update CICS Screen Environment 5-111
Create/Update Table Segloop 4-66 Update Environment Definition Defaults 2-12
LAST line command 9-51 Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-97
LCHILD=, DBD statement 3-9 lines, number of lines and columns on report 5-134
left justify a character field A-44 link work area 5-135
LEFT primary command 9-25 linkage section
LEFT SHIFT line command 9-51 01-level declarations, including the 5-98
LENGERR condition 5-81 LINKDYN field
LENGTH field Update IMS/DC Driver Environment 5-130
Create/Update DBD 3-10 linking, occurring in an IMS program 2-13
List Search Fields 3-16, 3-17 LINKOPT
LINE CLEAR line command 9-51 Update Environment Definition Defaults 2-13

LINKOPT parameter LOCKED field (continued)
Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-97 Update DL/I Detail Data Access 5-63
LINKPGM field logical record length
Update IMS/DC Driver Environment 5-129 maximum length 5-44
Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-100 logical record length, see LRECL field 3-38
LINKWKA field long literal 9-32
Create/Update IMS/DC Report Definitions 5-135 LONG VARCHAR 3-58
List Consistency Edits 4-49 LONG VARGRAPHIC 3-58
consistency edits example 4-62 lower case to upper case
List Data Administration Information 3-6 prototyping facility 7-5
List Headers 8-8 lower case to upper case, literals 4-6
List Merge Key Groups 6-42 lowercase to uppercase, translation 2-5
List Panel Definitions 4-9, 7-8 LRECL field 3-44, 5-74, 6-44, 6-45
List Presentation Stores 7-12 Show/Update Data Set Default Data 3-38
List Search Fields 3-15 Update CICS Journal Default Data 3-47
List Sorts 6-40 Update CICS Journal Record 5-77
List SQL Tables/Joins 3-51 Update CICS Queue Default Data 3-44
List/Show Custom Code 5-90 Update CICS Queue Record 5-74
listing member 8-3 Update Data Set Record 5-40
literal break character 2-31 Update Sort Definition 6-47
literal field rules 9-5 LTERM field
literal field 2-31 Create/Update PSB Or File Group 3-32
translate to upper case 4-6 Update DBMS Characteristics 5-31
type of editing 6-4 LTERM=, PCB statement 3-32
literal, field type LTH
converting to uppercase 2-33 Create/Update IDMS SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-68
LN field LTH field
Update Attribute Parameter 4-25 List Merge Key Groups 6-43
Update Help Message Parameters 4-21 Select Columns 5-60
Update Mapout Parameter 4-23 Update Attribute Parameter 4-25
Update Panel Fields (Batch) 6-4 Update Batch Literal Fields 6-7
Update Panel Fields (Online) 4-17 Update Batch Output Fields 6-10
Update Select Parameters 5-140 Update Help Message Parameters 4-21
LNKCOPY field Update IMS MFSs 5-105
including 01-level declarations 2-12 Update Literal Fields 4-29
Update Batch Environment 6-34 Update Mapout Parameter 4-23
Update CICS Screen Environment 5-111 Update Match Keys 6-38
Update Environment Definition Defaults 2-12, 2-14, Update Output/Input/Outin Field 4-33
2-16, 2-17 Update Panel Fields (Batch) 6-4
Update IMS/DC Driver Environment 5-128 Update Panel Fields (Online) 4-17
Update IMS/DC Report Environment 5-138 Update Select Fields 4-40
Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-98 Update Select Parameters 5-140
LNULL A-8 Update Sort Definition 6-48
load module, created by linkage editor View Presentation Store 7-17
name of 5-98, 5-127, 5-139 LTHLBL field
load presentation store 7-19 Update CICS Journal Data Access 5-85
LOCATE command 5-91, 7-8 Update CICS Journal Record 5-78
LOCATE primary command 9-27 Update CICS Queue Data Access 5-82
LOCKED field Update CICS Queue Record 5-74
Create/Update SSA/Command For DL/I LTHOPT field 3-44, 5-74
DB/Segment 3-24 Update CICS Journal Data Access 5-85
Index X-23
LTHOPT field (continued) match sort (continued)
Update CICS Journal Record 5-78 custom code for a 6-28
Update CICS Queue Data Access 5-82 keys, length of 6-38
Update CICS Queue Record 5-74 keys, supplying and updating 6-37, 6-38
LVCHAR A-8 line commands 6-37
LVNULL A-8 master file 6-37, 6-38
purging 6-25
save area generation 6-38
M transaction file 6-37, 6-38
M100 screen identifier 7-3 updating 6-25, 6-37
M120 screen identifier 7-18 USEREXEC requests 5-26
M151 screen identifier 7-15 zapping 6-25
M200 screen identifier 7-12 MATCHM 5-26
M401 screen identifier 7-8 MATCHT 5-26
MAIN SORT field MAX LTH field
Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-24 Create/Update DBD 3-10
main storage List Search Fields 3-15
queues 3-44, 5-73, 5-80 MBCOPY primary command 9-27
sorts, PL/I - minimum allowed 6-46 MBMOVE primary command 9-28
MAIN_PROCESS_LOOP 5-147 MBPURGE primary command 9-29
MAINI 5-126, 5-136, 5-137, 5-147 member
Mainline 5-125, 5-126, 5-137 copying 8-3
mainline sort list 8-3
creating 6-24 renaming 8-3
purging 6-24 member line 9-10, 9-12
updating 6-24, 6-44 MENU primary command 9-29
zapping 6-25 MERGE field
MAINPROCESSI 5-126, 5-147 Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-25
MAINPROCESST 5-126, 5-148 merge presentation-store
MAINT 5-126, 5-137, 5-147 into active presentation store 7-19
MAPOUT field merge sort
Update Batch Output Fields 6-10 data sets and key fields 6-50
Update Mapout Parameter 4-24 description for 6-43
Update Output/Input/Outin Field 4-34 keys, length of 6-43
mapping 2-11, 5-114 line commands 6-42
mapping name 4-19 listing 6-42
mapping, BMS 5-112 purging 6-25, 6-42
mapping, output save area, constructing 6-43
MAPOUT field 4-24 showing 6-42
mask, formatting an alphanumeric field 4-35, 6-11 updating 6-25, 6-42, 6-50
MASSINSERT, OPTLIST field 3-40, 5-44, 5-71 zapping 6-25
MASTER FILE field message switching 2-14, 5-99, 5-101, 5-130
Update Match Keys 6-37 messages, destination of, see LTERM 3-32
master key messages, field in TELON generated program 5-102,
match structure 6-28 5-104
MATCH field MFS
Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-25, 6-28 control blocks, generation of 4-17, 4-29, 4-32, 4-40
match sort Device name 5-139
auto exec requests 6-37 exit routine 5-104
AUTOEXEC requests 5-26 field exit routine 4-38, 4-45
creating 6-25 MOD name 5-102, 5-104, 5-139

MFS (continued)
special field 4-38, 4-45 N
MFS creation 8-5 N command code 3-23
MFS MOD NAME 5-127 N110 screen identifier 5-142
MFSMOD field N114 screen identifier 5-142
Update IMS MFSs 5-104 NAME field 3-46
Update IMS/DC Report Environment 5-139 Create/Update DBD 3-9
Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-102 Create/Update PSB Or File Group 3-30
MGREATR field Data Administration menu 3-5
Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-28 List Panel Definitions 4-10, 7-10
MID, adding a field to the beginning of 5-105 List Presentation Stores 7-13
middle, wrapped variable field 9-7 List Search Fields 3-15
MIDONLY List/Show Custom Code 5-91
field length 5-105 Panel Definition menu 4-7
field, initialization value 5-106 Update Attribute Parameter 4-26
fields 5-102 Update Help Message Parameters 4-22
type, designating the field as 5-105 Update Mapout Parameter 4-24
MIDONLY field Update Panel Fields (Batch) 6-4
Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-102 Update Panel Fields (Online) 4-17
MIDONLY/DEVICE field Update Select Parameters 5-140
Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-102 Update Sensitive Segment 3-33
MIDSOURCE field NAME=, DBD FIELD statement 3-10, 3-13, 3-15, 3-20,
Update IMS MFSs 5-105 3-24, 5-38, 5-64
MINOR field NAME=, PCB statement 3-30
Update Panel Group 6-16 NAME=, SENSEG statement 3-33
MOD NAME, MFS 5-127 NBALPHA A-8
MORE field NBNULL A-8, A-47
Update DLIDSCs For Segment Member 3-21 NBVCHAR A-9
Update Match Keys 6-38 NBVNULL A-9
Update Panel Fields (Batch) 6-5 NEXTPGM field
Update Panel Fields (Online) 4-19 Create/Update Screen Definition 5-10
Update Sort Definition 6-49 Update Select Fields 4-40
MOVE line command 9-5, 9-9, 9-51 Update Select Parameters 5-141
MOVE primary command 9-29 NITMLBL field
MSGBUF field Update CICS Queue Data Access 5-83
Update IMS/DC Driver Environment 5-130 NOJBUFSP condition 5-87
Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-101 nonterminal definitions
MSGCALL field CICS environment, updating 5-109
Update DBMS Characteristics 5-31 copying 8-3
MSGPGM field creating and updating 5-142, 5-149, 5-151
Update IMS/DC Driver Environment 5-129 custom code, editing 5-93
Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-101 custom code, listing 5-146
MSGTBL field DGADDing journals 3-46
Update IMS/DC Driver Environment 5-130 environment data, updating 5-109
Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-101 exporting 8-3
MSGTRAN field generated programming language 5-144
Update IMS/DC Driver Environment 5-130 listing 8-3
Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-101 printer specification for 5-145
renaming 8-3
report, length and width 5-144
utilities option 8-3
Index X-25
nonterminal program OF field
CICS environment, update/show 5-109 Update Batch Output Fields 6-10
NOSHOW primary command 9-30 Update Output/Input/Outin Field 4-19, 4-34
NOSPACE condition 5-81, 5-83 Update Select Fields 4-42
NOSUSP field OFFSET field
Update CICS Journal Data Access 5-87 Create/Update SSA/Command For DL/I
Update CICS Queue Data Access 5-82 DB/Segment 3-24
NOTAUTH condition 5-81 offset, parent segment 3-24
NOTFOUND condition 5-81, 5-84 OFLNULL A-3, A-16
NOTNULL field OFLOAT A-3, A-16
Create/Update SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-59 OFORMAT A-18
Select Columns 5-60 OHEX A-3, A-18
NOTOPEN condition 5-81 OHEXA A-19
NU field OHEXP A-19
Create/Update SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-59 OHEXT A-20
Select Columns 5-60 OINIT1 field
NULCALL Create/Update IMS/DC Report Definitions 5-135
NULCALL 2-27 Create/Update Screen Definition 5-12
NULL A-3, A-9 OINIT2 field
null indicator 3-59 Create/Update IMS/DC Report Definitions 5-135
null values 3-59 Create/Update Screen Definition 5-12
Select Columns 5-60 OINTCDT A-3, A-20
NULLS primary command 9-31 OINTCJUL A-21
NUMERIC A-3, A-9 OINTLDT A-3, A-22
numeric characters, check for A-36, A-37 OINTLJUL A-4, A-22
numeric field OJULIAN A-3, A-19
acceptable ranges of values 4-36 OK condition 5-81, 5-84, 5-85
NUMITEM field online help for TDF screens, fields 1-6
Update CICS Queue Data Access 5-83 online program definition 1-17
NUMNULL A-3, A-9 creating a 5-2
Online Program Definition menu 5-5
ONULL A-3, A-24
O ONUMERIC A-3
OCAR A-3, A-13 ONUMNULL A-3, A-25
OCART A-13 OP field
OCCAT A-14 Create/Update SSA/Command For DL/I
OCDATE A-3 DB/Segment 3-25
OCJULIAN A-3, A-14 Update Database Segment 5-38
OCUST1 field Update DBD Segment 3-13
Create/Update File Segloop 4-72 Update DL/I Detail Data Access 5-64
Create/Update Table Segloop 4-67 Update DLIDSCs For Segment Member 3-20
OCUST2 field OPCODE 3-13
Create/Update File Segloop 4-72 OPCODE field
Create/Update Table Segloop 4-67 Show/Update Data Set Default Data 3-40
OCUST3 field Update Data Set Record 5-43
Create/Update File Segloop 4-72 Update Segment Edit (SEGEDIT) 4-59
Create/Update Table Segloop 4-67 Update SQL Detail Data Access 5-52
ODATE A-3, A-15 Update VSAM or Sequential Detail Data
OEXTEND field Access 5-71
Update Parameter List Extension 4-48 OPEN field
Show/Update Data Set Default Data 3-38

OPEN field (continued) output field 2-31
Update Data Set Record 5-40 saving in screen image portion of TWA 5-117
optimization, line 5-97 Select New Row Name 5-34
OPTIMIZE FOR field type of editing 6-4
Update SQL Detail Data Access 5-47 OUTPUT LINE field
OPTION field Specify Tables Being Joined 3-79
Create/Update SSA/Command For DL/I output mapping
DB/Segment 3-23 MAPOUT field 4-24
OPTIONS field OUTREAD usage 5-25
Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-23 OUTTERM field
Create/Update Driver Definitions 5-121 Create/Update IMS/DC Report Definitions 5-136
Create/Update Nonterminal Definition 5-143 Create/Update Screen Definition 5-13
Create/Update Screen Definition 5-9 OVCHAR A-26
Update Panel Fields (Online) 4-16 OVER line command 9-52
OPTLIST field overriding PL/I defaults, see PLIXOPT 5-103, 5-112
Show/Update Data Set Default Data 3-40 OVNULL A-26
Update Data Set Record 5-44
Update VSAM or Sequential Detail Data
Access 5-71 P
OR Boolean operator, see BOOLOOP field 3-25 P command code 3-24, 5-63
ORDER field P-100-PFKEYS program section 5-13
Update Sort Definition 6-48 P100 screen identifier 4-4
ORDERBY clause, see ORDERBY field 5-51 P103 screen identifier 4-11
ORDERBY field P104 screen identifier 4-14
Update SQL Detail Data Access 5-51 P155 screen identifier 4-16
OS command processor P156 screen identifier 4-21
TDF Main menu 1-17 P157 screen identifier 5-140
OSEGIDX field P158 screen identifier 4-25
Create/Update File Segloop 4-72 P159 screen identifier 4-23
Create/Update Table Segloop 4-67 P161 screen identifier 4-49
OSSA A-25 P165 screen identifier 4-52
OUTATTR field P168 screen identifier 4-55
Update Attribute Parameter 4-26, 4-30 P170 screen identifier 4-65
Update Literal Fields 4-30 P175 screen identifier 4-69
Update Output/Input/Outin Field 4-33 P180 screen identifier 4-29
OUTIFIL character 7-5 P181 screen identifier 4-32
OUTIFIL field P182 screen identifier 4-40
Update Program Definition Defaults 2-6 P186 screen identifier 4-47
Update/Show Screen Parameters 5-116 P255 screen identifier 6-3
outin P280 screen identifier 6-7
field type 2-6 P281 screen identifier 6-9
outin field 2-31 P290 screen identifier 6-14
outin, field type P401 screen identifier 4-9
acceptable input values 4-36, 6-12 packed decimal, sort format 6-48
CURSOR AT FIELD field 4-54, 4-58 PAGE field
required 4-54 Create/Update File Segloop 4-71
screen field entries 4-57 PAGEKEY field
output buffer names 4-17, 4-29, 4-32, 4-40 Create/Update File Segloop 4-71
output buffer, TP, maximum size 5-131 PAGESAV field
output edit, extended field list 4-48 Create/Update File Segloop 4-71
Index X-27
panel column size 5-11 Parentheses
panel data 9-5, 9-32 syntax diagrams, use in 1-10
panel definition PARM LIST EXTENSION field
batch example 6-5 Update Batch Output Fields 6-10
batch, creating a 6-3 Update Output/Input/Outin Field 4-35
consistency edits example 4-61 Update Select Fields 4-43
creating a 4-3 PARMS field
field characteristics 4-16 Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-32
Panel Definition menu 4-4 path call generation 5-63
panel editing PATH field
field update rules 9-4 Create/Update SSA/Command For DL/I
general rules 9-4 DB/Segment 3-23
literal field rules 9-5 Update DL/I Detail Data Access 5-63
long literal field rules 9-8 PCB
rules for field with panel data 9-5 DBDNAME operand 3-31, 5-31
rules for wrapped variable fields 9-7 DBDNAME statement 3-30
variable field rules 9-5 destination of, see LTERM field 3-32
wrapped literal fields 9-8 EXPRESS value, see EXP field 3-31
panel editor 9-3 key feedback area 3-31
editing modes 9-3 KEYLEN= statement 3-31
full screen edit mode 9-3 LTERM= statement 3-32, 5-31
line edit mode 9-3 name to access the 3-31, 3-33, 5-31
panel image NAME= statement 3-30
creating 4-11 PROCOPT= statement 3-31, 3-34, 5-31
double spaced 8-6 PROCSEQ= statement 3-31, 5-31
editing 4-11 teleprocessing 3-32, 5-31, 5-32
line edit mode 4-14 TYPE= statement 3-30
line numbers 8-6 XFER-PCB 5-32
printing 8-3 XFER-PCB host variable name 3-32
panel image display window PCB field
Update Attribute Parameter 4-25 Update DBMS Characteristics 5-30
Update Help Message Parameters 4-21 PCB masks, DL/I
Update Mapout Parameter 4-23 including in program 2-12
Update Panel Fields (Online) 4-17 PCB PARMS field
panel line size 5-11 Update Database Segment 5-35
PANEL primary command 9-31, 9-32 Update DBD Segment 3-11
PANEL SIZE field PCBNAME field
Update Session Controls 2-33 Create/Update PSB Or File Group 3-31
panel specification Update DBMS Characteristics 5-31
TDF Main menu 1-17 Update Segment Edit (SEGEDIT) 4-60
PARENT field Update Sensitive Segment 3-33
List Search Fields 3-15 PD primary command 9-32
PARENT level 5-63 PDF primary command 9-33
parent segment offset 3-24 PDS primary command 9-33
PARENT/DEVICE field PDSCOPY command, default data 2-34
Create/Update DBD 3-10 PDSCOPY DSNAME field
PARENT=, DBD SEGM statement 3-10, 3-15 Update Session Controls 2-34
PARENTG field PF keys
Create/Update SSA/Command For DL/I code to process 5-13
DB/Segment 3-24 how to define 2-3
Update DL/I Detail Data Access 5-63 setting or changing values 2-28

PFKEYS field POSITION field
Create/Update Screen Definition 5-13 Update Parameter List Extension 4-47
PFKEYS, entry point 5-10, 5-53, 5-122 POSITION primary command 9-33
PFXLBL field PR STORE/RENAME field
Update CICS Journal Data Access 5-86 List Panel Definitions 7-10
Update CICS Journal Record 5-78 PRCTRAN field
PFXLTH field Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-27
Update CICS Journal Data Access 5-86 Create/Update Nonterminal Definition 5-146
Update CICS Journal Record 5-78 PREFIX field 6-45
PGM/PSB NAME field Update Sort Definition 6-46
Update IMS/DC Driver Environment 5-127 PRESENTATION
Update IMS/DC Report Environment 5-139 Prototyping Facility menu 7-5
Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-98 presentation store
PGMCUST field clear data 7-19, 7-20
Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-28 clear values 7-19
Create/Update Driver Definitions 5-124 clear variable names 7-19, 7-20
Create/Update IMS/DC Report Definitions 5-136 editing a 7-15
Create/Update Nonterminal Definition 5-146 load 7-19
Create/Update Screen Definition 5-14 merge 7-19
Update Program Definition Defaults 2-7 save 7-19
PGMCUST, entry point 5-10, 5-53, 5-122 presentation store editor 9-12
PGMNAME field invoking 9-12
Update Batch Environment 6-34 presentation store name 7-4
PIC field PREVIEW field
Update Batch Output Fields 6-10 Update CICS Journal Data Access 5-84
Update Output/Input/Outin Field 4-33 Update CICS Queue Data Access 5-80
picture clause, defining a Update Database User I/O SSALIST 5-66
PIC field 4-33 Update DL/I Detail Data Access 5-61
PKYLTH field Update VSAM or Sequential Detail Data
Create/Update File Segloop 4-71 Access 5-69
PKYUNIQ field PRINT field
Create/Update File Segloop 4-71 Update DBMS Characteristics 5-32
PL/I Update Panel Group 6-15
specified as programming language 2-5 printing a panel image 8-3
PL/I code generation PRMSTYL
nonterminal programs 5-145 PRMSTYL 2-24
sorts 6-45, 6-46, 6-47 PRNTDEST field
storage, minimum for sorts 6-46 Create/Update Nonterminal Definition 5-145
PL/I defaults, overriding of, see PLIXOPT 5-103, 5-112 PROCEDR field
PLISRTA 6-45 Create/Update Batch Definition 6-26
PLISRTB 6-45 Create/Update Driver Definitions 5-123
PLISRTC 6-46 Create/Update IMS/DC Report Definition 5-134
PLISRTD 6-46 Create/Update Nonterminal Definition 5-144
PLIXOPT field Create/Update Screen Definition 5-12
Update Batch Environment 6-35 PROCIN field 6-44
Update CICS Screen Environment 5-112 Update Sort Definition 6-46
Update IMS/DC Driver Environment 5-131 PROCOPT field
Update IMS/DC Report Environment 5-139 Create/Update PSB Or File Group 3-31, 3-34
Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-103 Update DBMS Characteristics 5-31
PLIXOPT statement 5-103, 5-107, 5-112, 5-131, 5-139 PROCOPT, PCB field 3-11, 5-35
Index X-29
PROCOPT=, PCB statement 3-31, 3-34, 5-31 PSB (continued)
PROCOUT field 6-44 destination for messages, see LTERM field 3-32
Update Sort Definition 6-46 importing 3-3
PROCSEQ field last update of 3-7
Create/Update PSB Or File Group 3-31 name of 3-5
Create/Update SSA/Command For DL/I SENSEG INDICES field 3-34
DB/Segment 3-23 PSB field
Update DBMS Characteristics 5-31 Update Session Controls 2-33
PROCSEQ=, PCB statement 3-31, 5-31 PSB scheduling and terminating 2-11
PROFILE primary command 9-34 PSBNAME field
program Update Batch Environment 6-35
copying 8-3 Update Environment Definition Defaults 2-11
listing 8-3 PSBSCHD field
renaming 8-3 Update Environment Definition Defaults 2-11
program definition structure 4-2 Punctuation marks (syntax diagrams) 1-9
program environment 5-7 PURGE primary command 9-35
identification 5-4
program identifiers
screens B-2 Q
program IDs Q command code 3-24, 5-63
A4 status code 5-102 Q-100-CICS-INIT program section 2-13
IMS message switches 5-101 Q-1000-PROGRAM-INIT batch program section
IMS transaction code 5-130 INIT field 6-27
IMS transaction codes 5-101, 5-130 Q-200-PSB-SCHEDULE program section 2-11
message switches 5-129 Q-210-PSB-TERM program section 2-11
program specification block, see PSB 3-2 QBUSY condition 5-81, 5-83
program variables, aligning, see ALIGN field 5-107 QIDERR condition 5-81
programming language 2-5 QN100I 5-148
Programs QN100T 5-148
comma QN200I 5-148
repeat symbol, use in 1-12 QN200T 5-148
parentheses QN210I 5-148
syntax diagrams, use in 1-10 QN210T 5-148
punctuation QN300I 5-148
syntax diagrams, use in 1-9 QN300T 5-148
PROGTYP QUAL field
PROGTYP 2-25 DB2/Catalog Import 3-50
prototyping commands qualification statements
View Panel Definition 7-19 building qualification statements for request 5-64
prototyping facility qualify an I/O request 3-24
TDF Main menu 1-17 to qualify an I/O request 5-62
Prototyping Facility menu 7-3 qualifier
prototyping, entering commands 7-6 table 5-31
PRT field qualifier, DB2 3-50, 3-52, 3-79
Create/Update PSB Or File Group 3-32 qualifier, SQL 3-54
PS NAME field QUELBL field
Prototyping Facility menu 7-4 Update CICS Queue Record 5-74
PSB QUELBL variable
creation of 8-6 overriding CQNAME 3-43
defining/maintaining a 3-2, 3-28 queues
description of 3-5, 3-7 accesses, group level variable name 3-45

queues (continued) REMARKS field (continued)
AUTOEXEC requests 5-27 Create/Update IMS/DC Report Definitions 5-134
COBOL COPY, overriding 5-75 Create/Update Nonterminal Definition 5-143
defining 3-4 Create/Update Screen Definition 5-10
DGADD 5-22, 5-73 RENAME field
inheritance situation 5-73 List Data Administration Information 3-7
length, specifying 5-74, 5-82 List Panel Definitions 4-10
PL/I INCLUDE, overriding 5-75 List Presentation Stores 7-13
REC line, use of 5-24 List/Show Custom Code 5-91
status code 4-57 renaming member 8-3
types 5-73, 5-80 REORDER field
updating 3-43, 3-44, 3-45, 5-73, 5-74 Update PL/I Executable Options 5-108
user exec requests 5-27 REPEAT field
writing to storage 5-73 Create/Update File Segloop 4-70
QZERO condition 4-57, 5-81 Create/Update Table Segloop 4-66
REPEAT line command 9-52
repeat previous statement 2-33
R repeating sequence of line skips 6-15
RANDOM 3-40, 5-44 REPLACE primary command 9-37
random access 3-40, 5-44 replace unprintable characters A-13
RCHANGE primary command 9-35 report
RDBMS characteristics 5-3
Update SQL ALIAS 3-76 report definition
RDBMS field creating/updating/purging/showing a 5-5
Update Batch Environment 6-35 description of 5-7
READQ request 5-83 report output, destination of 6-26
REC line 5-24 report size, number of lines and columns 5-134
RECLTH field reports
Show/Update Data Set Default Data 3-41 batch 6-26
Update Data Set Record 5-44 nonterminal definition 5-145
Update VSAM or Sequential Detail Data REPSEQ field
Access 5-72 Update Panel Group 6-15
record REQ field
I/O area 3-38, 5-42 Update Output/Input/Outin Field 4-33
layout 3-38, 3-39, 5-42, 5-43 Update Panel Fields (Batch) 6-5
maximum length 3-41 Update Panel Fields (Online) 4-19
Record Identification Field length REQID field
see KEYLEN field 3-39 Update CICS Journal Data Access 5-86
record length REQIDLBL field
maximum length 5-72 Update CICS Journal Data Access 5-86
record length, see LRECL or RECLTH fields 5-44 REQUEST field
record, I/O area Create/Update Data Group 5-24
overriding of 3-39, 5-42 RESET line command 9-4
REFRESH field RESET LINE line command 9-52
Update/Show Screen Parameters 5-117 RESET primary command 9-4, 9-38
relational operator field 3-13 RESLTCC field
RELATIVE 3-40, 5-43 SPBROWSE, SPTRNACT and SPRDNEXT Data
relative key 3-39, 3-40, 5-43 Access 5-54
REMARKS field RESLTNR KEY field
Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-24 SPBROWSE, SPTRNACT and SPRDNEXT Data
Create/Update Driver Definitions 5-122 Access 5-48
Index X-31
RESLTPR field S13Q screen identifier 5-73
SPBROWSE, SPTRNACT and SPRDNEXT Data S144 screen identifier 5-56
Access 5-55 S145 screen identifier 5-61
RESTORE line command 9-53 S146 screen identifier 5-69
RESTORE primary command 9-38, 9-39 S147 screen identifier 5-46
RESULTS Update SQL Detail Data Access 5-47
RESULTS 2-23 S149 screen identifier 5-88
RESUME primary command 9-39 S14J screen identifier 5-84
return code S14Q screen identifier 5-80
.A4 5-130 S151 screen identifier 5-93
A4 5-102, 5-130 S159 screen identifier 5-90
return code, ignoring 5-28 S161 screen identifier 5-96
REUSE field S162 screen identifier 5-96
Show/Update Data Set Default Data 3-42 S163 screen identifier 5-104
RFIND primary command 9-36 S164 screen identifier 5-107
RID S165 screen identifier 5-109
length of 5-43 S166 screen identifier 5-110
RID field length S167 screen identifier 5-127
RID field length 3-39 S168 screen identifier 5-138
RIDFLD S185 screen identifier 5-66
WORKSPA field 5-28 S187 screen identifier 5-58
RIGHT primary command 9-40 S210 screen identifier 5-120
RIGHT SHIFT line command 9-53 S214 screen identifier 5-121
RMNAME field S225 screen identifier 5-151
Create/Update DBD 3-8 S310 screen identifier 5-132
root segment 3-8, 3-10, 3-15 S314 screen identifier 5-132
row 5-33, 5-34 S401 screen identifier 5-149
ROW NAME save active presentation store 7-19
Create/Update IDMS SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-63 SAVE line command 9-53
ROW NAME field SAVE primary command 9-40
Select Columns 5-58 SAVEKEY field
row, see TLNROW field 3-35 Create/Update File Segloop 4-72
RPTDEST field Create/Update Table Segloop 4-67
Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-26 scheduling DL/I PSBs 2-11
Create/Update Nonterminal Definition 5-145 SCHEMA
RRDS 3-39, 3-40, 5-43 Create/Update IDMS SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-62
RRN, OPTLIST field 3-40, 5-44, 5-71 SCHEMA 2-24
SCHFLDC field
S Create/Update File Segloop 4-74
S100 screen identifier 5-5 SCHFLDI field
S110 screen identifier 5-8 Create/Update File Segloop 4-74
S112 screen identifier 5-115 SCHFLDL field
S114 screen identifier 5-9 Create/Update File Segloop 4-74
S125 screen identifier 5-20 SCONSIS field
S127 screen identifier 5-30 Update Select Fields 4-41
S135 screen identifier 5-35 Update Select Parameters 5-141
S136 screen identifier 5-40 SCOPE field
S137 screen identifier 5-33 Update Batch Output Fields 6-12
S13J screen identifier 5-77 screen

screen (continued) screens (continued)
characteristics 5-3 List/Show Custom Code 5-90
screen column size 5-11 Online Program Definition menu 5-5
screen definition 1-17, 5-3 Panel Definition menu 4-4
creating/updating/purging/showing a 5-5 Prototyping Facility menu 7-3
description of 5-7 Select Columns 5-58
DGADDing journals 3-46 Select New Row Name 5-33
screen field Show/Purge Batch Definitions 6-22
entries 4-57 Show/Purge CICS Screen Environment 5-110
screen field, entries Show/Purge Driver Definitions 5-121
required 4-54 Show/Purge IMS/DC Report Definitions 5-132
screen image portion, transfer work area 5-117 Show/Purge Nonterminal Definition 5-142
screen line size 5-11 Show/Purge PSBs Or File Groups 3-28
screen program IDs Show/Purge Screen Definition 5-9
F100 1-16 Show/Purge TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-96
screen size 2-33 Show/Update Data Set Default Data 3-37
SCREEN XFEDIT/SEGEDIT field Specify Tables Being Joined 3-79
Create/Update Screen Definition 5-13 Update Attribute Parameter 4-25
screens Update Batch Environment 6-33
Batch Program Definition menu 6-18 Update Batch Literal Fields 6-7
Batch Program Definition menu (long form) 6-18 Update CICS Journal Data Access 5-84
Batch Program Definition menu (short form) 6-18 Update CICS Journal Default Data 3-46
Catalog/Import DB2 Tables 3-49 Update CICS Journal Record 5-77
Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-22 Update CICS Queue Data Access 5-80
Create/Update Data Group 5-20 Update CICS Queue Default Data 3-43
Create/Update DBD 3-8 Update CICS Queue Record 5-73
Create/Update Driver Definitions 5-120 Update CICS Screen Environment 5-109
Create/Update File Segloop 4-69 Update Cross-Field Edit (XFEDIT) 4-52
Create/Update IDMS SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-60 Update Data Set Record 5-40
Create/Update IMS/DC Report Definitions 5-132 Update Database Segment 5-35
Create/Update Nonterminal Definition 5-142, 5-149, Update Database User I/O SSALIST 5-66
5-151 Update DBD Segment 3-11
Create/Update PSB Or File Group 3-28 Update DBMS Characteristics 5-30
Create/Update Screen Definition 5-8 Update DL/I Detail Data Access 5-61
Create/Update SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-53 Update DLIDSCs For Segment Member 3-18
Create/Update SSA/Command For DL/I Update Environment Definition Defaults 2-10
DB/Segment 3-22 Update Group Merge Keys 6-50
Create/Update Table Segloop 4-65 Update Help Message Parameters 4-21
Data Administration menu 3-3 Update IMS MFSs 5-104
Edit Custom Code 5-93 Update IMS/DC Driver Environment 5-127
Edit Panel Image 4-11 Update IMS/DC Report Environment 5-138
Field Extension 5-56 Update Literal Fields 4-29
Line Edit 4-14 Update Mapout Parameter 4-23
List Consistency Edits 4-49 Update Match Keys 6-37
List Data Administration Information 3-6 Update Output/Input/Outin Field 4-32
List Merge Key Groups 6-42 Update Panel Fields (Batch) 6-3
List Panel Definitions 4-9, 7-8 Update Panel Fields (Online) 4-16
List Presentation Stores 7-12 Update Panel Group 6-14
List Search Fields 3-15 Update Parameter List Extension 4-47
List Sorts 6-40 Update PF Keys Definition 2-28
List SQL Tables/Joins 3-51 Update PL/I Executable Options 5-107
Index X-33
screens (continued) SEGKEY field
Update Program Definition Defaults 2-5 Update VSAM or Sequential Detail Data
Update Segment Edit (SEGEDIT) 4-55 Access 5-70
Update Select Fields 4-40 SEGKEY field, see also KEY field 5-70
Update Select Parameters 5-140 SEGLOOP
Update Sensitive Segment 3-33 Create/Update File Segloop 4-69
Update Sensitive TLNROWs 3-35 create/update table SEGLOOP 4-65
Update Session Controls 2-30 first field name 4-65, 4-69
Update Sort Definition 6-44 last field name 4-66, 4-70
Update SQL ALIAS 3-75 range of, see SEGLOOP DELIMITERS field 4-20
Update SQL Detail Data Access 5-46 SEGLOOP 4-54, 4-60
Update SQL Join — Access Columns 3-83 type of 4-65
Update SQL Join — Join Columns 3-81 SEGLOOP DELIMITERS field
Update Stored Procedure Environment Definition Update Panel Fields (Online) 4-20
Defaults 2-23 SEGLOOP field
Update TPPCB Detail Data Access 5-88 Create/Update File Segloop 4-69
Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-96 Create/Update Table Segloop 4-65
Update UNIX Environment Definition Defaults 2-19 Panel Definition menu 4-7
Update VSAM or Sequential Detail Data SEGLOOP information, deleting 9-49
Access 5-69 SEGLOOP-COUNT host variable name 4-67, 4-68,
Update WINCH Environment Definition 4-72, 4-73
Defaults 2-21 SEGLTH field
Update/Show Screen Parameters 5-115 overriding the 3-41, 5-44
User Profile Maintenance 2-3 SEGM field
Verify DLIDSC Count 3-27 Update Database Segment 5-35
View Panel Definition 7-18 Update DBD Segment 3-11
View Presentation Store 7-15 SEGM, DBD statement 3-9
screens Update Batch Output Fields 6-9 segment
search field adding to a DBD 5-22
length of 3-17 I/O area of 3-12, 5-36
picture clause 3-17 layout 3-12, 5-36
starting position 3-17 maintaining position 3-23
type of data 3-17 name of 3-18, 3-22, 3-27
SEARCH FIELDS field name of, see NAME field 3-9
Update DBD Segment 3-11 parent segment offset 3-24
search fields, segment 3-15 requested for Auto I/O 4-41
secondary index 3-31, 5-31 retrieving a key 3-14
SECTION field variable length 3-24
Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-28 segment definition 3-12, 5-36
Create/Update Driver Definitions 5-124 segment edit 4-55
Create/Update IMS/DC Report Definitions 5-136 SEGMENT field
Create/Update Nonterminal Definition 5-146 Create/Update SSA/Command For DL/I
Create/Update Screen Definition 5-14 DB/Segment 3-22
SECTION, entry point 5-10, 5-53, 5-122 Update Database Segment 5-37
SEGEDIT Update Database User I/O SSALIST 5-68
consistency edits example 4-63 Update DBD Segment 3-13
copying an existing 4-55 Update DL/I Detail Data Access 5-64
List Consistency Edits 4-49 Update DLIDSCs For Segment Member 3-18
SEGEXIT field Verify DLIDSC Count 3-27
Update IMS MFSs 5-104 Segment I/O Area, maximum size required 5-131

segment key sequence number
name of 3-10 List Search Fields screen 3-16
number of bytes 3-10, 3-16 sequence number field
starting byte position 3-10, 3-16 Update DBD Segment 3-13
SEGMENT KEY field 3-15 sequential
Create/Update DBD 3-10 ACCESS field 3-38, 5-40
SEGMENT NAME field sequential access 3-40, 5-44
Update Segment Edit (SEGEDIT) 4-56 sequential file
segment name, identifying a 3-12 defining/maintaining a 3-2
segment qualification option description of 3-5, 3-7
specifying the 3-20, 3-23 last update of 3-7
SEGMENT-IO-AREA 2-11 name of 3-5
segment, I/O area sequential record length, see LRECL or RECLTH
overriding of 3-13, 5-37 fields 5-40
segment, reserving for exclusive use by program 5-63 session controls
SEGSET, OPTLIST field 3-40, 5-44, 5-71 User Profile Maintenance 2-3
SEGSETALL, OPTLIST field 3-40, 5-44, 5-71 SET field
select Update CICS Queue Data Access 5-82
field type 2-6 SETLBL field
Select Columns 5-58 Update CICS Queue Data Access 5-82
select field 2-31, 6-45 SETMODE command 2-34, 5-5
Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-26 SETPARENT 3-24
J-100 paragraph 4-41 SHIFT field
Select Columns 5-58 Utilities menu 8-6
Select New Row Name 5-34 show CICS environment 5-110
SELECT FIELDS field SHOW primary command 9-41
Create/Update Screen Definition 5-13 Show/Purge Batch Definitions 6-22
Select New Row Name 5-33 Show/Purge CA-IDMS/CA-Datacom/SQL
select, field type Tables/TLNROWs (D157) screen 3-54
acceptable input values 4-36, 6-12 Show/Purge CICS Screen Environment 5-110
CURSOR AT FIELD field 4-54, 4-58 Show/Purge Driver Definitions 5-121
required 4-54 Show/Purge IMS/DC Report Definitions 5-132
screen field entries 4-57 Show/Purge Ingres II/Oracle SQL Tables/TLNROWs
SELKEY field (D167) screen 3-54
Update Select Fields 4-41 Show/Purge Nonterminal Definition 5-142
SENCOLS field Show/Purge PSBs Or File Groups 3-28
Update SQL Detail Data Access 5-50 Show/Purge Screen Definition 5-9
SENSEG statement, NAME= 3-33 Show/Purge SQL Tables/TLNROWs (D147) screen 3-54
SENSEG statement, PROCOPT= Show/Purge TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-96
see PROCOPT field 3-34 Show/Update Data Set Default Data 3-37
sensitive columns, see SENCOLS field 5-50 SIZE field
SEQ 3-40, 5-44 Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-24
SEQ field Create/Update IMS/DC Report Definitions 5-134
Create/Update DBD 3-8 Create/Update Nonterminal Definition 5-144
Create/Update PSB Or File Group 3-29 Create/Update Screen Definition 5-11
List Consistency Edits 4-49 List Merge Key Groups 6-43
Update Match Keys 6-37 Panel Definition menu 4-6
Update Sensitive Segment 3-33 Update Match Keys 6-38
Update Sensitive TLNROWs 3-35 Update Panel Fields (Batch) 6-4
Update Sort Definition 6-47 Update Select Parameters 5-140
Update Sort Definition 6-48
Index X-35
size of report 5-134 SQLMOD
SKIPAFT field SQLMOD 2-25
Update Panel Group 6-15 SRC
SKIPBEF field List Consistency Edits 4-49
Update Panel Group 6-15 SRCHFLD NAME field
SMALLINT 3-57 List Search Fields 3-16
SORT GIVING 6-46 SSA
sort keys 6-47 building SSA statements for request 5-64
SORT USING 6-46 call against the data base 5-65
SORTIN 6-45, 6-46 determining length of A-25
sorting sequence 6-46 IMS key picture clause 3-16
SORTNAME field KEYPIC field 3-16, 3-17
List Sorts 6-41 search field picture clause 3-17
Update Sort Definition 6-46 SSA command code field
SORTOUT 6-45, 6-46 overriding of 3-20, 5-37
SORTWK files 6-46 overriding the 3-23, 5-64
SORTWK01 6-45 SSA Command Code field, overriding of 3-13
source code SSA host variables 5-68
exporting program definition 8-3 SSA LIST HOST VARIABLE field
SPA-AREA 5-112 Update Database User I/O SSALIST 5-68
SPA-AREA host variable name 2-12 SSA, overriding 4-59
SPA, IMS 2-13, 5-97, 5-127 SSALIST field
SPA, with fixed number of overhead bytes 2-14, 5-99 Update Database User I/O SSALIST 5-67
spaces when same value 6-8 Update DL/I Detail Data Access 5-62
SPACMPAT field 2-14, 5-99 Update Segment Edit (SEGEDIT) 4-59
SPACMPT field SSAs
Update Environment Definition Defaults 2-14 listing 5-37, 5-64
Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-99 STANDARD field
SPASIZE field Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-24
Update Environment Definition Defaults 2-10, 2-13 standard sort
Update IMS/DC Driver Environment 5-128 indicator for current structure 6-24
Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-99 START BROWSE KEY 4-73
SPASTG field START field
Update Environment Definition Defaults 2-12 Create/Update DBD 3-10
SPEC field List Search Fields 3-16, 3-17
Update Batch Output Fields 6-11 Update Sort Definition 6-48
Update Output/Input/Outin Field 4-35 START=, DBD FIELD statement 3-10, 3-16
Update Select Fields 4-43 STARTIO field
SPECIAL EDITS Update CICS Journal Data Access 5-86
use with prototyping 7-2 STATE A-9
Specify Tables Being Joined 3-79 state, checking for valid A-52
SPUFI 3-53 statement
SQL compression of 2-32
error condition return codes 4-57 repeating a 2-33
key field and variables correspondence 4-56 STATUS 5-149
qualifier 3-52, 3-54 status code
SQL I/O WHERE conditions 5-59 A4 5-102, 5-130
SQL QUAL.NAME field status codes, ignoring 5-28
List SQL Tables/Joins 3-52 STAYRES
SQL statement access 3-57, 5-59 STAYRES 2-27

STBRKEY field table (continued)
Create/Update File Segloop 4-73 key name 3-81
STORAGE field name of 3-5, 3-50, 3-52
Update PL/I Executable Options 5-108 naming a 3-50, 3-54, 3-79, 3-80, 3-83, 5-58
Update Sort Definition 6-46 qualifier 5-31
storage, variable row 5-33
allocating at execution time 5-108 TABLE field
reorder program, see REORDER field 5-108 Update DBMS Characteristics 5-30
SUB field TABLE NAME field
View Presentation Store 7-17 Select Columns 5-58
SUB, prototyping command 7-19 Select New Row Name 5-33
SUBMIT primary command 9-42 Specify Tables Being Joined 3-80
subscript variables 7-17, 7-19 table SEGLOOP 4-65
SUMMARY TABLENAME field
GPTYPE field 6-5, 6-15 Catalog/Import DB2 Tables 3-50
SWAP command tablename, DB2 3-50
prototyping facility restriction 7-2 tail, wrapped variable field 9-7
SWAP primary command 9-42 TASKIN 6-46
SYNONYM TASKOUT 6-46
Create/Update IDMS SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-62 TBLNAME field
SYNONYM field Update Sensitive TLNROWs 3-35
Create/Update SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-54 TDF Main menu 1-16
Update DBMS Characteristics 5-31 TDSKIP field
Syntax diagrams Update Panel Group 6-15
reading (how to) 1-9—1-14 temporary storage 4-73
SYSID field DGADD 5-22
Update CICS Queue Data Access 5-82 generating 5-83
Update CICS Queue Default Data 3-44 handle conditions 5-81
Update CICS Queue Record 5-74 queue names 3-44, 5-73, 5-80
SYSID, OPTLIST field 3-40, 5-44, 5-71 status codes 4-57
SYSIDERR condition 5-81 TERM field
SYSMSG field Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-28
Update IMS MFSs 5-104 Create/Update Driver Definitions 5-124
Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-102 Create/Update Nonterminal Definition 5-146
system environment 2-32 terminal alarm 2-6, 5-117
system log terminal I/O characteristics 5-115
CICS reserved ID 3-47 terminal ID 3-7
system messages, field in TELON generated terminating DL/I PSBs 2-11
program 5-102, 5-104 testing
SYSWK-cjname-JOURNAL-LENGTH 3-47 IMS programs 2-16
TEXT field
Update Batch Literal Fields 6-8
T Update Literal Fields 4-29
T-1000-PROGRAM-TERM batch program section TGREATR field
TERM field 6-28 Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-28
table 5-30, 5-33, 5-34 TLN field
Add/Update SQL Join Alias 3-85 Catalog/Import DB2 Tables 3-50
correlation name 3-79, 3-82, 3-84 TLNIIS A-4
defining/maintaining a 3-2 TLNNAME
description of 3-5 Add/Update SQL Join Alias 3-85
importing a 3-49, 3-50 Create/Update IDMS SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-61
Index X-37
TLNNAME (continued) TPPCB
Update SQL ALIAS 3-76 passing with the WRITE request 5-89
TLNNAME field TRACE field
Catalog/Import DB2 Tables 3-50 TRACE 2-18
Create/Update SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-54 Update Batch Environment 6-33
List SQL Tables/Joins 3-52 Update CICS Screen Environment 5-110
max size 3-5 Update Environment Definition Defaults 2-11, 2-14,
Specify Tables Being Joined 3-79, 3-80 2-16, 2-17
Update DBMS Characteristics 5-30 Update IMS/DC Driver Environment 5-128
Update SQL Join — Access Columns 3-83 Update IMS/DC Report Environment 5-139
Update SQL Join — Join Columns 3-81 Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-98
TLNROW 3-56 trace variables 2-11, 5-98, 5-110, 5-128
Update SQL ALIAS 3-75 TRANCDE field
TLNROW field Update CICS Screen Environment 5-111
Select New Row Name 5-34 Update Environment Definition Defaults 2-15
Update Sensitive TLNROWs 3-35 Update IMS/DC Driver Environment 5-128
TLNROW, name of 3-56, 5-59 Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-99
TN100T 5-148 TRANFLD field
TN1OOI 5-148 Update Environment Definition Defaults 2-15
TO field Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-99
Panel Definition menu 4-7 TRANMFS field
TO HEADER field Update Environment Definition Defaults 2-15
Utilities menu 8-4 Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-99
TO ID field TRANSACT auto exec data access 5-146
Utilities menu 8-5 transaction code 2-15
TOPDTL transaction code name 2-15
FORGRP field 6-16 transaction code, imbedded to MID 2-15
GPTYPE field 6-4, 6-15 TRANSACTION FILE field
TOPPAGE Update Match Keys 6-37
FORGRP field 6-16 transaction key
GPTYPE field 6-4, 6-5, 6-15 match structure 6-28
TOTREF field TRANSFER primary command 9-43
Update Batch Output Fields 6-12 transfer work area 5-12, 5-111
TOTSIZE field field name for mapping data 4-41
Update Batch Output Fields 6-13 including COPY member names 2-7
TP input buffer, maximum size 5-131 screen image portion 5-117
TP output buffer, maximum size 5-131 transferring control from panel to panel
TP-BUFFER 2-12 View Panel Definition 7-18
TP-BUFFER, where generated, see TPBSTG field 5-114 transient data
TP-OUTPUT-XFER-BUFFER definition 5-101, 5-130 DGADD 5-22
TPBSTG field handle conditions 5-81
Update CICS Screen Environment 5-114 queue names 3-44, 5-73, 5-80
Update Environment Definition Defaults 2-12 status codes 4-57
TPI-, input buffer names 4-17, 4-29, 4-32, 4-40 translate lower case to upper case
TPISIZE field prototyping facility 7-5
Update IMS/DC Driver Environment 5-131 translating literals to upper case 4-6
TPO-, output buffer names 4-17, 4-29, 4-32, 4-40 translating literals to uppercase 2-33
TPOSIZE field translation, lowercase to uppercase 2-5
Update IMS/DC Driver Environment 5-131 TSO
TPPARMS field environment 2-32
Update TPPCB Detail Data Access 5-89 environment parameters 2-16

TSO primary command 9-44 Update CICS Queue Record 5-73
Type Update CICS Screen Environment 5-109
Batch Program Definition menu 6-20 Update Cross-Field Edit (XFEDIT) 4-52
Create/Update IDMS SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-61, consistency edits example 4-62
3-64 Update Data Set Record 5-40
List Search Fields screen 3-16 Update Database Segment 5-35
TYPE field Update Database User I/O SSALIST 5-66
Create/Update DBD 3-9 UPDATE DBD field
Create/Update PSB Or File Group 3-30 Update DBD Segment 3-11
Create/Update SQL Tables/TLNROWs 3-57 Update DBD Segment 3-11
List Consistency Edits 4-50 Update DBMS Characteristics 5-30
List Search Fields 3-17 Update DL/I Detail Data Access 5-61
Select Columns 5-59 Update DLIDSCs For Segment Member 3-18
Show/Update Data Set Default Data 3-40 UPDATE ENVIRON DEF DEFAULTS field
Update CICS Queue Data Access 5-80 Update Program Definition Defaults 2-9
Update CICS Queue Default Data 3-44 Update Environment Definition Defaults 2-10
Update CICS Queue Record 5-73 UPDATE field
Update Data Set Record 5-43 Catalog/Import DB2 Tables 3-50
Update DBMS Characteristics 5-30 List Data Administration Information 3-7
Update IMS MFSs 5-104 List Panel Definitions 4-10, 7-10
Update Panel Group 6-14 List Presentation Stores 7-14
Utilities menu 8-4 Update DBD Segment 3-14
TYPE=, PCB statement 3-30 Update SQL Detail Data Access 5-49
UPDATE GROUP line command 9-53
Update Group Merge Keys 6-50
U Update Help Message Parameters 4-21
U field UPDATE I/O requests 5-23
Create/Update SSA/Command For DL/I Update IMS MFSs 5-104
DB/Segment 3-24 Update IMS/DC Driver Environment 5-127
Update Panel Fields (Batch) 6-4 Update IMS/DC Report Environment 5-138
U-100 section Update Literal Fields 4-29
U-100-request-segment-name program section 2-7 Update Mapout Parameter 4-23
U-100-USER-IO program section 2-7 Update Match Keys 6-37
U/S field Update Output/Input/Outin Field 4-32
Update Select Parameters 5-140 Update Panel Fields (Batch) 6-3
U.S. format for date A-4, A-5, A-6, A-15, A-23, A-33, Update Panel Fields (Online) 4-16
A-37 Update Panel Group 6-14
U100 screen identifier 8-3 Update Parameter List Extension 4-47
undefined store character 7-5 Update PF Keys Definition 2-28
unprintable characters, replacing A-13 Update PL/I Executable Options 5-107
UPDATE 5-150 Update Program Definition Defaults 2-5
Update Attribute Parameter 4-25 Update Segment Edit (SEGEDIT) 4-55
Update Batch Environment 6-33 consistency edits example 4-63
Update Batch Literal Fields 6-7 Update Select Fields 4-40
Update Batch Output Fields 6-9 Update Select Parameters 5-140
Update CICS Journal Data Access 5-84 Update Sensitive Segment 3-33
Update CICS Journal Default Data 3-46 Update Sensitive TLNROWs 3-35
Update CICS Journal Record 5-77 Update Session Controls 2-30
Update CICS Queue Data Access 5-80 Update Sort Definition 6-44
Update CICS Queue Default Data 3-43 Update SQL ALIAS 3-75
Index X-39
Update SQL Detail Data Access 5-46 USER field (continued)
Update SQL Join — Access Columns 3-83 List Panel Definitions 4-10, 7-10
Update SQL Join — Join Columns 3-81 List Presentation Stores 7-14
Update Stored Procedure Environment Definition List/Show Custom Code 5-92
Defaults 2-23 User I/O
Update TPPCB Detail Data Access 5-88 GROUP BY clause 5-51
Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-96 HAVING clause 5-52
Update UNIX Environment Definition Defaults 2-19 ORDERBY clause, see ORDERBY field 5-51
Update VSAM or Sequential Detail Data Access 5-69 USER MODE field
Update WINCH Environment Definition Defaults 2-21 Update Session Controls 2-34
UPDATE, OPTLIST field 3-40 user profile maintenance 2-3
Update/Show Screen Parameters 5-115 TDF Main menu 1-16
UPDATED field user sort
List/Show Custom Code 5-92 COBOL programs 6-44
UPDCOLS field copying 6-40
Field Extension 5-57 description for 6-41
UPDTA field listing 6-40
Create/Update Driver Definitions 5-123 PL/I programs 6-45
Update/Show Screen Parameters 5-116 purging 6-26, 6-40, 6-44
UPPER CASE LITERALS field showing 6-40
Update Session Controls 2-33 system-reserved name 6-41
USAGE field updating 6-25, 6-40, 6-44
Select New Row Name 5-33 zapping 6-40
Update Batch Literal Fields 6-7 USER SORTS field
Update Batch Output Fields 6-9 Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-25
Update CICS Journal Record 5-78 USEREXEC
Update CICS Queue Record 5-75 replace CICS journal name 3-47
Update Data Set Record 5-41 replace CICS queue name 3-44
Update Database Segment 5-36 USEREXEC requests
Update Literal Fields 4-29 online programs 5-23
Update Output/Input/Outin Field 4-32 USERID field
Update Select Fields 4-40 Catalog/Import DB2 Tables 3-50
USE field USGCOP1 field
Update Attribute Parameter 4-25 Update Environment Definition Defaults 2-12
Update Help Message Parameters 4-21 USGCOP2 field
Update Mapout Parameter 4-23 Update Environment Definition Defaults 2-12, 2-13
Update Panel Fields (Batch) 6-4 USGCOPY field
Update Panel Fields (Online) 4-17 Update Batch Environment 6-34
USECNT field Update CICS Screen Environment 5-112
Update DLIDSCs For Segment Member 3-19 Update Environment Definition Defaults 2-12, 2-14,
USECNT, incrementing 3-19, 5-37, 5-64 2-16, 2-17
USECOL1 field Update IMS/DC Driver Environment 5-128
Utilities menu 8-7 Update IMS/DC Report Environment 5-138
USED BY field Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-98, 5-99
Verify DLIDSC Count 3-27 utilities
USER 5-150 TDF Main menu 1-17
user exec 5-3 Utilities menu 8-3
user exec requests utilities, JCL 3-3
online programs 5-20
USER field
List Data Administration Information 3-7

WHERE conditions 3-81, 3-82, 3-84, 5-59
V WHERE field
V command code 3-23 Create/Update Data Group 5-28
V SSA command code 5-63 Select New Row Name 5-33
valid integer, checking for A-50 Update SQL Detail Data Access 5-48
valid state, checking for A-52 WKAREA field
VARCHAR 3-57 Create/Update Batch Definitions 6-26
variable key access 3-39, 3-40, 5-43 Create/Update Driver Definitions 5-124
variable storage Create/Update IMS/DC Report Definitions 5-135
allocating at execution time 5-108 Create/Update Nonterminal Definition 5-145
reorder program, see REORDER field 5-108 Create/Update Screen Definition 5-12
variable-length records, maximum length 4-59 WKAREA, entry point 5-10, 5-53, 5-122
Variables (syntax diagrams) 1-9 WKSPAIN field
VARLTH field Update Environment Definition Defaults 2-15
Create/Update SSA/Command For DL/I Update IMS/DC Driver Environment 5-129
DB/Segment 3-24 Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-100
VCHAR A-9 WKSPAIO field
VERIFY command 3-19 Update Environment Definition Defaults 2-15
Verify DLIDSC Count 3-27 Update IMS/DC Driver Environment 5-129
version of TELON, identifying 5-116 Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-100
view WKSPASZ field
importing a 3-49 Update Environment Definition Defaults 2-15
View Panel Definition 7-18 Update IMS/DC Driver Environment 5-128
View Presentation Store 7-15 Update TSO or IMS Screen Environment 5-100
VNULL A-9 WLMENV
VSAM WLMENV 2-23
ACCESS field 3-38, 5-40 work area 5-12
data set name, accessed by the SEGEDIT 4-56 working storage
direct access 3-40, 5-44 field name for mapping data 4-41
dynamic access 3-40, 5-44 WORKSPA
ESDS 3-40, 5-43 database 2-13, 5-97
KSDS 3-39, 3-40, 5-43 database initialization code 2-15, 5-100
random access 3-40, 5-44 database, size of 2-15
RRDS 3-39, 3-40, 5-43 retrieval and writing of WORKSPA databases 2-15,
sequential access 3-40, 5-44 5-100
VSAM record length, see LRECL or RECLTH WORKSPA database 5-127
fields 5-40 WORKSPA database initialization code 5-129
VSAM SEGMENT LTH field WORKSPA usage 5-25, 5-36, 5-42
Update Segment Edit (SEGEDIT) 4-59 WORKSPA, retrieval and writing of WORKSPA
VSAM variable-length records, maximum length 4-59 databases 5-129
wrapped variable 9-7, 9-32
W WRITE request
passing TPPCBs 5-89
WAIT field
Update CICS Journal Data Access 5-86
WAIT parameter
Update CICS Journal Data Access 5-85
X
X-100-CONSIS-EDITS program section field 5-13
WHEN field XFEDIT
Update Segment Edit (SEGEDIT) 4-56 copying an existing 4-52
WHERE clause 5-33 example 4-62
Index X-41
XFEDIT/SEGEDIT field
Update Select Parameters 5-141
XFER field
Create/Update Driver Definitions 5-124
XFER-PCB 5-32
XFER-PCB host variable name
ABCALL field 5-32
MSGCALL field 5-31
XFERWKA field
Create/Update Driver Definitions 5-123
Create/Update IMS/DC Report Definitions 5-135
Create/Update Nonterminal Definition 5-145
Create/Update Screen Definition 5-12
XFERWKA, entry point 5-10, 5-53, 5-122
XFIELD
List Consistency Edits 4-49
XOPTS field
Update PL/I Executable Options 5-108
Z
Z100I 5-126, 5-137
Z900I 5-126, 5-137, 5-148
Z970I 5-148
Z970T 5-148
Z980I 5-126, 5-137
Z980T 5-126, 5-148
Z990I 5-148
zapping
batch sort structures 6-25
zoned decimal, sort format 6-48

Design Facility Reference 4.1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Design Facility Reference 4.1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Design Facility Reference 4.1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Advantage CA-Telon®

The manufacturer of this documentation is Computer Associates International, Inc.

First Edition, May 2003

 2003 Computer Associates International, Inc.

Chapter 1. CA-Telon Design Facility Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Chapter 2. User Profile Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Chapter 3. Data Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Chapter 4. Panel Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Chapter 5. Online Program Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

iv Design Facility Reference Guide

Chapter 6. Batch Program Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Chapter 7. Prototyping Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Chapter 8. Utility Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Chapter 9. Editors and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

vi Design Facility Reference Guide

Appendix A. Field Edit Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Appendix B. Screen Program Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

viii Design Facility Reference Guide

Chapter 1. CA-Telon Design Facility Main Menu 1-1

1.1 What This Manual is About

1-2 Design Facility Reference Guide

1.2 Who Should Use This Manual

The manual is designed to be used in conjunction with:

Chapter 1. CA-Telon Design Facility Main Menu 1-3

1.3 Where to Find Additional Information

1-4 Design Facility Reference Guide

1.4 About Advantage CA-Telon

Chapter 1. CA-Telon Design Facility Main Menu 1-5

1.5 Advantage CA-Telon Design Facility

To leave the Telon Help Facility, invoke END processing.

Screen definition: The screen definition consists of general characteristics such as

1-6 Design Facility Reference Guide

1.6 Advantage CA-Telon Generator

Screen definition input: Advantage CA-Telon source statements developed from

This architecture allows you to regenerate Advantage CA-Telon applications simply if

Program structure: A Advantage CA-Telon-generated program is easy to follow,

The generated program also contains calls to Advantage CA-Telon-delivered

Chapter 1. CA-Telon Design Facility Main Menu 1-7

1.7 Advantage CA-Telon Test Facility

Full-screen interactive debugging: The TTF gives you screen-to-screen control

1-8 Design Facility Reference Guide

1.8 Reading Syntax Diagrams

Keywords: appear in uppercase letters, for example, COMMAND or PARM. These

Variables: appear in italicized lowercase letters, for example, parm1 or parm2.

Required Keywords and Variables: appear on a main line.

Optional Keywords and Variables: appear below a main line.

Default Keywords and Variables: appear above a main line.

Double Arrowheads Pointing to the Right: indicate the beginning of a

Double Arrowheads Pointing to Each Other: indicate the end of a statement.

Single Arrowheads Pointing to the Right: indicate a portion of a statement, or

Punctuation Marks or Arithmetic Symbols: If punctuation marks or arithmetic

, comma > greater than symbol

Chapter 1. CA-Telon Design Facility Main Menu 1-9

No Parameters: Below is an example of a statement without parameters.

Statement Without Parameters

You must write:

Required Parameters: Required parameters appear on the same horizontal line

Statement With Required Parameters

You must write:

Delimiters such as parentheses around parameters or clauses must be included.

TELON DESIGN FACILITY MAIN MENU

USER PROFILE MAINTENANCE MENU

UPDATE PROGRAM DEFN DEFAULTS

UPDATE ENVIRON DEFN DEFAULTS

CICS: SPASIZE 2 PSBSCHD 3___ PSBNAME 4